A Vedic Reader

A. A. Macdonell

A VEDIC

READER

.BY IJNIFORbl

TtIE

SAME

AUI'IIO_R PRI-_SENT WORK

WITH TItE

VEDIC FOR
Including

GRAMMAR STUDENTS
on Syntax : List and three of Verbs,

a chapter Appendices

Metre,

Accent

A VEDIC
FOR

READER
STUDENTS
BY

ARTHUR

ANTHONY
M.A., ProD.
BODEN PROFESSOR ; OF

MACDONELL
SANSKRIT OF TIIE BR1TISII ACADEblY

FELLOW

OF

BAI,LIOL FELLOW

COLLEGE OY 'J_IE

YELLOW

ROYAL

DANISH

ACAI)E,MY

CONTAINING THIRTY HYMNS OF THE RIGVEDA IN THE ORIGINAL SAMHIT_- AND PADA TEXTS, WITH TRANSLITERATION, TRANSLATION, EXPLANATORY NOTES, INTRODUCTION, VOCABULARY

OXFORD AT THE CLARENDON 1917 PRESS

L'OHCORDIA $[HIHARY THEOLOGICALLIBRARY

iT. WAYNE, INDIANA 46825

OXFORD
LONDON TORONTO

UNIVERSITY
GLASGOW CAPE

PRESS
NEW YORK TOWN BOMBAY

EDINBURGH MELBOURNE HUMPHREY

MILFORD

I'UBLISHERTOTHE UNIYE_ITY

PRINTED ENGLAND_ IN

PREFACE
THis Reader is meant to be a companion volume to my Vedic G-rammar for Students. It contains thirty hymns comprising just under 300 stanzas. These hymns have been taken exclusively from the Rigveda, not only because that Veda represents tile earliest and most important phase of the sacred language and literature of India, but because the addition of specimens from the later Vedic literature with their divergences in speech and thought would tend to confuse the learner beginning the study of the oldest period. All the books of the Rigveda have been drawn upon except the ni,_th. The reason of this exception is that, though the whole of the ninth book practically consists of hymns addressed to Soma only, the hymn which in my opinion represents that deity best occurs in another (the eighth) book. All the most important metres are represented, though no specimens of the rare and complex strophic measures could be given because none of the hymns composed in them seemed to be suitable for the Reader. I have also considered literary merit as far as possible in making the selection. As regards subject-matter, each of the more important deities is represented by one hymn, Agni alone by two. There are besides a few hymns of a different type. One is concerned with social life (x. 34), one with magical ideas (vii. 103), two with cosmogony (x. 90. 129), and three with eschatology (x. 14. 15. 185). The selection thus forms a brief epitome of the Rigveda, the earliest monument of Indian thought. The arrange. ment of the hymns follows their order in the text of the Rigveda as shown, togethei, with their respective deities and subjects, in the

vi

PREFACE

table of contents (p. ix). As the latter list is so short, the name of the deity addressed in any selected hymn can be found at once, but it also appears in its alphabetical order in the General Index. Unlike all Sanskrit and Vedic chrestomathies known to me, the present work is intended primarily for students who, while acquainted with Classical Sanskrit, are beginners of Vedic lacking the aid of a teacher with an adequate knowledge of the earliest period of the language and literature of India. It will moreover, I think, be found to contain much detailed information useful even to more advanced students. Hence difficult and obscure stanzas have never been omitted from any of the selected hymns, because the notes here afford an opportunity of illustrating the methods of critical interpretation (see, for instance, pages 36, 47, 139-40, 152, 166, 175). In conjunction with my Vedic Grammar for Students, the Reader aims at supplying all that is required for the complete understanding of the selections without reference to any other book. Each hymn is preceded by a special introduction describing briefly the deity or the subject with which it deals. The text of every stanza is printed in three different forms. The first is the Samhita text, in DevanagarI characters, exactly as handed down by tradition, without change or emendation. But each Pada or metrical line is printed separately so as to exhibit to the eye the versification of the stanza. Then comes on the right half of the page the traditional Pada text in which each word of the Samhita text is given separately without Sandhi, and in which compounds and certain derivatives and caseforms are analysed. This is an important addition because the Pads text, as nearly contemporary in origin with the Sazp.hits text, furnishes us with the earliest interpretations, within the sphere of phonetics and word-formation, of the Rigveda. Next follows the translitel_ted Sarp.hits text, in which by the removal of vowelcontractions, the resolution of semivowels, and the replacement of a, the original metre of the Rigveda is restored and, by the use of punctuation, the sense is made clearer. The translation, which follows, is close, accounting for every word of the original, and is

PREFACE

vii

based on the critical method of interpretation. The notes furnish minute explanations of all matters concerned with grammar, metre, accent, syntax, and exegesis. The general introduction gives a concise account of the form and matter of the Rigveda, describing in outline its arrangement, its language and metre, its religion and mythology, besides the critical method here applied to the interpretation of its hymns. The vocabulary supplements the translation and notes by giving the derivation of every word and adding in brackets the most obvious cognates from the other Indo-European languages allied to Sanskrit, especially Avestic, Greek, Latin, and English. I have added a copious general Index for the purpose of enabling the student to utilize to the full the summary of Vedic philology which this book contains. Any one who has worked his way carefully through the pages of the l_cader ought thus to have laid a solid foundation in Vedic scholarship, and to be prepared for further studies on independent lines. Freedom from serious misprints is a matter of great importance in a book like this. Such freedom has, I trust, been achieved by the aid of my two friends, Dr. James Morison, Librarian of the Indian Institute, and my former pupil, Dr. A. Berriedale Keith, Regius Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology in the University of Edinburgh. In the com_e of this obliging task Prof. Keith has supplied me with a number of suggestions, the adoption of which has undoubtedly improved the notes in many points of detail.
_ALLIOI. COLLEGE_ OXFORD. Oclober, 1917.

CONTENTS
PAGES PREFACE INTRODUCTION VEDIC HYMNS . . . v Xl--XXXi 1-219

Agni Savitr . Marut_ Vi._.u . Dy_v_p.rthivi Indra . Rudra . Ap_.m nap_t, Mitru . Brhaspati U.sas Agnl Parjanya P_s.an . Apas Mitr_-Varun. _ S_rya . A_vin_ Varun.a Man..d_k_s Vi_ve dev_s . Soma . Funeral Hymn Pitaras

i. 1 i. 35 i. 85 i. 154 i. 160 ii. 12 ii. 33 ii. 35 iii. 59 iv. 50 iv. 51 v. 11 v. 83 vi. 54 vii. 49 vii. 61 vii. 63 vii. 71 vii. 86 vii. 103 viii. 29 viii. 48 x. 14 x. 15

1-10 10-21 21-30 30-6 36-41 41-56 56-67 67-78 78-83 83-92 92-9 100-4 104-11 111-15 115-18 118-24 124-28 128-34 134-41 141-7 147-52 152-64 164-75 176-86

CONTENTS
PAGES

Gambler x. 34 Purusa x. 90 R_tri . x. 127 Hymn of Creation x. 129 Yama . x. 135 V_t_ x. 168
VOCABULARY GENERAL INDEX

186--95 195-203 203-7 207-11 212-16 216-19

221-56 257-63

INTRODUCTION
1. AQ_ OF THE
RI_VEDA.

TH_ Rigveda is undoubtedly the oldest literal T monument of the Indo-European languages. But the exact period when the'hymns were composed is a matter of conjecture. All that we can say with any approach to certainty is that the eldest of them cannot date from later than the thirteenth century B.c. This assertion is based on the following grounds. Buddhism, which began to spread in India about 500 B.C., presupposes the existence not only of the Vedas, but also of the intervening literature of the Brahmanas and Upanishads. The development of language and religious thought apparent in the extensive literature of the successive phases of these two Vedic periods renders it necessary to postulate the lapse of seven or eight centuries to account for the gradual changes, linguistic, religious, social, and political, that this literature displays. On astronomical grounds, one Sanskrit scholar has (cf. p. 146) concluded that the oldest Vedic hymns date from 3000 B.C., while another puts them as far back as 6000 B.C. These calculations are based on the assumption that the early Indians possessed an exact astronomical knowledge of the sun's course such as there is no evidence, or even probability, that they actually possessed. On the oth'er hand, the possibility of such exhume antiquity seems to be disproved by the relationship of the hymns of the Rigveda to the oldest part of the Avesta, which can hardly date earlier than from about 800 B.c. That relationship is so close that the language of the .&vesta, if it were known at a stage some five centuries earlier, could scarcely have differed at all from that of the Rigveda. Hence the Indians could not have separated from the Iranians much sooner than 1300 n.c. But, according to Prof. Jaeobi, the separation took place before 4500 13. . In that case we must assume that the Iranian and the c

xii

AGE OF THE

RIGVEDA

Indian languages remained practically unchanged for the truly immense period of over 3000 years. We must thus rest content with the moderate estimate of the thirteenth century B.C. as the approximate date for the beginning of the Rigvedlc period. This estimate has not been invalidated by the discovery in 1907 of the names of the Indian deities Mitre, Varu.na, Indra, Nasatya, in an inscription of about 1400 _. c. found in Asia Minor. For the phonetic form in which these names there appear may quite well belong to the Indo-Iranian period when the Indians and the Persians were still one people. The date of the inscription leaves two centuries for the separation of the Indians, their migration to India,, and the commencement of the Vedic hymn literature in the north-west of Hindustan.
3, ORIGIN AND GROWTH OF THE COIJLECTION,

When the Indo-Aryans entered India, they brought with them a religion in which the gods were chiefly personified powers of Nature, a few of them, such as Dyaus, going back to the IndoEuropean, others, such as Mitra, Varu.na, Indra, to the Indo-Iranian period. They also brought with them the cult of fire and of Soma, besides a knowledge of the art of composing religious poems in several metres, as a comparison of the Rigveda and the Avesta shows. The purpose of these ancient hymns was to propitiate the gods by praises accompanying the offering of melted butter poured on the fire and of the juice of the Soma plant placed on the sacrificial grass. The hymns which have survived in the Rigveda from the early period of the Indo-Aryan invasion were almost exclusively composed by a hereditary priesthood. They were handed down in different families by memory, not by writing, which could hardly, have been introduced into India before about 700 s.c. These family groups of hymns were gradually brought together till, with successive additions, they assumed the earliest collected form of the Rigveda. Then followed the constitution of the Sa .mhita text, which appears to have taken place about 600 s.c., at the end of the period of the Brahmanas, but before the Upanishads, which form appendages to those works, came into existence. The creators of the Sa.mhita did not in any

INTRODUCTION

xiii

way alter the diction of the hymns here collected together, but only applied to the text cel_ain rules of Sandhi which prevailed in their time, and by which, in particular, vowels are either contracted or changed into semi-vowels, and a is often dropped after e and o, in such a way as constantly to obscure the metre. Soon after this work was concluded, extraordinary precautions were taken to preserve from loss or corruption the sacred text thus fixed. The earliest expedient of this kind was the formation of the Pada or 'word' text, in which all the words of the Samhita text are separated and given in their original form as unaffected by the rules of Sandhi, and in which most compounds and some derivatives and inflected forms are analysed. This text, which is virtually the earliest commentary on the Rigweda, was followed by other and more complicated methods of reciting the text, and by various works called Anukrama.nIs or 'Indexes ', which enumerate fl'om the beginning to the end of the Rigveda the number of stanzas contained in each hymn, the deities, and the metres of all the stanzas of the Rigveda. Thanks to these various precautions the text of the Rigveda has been handed down for 2,500 years with a fidelity that finds no parallel in any other literature.
8. EXTENT AND DIVISIONS OF THE RIGVED,k.

The Rigveda consists of 1,017 or, counting eleven others of the eighth Book which are recognized as later additions, 1,028 hymns. These contain a total of about '10,600 stanzas, which give an average of ten stanzas to each hymn. The shortest hymn has only one stanza, while the longest has fi_y-eight. If printed continuously llke prose in Roman characters, the Samhita text would fill an octavo volume of about 600 pages of thirty-three lines each. It has been calculated that in bulk the RV. is equivalent to the extant poems of Homer. There is a twofold division of the RV. into parts. One, which is purely mechanical, is into As.takas or ' eighths' of about equal length, each of which is subdivided into eight Adhyayas or ' lessons ', while each of the latter consists of Vargas or 'groups' of five or six stanT_s. The other division is in_ ten Ma.n.dalas or ' books' (lit. 'cycles'}

xiv

EXTENT

AND DIVISIONS

OF THE RIGVEDA

and Sak .tas or 'hymns'. The latter method is an historical one, indicating the manner in which the collection came into being. This system is now invariably followed by Western Scholars in referring to or quoting from the Rigveda.
4. ARRANGEMENT OF THe. RIGVP.DA.

Six of the ten books, ii to vii, are homogeneous in character. The hymns contained in each of them were, according to native Indian tradition, composed or 'seen' by poets of the same family, which handed them down as its own collection. The tradition is borne out by the internal evidence of the seers' names mentioned in the hymns, and by that of the refrains occurring in each of these books. The method of arrangement followed in tile 'family books' is uniform; for each of them is similarly divided into groups addressed to different'gods. On the other hand, Books i, viii, and x were not composed each by a distinct family of seers, while the groups of which they consist are constituted by being the hymns composed by different individual seers. Book ix is distinguished from the rest by all its hymns being addressed to one and the same deity, Soma, and by its groups being based not on identity of authorship, but of metre. :Family books.--In these the first group of hymns is invariably addressed to Agni, file second to Indra, and those that follow to gods of less importance. The hymns within these deity groups are arranged according to the diminishing number of stanzas contained in them. Thus in the second Book the Agni group of ten hymns begins with one of sixteen stanzas and ends with one of only six. The first hymn of the next group in the same book has twenty-one, the last only four stanzas. The entire group of the family books is, moreover, arranged according to the increasing number of the hymns in each of those books, if allowance is made for later additions. Thus the second Book has forty-three, the third sixty-two, the sixth seventyfive, and the seventh one hundred and four hymns. The homogeneity of the family books renders it highly probable that they formed the nucleus of the RV., which graduaUy assumed it_ final shape by successive additions to these books.

INTRODUCTION

xv

The earliest of these additions appears to be the second half of Book i, which, consisting of nine groups, each by a different author, was prefixed to the family books, the internal arrangement of which it follows. The eighth is like the family books as being in the main composed by members of one family, the Kanvas ; but it differs from them in not beginning with hymns to Agni and in the prevalence of the strophic metre called Pragatha. The fact of its containing fewer hymns than the seventh book shows that it did not form a unit of the family books; but its partial resemblance to them caused it to be the first addition at the end of that collection. The first pal_ of Book i (1-50) is in several respects like Book viii : Kanvas seem to have been the authors of the majority of these hymns ; their favourite strophic metre is again found here; and both collections contain many similar or identical passages. There must have been some difference between the two groups, but the reason why they should have been separated by being added at the beginning and the end of an older collection has not yet been shown. The ninth book was added as a consequence of the first eight being formed into a unit. It consists entirely of hymns addressed to Soma while the juice was ' clarifying' Ipavam_na) ; on the other hand, the family books contain not a single Soma hymn, and Books i and viii together only three hymns invoking Soma in his general character. Now the hymns of Book ix were composed by authors of the same families as those of Books ii to vii, as is shown, for instance, by the appearance here of refrains peculiar to those families. Hence it is to be assumed that all the hymns to Soma Pavamana were removed from Books i to viii, in order to form a single collection belonging to the sphere of the Udglitl." or chanting priest, and added after Books i-viii,'which were the sphere of the Herr or reciting priest. The diction and recondite allusions in the hymns of this book suggest that they are later thah those of the preceding books ; but some of them may be early, as accompanying the Soma ritual which goes back to the Indo-Iranian period. The hymns of the first part of this book (1-60) are arranged according to the decreasing number of their stanzas, beginning with ten and ending with four. In the second part (61-114), which contains some very long hymns (oneef forty.eight and another of fifty-eight stanzas), this arrangement is not followed.

xvi

ARRANGEMENT

OF THE RIGVEDA

The two parts also differ in'metro: the hymns of the first are, excepting four stanzas, composed in GayatrI, while the second consists mainly of groups in other metres; thus 68-84 form a JagatI and 87-97 a Tris.tubh group. The tenth book was the final addition. Its language and subjectmatter show that it is later in origin than the other books; its authors were, moreover, clearly familiar with them. Both its position at the end of the RV. and the fact that the number of its hymns {191) is made up to that of the first book indicate its supplementary character. Its hymns were composed by a large number of seers of different families, some of which appear in other books; but the traditional attl_bution of authorship is of little or no value in the case of a great many hymns. In spite of its generally more modern character, it contains some hymns quite as old and poetic as the average of those in other books. These perhaps found a place here because for some reason they had been overlooked while the other collections were being formed. As regards language, we find in the tenth book earlier grammatical ibrms and words growing obsolete, while new words and meanings begin to emerge. As to matter, a tendency to abstract ideas and philosophical speculation, as well as the introduction of magical conceptions, such as belong to the sphere of the Atharvaveda, is here found to prevail. 5. LANGUAGe.

The hymns of the RV. are composed in the earliest stage of that literary language of which the latest, or Classical" Sanskrit, was stereotyped by the grammar of Pa.ninl at the end of the fourth century B.C. It differs from the latter about as much as Homeric from Attic Greek. It exhibits a much greater variety of forms than Sanskrit does. Its case-forms both in nominal and pronominal inflexion are more numerous. It has more participles and gerunds. It is, however, in verbal ibrms that its comparative richness is most apparent. Thus the RV. very frequently uses the subjunctive, which as such has entirely died out in Sanskrit ; it has twelve forms of the infinitive, while only a single one of these has survived in Sanskrit. The language of the RV. also differs from Sanskrit in its accent, which,

INTRODUCTION

xvii

like that of ancient Greek, is of a musical nature, depending on the pitch of the voice, and is marked throughout the hymns. This accent has in Sanskrit been changed not only to a stress accent, but has shifted its position as depending on quantity, and is no longer marked. The Vedic accent occupies a very important position in Comparative Philology, while the Sanskrit accent, being secondary, has no value of this kind. The Sandhi of the RV. represents an earlier and a less conventional stage than that of Sanskrit. Thus the insertion of a sibilant between final n and a hard palatal o1"dental is in the RV. restricted to cases where it is historically justified ; in Sanskrit it has become universal, being extended to cases where it has no justification. After e and o in the RV. f_ is nearly always pronounced, while in Sanskrit it is invariably dropped. It may thus be affirmed with certainty that no student can understand Sanskrit historically without knowing the language of the RV. 6. METRE. The hymns of the RV. are without exception metrical. They contain on the average ten stanzas, generally of four verses or lines, but also of three and sometimes five. The line, which is called Pada (' quarter') and forms the metrical unit, usually consists of eight, eleven, or twelve syllables. A stanza is, as a rule, made up of lines of the same type ; but some of the rarer kinds of stanza are formed by combining lines of different length. There are about fifteen metres, but only about seven of these are at*all common. By far the most common are the Tri.s.tubh (4 x 11 syllables), the GayatrI (3 x 8), and the JagatI (4 x 12i, which together furnish two-thh'ds of the total number of stanzas in the RV. The Vedic metres, which are the foundation of the Classical Sanskrit metres except two, have a quantitative rhythm in which short and long syllables alternate and which is of a generally iambic type. It is only the rhythm of the last four or five syllables (called the cadence) of the line that is rigidly determined, and the lines of eleven and twelve syllables have a caesura as well. In their structm'e the Vedic metres thus come half' way between the metres of the Indo-Iranian period, in which, as the Avesta shows, the principle is the number of syllables only, and 1902 b

xviii

METRE

those of Classical Sanskrit, in which {except the _loka) the quantity of every single syllable in the line is fixed. Usually a hymn of the Rigveda consists of stanzas in the same metre throughout ; a typical divergence from this rule is to mark the conclusion of a hymn with a stanza in a different metre. Some hyams are strophic in their construction. The strophes in them consist either of three stanzas {called t.raa) in the same simple metre, generally C_yatrl, or of two stanzas in different mixed metres. The latter type of strophe is called Pragatha and is found chiefly in the eighth book. 7. RELIGION OF TItE RIGVEDA.

This is concerned with the worship of gods that are largely personifications of the powers of nature. The hymns are mainly invocations of these gods, and are meant to accompany the oblation of Soma juice and the fire sacrifice of melted butter. It is thus essentially a polytheistic religion, which assumes a pantheistic colouring only in a few of its latest hymns. The gods are usually stated in the RV. to be thirty-three in number, being divided into three groups of eleven distributed in earth, air, and heaven, the three " divisions of the Universe. Troops of deities, such as the Maruts, are of course not included in this nmnber. The gods were believed to have had a beginning. But they were not thought to have all come into being at the same time ; for the RV. occasionally refers to earlier gods, and certain deities are described as the offspring of others. That they were considered to have been originally mortal is implied in the statement that they acquired immortality by drinking Soma or by receiving it as a gift from Agni and Savit.r. The gods were conceived as human in appearance. Their bodily parts, which are frequently mentioned, are in many instances sim.ply figurative illustrations of the phenomena of nature represen.ted by them. Thus the arms of the Sun are nothing more than his rays ; and the tongue and limbs of Agni merely denote his flames. Some of the gods appear equipped as warriors, especially Indra, others are described as priests, especially Agni and B.rhaspati. All of them drive through the air in cars, drawn chiefly by steeds, but sometimes by other animals. The favourite food of men is also that of.the gods,

INTRODUCTION

xix

consisting in milk, butter, grain, aud the flesh of sheep, goats, and cattle. It is offered to them in the sacrifice, which is either conveyed to them in heaven by the god of fire, or which they come in their ears to partake of on the strew of grass prepared for their reception. Their favourite drink is the exhilarating juice of the Soma plant. The home of the gods is heaven, the third heaven, or the highest step of Vi.snu, where cheered by draughts of Soma they live a life of bliss. Attributes of the gods.--Among these the most prominent is power, for they are constantly described as great and mighty. They regulate the order of nature and vanquish the potent powers of evil. They hold sway over all creatures; no one can thwart their ordinances or live beyond the time they appoint ; and the fulfilment of d_sires is dependent on them. They are benevolent beings who bestow pros- . perity on mankind; the only one in whom injurious traits appear being Rudra. They are described as ' true' and 'not deceitful', being friends and protectors of the honest and righteous, but punishing sin and guilt. Since in most cases the gods of the RV. have not yet become dissociated from the physical phenomena which they represent, their figures are indefinite in outline and deficient in individuality. Having many features, such as power, brilliance, benevolence, and wisdom in common with others, each god exhibits but very few distinctive attributes. This vagueness is further increased by the practice of invoking deities in pairs--a practice making both gods share characteristics properly belonging to one alone. When nearly every power can thus be ascribed to every god, the identification of one deity with another becomes easy. There are in fact several such identifications in the RV. The idea is even found in more than one late passage that various deities are but different forms of a single divine being. This idea, however, never developed into monotheism, for none of the regular sacrifices in the Vedic period were offered to a single god. Finally, in other late hymns of the RV. we find the deities Aditi and Prajapati identified not only with all the gods, but with nature as well. This brihgs us to that pantheism which becavje characteristic of later Indian thought in the form of the Vedanta philosophy. The Vedic gods may most conveniently be classified as deities of b2

XX

CLASSIFICATION

OF THE

GODS

heaven, air, and earth, according to the threefold division suggested by the -RV. itself. The celestial gods are Dyaus, Varuna, Mitra, SQrya, Savitr, Ptlsan, the A_vins, and the goddesses U.sas, Dawn, and Ratty, Night. The atmospheric gods are Indra, Apam nap_t, Rudra, the _Iaruts, Vayu, Parjanya, and Apas, the Waters. The terrestrial deities are Prthiv_, Agni, and Soma. This Reader conrains hymns addressed to all these gods, with detailed introductions describing their characters in the words, as far as is possible, of the RV. itself. A few quite subordinate deities are not included, partly because no entire hymn is addressed to them. Two such belong to the celestial sphere. Trita, a somewhat obscure god, who is mentioned only in detached stanzas of the RV., comes down from the IndoIranian'period. He seems to represent the 'third' or lightning form of fire. Similar in origin to Indra, he was ousted by the latter at an early period. _tarisvan is a divine being also referred to only in scattered stanzas of the RV. He is desclSbed as having brought down the hidden fire from heaven to men on earth, like thePrometheus of Greek mythology. Among the terrestrial deities are certain rivers that are personified and invoked in the RV. Thus the Sindhu (Indus) is celebrated as a god.dess in one hymn (x. 75, 2. 4. 6), and the Vip/_ (Bias) and the SutudrI (Sutlej), sister streams of the Panj_tb, in another (iii. 38). The most important and oftenest lauded is, however, the Sarasvat! (vi. 61; vii. 95). Though the personification goes much further here than in the case of other streams, the connexion of the goddess with the river is never lost sight of in the RV. Abstract deities.--One result of the advance of thought during the period of the RV. from the concrete towards the abstract was the rise of abstract deities. The earlier and more numerous class of these seems to have started from epithets which were applicable to one or more older deities, but which came to acquire an independent value as the want of a god exercising the particular activity in question began to be felt. We find here names denoting either an agent (formed with the suffix tr or tar}, such as Dh_tr ' Creator', or an attribute, such as Praj_pati, ' Lord of Creatures'. Thus Dh_tr, otherwise an epithet of Indra, appears also as an independent deity who creates heaven and earth, sun and moon. More rarely occur Vidh_tr, the 'Disposer', Dhartr, the 'Supporter', Tr_tr, the

INTRODUCTION

xxi

' Protector ', and Net!', the ' Leader '. The only agent god mentioned at all frequently in the RV. is Tvas..t!., the 'Artificer ', though _o entire hymn is addressed to him. He is the most skilful of workmen, having among other things fashioned the bolt of Indra and a new drinking-cup for the gods. He is a guardian of Soma, which is called the 'food of Tv_.t!", and which Indra drinks in Tva.s.t!"s house. He is the father of Saranya, wife of Vivasvant and mother of the primaeval twins Yama and YamI. The name of the solar deity Savitr, the 'Stimulator', belongs to this class of agent gods (cf. p. 11). There are a few other abstract deities whose names were originally epithets of older gods, but now become epithets of the supreme god who was being evolved at the end of the Rigvedic period. These appellations, compound in form, are of rare and late occurrence. The most important is Prajapati, ' Lord of Creatures '. Originally an epithet of such gods as Savitr and Soma, this name is employed in a late verse of the tenth book to designate a distinct deity in the character of a Creator. Similarly, the epithet Vivakarman, ' all-creating ', appears as the name of an independent deity to whom two hgmns (x. 81. 82) are addressed. Hiranyagarbha, the ' Golden Germ ', once occurs as the name of the supreme god described as the ' one lord of all that exists'. In one curious instance it is possible to watch the rise of an abstract deity of this type. The refrain of a late hymn of the RV. (x. 121) is k_smai dev_ya havi.s_ vidhoma ? ' to what god should we pay worship with oblation ?' This led to the word k_, ' who ?' being used in the later Vedlc literature as an independent name, Ka, of the supreme god. The only abstract deity of this type occurring in the oldest as well. as the latest parts of the RV. is Brhaspati (p. 88). The second and smaller class of abstract deities comprises personifieations of abstract nouns. There are seven or eight of these occurring in the tenth book. Two hymns (83. 84) are addressed to Manyu, 'Wrath ', and one (x. 151) to Sraddh_, ' Faith'. Anumati, ' Favour (of the gods}', Aramati, ' Devotion ', S_n.rta, ' Bounty '_ Asunlti, 'Spirit-life', and Nirrti, ' Decease', occur only in a few isolated passages. A purely abstract deity, often incidentally celebrated throughout

xxii

ABSTRACT

DEITIES

the RV. is A-diti, ' Liberation ', ' Freedom' (lit. ' un-binding '), whose main characteristic is the power of delive2_ng fl'om the bonds of physical suffering and moral guilt. She, however, occupies a unique position among the abstract deities, owing to the peculiar way in which the personification seems to have arisen. She is the mother of th.e small group of deities called __dityas, often styled 'sons of Aditi '. This expression at first most probably meant nothing more than 'sons of liberation ', according to an idiom common in the RV. and elsewhere. The word was then personified, with the curious result that the mother is mythologically younger than some at least of her sons, who (for instance Mitra) date from the Indo-Iranian period. The goddess Diti, named only three times in the RV., probably came into being as an antithesis to Aditi, with whom she is twice mentioned. Goddesses play an insignificant paris in the RV. The only one of importance is Usas (p. 92). Next come Sarasvatl, celebrated in two whole hymns (vi. 61 ; vii. 95) as well as parts of ethel,, and Vac, 'Speech' (x. 71. 125). With one hymn each are addressed Prthivl, 'Earth' (v. 84), RatrI, 'Night' (x. 127, p. 203), and Aranyanl, 'Goddess of .the Forest' (x. 146). Others are only sporadically mentioned. The wives of the great gods are still more insignificant, being mere names formed from those of their consorts, and altogether lacking in individuality: such are Aglr_yI, Indra.nI, Varu.nanr, spouses of Agni, Indra, and Varu.na respectively. Dual 1)ivinities.--A peculiar feature of the religion of the RV. is the invocation of pairs of deities whose names are combined as compounds, each member of which is in the dual. About a dozen such pairs are celebrated in entire hymns, and about a dozen more in detached stanzas. By far the largest number of hymns is addressed to the couple" Mitrlf-Varun_, though the names most frequently found as dual compounds are those of Dyav_-prthivr, ' Heaven and Earth' (p. 86). The latter pair, having been associated as univ "e_ parents from the Indo-European period onwards, in all probab'_rnished the analogy for this dual type. Groups of Deities.--There are also a few more or less definite groups of deities, generally associated with some particular god. The Maruts (p. '21), who attend on Indra, are the most numerous group. The

INTRODUCTION

xxlii

smaller group of the ._dityas, of whom Varuna is the chief, is constantly mentioned in company with their mother Aditi. Their number is stated in the RV. to be seven or, with the addition of Martan.da, eight. One passage (ii. 27, 1) enumerates six of them, Mitra, Aryaman, Bhaga, Varuna, Daksa, A.ma : Sarya was probably regarded as the seventh. A much less important group, without individual names or definite number, is that of the Vasus, whose ' _esder is generally Indra. There are, finally, the Vi_ve devas {p. 147), who, invoked in many hymns, form a comprehensive group, which in spite of its name is, strange to say, sometimes conceived as a narrower group associated with others like the Vasus and __dityas. _Lesser Divinities.--Besides the higher gods, a number of lesser divine powers are known to the RV. The most prominent of these are the .Rbhus, who are celebrated in eleven hymns. They are a deft-handed trio, who by their marvellous skill acquired the rank of deities. Among their five main feats of dexterity the greatest consisted in transforming the bowl of Tvas._!" into four shining cups. The bowl and the cups have been variously interpreted as the moon with its four phases or the year with its seasons. The .l_bhus further exhibited theh" skill in renewing the youth of theh" parents, by whom Heaven and Earth seem to have been meant. Occasional mention is made in the RV. of an Apsaras, a celestial water-nymph, the spouse of a corresponding genius named Gandharva. In a few passages more Apsal_ses than one are spoken of; but the only one mentibned by name is Urvan Gandharva is in the R. a single being (like the Gandarewa of the Avesta), who dwells in the aerial sphere, guards the celestial Soma, and is (as in the Avesta) connected with the waters. There are, lastly, a few divinities of the tutelary order, guardians watching over the welfare of house or field. Such is the rarely mentioned Vasto.spati, ' Lord of the Dwelling', who is invoked to grant a favourable entry, to remove disease, and to bestow protection and prosperity. Ks.etrasya pati, ' Lord of the Field ', is besought to grant cattle and horses and to confer welfare. SIta, the ' Furrow ', is once invoked to dispense crops and rich blessing_ In addition to the great phenomena of nature, various features of the earth's surface as well as artificial objects are to be found deified

xxlv

LESSER

DIVINITIES

in the RV. Thus besides Rivers and Waters (p." 115), already mentioned as terrestrial goddesses, mountains are often addressed as divinities, but only along with other natm'al objects, or in association with gods. Plants are regarded as divine powers, one entire hymn (x. 97) being devoted to their praise, chiefly with reference to their healing properties. Sacrificial implements, moreover, are deified. The most important.of these is the sacrificial post which is praised and invoked in a whole hynm (iii. 8). The sacrificial grass (barhis) and the Divine Doors (dv_ro dow-l_.), which lead to the place of sacrifice, are addressed as goddesses. The pressing stones (gr_vanas) are invoked as deities in three hymns (x. 76.94. 175) : spoken of as immortal, unaging, mightier than heaven, they are besought to drive away demons and destruction. The ]lIortar and Pestle used in pounding the Soma plant are also invoked in the RV. (i. 28, 5. 6). Weapons, finally, are sometimes deified: armour, bow. quiver, arrows, and drum being addressed in one of the hymns (vi. 75}. _iT_eDe_w_woften mentioned in the hymns are of two kinds. The J higher and more powerful class are the aerial foes of the gods. Those are seldom called asura in the RV., where in the older parts that word means a divine being, like al_ura in the Avesta (cf. p. 134). The term dasa or dasy-u, properly the name of the dark aborigines, is frequently used in the sense of fiend to designate the aerial demons. The conflict is regularly one between a single god and a single demon, as exemplified by Indra and Vrtra. , The latter is by far the most frequently mentioned. His mother being called Danu, he is sometimes alluded to by the metronymic term Danava. Another powerful demon is Vala, the personified cave of the cows, which he guard_, and which are set free by Indra and his allies, notably the A-figirases. Other demon adversaries of Indra are Arbuda, described as a wily beast, whose cows Indra drove out ; Vihvarllpa, son of Tvast.r, a throe-headed demon slain by both Trita and Indra, who seize his cows; and Svarbhanu, who eclipses the sun. There are several other individual demons, generally described as Deans and slain by Indra. A group of demons are the Pa.nis (' niggards')_ primarily foes of Indra, who, with the aid of the dog Sarama, tracks and releases the cows hidden by them. The second or lower class of demons are terrestrial goblins, enemies

INTRODUCTION

xxv

of men. By far the most common generic name for them is Raksas. They are nearly always mentioned in connexion with some god who destroys them. The much less common term Yatu or Yatudhana (primarily 'sorcerer') alternates with Raksas. and perhaps expresses a species. A class of demons scarcely referred to in the RV., but often mentioned, in the later Vedas, are the Pi_cas, eaters of racy flesh or of corpses. Not more than thirty hymns are concerned with subjects other than the worship of gods or deified objects. About a dozen of these, almost entirely confined to the tenth book, deal with magical practices, which properly belong to the sphere of the Atharvaveda. Their contents are augmT (iL 42. 43) or spells directed against poisonous vermin (i. 191) or disease (x. 163), against a demon destructive of children (x. 162), or enemies (x. 166), or rival wives (x. 145). A few are incantations to preserve life (x. 58.60), or to induce sleep (v. 55), or to procure offspring (x. 183) ; while one is a panegyric of frogs as magical bringers of rain (vii. 103, p. 141).
8. SECULAR I_ATTER IN THE RIGVEDA.

Secular hymns.--Hardly

a score of the hymns are secular poems.

These are especially valuable as throwing direct light on the earliest thought and civilization of India. One of the most noteworthy of them is the long wedding hymn (x. 85). Tliere are also five funeral hymns (x. 14--18). Four of these are addressed to deities concerned with the future life ; the last, however_ is quite secular in tone_ and gives more infm_nation than any of the rest about the 5me_al customs of early Vedic India (cf. p. 164). Mytlwlogical dialogues.--Besides several mythological dialogues in which the speakers are divine beings (iv. 62; x. 51. 52. 86. 108), there are two in which both agents are human. One is a somewhat obscure colloquy (x. 95) between a mortal lover Puraravas and the celestial nymph Urva_I, who is on the point of forsaking him. It is the earliest form of the story which much more than a thousand years later formed the subject of Kalidasa's drama Vikramorvahi. The other (x. 10) is a dialogue between Yama and YamL the twin parents of the human race. This group of hymns has a special literary interest as foreshadowing the dramatic works of a later age.

xxvi

SECULAR

HYMNS

Didactic hymns.--Four hymns are of a didactic character. One of these (x. 34) is a striking poem, being a monologue ill which a gambler laments the misery he has brought on himself and his home by his inability to resist the attraction of the dice. The rest which describe the various ways in which men follow gain (ix. 112), or praise wise speech (x. 71), or the value of good deeds (x. 117), anLieipate the sententious poetry for which post-Vedic literature is noted. /_idd_s.--Two of the hymns consist of riddles. One of these . (viii. 29, p. 147) describes various gods without mentioning their names. More elaborate and obscure is a long poem of fifty-two stanzas (i. 164), in which a number of enigmas, largely connected with the sun, are propounded in mystical and symbolic language. Thus the wheel of order with twelve spokes, revolving round the heavens, and containing within it in couples 720 sons, means the year with its twelve months and 360 days and 360 nights. Cosmogonic hymns.--About half a dozen hymns consist of speculations on the origin of the world through the agency of a Creator (called by various names) as distinct from any of the ordinary gods. One of them (x. 129, p. 207), which describes the world as due to the development of the existent (sat) from the non-existent (a-sat), is particularly interes.ting as the star_ing-point of the evolutional philosophy which in later times assumed shape in the Safikhya system. A semi-historical character attaches to one complete hymn (i. 126) and to appendages of 8 to 5 stanzas attached to over thirty,others, which are called Danastutis, or 'praises of gifts'. These are panegyrics of liberal patrons on behalf of whom the seers composed their hymns. They yield incidental genealogical information about the poets and their employers, as well as about the names and the habitat of the Yedic tribes. They are late in dater appearing chiefly in the first and tenth, as well as among the supplementary hymns of the eighth book. Geographical data.--From the geographical data of the RV., especially the numerous rivers there mentioned, it is to be inferred that the Indo-Aryan tribes when the hymns were composed occupied the territory roughly corresponding to the north-west Frontier Province, and the Panjab of to-day. The references to flora and fauna bear out this conclusion.

INTRODUCTION

xxvii

The historical data of the hymns show that the Indo-Aryans were still engaged in war with the aborigines, many victories over those toes being mentioned. That they were still moving forward as conquerors is indicated by references to rivers as obstacles to advance. Though divided into many tribes, they were conscious of religious and racial unity, contrasting the aborigines with themselves by calling them non-sacrificers and unbelievers, as well as ' black-skins' and the 'Dasa colour' as opposed go the 'Aryan colour'. Incidental references scattered throughout the hymns supply a good deal of information about the social conditions of the time. Thus it is clear that the family, with the father at its head, was the basis of society, and that women held a freer and more honoured position than in later times. Various crimes are meationed, robbel_], especially of cattle, apparently being the commonest. Debt, clfiefly as a result of gambling, was known. Clothing consisted usually of an upper and a lower garment, which were made of sheep's wool. Bracelets, anklets, necklaces, and earrings were worn as ornaments. Men usually grew boards, but sometimes shaved. Food mainly consisted of milk, clarified butter, grain, vegetables, and fruit. Meat was eaten only when animals were sacrificed. The commonest kind appears to have been beef, as bulls were the chief offerings to the gods. Two kinds of sph'ituous liquor were made: Soma was drunk at religious ceremonies only, while Sura_extracted from some kind of grain, was used on ordinary occasions. Occupations.--Ono of the chief occupations of the Indo-Aryan was warfare. He fought either on foot or from a chariot, but there is no evidence to show that he ever did so on horseback. The ordinary weapons were bows and arrows, but spears and axes were also used. Cattle-breeding appears to have been the main source of livelihood, cows being the chief objects of desire in prayers to the gods. But agriculture was also practised to some extent : fields were furrowed with a plough drawn by bulls ; corn was cut with sickles, being then threshed and winnowed. Wild animals were trapped and snaredL or . / hunted with bows and arrows, occasionally with the aid of dogs Boats propelled by paddles were employed, as it seems mainly for the purpose of crossing rivers. Trade was known only in the form of barter, the cow representing the unit of value in exchange. Certain

xxviii

OCCUPATIONS

AND AMUSEMENTS

trades and crafts ah'eady existed, though doubtless in a rudimentary stage. The occupations of the wheelwright and the carpenter were combined. The smith melted ore in a forge, and made kettles and other vessels of metal. The tanner prepared the skins of animals. Women plaited mats of grass or reeds, sewed, and especially wove, but whether they ever did so professionally is uncertain. Anmsements.--Among these chariot-racing was the favourite. The most popular social recreation was playing with dice (cp. p. 186}. Dancing was also practised, chiefly by women. The people were fond of music, the instruments used being the drum (dundubhi), the flute (v_n.a), and the lute (v_._). Singing is also mentioned. 9.
"]'JITERARY MERIT OF THE _IGVEDA.

The diction of the hymns is on the whole natural and simple, free from the use of compounds of more than two members. Considering their great antiquity, the hymns are composed with a remarkable degree of metrical skill and command of language. But as they were produced by a sacerdotal class and were generally intended to accompany a ritual no longer primitive, their poetry is often impaired by constant sacrificial allusions. This is especially noticeable in the hymns addressed to the two ritual deities Agni and Soma, where the thought becomes affected by conceits and obscured by mysticism. Nevertheless the RV. contains much genuine poetry. As the gods are mostly connected with natural phenomena, the praises addressed to them give rise to much beautiful and even noble imagery. The degree of literary merit in different hymns naturally varies a good deal, but the average is remarkably high. The most poetical hymns are those addressed to Dawn, equal if not superior in beauty to the religious lyrics of any other literature. Some of the hymns to Indra show much graphic power in describing his conflict with the demon V.rtra. The hymns to the ]_aruts, or Storm gods, often depict with vigorous imagery the phenomena of thunder and lightning, and the mighty onset of the wind. One hymn to Parjanya (v. 88) paints the devastating effects of the rain-storm with great vividness, The hymns in praise of Varun.a describe the various aspects of his sway as moral ruler of the world in an exalted strain of poetry. Some of

INTRODUCTION

xxix

the mythological dialogues set forth the situation with much beauty of language; for example, the colloquy between Indra's messenger Sarama and the demons who stole the cows (x. 108), and that between the primaeval twins Yama and YamI (x. 10). The Gambler's lament (x. 34) is a fine specimen of pathetic poetry. One of the funeral hymns (x. 18) expresses ideas connected with death in language of impressive and solemn beauty. One of the cosmogonic hymns (x. 129) illustrates how philosophical speculation can be clothed in poetry of no mean order. 10. INTERPRETATION.

In dealing with the hymns of the RV. the important question arises, to what extent are we able to understand theh" real sense, considering that they have come down to us as an isolated relic from the remotest period of Indian literature ? The reply, stated generally, is that, as a result of the labours of Vedic scholars, the meaning of a considerable proportion of the RV. is clear, but of the remainder many hymns and a great many single stanzas or passages are still obscure or unintelligible. This was already the case in the time of Y_ka, the author of the Nirukta, the oldest extant commentary (c. 500 B.C.) on about 600 detached stanzas of the RV. ; for he quotes one of his predecessors, Kautsa, as saying that the Vedic hymns were obscure, unmeaning, and mutually contradictory. In the earlier period of Vedic studies, commencing about the middle of the nineteenth century, the traditional method, which follows the great commentary of S'_yana (fourteenth century A.C.), and is represented by the translation of the RV., begun by H. H. Wilson in 1850, was considered adequate. It has since been proved that, though the native Indian commentators are invaluable guides in expIalning the theological and ritual texts of the Brahmau as and Satras, with the atmosphere of which they were familiar, they did not possess a continuous tradition from the time when the Vedic hymns were composed. That the gap between the poets and the interpreters even earlier than Yaska must have been considerable, is shown by the divergences of opinion among his predecessors as quoted by him. Thus one of these, Aura. vabha, interprets nasatyau,

xxx

INTERPRETATION

an epithet of the Avins, as 'true, not false ', another Agr_yan.a, as ' leaders of truth' (satyasya pray.,etarau), while Yaska himself thinks it may mean 'nose-born' (nRsikR-prabhavau)! Yaska, moreover, mentions several different schools of interpretation, each of which explained difficulties in accordance with its own particular theory. Yaska's own interpretations, which in all cases of doubt are based on etymology, are evidently often merely conjectural, for he frequently gives several alternative explanations of a word. Thus he explains the epithet jRt_-vedas in as many as five different ways. Yet he must have had more and better means of ascertaining the sense of various obscure words than S_yana who lived nearly 2,000 years later. S_yana's interpretations, however, sometimes differ from. those of Yaska. Hence either Y.aska is wrong or Saya.na does not, follow the tradition. Again, Sayana often gives several inconsistent explanations of a word in interpreting the same passage or in commenting on the same word in different passages. Thus asura, ' divine being ', is variously rendered by hhn as 'expeller of foes', 'giver of strength ', 'giver of life ', ' hurler away of what is undesired '. 'giver of breath or water', 'thrower of oblations, priest ', ' taker away of breath ', ' expeller of water, Parjanya', ' impeller ', ' strong ', ' wise ', and ' rain-water' or ' a water-discharging cloud' ! In short it is clear from a careful examination of their comments that neither Yaska" nor Saya_.a possessed any certain knowledge about a large number of words in the RV. Hence their interpretations can be treated as decisive only if they are borne out by probability, by the context, and by parallel passages. For the traditional method Roth, the founder of Vedie philology, substituted the critical method of interpreting the difficult parts of the RV. from internal evidence by the minute comparison of all words parallel in form and matter, while taking into consideration context, grammar, and etymology, without ignoring either the help supplied by the historical study of the Vedic language in its connexion with Sanskrit or the outside evidence derived from the Avesta and from Compal_t[ve Philology. In the application of his method Roth attached too much weight _o etymological considerations, while he undervalued the evidence of native tradition. On the other hand, a reaction arose which, in emphasizing the purely Indian character

INTRODUCTION

xxxi

of the Vedic hymns, connects the interpretation of them too closely with the literature of the post-edic period and the much more advanced civilization there described. It is important to note that the critical scholar has at his disposal not only all the material that was open to the traditional interpreters, and to which he is moreover able to apply the comparative and historical methods of research, but also possesses over and above many valuable aids that were unknown to the traditional school--the Avesta, Comparative Philology, Comparative Religion and Mythology, and Ethnology. The student will find in the notes of the Reader many exemplifications of the usefulness of these aids to intorpretatio'n. There is good reason to hope from the results already achieved that steady adherence to the critical method, by admitting all available evidence and by avoiding onesidedness in its application, will eventually clear up a large proportion of the obscurities and difficulties that still confront the interpreter of the Rigveda.

ERRATA
read _itipfi.d5.

P. 14, line 27, for _itip_.do P. 28, line 1, read ;_'4_. P. P. P. P. 31, 48, 51, 60,

line 29, and p. 46, I. 29, for y6 read yS. head-line, for i. 12, 4 read ii. 12, 4. line 31, for y5 read y_. line 137 for no read nS.

P. 69, line 27 for _.m read tara.. Pp. 68, 70, 71, 75, head-lines, for APA.M read APA .M. P. 118, head-line_ for APAS read .&PAS. l'. lO.5, line 12, for v/_v(maks_s read vi_v_cak.s_s. P. 128, line 8, for n_ read rill.i; P. 139, line 14, for vibhfdako read vibhfdakS. P. 142, last line, and p. 143, line 11, for anyd read any$. P. 144, head-line 7 for MA.N.D_TKAS read MA .N.DI_KAS. P. 1797 line 26_ for td read t_. P. 184, line 17, for tfi read t$. P. 2247 head-line and line 17 for abhiti read abh_ti.

AGNI
As the personification of the sacrificial fire, Agni is second in importance to Indra (ii. 12) only, being addressed in at least 200 hymns. The anthropomorphism of his physical appeal_nce is only rudimentary, and is connected chiefly with the sacrificial aspect of fire. Thus he is butter-backed, flamehaired, and has a tawny beard, shal_ jaws, and golden teeth. Mention is often made of his tongue, with which the gods eat the oblation. With a burning head he faces in all directions. He is compared with various animals : he resembles a bull that bellows, and has horns which he sharpens; when born he is often called a calf; he is kindled like a horse that brings the gods, and is yoked to convey the sacrifice to them. He is also a divine bird; he is the eagle of the sky; as dwelling in the waters he is like a goose; he is winged, and he takes possession of the wood as a bird perches on a tree. Wood or ghee is his food, melted butter his beverage; and he is nourished three times a day. He is the mouth by which the gods eat the sacrifice; and his flames are spoons with which he besprinkles the gods; but he is also asked to consume the ofl'eHngs himself. He is sometimes, though then nearly always with other gods, invited to drink the Soma juice. His brightness is much dwelt upon : he shines like the sun ; his lustre is like the rays of the dawn and the sun, and like the llghtnings of the l_in-cloud. He shines even at night, and dispels the darkness with his beams. On the other hand, his path is black when he invades the forests and shaves the earth as a barber a beard. His flames are like roaring waves, and his sound is like the thunder of heaven. His red smoke rises up to the firmament ; like the erector of a post he supports the sky with his smoke, cSmoke-bannered' (dhfim_-ketu) is his frequent and exclusive epithet. He has a shining, golden, lightning car, drawn by two or more ruddy and tawny steeds. He is a charioteer of the sacrifice, and with his steeds he brings the gods on his car. He is the child of Heaven (Dy_us), and is often called the son of Heaven and Earth (i. 160). He is also the offspring of the waters. The gods generated him as a light for the $.ryan or for man, and placed him among men. Indra is called Agni's twin brother, and is more closely associated with him than any other god.
1902 B

AGNI

[]. 1

The mythology of Agni, apart from his sacrificial activity, is mainly concerned with his various births, forms, and abodes. Mention is often made of his daily production from the two kindling sticks (ar_nis), which are his parents or his mothers. From the dry wood Agni is born living; as soon as born the child devours his parents. By the ten maidens that produce him are meant the ten fingers of the kindler. Owing to the force required to kindle Agni he is often called 'son of strength' (s_hasa.h sfmfih.). Being produced every morning he is young; at the same time no sacrificer is older than Agni, for he conducted the first sacrifice. Again, Agni's origin in the aerial waters is often referred _o : he is an embryo of the waters ; he is kindled in the waters ; he is a bull that has grown in the lap of the waters. As the 'son of Waters' (ii. 35) he has become a separate deity. He is also sometimes conceived as latent in terrestl_al waters. This notion of Agni in the waters is a prominent one in the RV. Thirdly, a celestial origin of Agui is often mentioned .. he is born in the highest heaven, and was brought down from heaven by M_tari_van, the Indian Prometheus ; and the acquisition of fire by man is regarded as a gift of the gods as well as a production of M_tari_van. The Sun (vii. 68) is further regarded as a form of Agni. Thus Agni is the light of heaven in the bright sky; he was born on the other side of the air and sees all thin8_ ; he is born as the sun rising in the morning. Hence Agni comes to have a triple character. His births are three or threefold ; the gods made him threetbld ; he is threefold light ; he has three heads, three bodies, three stations. This threefold nature of Agni is clearly recognized in the RV., and represents the earliest Indian trinity. The universe being also regarded as divided into the two divisions of heaven and earth," Agni is sometimes said to have two origins, and indeed exclusively bears the epithet dvi-j_nman having two births. As being kindled in numerous dwellings Agni is also said to have many births. Agni is more closely associated with human life than any other deity. He is the only god called gTh_-pati lord of the house, and is constantly spoken of as a guest ({ttithi) in human dwellings. He is an' immortal who h_s taken up his abode among mortals. Thus he comes to be termed the nearest kinsman of men. He is oftenest described as a father, sometimes also as a brother or even as a son of his worshippers. He both takes the offerings of men to the gods and brings the gods to the sacrifice. He is thus characteristically a messenger (dftt_) appointed by gods and by men to be an ' oblation-bearer '. As the centre of the sacrifice he comes to be celebrated as the divine counterpart of the earthly priesthood. Hence he is often called priest (.rtvij, vipra), domestic priest (pur6hita), and more often than by any other name invoking priest (h6tT), also officiating priest (adhvary_) and praying priest (brahm_n). His priesthood is the most salient featrre

i. 1, 1] of his character; warrior.

AGNI he is in fi_c_ the grea_ priest, as Indra is the

3 great

Agni's wisdom is often dwelt upon. As knowing all the details of sacrifice, he is wise and all-knowing, and is exclusively called j&t_-vedas he who knows all created beings. He is a great benefiLctor of his worshippers, protecting and delivering them, and bestowing on them all kinds of boons, but pre-eminently domestic weli_re, offspring, and prosperity. His greatness is often lauded, and is once even said to surpass that of the other gods. His cosmic and creative powers are also frequently praised. From the ordinary sacrificial Agni who conveys the offering (havyav_hana) is distinguished his corpse-devouring (kravyt_d) form that burns the body on the funeral pyre (x. 14). Another funcLion of Agni is to burn and dispel evil spirits and hostile magic. The sacrificial fire was already in the Indo-Iranian period the centre of a developed ritual, and was pm_onified and worshipped as a mighty, wise, and beneficent god. It seems to have been an Indo-European institution also, since the Italians and Greeks, as well as the Indians and Iranians, had the custom of offering gifts to the gods in fire. But whether it was already personified in that remote period is a matter of conjecture. The name of Agni (Lat. igni-s, Slavonic egg,i) is Indo-European, and may originally have meant the ' agile' as derived from the root ag to d_qve (Lat. ago, Gk. _7_o, Skt. Aj_uni). RmVEDA i. 1.

The metro of this hymn is G_yatri (p. 438) in which nearly one-fourth of the RV. is composed. It consists of three octosyllabic verses identical in construction, each of which, when normal, ends with two iambics (_- ,_ _). The first two verses are in the San.ahita treated as a hemistich ; but there is no reason to SUl$poso that in the original text the second verse was more sharpl_ divided from the third than from the first.

1 Agnfm

i_.e pur6hitam,

ImagnifyAgni

the damestic_'iest,

yajfl_sya dev_m .rtvijam, hot, ram ratnadh_tamam,

the divine ministrant of the sacrifice, tlm invoker, best bestawer of treasura B2

f J

i I ] ii

AGNI

l i. 1, 1

; ', t

On the marking of tile accent in the RV. see p. 448, 2. The verb i.le (1. s. pr. A. of i.d : .1 for .d between vowels, p. 3, f. n. 2) has no Udatta because it is in a principal sentence and does not begin a sentence or Pada (p. 466, 19A.); its first syllable bears thd dependent Svarita which follows the Udatta of the preceding syllable (p. 448, 1). pur6-hitam has the accent of a Karmadharaya when the last member is a pp. (p. 456, top). yajfi_isya is to be taken with .rtvijam (not with purShitam according to Sayana), both because the genitive normally precedes the noun that governs it (p. 285 e), and because it is in the same Pada ; cp. RV. viii. 38, 1 ; yajfi_sya hi sth_ rtvij_ ue two (Indra-Agni) are ministra_2ts of the sacrifice. The dependent Svarita which the first syllable' of .rtvijam would otherwise bear (like il.e), disappears because this syllable must be marked with the Anudatta that precedes an Udatta. .rtv-ij though etymologically a compound (.rtu+ij = yaj) is not analysed in the Pada text, because the second member does not occur as an independent word ; cp. x. 2, 5 : agnir devam rtu_6 yaj_ti may Agni sacrifice to the gods according to the seasons, ratna-dh_-tama (with the ordinary Tp. accent: p. 456, 2): the Pada text never divides a cd. into more than two members. The suffix tama, which the Pada treats as equivalent to a final member of a cd., is here regarded as forming a unit with dha ; cp. on the other hand vir_-vat + tama in 3 c and eitr_-firavas + tama in 5 b. r_tna never means jewel in the RV.

! !

2 Agnl.h p_rvebhir ._.sihhir _lio n_tanair ut_, s_ derma Sh_ vaks.ati,

Agni to be magnified by laast and present seers, may he conduct t_e gods here.

._.sibhis : The declensional endings bhy_m, bhis, bhyas, su are in the Pada text treated like final members of compounds and separated, but not when the pure stem, as in the a dec., is modified in the preceding member ; hence p_a'vebhis (p. 77, note 9) is not analysed. i.dyas : to be read as _ias (p. 16, 2 d). n_tanais : note that the two

i. ], 3]

AGNI

forms of the inst. p]. of the a dec. in ais and ebhis constantly occur in the same stanza, s_ (49) being unmarked at the beginning of a Pada, has the Udatta; the dependent SvarRa of the following syllable disappears before the Anudatta required to indicate the following Ud'_tta of yam (Sandhi, see 89). This Anud_tta and the Svarita of vAks.ati show that all the intervening unmarked syllables yam _h_ have the Udatta. _All the unaccented syllables following a Svarita (till the Anudatta preceding an Udatta) remain unmarked; hence the las's two syllables of v_ks.ati are unmarked ; but in the Padatext every syllable of a word which has no Ud_tta is marked with the Anud_tta ; thus vaks ati. The htter word is the s ao. sb. of yah carry for vah-s-a-ti (143, 2 ; 69 a). In _ ih_, vaks ati, the prp. because it is in a principal sentence is uncompounded and accented (p. 468, 20), besides as very often being separated from the verb by another word. The verb yah is constantly connected with Agnl, who conveys the sacrifice and brings the gods. Syntactically the first hemistich is equivalent to a rel. clause, s_ being the correlative (cp. p. 294a). The gerundive _d.yas strictly speaking belongs in sense to nutanam, but is loosely construed with p_rvebhis also, meaning ' is to be magnified by present seers and (was) to be magnified by past seers '. The pcl. ut_ and (p. 222) is always significant in the RV.

3 Agnin_ pS_am

rayim

a_navat

Through day by day

Agni _y (and)

one obtain wealth prosI)eriO, in heroes. glorious

ev_ dive-dive,

ya_i_sa .m vir_vattamam. sdiuav-a-t the prn. ' indefinite Sanskrit. in the RV. numerous

(and) most abounding

: sb. pr. of am._ attain, 3. s. ind. pr. a_n6ti (cp. p. 134) ; he' inherent in the 3. s. of the vb. is here used in the sense of 'one ', as so often in the 3. s. op. in classical raylm, p6.sam: co-ordinate nouns are constantly used without the conjunction oa. div$-dive : this is one of the itv. compounds found in the RV., which are always

AGNI

[i. 1, 3

accented on the first member only, and are analysed in the Pads text like other compounds (189 C a). ya_sam: this is one of the few adjectives ending in -_s that occur in the RV. ; the corresponding n. substantives are accented on the first syllable, as y64t-as , fame (83, 2 a ; 182, p. 256). vir_-vat-tamam : both the suffix rant (p. 264, cp. 185 a) and the superlative suffix t_ma are treated in the Pads text like final members of a cd. ; v_r_vant being here regarded as a unit, it is treated as the first member in the analysis (cp. note on ratna-dh_,tama in 1 c). In these two _djectives we again have co-ordination without the connecting pcl. ca. Their exact meaning is 'causing fame' aud 'produced by many heroic sons', fame and brave fighters being constantly prayed for in the hymns.

4 Agne, yGm yajfi_m adhvarGm vi_v_ta.h paribh_r _si, s_ id devd.su gaehati,

0 Agni, the worship and sacrifice that tlwu encom2assest on every side, that same goes to the gods.

yajfihm adhvar_m : again co-ordination without ca; the former has a wider sense _- worship (prayer and offering) ; the later -sacrificial act. vi_v_-tas: the prn. adj. vi_va usually shifts its accent to the second syllable before adv. suffixes and as first member of a cd. (p. 454, 10). _si is accented as the vb. of a subordinate clause (p. 467, B). s_ id: all suc"cessively unmarked syllables at the beginning of a hemistich have the Udatta (p. 449, 2). On the particle id see p. 218. devd.su: the loc. of the goal reached' (p. 325, I b); the acc., which might be used, would rather express the goal to which the motion is directed, gaehati: as the vb. of a principal sentence has no Udatta (19 A) ; nor has it any accent mark in the Samhita text because all unaccented syllables following ' a dependen_ Svarita remain unmarked ; on the other hand, all the syllables of an unaccented word are marked with the Anudatta in the Pads text (ep. note on 2 d). The first syllable of gachati is long by position (p. 487, a 3).

i. 1, s]

AGNI

e_'_q_e:

_m_:I _--.W_:_:

5 Agnix h6t_ kavikratu.h saty,[_ citr_ravastamah., dev6 dev$bhir _ gamat,

May Agni the invokeJ', of wise intelligence, tile true, of most brilliant fame, the god come with the gods.

Both kavi-kratus and eitr-_ravas have the regular By. accent (p. 455 c); the latter cd. is not analysed in the Pads text because it forms a unit as first member, from which tams is separated as the second ; cp. notes on tams in 1 c and 3 c. dev6bhis : the inst. often expresses a sociative sense without a prp. (like saha in Skt.) : see 199 A 1. 4ev5 dev6bhi.h: the juxtaposition of forms of the same wol'd, to express a contrast, is common in the RV. gam-a-t : root ao. sb. of gain (p. 171); on the accentuation of _ gamat see p. 468, 20 A a.

6 _d af_g_ d_6_.e tu_m, I Agne, bhadx_m kari.sysi, t_v6t t_t satym, A_hgirah..

Just wkat good thou, 0 Ag_i, wiZt do for the worshilr2er, that (purpose) o/thee (comes) true, 0 di_giras.

ahg_ : on this pcl. see 180 (p. 213). d_fi@e : dat. of d_-vam, s, one of the few pf. pt. stems in the I_V. formed without red. (140, 5 ; 157 b), of which only v_d-va.ms survives in Skt. tv_tm: here, as nearly eve,Twhere in the RV., to be read as tu_%mon account of the metre. Though the Padas forming a hemistich constitute a metrical unit, that is, are not divided from each other either in Sandhi or in the marking of the accent, the second Pads is syntactically separated fl'om the.first'inasmuch as it' is treated as a new sentence, a voc. or a vb. at its beginning being always accented (p. 465, 18a; 19 b).

AGNI

[i 1, 6

Hence Agne is accented (the UdRtta being, as always, on the first syllable, p. 465, 18), while Aflgiras is not (p. 466, 18 b). kari sy_si (ft. of k_ do): that is, whatever good thou intendest to do to the worshipper will certainly be realized, t_va it t_t: that intention of tlt_e.

7 dpa tv&gne divd-dive, . ddsgvastar, dhlya vayam, n_mo bh_tranta dmasi ;

To thee, O Agni, day by day, O illuminer of gloom, we come witl_ tlwught bringing homage ;

tv_ as the enc. form of tv_m (109 a) and Agne as a voc. in the middle of a Pada (p. 466 b) are unaccented. The ace. tva is most naturally to be taken as governed by the preposition lipa (p. 209), though it might otherwise be quite well dependent on the cd. vb. tipa (_-imasi (a common combination of lipa and _ with verbs meaning to go), as the first prp. is often widely separated from the verb (191 f; p. 468, 20 a). dd.s_-vastar: Saya.na explains this ed. (which occurs here only) as by night and day, but vastar never occurs as an adv. and the accent of do_ is shifted (which is not otherwise the case in such cds., as sRy_ .m-prRtar evening and morning, from s_ygma) ; the explanation as 0 iUuminer (from 1. vas shine) of darkness (with voc. accent on the first syllable) is much more probable, being supported by the description of Indra (iii. 49, 4) as k_ap_.m vast_ jamta suryasya illum_ner of nights, generator of the Sun. hiya inst. of db_ thought (accent, p. 458, 1), used in the sense of mental1_rayer. n_mas, lit. bow, implies a gesture of adoration bh_rantas : N. pL pr. pt. of blair bear. a-imam: the ending masi is five times as common as mas in the RV. (p. 125, f. n. 2).

i. 1, .9] 8 r_jantam adhvar_n._im., gop_m .rt_sya dJdivim, v_rdhamanam

Ao

AGNI

.q

(to thee) ruling over sacrifices, the ddni,ng guardian of order, growi_2gin thi_e own house.

su6 d_me.

rajantam: this and the other accusatives in this stanza are in agreement with tva in the preceding one. adhvaranam : governed by the preceding word, because verbs of ruling take the gen. (202 A a); the final syllable am must be pronounced with a slur equivalent to two syllables (like a vowel sung in music), go-p_m: one of the many m. stems in final radical a (p. 78), which in Skt. is always shortened to a (as go-pa). .rt_ means the regular order of nature, such as the unvarying course of the sun and moon, and of the seasons ; then, on one hand, the regular course of sacrifice (rite) ; on the other, moral order (right), a sense replaced ill Skt. by dharma. Agni is specially the guardian of .rt_ in the ritual sense, because the sacrificial fire is regularly kindled every day; Varuna (vii. 86) is specially the guardian of .rt_ in the moral sense, v_rdhamanam: growling in thiue own house, because the sacrificial fire after being kindled flames up in its receptacle on the altar, sv6 : to be read as su6 ; this prn. meaning ou_ refers to all three persons and numbers in the RV., my own, thy own, his own, &c. (cp. p. 112 c). d_me: this word (= Lat. domu-s) is common in the RV., but has disappeared in Skt.

9 s_ na.h pit6va sfm_ve, _.gne, sftpayan6 bhava ; s_casva na.h suast_ye,

.3o, 0 Agni, be easy of access to us, as a father to his son ; abide with us for our well-being.

s_ is here used in its frequent anaphoric sense of as such, thus (p. 294 b). has enc. dat. (109 a) parallel to sfm_ve, pit_ ira: the one. po]. ira is regularly treated by the Pada text as the second member of a cd. ; "in the RV. pit._ is usually coupled with sfmti, mat_ with purrS. _fm_,v_f: this word as written in the Samhita text appears with two Udattas, because the Udatta of the elided

10

AGNI

[i. 1, 9

is thrown back ou the preceding syllable (p. 465, 3) ; but this must be restored, as the metre shows, and s fingve /_.gne read. Though a is elided in about 75 per cent. of its occurrences in the written Sa_.lhita text, it remains in the rest; it must be pronounced in about 99 per cent. (cp. p. 28, f. n. 4 and 5). The vowel Sandhi which is invariably applied between the final and initial sounds of the two Pgtdas of a hemistich, must always be resolved to restore the metre. This is another_ indication (see note on _.gne in 6 b) that the _econd and the first Pada were originally as independent of each other as the second and the third. On the accentuation of sfipgyang as a By. see p. 455, c =. sgcasvg: this verb (which is exclusively edic) is'construed with the ace. (here nas) or the inst. ; the vowel of sva, the ending of the 2. s. ipv. A., is hero (like many other final vowels) lengthened in the Salphita, but is regularly short in the Pada text. svast_ye must be read as su-astgye; it has the sense of a final dat. (9,00 B 2). It is not analysed in the Pada text because asti does not occur as an independent nominal stem.

S_&VlTI_
This god is celebrated in eleven entire hymns and in many detached stanzas as well. He is pre-eminently a golden deity : the epithets goldeneyed, golden-handed, and golden-tongued are peculiar to him. His car and its pole are golden. It is drawn by two or more brown, white-tooted horses. He has mighty golden splendour which he diffuses, illuminating heaven, earth, and air. He l_ises aloft his strong golden arms, with which he arouses and blesses all beings, and which extend to the ends of the earth. He moves in his golden car, seeing all creatures, on a downward and an upward path. Shini_,g with the rays of the sun, yellow-haired, Savit.r raises up his light continually from the east. His ancient paths in the air are dustless and easy to traverse, and on them he protects his worshippers; for he conveys the departed spirit to where the righteous dwell. He removes evil dreams, and makes men sinless; he drives away demons and sorcerers. He observes fixed laws; the waters and the wind are subject to him. The other gods follow his lead; and no being can resist his will. In one stanza (iii. 62, 10) he is besought to stimulate the thoughts of worshippers who desire to think of the, glory of god Savit_. This is the celebrated Sltvitri stanza which has been a morning prayer in India for more than three thousand years. Savitr is often distinguished from Sfirya (vii. 63), as when he is said to shine with the rays of the sun,

i. 35, 1]

SAVIT]._

11

to impel tile sun, or to declare men sinless to the sun. But in other p_Lssagesit is hardly possible to keep the two deities _part. Savit!" is connected with the evening its well as the morning; for at his command night comes and he brings all beings to rest. The word Savit!" is derived from the root sa to stb,,hde, which is constantly and "almost exclusively used with it in such a way as to form a perpetual play on the name of the god. In nearly half its occurrences the name is accompanied by dovgt god, when it means the ' Stimulator god'. He was thus originally a solar deity in the capacity of the great stimulator of life and motion in the world. i. 85. In this hymn Savit_.' appears as the regulator of time, bringing day and especially night. The metre of this hymn is Tri.s.tubh (p. 441), the commonest in the RV., about two-fifths of which are composed in it. It consists of four verses of eleven syllables identical in construction, and is divided into two hemistichs. The cadence (the last four syllables) is trochaic (-_-_) ; the opening, consisting of either four or five syllables followed by a caesura or metrical pause, is predominantly iambic (_ - _ - or _ - _-- _), and the break between the caesura and the cadence is regularly _ _or ,_ _. Thus the scheme of the whole normal verse is either '_ '_ , _v]-__] or _ v _., _1_-_1" The metre of stanzas 1 and 9 is Jagati (p. 442}, which consists of four verses of twelve syllables. The JagatI is identical with the Tris.tubh verso extended by one syllable, which, however, gives the cadence an iambic character (-,., - _ _). In the first stanza the caesura is ahvays after the fifth syllable, in the. second Pada following the first member of a compound.

I hv_,yRmi Agnim suast_ye ;

A ,

pratham_m
o A

1call on Agnifirstfor I call on .Mitra-Varu_._a

welfare; hcrc for

hv_ygmi

Mxtravaru_Rv

ihavase;

aid ; I call o_ Night that brings tl_

" iI i ; 1 "

12

SAVIT.R

[i. 35, 1

hvt_y_mi R_tri.m jggato niv6_anita ; Savit_ram fithvgygmi devgm ye.

world to rest ; I call on god Savitr for he/p.

hvy_mi: pr. ind. from hv_ call; note the anaphoric repetition of this word at the beginning of each verse, pratham_m is in apposition to Agn/m. su-ast_ye: this, _vase, and fit_ye are final datives (p. 314, B 2) ; the last two words are derived from the same root, av help. svasti (cp. note on i. 1, 9 c) evidently means wellbeing; by S_ya.na, following Y_ka (Nirukta, iii. 21), it is explained negatively as a-vinAfia non.destruction. Mltra-varuna: one of the numerous Dvandvas both members of which are dual and accented (p. 269); note that Dv. cds. are not analysed in the Pada text. lhavaso for ih gvase: on the accent see p. 464, 17, 1. jggatas: the objective gen. (p. 320, B 1 b), dependent on niv6_anim = that causes the world to 'turn in' (cp. x. 127, 4. 5); the cs. nive6gyan is applied to Savltr in the next stanza.

2 a kt_..n6na rgjas_ vgrtam_no, nive_yann am_ta.m m_rtiam oa, hirany_yena Savit_ rgthena, dev6 y_ti bhdvanfini pg_yan,

Rolling hither through the dark space, laying to rest the immortal and the mortal, on his golden car god Savit.r comes seeing (all) creatu_'es.

v_rtam_nas: the prp. may be separated from apt. as from a finite vb., p. 462, 13 a ; when it immediately precedes, as in nivo_yan, it is usually compounded, ibid. k_n6na r_jas_ : ----through the darkness ; loc. sense of the inst., 119 A 4. am_tam m_rtia .m ca s. m. used collectively --- gods and men. r_thon_ must of course be read r_thena]_ ; see note on _gne, i. 1, 9 b. _ dev6 y_ti : cp. note

i. u, 4]

SAVIT._

]a

oil _ _h_ vak.sati, i. 1, 2 c. In this and the two following stanzas Savitr is connected with evening.

3 y_ti

dev_L.h prav_Lt_, y_ti v_ta ;

ud-

The god goes by a downward, he goes by an upward ]_ath ; adorable he goes with his two bright steeds. God Saxit.r comesfrom fix distance, driving away all hardshilas.

y_ti _ubhr_bhydm yajat5 hhribhy[_m. dev5 y_ti Savit_ par_v_to, _Lpavi_v_ durit_ badhamanah. . z -

In this stanza a Jagati verse is combined with a Tri.s.tubh in each hemistich. This is quite exceptional in the RV. : see p. 445, fl i and f. n. 7. pra-v_t-_ and ud-v_t-a : local sense of the inst. (199 A 4); note that the suffix vat (p. 263) is in the Pada text treated like the second member of a cd. The downward Aand upward path refer to the sun's . course in the sky. The second y_tt is accented as beginning a new sentence, h_ribhyfizn: inst. in sociative sense; cp. dev_bhis in i. l, 5. On the different treatment of _iubhr_bhy_m and l_ribhy_m in the P_da text see note on p_'-vebhis in i. 1, 28. par_v_t6 pa: see note on _Igne in i. 1, 9. parav_tas: abl. with verb of motion (201 A 1). _pa b_dhamfi_aas : cp. note on _ in 2 c. vi_v_ durit_ : this ibrm of the n. pl. is commoner in the RV. than that in ani; p. 78, f. n. 14.

14 4 abl_v.rta.m pa.m, hlranya_amyam, tam, _sthfid r_tha.m bh_nu.h, krsn_ r_jamsi, nah. Savit_ t_vi.s_, yajat5 k._anair,

SAVITI._ vi_v_rfib.rh_neitr_d_dhaHis the car adorned

[i. 35, 4 _tqth ".pearls., lofty, 5rohtly

omniform, lustrous,

with golden pins, Savit.r putting

adorable

on the dark s_aces

and his might, has mounted.

The final vowel of abhi is lengthened in the Samhita text, as often when a long vowel is favoured by the metre. The prp. is also accented, this being usual when a prp. is compounded with a pp. (p. 462, 13 b). k._anais: stars are probably meant, as is indicated by x. 68, 11 : ' the Fathers adorned the sky with stars, like a dark horse with pear|s '. vi_'v_-rfipam : on the accent cp. note on i. 1, 4 b. -_amyam: inflected like rathe, p. 87; the _ami is probably a long pin fixed at each end of the yoke to prevent its slipping off the horse's neck. _ asthfit: root ao. of sth_. k_n_ r_j_.msi: ----darkness. d_Ea_nas (pr. pt. ; the pf. would be dadhan_s) governs both r_j_.msi and t_visim = clothing himself in darkness (cp. 2 a) and might, that is, bringing on evening by his might.

5 vi

jGnfi2i akhyan,

"_ e h y_va.h

6itip_do v_hchliviasya ta-

His drawing have have Say/ft.

dusky surveyed rested

steeds,

white-footed, _ole, For

his car with golden the _eolales. and

r_tha.m _vad _

hiranyapraiigam vi_a.h Savitdr

anta.h, up,the vi_va sthu.h. bhtivanani

ever the settlers

a_l creaturcs la_a of dhr_ne

in the

i.35, 6]

SAVIT.R

15

vi: A separated from vb. ; see note on _ val_.ati, i. 1, 2 e. j_nR5 _ chyavah: for j_n_n _y_v_.h (40, 1). mtl-padas : on the accentua"" " tion of this By. on the final member, see p. 455, c a. Note that the initial a of akhyan remains after o (cp. note on i. 1, 9 b). akhyan : aao. of khy_ see (p. 168, a 1), cp. 7 a and 8a, and p_yan in 2d ; the dO. expresses a single action that has just taken place (p. 345 C) ; the pf. tasthur expresses an action that has constantly (_vat) taken place in the past down to the present (113 A a). In -praiigam (analysed by the Pada text of x. 130, 3 as pra-uga), doubtless = pra-yugam (as explained in a Prati_khya), there is a remarkable hiatus caused by. the dropping of y. vi_vR bhlivanRni here the old and the new form of the n. pl. are used side by side, as very often. On the Sandhi of d_ivyasyop_sthe cp. note on _gne, i. 1, 9 b. dRivya divine is a variation of the usual dev_ accompanying the name of Savitr. up/Lsthe- the idea that all beings are conrained in various deities, or that the latter are the soul (_tm_) of the animate and inanimate world, is often expressed in the RV.

6 tisr5 dy_va.h ; Savit_r dv_ upSsth_a, _k_ Yam_sya bh_ivane vir_.s_.t, _nlm n_ r_thyam am._t_dhi tasthur: ih_ brav_tu y_ u t_c ciketat,

(There are) three heavens : two (are) the laps of Savitr, one overcoming men, (is) _n the abode of Yama. All immortal things rest (on him) as on the axle-end of a car : let him who may understand th{s tell it here.

The interpretation of this stanza is somewhat diffic{Ht ; for it is meant, as the last P_da indicates, as an enigma (like several others in the RV.). The first P_da is evidently intended to explain the

16

SAVIT .R

[i. 35,

last two of the preceding stanza : of the three worlds Savit!" occupies two (air and earth). The second 1)ads adds: the third world (the highest heaven) is the abode of Yams, in which dwell men after death (that is, the Pit!'s). The third Pada mcaffs: on Savit!', in these two (lower) worlds, the gods rest. dy_vas: N. pl. of dy6, here f. (which is rare) ; probably an elliptical pl. (193, 3 a) -- heaven, air, and earth, dv_ : ]br dv_u before u (22) ; after tisr6 dy_va.h the f. form dv$ should strictly be used (like Skfi. in b), but it is attracted in gender by the following up_sth_ (cp. 194, 3). up_sth_a: the dual ending _ (which in the RV. is more than seven thiies as common as au), appears beibre consonants, in pausa at the end of a Pada, and in the middle of a Pada before vowels, with which it coalesces. Here it is nasalized (as often elsewhere) befm'e the initial vowel of the following Pada to avoid the hiatus; this is another indication (cp. note on _gne, i. 1, 9 b) that there was in the original text of the RV. no vowel Sandhi between the Plidas of a hemistich, vlra-.sat : N. s. of vira-s_h (81b), in which there is corebraliz_tion of s by assimilation to the final cerebral .t(for -s_.t) ; in the first member the quantity of the vowels (for vira) is interchanged for metrical convenience ; the Pada text does not analyse the cd. because the form vira does not occur as an independent word (cp. note on .rtvij, i. 1, i b). am._t_ : n. pl. ---- the gods. a.ni.m n_ : on him, asthe car rests on the two ends of the axle which pass through the nave of the wheels. _dhi tasthur : the pf. of sth_ here takes the acc. by being compounded with gdhi ; in 5 d the simple verb takes the loc. The third Pada is only a modification in sense of 5 c d. bravitu : 3. s. ipv. of br_ speak (p. 143, 3 c). The pcL u is always written in the Pada text as a long vowel and nasalized : fi_a it ciketat : pf. sb. of cit observe.

II

i. 35, s]

SAVIT R

17

7 vi suparn6 antfixik.s_ni akhyad, gabhir_vepfL _surah. sunith_.h, kliecl_nim, s_ria.h P k_ ciketa 9 katam_.m dy_m ra_mir asy_ tat_na P

The bird has su_veyed the almospheric region,s, the divine spirit, of deep inspiration, of good guidance. WT_em is now the sun ? Who has understood (it) ? To what heaven has his ray extended ?

7-9 deal with Savit.r as guiding the sun. vi... akhyat : cp. 5 a and 8 a. suparn._s : Savit!" is here called a bird, as the sun-god Sarya (vii. 63) often is. On the accent of this By. and of su-nith_s see p. 455, c a. ant_iriks._ni: equivalent to k.r.sn._ r_msi (4 d), the aerial spaces when the sun is absent. asuras : this word, which is applied to various gods in the RV., but especially to Varuna, and in the Avesta, as ahura, is the name o.f the highest god, means a divine being possessed of occult power; towaxds the end of the Rigvedic period it gradually lost this sense and came to mean a higher hostile power, celestial demon, sunith_s : guiding well here means that the sun illumines the paths with his light, kv6d_nim : when an independent Svarita is in the Samhita text immediately followed by an Udatta, the Svarita vowel, if long, has added to it the figure 3, which is marked with both Svarita and Anudatta (p. 450 b). id_mfm : now = at night, eiketa : pf. of cit observe (139, 4). dy_m : ace. of dy6 (p. 94, 3), here again (cp. 6 a) f. asy_: = asya _. tat_na: pf. of tan stretch (cp. 137, 2 b). The question here asked, where the sun goes to at night, is parallel to that asked about the stars in i. 24, 10: ' those stars which are seen at night placed on high, where have they gone by day?'

"_ %T-,'__ "_I"_(-_"=TT '_T'_o.aT. _1" t

_I'_l _T-_ l _

I __ I _EI_,_. I

_9o_

18

SAVIT.I:t

'

[i. 35,8

8 aqHu vi akhyat kakdbha.hp.rthiryes, tr_ dh_nva, y6jan_, sapt_ sindhCm. hiranyakq*t.h Savit_ dev_ _g_d, d_dhad r*ttn_ dfUifise vanam. " _ "-

He has surveyed the eight _eaks of the earth, the three waste lands, the leagues, the seven rivers. Golden-eyed god Savit.r ]*as come, bestowing desirable gifts worshipper. on the

The general meaning of this stanza is that Savit.r surveys all space : the mountains, the plains, the rivers, and the regions between heaven and earth, asHu : 106 b. p.rthivy_s : on the accentuation see p. 458, 2, tr_ : n. pl. (105, 3) to be read disyllabicaUy, clh_nva : acc. pl. of dh_nvan n., 90, 3 {p. 70 ; cp. p. 67, bottom). The long syllable after the caesura in b and d (- _ - for _ _ -) is rare in the RV. (p. 440, 4 B). ySjana : probably the thirty leagues that Dawn traverses in the sky (i. 123, 8), the number of each of the other features being expressly stated, hiranyak_._s: the accent of this cd. as a By. is quite exceptional: p. 455 c. _-ag_t: root ao. of ga go, d_tdhat : on the accent cp. 127, 2; on the formation of the stem, 156.

9 himnyap_ni.h Savit_ vioarsanir .I. _ o ubh$ dyavaprthlvz ant_r iyate, 2. _ _ apamzvam, b_lhato; vStz"surmm ; _ " abhi krsn_na r_jas_ dy_m rn_ti,

Golden-lmru_edSavit.r, the active, goes between both heaven and earth. He drives away disease ; heguides the su_ ; through the dark space he ._enetrates to heaven. .

Dy_va-prShzw : with the usual double accent of Devata-dvandvaa (p. 457, e fl) and not analysed in the Pada text {ep. note on 1 b). Its final i, as well as the o of ubh_, being Prag_.hya (25 a, 26 a), is tollowed by iti in the Pada text (p. 25, f. n. 2). ant_r (46) com.

i. 35, 10]

SAVITI_

19

bined with i go governs the ace. ; cp. tile two laps of Savitr in 6 a. _pa b_clhate: he drives away disease, cp. 3 d; contrary to the general rule (p. 466, 19 A) the vb. is here accented ; this irregularity not infrequently occurs when in the same Pada a compound verb is immediately followed by a simple vb. v6ti: accented because it begins a new sentence; Savit!" guides the sun: cp. 7 c. k.rs..n, fina r_jasa: cp. 2a and 4d. abhi . . . dy_m .rn. ti: cp. 7 d. The o metre of d is irregular : it is a Tris.tubh of twelve syllables, the first two syllables (abhi) taking the place of a long one. Cp. p. 4_1, 4 a and p. 445, B 1.

qo

t m:

I_

10 hiran.yahasto _axra.h sun,the.h, sum.r.1_a.h suava_a yatu arv_fi, apasadhan rak_._iso yatudh_nan, _sthfi_l dev_.h pratidos_ .m grn.an_h..

.Let the golden.handed divine spirit, of good guidance, most grac;ous, aiding well, come. hither. Chasing awaydemons and sorcerers, the god being lauded has arisen towards eventide.

_suras: cp. 7 b. sylvan: the analysis of the Pada text, sylvan = laossessed ofl_ro_erty, is followed by Sayana who renders it by dhanavan wealthy; this would mean that Savit!" bestows wealth (cp. d_dhad r_tna in 8 d, and vi. 71, 4 _ dfi_tise suvati bh_ri vam_m he, Savit!-, brb_gs much wealth to the worship__er). This nora. occurs several times in the RV., and is always analysed in the same way by the Padapa.tha. On the other hand, three oblique cases of su-_vas giving good help occm. (sv_vasam, svli,vasa, sv_vasas). Roth takes sylvan to be anom. of this stem irregularly formed by analogy for su-_vas (cp. 83, 2 a). I follow the Pada text as the meaning is sufficiently good. Final an, which regularly becomes az_ before vowels (39), sometimes undergoes the same change before y "[40, 4). raks._sas has the accent of a m. in as (83, 2 _+) the n. form ; is r_,lr_..am_i, yatudh_n_n is added, as is often the case, without c2

20

SAVIT.R

It. 35, 10

a coanectil}g ca: cp. note on rayim, in i. 1, 3a; note that the Sandhi of an before vowels (89) does not apply at the end of an internal Pada. If Savit!. in this stanza is connected with morning rather than evening, _sthRt would here be equivalent to ud asth_t ; cp. RV. vi. 71, 4 : rid u .sy_ dev_.h Savit_ d_munfi hiran.yapRn.i.h pratido.s_m _sthRt that god Savitr, the do_estic friend, the go?denhanded, has arise_ towards eventide ; it may, however, be equivalent to _ asthat, that is, he has mounted his car, cp. 4 c. g rnan_s: pr. pt.._., with ps. sense, of 1. g.r sing, greet.

....

ll ydtep_ntha.h, Savlta.h, pUrVlaSO, 1Trine ancient 2aths, 0 Savitr, arenava.h stik.rta antaril_.e, the dustless, the well _ade, in the tdbhir n5 ady_ pathibhi.h sugdair, (going) by thosepaths easy to bhi traverse lrrotect us to.day, and speak r_l_._ ca no, _dhi ca brfihi, for us, 0 god. deva. te : the dat. and gen. of tvhm_ is ahvays unaccented ; while td, N. pl. m. and N. A. du. f. n. of t_, is always td. p_nthfis : N. pl. of p_intha, m. 2ath, which is the only stem (not p_nthan) in the RV. (99, 1 a). Savita.h: when final Visarjaniya in the Samhita text represents original r, this is always indicated by the word being written with r followed by iti in the Pada text ; here Savitar iti. 'ren_vas : the initial a must be restored (see note on/[gne, i. 1, 9 b ; but a is not elided after o in c and d) ; on the accent of a Bv. formed with privative a, see p. 455, c a. sd-k.rt_s : Karmadharayas, in which the first member is an adv. and the last a pp., accent the former ; p. 456, 1 a. t_bhis : inst. of t_, p. 106 ; p. 457, 11 b. In c n5 ad.y_t should be pronounced because e and o are shortened bef(_re a (p. 437, a 4) ; this rule does not apply when e and o are separated from a by the caesura ; hence in d 5, _lhi should he-pronounced." sugdbhi: see 47. The final a of r_k.sR is lengthened bemuse the

i. ss] second syllable of the be our advocate; the other passages: in i. that his worshippers make a similar report

MARUTS

21

Pads favours a long vowel. _dhi . . . brfihi : meaning of this expression is illustrated by 123, 3 Savitr is besought to report to Sarya are sinless ; in vii. 60, 2 Sarya is implored to to the ._dityas.

MARUTAS
This group of deities is prominent in the RV., thirty-three hymns being addressed to them alone, seven to them with Indra, and one each to them with Agni and Pa.san (vi. 54). They form a troop (gan._, _rdhas), being mentioned in the plural only. Their number is thrice sixty or thrice seven. They are the sons of Rudra (ii. 38) and of Prgni, who is a cow (probably representing the mottled storm-cloud). They are further said to have been generated by V_yu, the god of Wind, in the wombs of heaven, and they are called the sons of heaven; but they are also spoken of as self-borm They are brothers equal in age and bof one mind, having the same birthplace and the same abode. They have grown on earth, in air, and in heaven, or dwell in- the three heavens. The goddess Rodas_ is always mentioned in connexion with them ; she stands beside them on their car, and thus seems to have been regarded as their bride. The brilliance of the Maruts is constantly referred to : they are golden, ruddy, shine like fires, and are self-luminous. They are very often associated with lightning: all the five compounds of vidy6t in the RV. are almos_ exclusively descriptive of them. Their lances represent lightning, as their epithet .r.s.ti-vidyut lightning-sj_eared shows. They also have golden axes. They are sometimes armed with bows and arrows, but this trait is probably borrowed from their father Rudra. They wear garlands, golden mantles, golden ornaments, and golden helmets. Armle/s and anklets (khfi_li) are peculiar to them. The cars on which they ride gleam with lightning, and are drawn by steeds (generally feminine) that are ruddy or tawny, spotted, swif_ as thought. They are great and mighty ; young and unagifig ; dustless, fierce, terrible like lions, but also playful like children or calves. The noise made by them, and often mentioned, is thunder and the roaring of the winds. They cause the mountains to quake and the two worlds to tremble; they rend trees, and, like wild elephants, devour the forests. One of their main activities is to shed rain : they cover the eye of the sun with rain; they create darkness with the cloud when they shed rain ; and they cause the heavenly pail and the streams of the mountains to pour. The waters they shed are often clearly connected with the thunder-

22

MARUTS

[i. s5, i

storm. Their rain is often figuratively called milk, ghee, or honey. They avert heat, but also dispel darkness, produce light, and prepare a path for the sun. They are several tilues called singers: they are the singers of heaven ; they sing a song ; for Indra when he slew the dragon, they sang a song and pressed Soma. Though primarily representing the sound of the winds, their song is also conceived as a hymn of praise. Thus they come to be compared with priests, and are addressed as pl_ests when in the company of Indra. Owing to their connexion with the thunderstorm, the Malaats are constantly associated with Indra (ii. 12) as his friends and allies, increasing his strength and prowess with their prayers, hymns, and songs, and generally assisting him in the fight with V.rtra. ]ndm indeed accomplishes all his celestial exploits in their company. Sometimes, however, the Maruts accomplish these exploits alone. Thus they rent V!'tm joint from joint, and disclosed the cows. When not associated with ]nd_, the Maruts occasionally exhibit the maleficent traits of their father Rudra. Hence they are implored to ward off the lightning froni their worshippers and not to let their ill-will reach them, and are besought to avert their alTow and the stone which they hurl, their lightning, and their cow- and man-slaying bolt. But like their father Rudra, they are also supplicated to bring healing remedies. These remedies appear to be the waters, for the Maruts bestow medicine by raining. The evidence of the RV. indicates that the Mamts are Storm-gods. The name is probably derived from the root mar, to shi_e, thus meaning 'the shining ones '. L 85. Metre: Jagati; 5 and 12 Tri_.tubh.

_
1 pig
.

,. I,
jtinayo sfin_va.h rig, suThe wondrous so_s of _tt_ra, the racers, who on their course. adorn 21Ia_ts themselves l_ke women, t_ l_ave indeed made tl_e two

y6 _ximbhante, s_ptayo Rudigsya d_msasal_,

yaman,

i. 85,3] r6dasi hi Mardtah dhd.

. _ A

MARUTS cakrird v.r-

23

worlds to increase. The i_etuous ho'oes rejoice in rites of worship.

madantl vxra vid_thesu ya.h.

gh._sva-

j_nayas : 99, 1 a. y_man : loc., 90, 2. su_m. sas_ : accent, p. 455, lOca. cakrir6: 3. pl. A. pf. ofk.r; w_th dat. inf., p. 334,b. m_danti: with loc., 204, 1 a. vid_thesu: the etymology and precise meaning of this word have been much discussed. It is most probably derived from vidh worship (cp. p. 41, f. n. 1), and means divine worship.

2 t_ uks.it_so mahim_nam f_ata : . o o diwRudrasoadhi caknre s_da.h, _rcantoark_m, jan_yantaindriy_m, _dhi hriyo dadhiro P._nim_tara.h,

They having waxed strong have attained greatness : in heaven the Rudras have made their abode. Singing their song and generating the might of In(ira, they whose mother is P.rgni have put on glory.

t_ : N. pl. m. of t_ that, 110. uk_it_sas : pp. of 2. uk_. (= yak.s) grow. _ata: 3. pl.._, root ao. of am.fi attain. Rudr_sas: the Maruts are often called ' Rudras' as equivalent to ' sons of Rudra '. _dhi : prp. with the loc. divl ; 176, 2. janayanta indriy_m : that is_ by their song. _4hi dadhire : 3. pl. -&.pf. of _ dhK, which is especially often used of putting on ornaments. _rlyas : A. pl. of _r_ g/ory ; referring to the characteristic brilliance of the Maruts.

__

_'_rl"_,_

_:

-_J_ I__#_': I_____ I_:

i ) t. _; "i :F 'i i! "

24 MARUTS It. ss, 3 3 g6m_taro y_c chubh_yant6 afljiWhen theU whose mother is a c(m. bhis, deck themselves with ornaments, tan_su _ubhr_ dadhire virgtkshining they put on their bodies mata.h, brilliant wea_vons. They drive off b_dhante vi_vam abhim_tinam every adversary. Fatness flows _pa. along their tracks. v_rtm_ni e.s_m _nu riyate ghrt_m. g6mataras : as" the sons of the cow Prhni. yhe ehubl_yante : Sandhi, 53. dadhire : pf. with pr. sense, they haveput on : they wear. _tpa: prp. after the vb. and separated from it by other words. 191 f; p. 468, 20. hnu riyate : 3. pl. A. pr. of ri time. gh.rt_tm : ghee = fertilizing rain. The meaning of d is: the course of the Maruts is followed by showers of rain. e.sam: unemphatic G. pl. m. of ay_m, p. 452, 8 B c,

'_;_rl"_"1"_r: 1_i_: , '_T_

II

vl y6bhr_jante sdmakh_sa .r._.tiWho as great .warriors shine bhi.h, forth with their spears, overthrow. pracy_v_yanto _eyut_ eid 6jas_, ing even what has never been over. manojtivo y_n, Maruto, r_thrown with their might : when ye, the_u _ 0 Maruts, that are swift as tlwught, v.._vratasa.h p._oatir _yugwith your strong ]wsts, have yoked dhuam ; the s_vottedmares to your cars, mimakh_sas: a Karmadharaya ed. p. 455, 10 c a), but the exact meaning uncertain, pra-ey_v_yantas: pr. pt. this cs., which occurs frequently in according to its accent (ep. of makl_ is still somewhat of em of eyu ma_e; though the RV., always has a long.

i. ss, 6]

MAI_UTS

25

radical vowel in the Samhita text, it invariably has a short vowel ill the Padapn.tha. Marutas : change from the 3. to the 2. prs., in the same sentence, a not infrequent transition in the RV. manojtivas : 1_'.pl. radical ft stem mano-j_, 100, II a (p. 88). r_thesu _ : 176, 2. p_satis: the spotted mares that draw the cars of the Maruts. _yugdhvam : 2. pl. __. root ao. of yuj yoke.

_f'_IT'_'_ _f _I"

_'i_l_.

_'d I _I_

I _f I _i_

I _r'_:

5 pr_

yGd r_the.su p._satir Gyugdhvam., A. vale fidri.m, Mature, ram. h_yanta.h, ut_rus_isya vi .sianti dh_r_ c_vmevod*tbhir vi undanti bh_ma.

il whe_ ye have yoked the s_otted mares before your cars, speeding, 0 Maruts, the stone in the conflict, they discharge the streams of tl_c ruddy (sLeed) andnwisten the earth like a skin with waters.

_yugdhvam: with loc., cp. 204, 1 b. Adrim: the Maruts hold lightning in their hands and cast a stone, ut: here comes before the first instead of the second of two clauses, as ca sometimes does {p. 228, 1). _ru.sasya: the ruddy steed of heaven; cp. v. 83, 6 where the Maruts are invoked to pour forth the streams of the stallion ; and in v. 56, 7 their ruddy steed (vRj[ ru.sah.) is spoken of. vi .syanti : 3. pl. pr. of sR bind ; Sandhi, 67 a ; change back from 2. to 3. prs.; cp. 4cd. undanti: 3. p]. pr. of ud wet. bh_ma: N. of bh_maan n. earth (but bhfunn m. abundance).

26 6 _ vo vahantu sy_do ; raghupatv_na.h bhill., sldat_ barhir: k.rt_m.. s_ptayo pr_ jigata

MARUTS raghubfihfi-

It. 85,6

urti va.h s_das m_dh-

Let your swift-gliding raco's bring you hither. Swift-flying come forward with your arms. Sit down on the sacrificial grass: a wide scat is made for you. Rejoice, 0 3faruts, in the sweet juice.

m_d_yadhvam, Maruto, v5 _ndhasa .h.

raghu-.syAdas : Sandhi, 67 b. raghup_tv_nas : as belonging to this Pi_da to be taken with prA jig_ta (gi go). b_hlibhis : with outstretched arms as they drive, s_data _ : 2. pl. ipv. pr. of sad sit with prp. following (p. 468, 20). s_das: Sandhi, 43, 2a. krt._m: as finite vb., 208. mfidGyadhvam: cs. of mad rejoice, with gen., 202Ab. m_dhvas: gem n. of m_dhu, p. 81, f.n. 12; the sweet juice is Soma.

_I_ U 7 t_ 'vardhanta tvan_ : svhtavaso mahi.Sdf-strong they grew by their greaPness : they have mounted to the

n_kam tasthdr ; urfi cakrire firmament; theyhave made for thems_da.h, selves a wide seat. When V'._:a.u Vi.sn.ur y_d dh_vad v._.sana.m hell)ed the bul_ reeling with intoxiv_yo madaeytitam, n_ sidann priy6. _ barhlsi cation, they sat down u2on their beloved sacrificial grass like birds.

t6 'vardh_nta: Sandhi accent, p. 465, 17, 3. mahitvan_: inst. of mahitvan, p. 77, f. n. 3. _ tasthth" : vb. of a principal sentence

i. ss, 9]

MARUTS

27

accented according to p. 468, ft. Vi.sn.us: the mention of wide space (a conception intimately connected with Visl.m, cp. uru-g_y_, &c.) in 6 c and 7 b has here probably suggested the introduction of i.s.nu (i. 154), who is ill various passages associated with the _aruts (especially in v. 87) and who also forms a dual divinity (lndr_-Vi.s.nfi) with ]ndra. dha: Sandhi, 54. _vat: 3. s. ipf. of avfavour; Visnu helps Indra, aided by the _Iaruts, in his conflicts. v._.san : dec., 90, 1 ; both this word and madaoyfit are applied to ' Soma as well as Indra, but the meaning of the vb. av and the use of the ipf. are in favour of Indra being intended, the sense then being: ' when Vis.nu and Ind1% associated in conflict, came to the Soma offering, the Maruts, their companions, came also.' v_yaa: N. pl. of vi bird. sidan : unaugmented ipf. of sad sit.

8 @_r_ iv@d ytiyudhayo n_ j_gmayah., _ravasyAvo n p._tan_su yetire, bh_yante vi_v_ bhdvanrt Marddbhio:
--_,_

Like heroes, s_eeding like war. riors, like fame-seeking (men) they have arrayed tl_nselves in battles. All creatures fear the Maruts : the men" are like kings of terr_le aspect.

rajana

ira tvesAsamd_o

nrah.,

ira: no_e how this pcl. interchanges with n in this stanza. _etire : 8. pl. pf. A. of yat : 137, 2 a. bhAyante : 3. pl. pr. A. of bhi fear ; the pr. stem according to the bhft class is much commoner in the RV. than that according to the third class. Martidbhyas : 201 A b. n_ras : the Maruts ; N. pl. of n.r _mn, 101, 1.

9 Tv_ta

yhd

vGjra.m su_pa n_ri_p_msi nir ap_m

s_.k.rtam _vartak_raubjad /

When turned

the skilful the

Tva#r

had took it

hiranyGyam, sah_srabh.r.s.ti.m yat, dhatt_ Indro tave : _than Vrtr_m, arn. av_m.

well-made, bolt, Indra

golden,

thousand-edged

to _ve_form manly

deeds : he slew

V.rtra, and drove out the flood of waters.

The association of ideas connecting Indra with the Maruts is continued from 7 e d. That Tv_.tr fashioned Indra's bolt for him is mentioned, in a similar context, in i. 32, lc and 2b: _hann hhim, hnv apes tatarda ; Tv_s_ asmai v_jra .m svary_ .m tatak.sa he slew the "ser2ent, he released the waters ; Tvaq.t..rfashioned for him the whizzing bolt. dhatt_f : 3. s. pr.._, used in the past sense (212 A 2). k4rtave : dat. inf. of purpose, in order to_erform (k.r), 211. n_ry_tpfi .msi is here and in viii. 96, 19 analysed by the Pada text as mixi hpa .msi. The only possible sense of these words would be deeds against the hero (V!'tra). On the other hand n_ry_ni appears once (vii. 21, 4) and nhrya twice (iv. 19, 10 ; viii. 96, 21) as an attribute of _ip_ .msi ; the epithet n6xyapasam, analysed by the Padapa.tha (viii 93, 1) as n_rya-apasam doing manly deeds is applied to Indra. It thus seems preferable _ make the slight emendation naryapamsx (to be read n_i_pa .msi) in the Samhita text, and mirya]_pa.msi in the Pada text. nir aubjat : 3. s. ipf. of ubj force (ep. 23 c).

i. 85, 11]

MARUTS

29

10 firdhv_.m nunudro 6jas_;

avat_m

t_

They have .pushed u_ the well with might;they have _lit even thc firm mountain. Blowing their 2ipes the bountiful Maruts have performed glorious deeds in the intoxication of Soma.

dfid.rh_n._m, aid bibhidur vi p_rvatam. dh_manto v_n_m. Martita.h sudSnavo m_de s6masya r_nifini cakrire.

firdhv_m : Ju_ve pressed (the bottom) u2ward, that is, overtur,_ed, poured out; avat_m : the cloud; ----they have shed rain. d_drhan_m : pf. pt. ,_. of d.rh make firm, with long red. vowel (189, 9), shol_ened in the Pada text. bibhidur vi: p. 468, 20. p_rvatam: cloud mountain ; another way of saying the same thing, dh_mantas : with reference to the sound made by the Maruts ; cp. _rcantas, 2 c. m_de s6masya: Indra is constantly said t_ perform his mighty deeds in the intoxication of Soma, so his associates the Maruts are here similarly described.

11 jihm_a di_ _sificann

nunudre : titsam

avat_m, t_y_ G6tamaya t.rs-

.They have 2rushed _,thu, rt the a well in that direction : they 2oured out the spring for the thirsty Gotama." Of brilliant splendour they ayl_roach him with helv ; may . they satisfy the desire qf the sage by their powers.

n_o. gachantim va.h:

_vas_

citr_bh_natarpayanta

k_mam viprasya dhamabh_ ,h.

30

MARUTS

[i. 85, 11

jibm_m : so as to be horizontal and pour out the water, much the same as firdhv_m in 10a. t_y_ di_: this expression is obscure; it may mean, in tho quarter in which Gotama was; cp. 199 A4. im : bin,, Gotama, p. 220. viprasya : of Gotama. tarpayanta : cs. of t.rp be pleased ; the inj. is more natural here, coming after a pr., than an unaugmented ipf. would be.

12 Ya va.h +_rma +a_am_n_ya tridh_tfmi i asm_bhya.m yanta, rayi.m no v_ram, dR_tise

2. o

s_uti, vi su-

The shelters which you lmve for the zealous man, extend them threefold to the worshi_xver. Extend them to us, 0 Maruts. Bestow on us wealth together with excellent hero.es, mighty ones.

yaehat_thi, Maruto, v_.ana.h,

tam, dhatta,

pf. pt. -_. of _am _ labour. _ma: N. pl. n. (90, 2) sa_amanaya: " - _ aL tridh_tfmi : used appositionally (198). d_dse : dat. of d_va.ms, 157 b. yachata _dhi: prp. after vb., p. 468, 20 ; ipv. pr. of yam stretch, asm_bhyam: p. 104. vi yanta: 2. pl. ipv. root ao. of yam stretch (cp. p. 172, 5). dhatta: 2. pl. ipv. of dhR _ut (p. 144 B b). su-vlram : that id, accompanied by warrior sons ; cp. vir_vattamam, i. 1, 3 c.

vi$Su
This deity occupies a subordinate position in the RV., being celebrated i- only tlve or six hymw. The only anthropomorphic traits mentioned about him are the strides he takes, and the description of him as a youth vast in body who is no longer a child. The central feature of his nature consists inhisthreesteps,onnected c with which are his exclusivepithets e 'wide-going' (uru-ggy_)and 'wide-_strlding ' (uru-kramA). With these steps traverses earthor theterrestrial he the spaces. Two of hissteps arc visibleo men, but the thirdor highest t isbeyond the flight birdsor of

i. 154, 1]

vI.s_u

31

mortal ken. His highest step is like an eye fixed in heaven; it shines brightly down. It is his dear abode, where pious men and the gods rejoice. There can be no doubt that these three steps refer to the course of the sun, and in all probability to its palate through the three divisions of the world : earth, air, and heaven. Vis.n.u sets in motion like a revolving wheel his ninety steeds (----days) with their four names (= seasons), an allusion to the three hundred and sixty days of the solar year. Thus Vis.n.u seems to have been originally a personification of the activity of the sun, the swiftlymoving luminary that with vast strides passes through the whole universe. Vi.sn.u takes his steps for man's existence, t_ bestow the earth on him as a dwelling. The most prominent secondary characteristic of Vis.n.u is his friendship for Indra, with whom he is often allied in the fight with V.rtra. In hymns addressed to Vis.n.u alone, Indra is the only other deity incidentally associated with him. One hymn (vi. 69) is dedicated to the two gods conjointly. Through the V.rtra myth the Maruts, lndra's companions, are drawn into alliance with Vi.snu, who throughout one hymn (v. 87) is pm_sed in combination with them. The name is most probably derived from vii} be active, thus meaning ' the
active one '.

i. 154.

Metre:

Tristubh.

1 V'.x_or nd cam,

kam

viri_ni vimam6 fittara.m

pr_

re-

I will now ln'oclaim the heroic _powers of Visn.u, who has measured out l_lace, the terrest.Hal the regions ; who established out tril)ly. uIr2oer gatherimdstrode

yt_l_ p6a'thivfini y6 gskabh&yad stham, vicakram_nt_s

rt_jfi.msi; sadhg-

]_aving, wide-loaeed,

tr_dh6rug_y_h.,

kam : this pcl. as an encl. always follows nt_, sti or hi (p. 225, 2). viry_ni: the syllable preeeding the so-called independent Svarita

: iI l

(p. 448) is maHced with the Anudatta in the same way as that preceding the Udatta ; here we have, as usual, in reality the dependent Svarita, the word having to be pronounced viri_.ni, pr_ vocam: inj. ao. of vae, 147, 3. p_rthivfmi r_jamsi: the earth and the contiguous air. vi-mam_ : this refers to the sun traversing z the universe; cp. what is said of Varuna in v. 85, 5 : maneneva tasthiv_a ant_rikse vi y5 mares prthiv_m, s_ryena who standing in the air has 9neasured out the earth with the su_, as with a measure. _skabhgyat : ipf. of skabh _vro2 ; the cosmic action of supporting the sky is also attributed to SaviL!', Agni, and other deities, littara .m sadh_stham: tllat is, heaven, as opposed to the terrestrial spaces in b, according to the twofold division of the world, vicakraman._s: pf. pt. A. of kram. tre-dh_: with his three steps; the first syllable must be pronounced with a slur equivalent to two short syllables (,_); the resolution tredh_ urug_y_.h would produce both an abnormal break and an abnormal cadence (p. 441, top).

2 prG t_d Visnu.h stavate virien, a, m.rg6 n_ bbim_.h kucar6 girls th_.h, y_syorti_u tris.d vikrg_manesu adhiksiy_nti bhdvanfini vinyl,

. By reason of his heroic _ower, like a dread beast that wanders at will, that haunts the mour/_tains, Vi_.m.uis yraised aloud for that: he in whose three _dde strides al_ beings dwdl.

pr_ stavate : A. of stu in the ps. sense, as is often the case when the pr. stem is formed according to the first (and not the second) class, t_d: the cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) }_eferring to the heroic powers of i.snu attributed to him in the precJeding stanza, viry&.na : cp. note on virykni in 1 a. m.rg_s: Saya_)a here interprets this

i. _, 3]

vI.SNO

88

word to mean a beast of prey, such as a lion ; but though bhim_. occurs as an attribute both of si .mhg lion and of v.rs.abhtL bull in the RV., giri._.h_ is found throe or four times applied to the latter and never to the former, and in the next stanza Vis.nu is called a mountain-dwelling bull'; hence the simile appears to allude to a bull rather than a lion. ku-cax6 : Yliska, followed by SRya.na, has two explanations of this word, doing ill (ku = kutsitam karma blameworthy deed) or going anywhere (kva ayam na gachati where dees he not go ?). Note that the word is not analysed in the Pads text because kn does not occur as an independent word. Sayana has two explanations of giri.s.th_s: dwdling in a lofty world or always abiding in s_eeeh (giri as loc. of gir) consisting of.Man'tras, &c. (I) ; on the inflexion see 97, 2 ; nots that in the analysis of the Pads text the change caused by internal Sandhi in the second member is, as always, removed, vikxgmmao.su : note that the final vowel of the PRda must be restored at the junction with the next Pads. aclhi-k#ytiaxti : the root 1. k.si follows the ad class (k.sdti} when it means dwell, but the bhft class (k.egyati) when it means rule over. With c and d cp. what is said of Savit.r in i. 85, 5.

3 prg_Vi0n, ave 6_t_m etu mg_rntt, girikoita uruggy_ya v!_e.n.e, y_ idg.m dirgbgm, prgyatam sadh_th_m bhih. ;

Let my inspiring hymn go forth for V'.t.s_. the mountain-dwelling u, w_de:paei_g bull, who alone with but three steps has measured ou$ .place;

ako vimaana tribhlr it pada- this long far-extendedgathering.

_.ttm: the fi must be slurred disyllabically (= _). idg.m sadli_tham : of course the earth as opposed to _ittaram #_mth_m in 1 c. _kas and tribhls are antithetical, id emphasizes the lat_er
l$os D

34

VI.S.NU

[i. 1_4,3

word : with only three. The second Pads of this stanza is parallel to the third of the preceding, the epithets in the former being applied direct to Visnu, in the latter to the wild beast to which Vi.snu is compared: girik_.'t = giris..th_; urug_y_ = kuear_ ; vt_.san = tar.g5 bhim_.h. This correspondence of kucar_ (besides V.'s alternative exclusive epithet ur_]kram_ in 5 c and elsewhere) confirms the exp]anation of urug_y_ as wide,acing from g_ go (Yr_ska, mah_gati having a wide ga_), and not widely swng from g_ sing (Sayana).

4 y6.syatr_p_n_._m_dhun_ pa- Whose three stepstilted _th d_ni _ead, unfailing, rejoice in bliss; _kgiyam_n_ svadh_y_ m_danti ; and who in threefold wise alone y_ u tridh_tu p.rthivhn ut_ has su_ortec_ e_'th and heaven, dy_m _ko d_dh_ra bh_ivan_ni vinyl. and all beings.

tr_ : n. pl. of tri (105, 3). padany_' : the final vowel of the P_da must be restored; cp. 2c. purn.a: cp. p. 308 d. _k_fiy.am_n._: r_,ver failing in mead; the privati_e pcl. a is almost invariably accented in Karmadh_rayas, p. 456 a (top) ; such negative cds. are not analysed in the Pada text. svadh_y_: inst. with verbs of rejoicing (p. 808 c). m_danti- his footsteps rejoice, that is, those dwelling in them do so. u : _- al_o (p. 221, 9). tri-dh_tu : this n. form is best taken adverbially ----trodh_L in i d, in a threefoId way, by taking his three steps. It might, however, moan the _hreefold world, loosely explained by the following earth and heaven. _kas : a/one in antithesis to vi_vfi, cp. 8 d. d_ulh_ra: pf. of dhr, with long red. vowel (189, 9), which is here not shortened in the Pada text.

i. L_,6]

vI.s.Nu

85

t_r_: _i_ _:, _ _

5 t_d asya priy_m abhi

_+_r_l I I I i _: _ _: _
I would attain to tl_t dear

p_tho

a_ya .m, n_ro y_tra devay_vo m_danti : urukxam_sya s_ hi b_ndhur itth_, Vi_n.o.h pacl_ param6 m_dhva dtsa.h.

domain of his, where men devoted to the gods rejoice : for that, truly akin to the wide-strider, is a well of mead in the highest stel_ of Visnu.

abhi a_yam: op. root ao. of am._ reach, y_tra: in the third step of Vi..snu ----heaven, where the Fathers drink Soma with ama (ep. i. 35, 6). n_ras: that is, pious men who dwell in heaven ; N. pl. of n._, 101, 1. s_ : referring to p_thas is attracted in gender to b_ndhus, 194, 3. itth_: p. 218. mdd.hvas (gem, p. 81, n. 12): ep. 4 a, where the three steps are filled with mead ; but the third step is its special abode.

_m_ _,_,_r__ __

m,__T_, _.m_,_, _

6 t_ v_m v_stfm2 dhy_i,

_masi

g_ma-

_tra s4vobh_-_r_g_ayasa. h : _
_tr,_ha tad urug_y_sya param_.m paddm bhf_ri. vt_.s.na_, bh_ti v2 _tva

We desire to go to those abodes of you two, where are the manyhorned nimble kine : there indeed that highest ste_ of the wide:pacing bull shines brightl_ down.

36 i ] ! i

VISNU

[i. s 154,

v_m : of you two, that is, of Indra and Vi.s.nu. The former, being the only other god with whom Vi.s.nu is intimately associated, would easily be thought of incidentally in a hymn addressed to Vi.snu alone ; this dual also anticipates the joint praise of these two gods hymndualdivinity 155). ufimasi:I.pl.pr.of vaildesire as a (i. (fnclrR-Vi_.nfi) in thefirst stanzasa). g_mtwo (134,2of thenext adhyai: dat. inf., p. 193, 7. g_tvas: N. pl. of g6 cow (102, 2); it is somewhat doubtful what is meant by the cows; they are explained by Y_ska and SRyana as rays ; this is a probable sense, as the rays of dawn are compared with cattle, and something connected with sunlight is appropriate to the third step of Vi.s.nu, the realm of light. Roth explains g_vas as stars, but there is little to support this interpretation, bhl_ri-_.rhgfm: many-horned would allude to the diffusion of the sunbeams in many directions, ay_sas: this form is understood as a N. pl. of aya (from i go)by Yaska, who explains it as ayanRs moving, and by Sayana as gantRras goers = ativist.rtas very widely diffused; but the occurrence of the A. s. .t. .L _ aysaam, the G. pl. ayasam, as well as the A. pl. ayasas, indicates that the stem is ayas ; while its use as an attribute of s'm_h6 lion, _va ]wrse, and often of the Maruts, shows that the meaning must be active, swift, nimble. _ha : on the use of this pcl. see p. 216. v._sn,as : cp. 8 b.

t _.

DY._V__-P .RTHIVI
Heaven and Earth are the most frequently named pair of deities in the RV. They are so closely associated that; while they are invoked as a pair in six hymns, Dygus is never addressed alone in any hymn, and P.rthiv in only one of three stanzas. The dual compound Dy_vR-P.rthivl,moreover, occurs much oftener than the name of Dygus alone. Heaven and Earth are also mentioned as r6dasi the two wor/ds more than 100 times. They are parents, being often called pit_r_, mAtttr/L, j_.nitrri, besides being separately addressed as 'father' and ' mother'. They have made and sustain all creatures ; they are also the parents of the gods. At the same time they are in different passages spoken of as themselves created by individual gods. One of them is a prolific bull the other a variegated cow, being both rich in seed. They never grow old. They are great and wide-extended; they are broad and vast abodes. They grant food and wealth, or bestow great fame and dominion. Sometimes moral qualities

i. 16o,,]

DYAVA-PR. THIVI

87

are attributed to them. They are _iae and promote righteousness. As father and mother they guard beings, and protect from disgrace and misfortune. They are sufficiently personified to be called leaders of the sacrifice and to be conceived as seating themselves around the 'offering ; but they never attained to a living personification or importance in worship. These two deities are quite co-ordinate, while in most of the other pairs one of the two greatly predominates. i. 160. Metre : lagati.

_W'_I" _ I

1 t_ hi Dy_v&-P.rthiv_ vi_v_tfiam.bhuv_, .rtavar:, rAjaso dhrayAtkavi : sujnmani dhis._.e ant_r iyate dev5 dev[ _an_ S_triah. _dei.h.

These two, bzdced, .Heaven and Earth, are beneficial _oall, observing order, s_ptmrting the sage of U_e air: between [he Lwo divine bowls that produce fair creations the divine bright S_rya moves according to fixed law.

The first two Padas form an independent sentence ; otherwise hi (p. 252) would accent iyat_ in e. Dyava-P.rthivi: on the accent, and treatment in the Pada text, see note on i. 35, 1 b. vi_vA-[am. bhuv_: dec., p. 89; accent, note on i. 1, 4b; final a and _ are never contracted with .r (19 a and note 5). .rt_vax[: note that, when the final vowel of a ed. is Pra_hya, this is in the Pad text first indicated by iti, and the cd. is then repeated and analyse_l ; in the present ease the suffix vari (f. of van, pp. 67 and 69, f. n. 2) is treated like the final member of a cd., and the final vowel of .rt_ is h_ated as metrically lengthened, rlh_rayt_t-kavi: a governing

88

DYAYA-P .RTHIVi

[i. 160,1

cd. (189 A 2 a) ; the gen. r_jasas is dependent on -kavi, probably = Agni, who (in x. 2, 7) is said to have been begotten by Dyava-pl'thivl. dhi_ne: the exact meaning of this word, hero a designation of d yav_-prthi_, A o is uncertain, . ant_r [yate goes between with ace. ; the same thing is said of Savitr in i. 85, 9 b. dh_rma_a n. ordinance (dh_rm_n m. ordainer) is the only stem in the RV. (dharma is a later one).

_i-dT I _'_. I _

I _rf_TI _-_: I _l_[_f -

2 uruvyGoas_

mahlni asa6e_t_,

As Father and Mother, far.ex. tending, great, inexhaustible, the two l_'otect (all) beings. Like two most loroud fair women are the two worlds, since the _'ather clothed them with beauty.

pit_ m_t_ ca, bhtivanani rak.sata.h, sudtL_.'.s.tamevapu_..ie n_ r6dasi, pit_ ydt sire abhi rfip_ir _vasayat.

uru-vy_eas_ : on the accent of this By. having wide extc_ion, see p. 455 c a. The du. a-sa_c_t-a is a By. (as the accent shows, p. 455 c a) having no second, while.d-sa_Icant (also an epithet of Dyava-prthiv_) is a Karmadharaya (p. 455, f. n. 2), not a second---unequal/ed, su-dh._s.tame : on the Pada analysis cp. note on i. 1, I c. vapu_.y& : cp. note on viry_n.i, i. 154, 1 a. pit_: the god here meant as the father of Dyava-p.rthivI may be ivakarman, who in RV. x. 81, 1. 2 is called 'our father' and is deseribecl as creating the earth and heaven, sire: see p. 249. abhl av&sayat: ipf. es. of 2. vas wear.

]. 16o,4]

DY._VA-PR. THII

"39

3 s_ vhhni.h putrh.h pitar6.h pavitrav_n pun_ti dh_rO ygyA. bhfivanAni mfi-

That son of the two parents, Lhe driver, the _urifier, wisely I_urifies bei_ls by his mysterious power. He has always milked fi'om the s_eckled cow and from the bull abounding in seed his shining moisture.

dhent_.m ca p._nim v._.abh_m sur6tasam vi_v_h_ _ukr_ .m p_y6 asya duk_ata.

putr_s : by the son of the'parents (Heaven and Earth) Agni is meant; for he is expressly said to have been begotten by Heaven and Earth (RV., x. 2, 7), cp. note on 1 b; he is especially called v_hai as the one who conveys (vahati) the gods to the sacrifice ; he is very frequently called p_vak_ _rifier Caterm seldom applied to any other deity); he purifies beings in his character of priest. Sayana thinks the Sun is meant, and explains purifies by illumines. dhen_zn: the term cow is often used in the RV. in the sense of earth, ca is here used with the first acc. instead of the second (ep. p. 228, 1). v_sabh_n : Dyaus is called a bull in other passages also, and is said to have been made by Agni to roar for man (i. 81, 4). su-r&tasam : alludes to the shedding of rain. vi_iv_h_ is a cd. adv. resulting from the juxtaposition of vi_v_ _h_ as an acc. of time (cp. p. 800, 5) = for all days equivalent to _h_ vi_v_ which also occurs, du.ksata: unaugmented sa ao. (141 a) without initial aspiration (which "is, however, restored in the Pada text), from dub milk (with two acc., 198, 2). The general meaning of c d is that Agni as the priest of sacrifice causes heaven to fertilize the earth, and the lat_er to be productive.

'

40
_: _ : _

DY._V._-PI._THIVI
II _ _ _: ' _ _ _--___

[i. 160, 4
[ 'r

4 ay_m devanam tamo

..

ap_s_m

apes-

He of the active gods is the nwst active who has created the two worlds that are beneficial to all. He who witl_ insight has measured out the two s_aces (and upheld them) with unaging supForls, has been universally praised.

y6

jajana r6dasi vi_v_a.mbhuv_. vi y6 mare6 r_jasi s,lkratfiy_yfi aj_rel_hi.h sk_mbhanebhi.h, s_m _n.reo.

In this stanza (cp. 2) the father of Heaven and Earth is celebrated. ap_s_m : partitive gen. (p. 821, b a). vl... mare6 : this expression is also used of Vi.s.nu (see i. 154, 1. 3) and other gods. r_asi : the heavenly and the terrestrial spaces. The initial vowel of d must be restored, s_m _n.rce: red. pf. of arc sing (189, 6), the ._. being used in the ps. sense ; Sayan.a explains it in an act. sense as pfijitav_n has honoured, which he further interprets to mean sthf_ pitavfin has established !

It 5 t6 no .g_._a_, rossini, m_hi _r_vsh., k_tr_.m, Dy_,v_.P.rthivi, dhfisatho bTh_t. So bei_ lauded, 0 great ones, bestow on us, 0 Heaven and Earth, great fame and am_vle dominion. Bring for us Fraiseworthy strength .

i. 160,5]

DY._V-_-PR. THIVI

41

y6n_bhi k_.s_s tat_nfi_aa vi_v_h_ . . panaylam 6j6 asm6 s_m invatam.

by which we may always extend over the peoples.

t$ : N. du. f., used anaphoricaUy (p. 294, b). g._._n6 : pr. pt. of 1. _.. s/ng, A. used in ps. sense, mah2ni : there are six adjectives meaning great, formed from the root mah be great: by far the commonest is mh (81) ; mahnt (85 a) is also common ; mah_ and mahln are not common, but are inflected in several cases; m_hi and mah_s (88, 2 a a) are used in the N.A. sing. only, the former very often, the latter rarely, k_.atrm : without ca. dh_sathas : 2. du. sb. s ao. (2. 162, 2) of dh bestow, to be construed with the dat. nas. abhi ...'tat_n_ma: pf. sb. of tan stretch (140, 1, p. 156).. vi_v_-hK is an adv. formed with the suffix h_ = dh_ (p. 212 fl) meaning literally in every manner = always (cp. vi_v_h_ in 8 d) ; on the accent cp. note on vi_v_tas in i. 1, 4 b. pan&yya : see 162, 2. 5j5 : final o is pronounced short before K (p. 437, a 4), but the rhythm of the break here (- u -) is abnormal (p. 440, f. n. 6). asm6: properly loc. of vaym (p. 104), but also used as a dat., is Prag_.hya ; it is dat. here (200 A 1). invatam : 2. du. ipv. of inv, a secondary root produced by a transfer from the fifth class (i-nu) to the first, inv-a (188, 8 b).

INDRA
Indra is invoked alone in about one-fourth of the bymns of the RV., far more than are addressed to any other deity ; for he is the favourite nat_onai god of the Yedlc people. He is more anthropomorphic on the physical side, and moreinvested with mythological imagery, than any other member of the pantheon. He is primarily, a god of the thunderstorm who vanquishes the demons of drought or darkness, and sets free the water_ or wins the light. He is secondarily the god of battle who aids the victorious ,_ryan in overcoming his aboriginal foes. His p]aysical features, such as body and head, are often referred to ; after he has drunk Soma he agitates his jaws and his beard ; and his belly is many times mentioned in connexion with his great powers of drinking Soma. Being tawny (h_ri) in colour, he is also tawny-haired and tawnybearded. His arms are especially often referred to because they wield the

42

INDRA

[ii. 12

thunderbolt (v_ra), which, mythologically representing the lightning stroke, is his exclusive weapon. This bolt was fashioned for him by Tva_...r, being made of iron (_yas_), golden, tawny, sharp, many-pointed, sometimes spoken of as a stone or rock. Several epithets, compounds or derivatives of vt_jra, such as v_ra-bahu bearing the bolt in his arm and v_rin wielder of the bolt are almost without exception applied to him. Sometimes he is described as armed with bow and aITOWS he also carries a hook (aflku_t_). ; Having a golden car, drawn by two tawny steeds (ht_ri), he is a carfighter (rathes.th_). Both his car and his steeds were fashioned by the .Rbhus, the divine artificers. As Indra is more addicted to Soma than any of the other gods, the common epithet ' Soma-drinker' (Somap_) is characteristic of him. This beverage stimulates him to carry out his warlike deeds; thus for the slaughter of V.rtra he is said to have drunk three lakes of Soma. One whole hymn (x. 119) is a monologue in which Indra, intoxicated with Soma, boasts of his greatness and his might. Indra is often spoken of as having been born, and two whole hymns deal with the subject of his birth. His father, the same as Agni's, appears to be Dyaus ; but the inference from other passages is that he is Tv_.r, the artificer among the gods. Agni is called Indra's twin brother, and I_fi.san (vi. 54) is also his brother. His wife, who is often mentioned, is Indr_n.i. Indra is associated with various other deities. The Maruts (i. 85) are his chief allies, who constantly help him in his conflicts. Hence the epithet _rardtvant accompanied by the Marttts is characteristic of him. Agni is the god most often conjoined with him as a dual divinity. Indra is also often coupled with Varun.a (vii. 86) and _.yu, god of Wind, less often with Soma (viii. 48), B.rhaspati (iv. 50), Pfisan, and Vi.sn.u. Indra is of vast size ; thus it is said that he would be equal to the earth even if it were ten times as large as it is. His greatness and power are constantly dwelt on: neither gods nor men have attained to the limit of his might ; and no one like him is known among the gods. Thus various epithets such as Fiakr_ and _iti_ivant mighty, _t_oipcLti lo_rl of might, tat_. kratu havi*ng a hundred l_owers, are characteristic of him. The essential myth forming the basis of his nature is described with extreme frequency and much variation. Exhilarated by Soma and generally escorted by the Maruts, he attacks the chief demon of drought, usually called V.rtra, but often also the serpent (_Lhi). Heaven and Earth tremble when the mighty combat takes place. With his bolt he shatters .rtra who encompasses the waters, hence receiving the exclusive epithet al_su-jit conquering in the waters. The result of the conflict, which is regarded as being constantly renewed, is that he pierces the mountain and sets free the waters pent up like imprisoned cows. The physical elements in the conflict are nearly always the bolt, the mountain, waters or flyers, while

il. 12]

INDRA

43

lightning, thunder, cloud, rain are seldom directly named. The waters are often terrestrial, but also often aerial and celestial. The clouds are the mountains (p_trvata, giri), on which the demons lie or dwell, or from which Indra casts them down, or which he cleaves to release the waters. Or the cloud is a rock (adri) which encompasses the cows (as the waters are sometimes called), and from which he releases them. Clouds, as containing the waters, figure as cows also ; they further appear under the names of udder (_dhar), spring (fltsa), cask (kavandha), pail (k6_a). The clouds, moreover, appear as the fortresses (pf_ras) of the aerial demons, being described as moving, autumnal, made of iron or stone, and as 90, 99, or 100 in number. Indra shatters them and is characteristically called the ' fort-destroyer' '(pftrbhid). But the chief and specific epithet of Indra is ' V.rtra-slayer' (V.rtra-han), owing to the essential importance, in the myth, of the fight with the demon. In this fight the Maruts are his regular allies, but Agni, Soma, and Vis.n.ualso often assist him. Indra also engages in conflict with numerous minor" demons; sometimes he is described as destroying de_nons in general, the Rak.sases or the Asuras. With the release of the waters is connected the winning of light, sun, and dawn. Thus Indra is invoked to slay Vrtl_ and to win the light. When he had slain Vrtra, releasing the waters for man, he placed the sun visibly in the heavens. The sun shone forth when Indra blew the serpent from the air. There is here often no reference to the V.rtra fight. Indra is then simply said to find the light ; he gained the sun or found it in the darkness, and made a path for it. He produces the dawn as well as the sun ; he opens the darkness with the dawn and the sun. The cows mentioned along with the sun and dawn, or with the sun alone, as found, released, or won by Indra, are here probably the morning beams, which are elsewhere compared with cattle coming out of their dark stalls. Thus when the dawns went to meet Indra, he became the lord of the cows ; when he overcame V.rtra he made visible the cows of the nights. There seems to be a confusion between the restoration of the sun after the darkness of the thunderstorm, and the recovery of the sun from tile darkness of night at dawn. The latter feature is probably an extension of the former. Indra's connexion with the thunderstorm is in a few passages divested of mythological imagery, as when he is said to have created the lightnlngs of heaven and to have directed the action of the waters downwards. With the .rtra-fight, with the winning of the cows and of the sun, is also connected the gaining of Soma. Thus when Indra drove the serpent from the air, there shone forth fires, the sun, and Soma ; he won Soma at the same time as the cows. Great cosmic actions are often attributed to Indra. He settled the quaking mountains and plains. He stretches out heaven and earth like a hide ; he holds asunder heaven and earth as two wheels are kept apart by

44

INDRA

[fi. 12

the axle ; he made the non-existent into the existent in a moment. Sometimes the separation and support of heaven and earth are described as a result of Indra's victory over a demon who held them together. As the destroyer of demons in combat, Indra is constantly invoked by warriors. As the great god of battle he is more frequently called upon than any other deity to help the Aryans in their conflicts with earthly enemies. He pro_ecH the Aryan colour and subjects the black skin. He dispersed 50,000 of the black race. He subjected the Dasyus to the Aryan, and gave land to the Aryan. More generally Indra is praised as the protector, helper, and friend of his worshippers. He is described as bestowing on them wealth, which is considered the result of victories. His liberality is so characteristic that the frequent attribute magh_,van bountiful is almost exclusively his. Besides the central myth of the Vrtra-fight, several minor stories are connected with Indrm In various pa_ages he is described as shattering the car of Us.as, goddess of Dawn (iv. 51) ; this trait is probably based on the notion of Indra's bringing the sun when kept back by the delaying dawn. He is also said to have stopped the steeds of the Sun, apparently by causing the latter to lose a wheel of his car. Indra is further associated with the myth of the winning of Soma ; for it is to him that the eagle brings the draught of immortality from the highest heaven. Another myth is the capture by Indra, with the help of Saram_, of the cows confined in a cave by demons called Pa_.is. Various stories which, though mixed with mythological elements, probably have an historical basis, are told of Indra's having fought in aid of individual proteges, such as king Sud_s, against terrestrial foes. The attributes of Indra are chiefly those of physical superiority and rule over the physical world. He is energetic and violent in action, an irresistible fighter, an inexhaustible lavisher of the highest goods on mankind, but at the same time sensual and" immoral in various ways, such as excess in eating and drinking, and cruelty in killing his own father Tva_t.r. He forms a marked contrast to Varun.a, the other great universal monarch of the RV., who wields passive and peaceful sway, who uniformly applies the laws of nature, who upholds moral order, and whose character displays lofty ethical features. The name of Indra is pre-Indian ; for it occurs in the Avesta a8 that ot a demon ; the term _er_h_gh_a (=V.rtrah_) is also found there as the designation of the God of Victory, though unconnected with Indra. Thus it seems likely that there was already in the Indo-Iranian period'a god resembling the V_ra-slaying Indra of the RV. The etymology of the word is doubtful, but its radical portion ind may be connected with that in ind-u drop.

:.

ii. 1.2,2] ii. 12. Metre : Tris..tubh.

INDRA

45

,,
1 y5 jat_ ev_ pratham5 m_nasvan dev5 devon kr_tunapary_bhfisat ; y_sya _dsmad rSdas[ _bhyasetam n r_sya mahn_ : s_, janasa, indra.h. Tile chief _se god who as soon as born sur_ssed the gods in $ower; before whose vehemence the Lwo worlds trembled by reason of the greatness of his valour: he, 0 _nen, is Indra.

ev_ : see p. 224, 2. m_nas-van : note that the suffix van is not separated in the Pada text, as it is in pavitra-v_n (i. 160, 3) ; had the Sandhi of the word, however, been m_no-v_u it would have been analysed as m_na.h4van, dev5 derma : cp. i. 1, 5 c. pary_bh_.at: the exact meaning of the vb. p_i bhfi.s is somewhat uncertain here, but as the greatness of Indra is especially emphasized in this hymn, surpass seems the most probable. S/lyan.a explains it here as encompassed with _otect_m ; in the AV. as _led over ; in the TS. as surpassed, rddasi; the Prag.rhya i of duals is not shortened in pronunciation before vowels (p. 437, f. n. 3). _bhyasetRm : ipf. of bhyas = bl_ be afraid of, with abl. (p. 316, b). m_bn_ : inst. of mabdn greatness (ep. p. 458, 2). The refrain s_, janRsa, _ndra.h ends every stanza (except the last) of this hymn ; similarly vi_vasm_d _[ndra _ittara.h ends all the twenty-three stanzas of x. 86.

46

INDRA

[ii. 12, 2

17-"_' It 2 y_.h p.rthiv_, vy_tham_n_m _dT.mhad, y_.h p_rvatKn pr_kupitfi_ _ramnat, y5 ant_rik.sam vimam$ v_r_yo, y6 dy_m _stabhnat : s, jan_sa, ]_ndrah. ]Vho made firm the quaking earth, who set at rest the agitated mountains ; who measures out the air more whZely, who supported heaven : he, 0 n_m, is _rndra. '

y_s: note that every Pada of this stanza, as well as of nearly every other stanza of this hymn, begins with a form of the relative prn. corresponding to the s_ of the refrain. The cosmic deeds of Indra in all the three divisions of the universe, earth, air, and heaven, are here described, hramn_t.: ipf. of ram set at rest. vimam_ vhr_yas (cpv. of ur6, 103, 2 a): here the cpv. is used predicatively, extended so as to be wider; cp. vi. 69, 5, where it is said of Indra and Visnu : ' ye made the air wider and stretched out the spaces for us to live.' dy_m : ace. of dy6 sky. _stabhn_t : ipf. of stabh prop ; in this and the preceding'stanza the ipf. of narration is used throughout excepting vimam_t (a form of constant occurrence, cp. 154, 1. 3 ; 160, 4) : cp. 213 d (p. 343).

I
I

_ _

_ _r r__ _ _ _:

_r: _ _ _,_ ,n: _,_'_,r'_ _ _:_ ,_,'-_:_ _ _'_"_: _ _',_',__ _ __r,r_*

O ---

8 y6 hatv_hlrn dhfm,

_rin._t sapt_ sin-

Wlw having slain the serpent released the seven streams, who drove out the cows by the unclosin_ of Vala, who between two rocks has produced fire, victor in battles : he, 0 men, is Indra.

y6 g_ ud_ad apadh_ Val_sya, yd_i_manoranttixagnim. ]ajana, samv_k sam/Ltsu : s_, jan_sa, 3[ndra.h.

ii. 12,4]

INDRA

47

The first hemistich refers to the two well-known myths, the release of the waters by the conquest of Vrtra, and the capture of the cows imprisoned by Vala; cp. ii. 14, 2:y6 ap6 vav.rv_m, sam V.rtr_m jagh_na Aowho slew Vrtra who had enclosed the watei's, and A /b/d. 3 : y6 ga udajad, _pa hi Val_ .m v_.h who drove out the cows, for he unclosed Vala. _ri_t: ipf. of ri release, sapt/_ sindhfm: the A. seven rivers of the Panjab. g_s : A. pl. of g6 cow. ud-ajat : ipf. of aj drive. There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of apadh_, a word that occurs here only. In form it can only be an I. s. of apa-dh_ (cp. 97, 2). The parallel use of _pa-v.r in ii. 14, 3 (quoted above) indicates that apa-dh_ means the _closing by Indra of the cave of Vala in which the cows are imprisoned ; cp. also i. 11, 5 : tv_m Val_sya g6mat6 'pfivar bilam tho_ hast unclosed the aloerture of Vala rich in cows. The form is explained by Durga, the commentator on the Nirukta, by apadhfinena as meaning udgh_.tunena Valasya by the unclosing of Vala. Sayana interprets it as an irregularity for the abl. =from the enclosure of Vala. Val_mya : the objective gen. (p. 320, B 1 b)-----by opening (the cave of) Vala. _manor ant_r : between two clouds, according to Sayana ; between heaven and earth according to Durga ; the allusion is to the lightning form of Agni who in several passages is said to be ' in the rock ', to be 'produced from the rock' and is called 'son of the rock'

(_dre.hs_Ln_ .h).

4 y_nema vi_a cy_vana k.rtam, y5 d_am. v_rnam _dharam gf_h_k_.h;

J-

--

By whom all things here have been _nade u_stable, who has made subject the l_sa" colour and has

48 svaghmva y5 jlgivam _ad ary_.h pu.s.t_ni : s_, _ndra.h.

INDRA laks_m jan_sa,

[i. 12, 4

made it disappear; who, like a _ni_ gambler the stake, has taken the_oss_sio_ of thefoe: he, 0 men, is Indra.

im_ vi_va: all these things, that is, all things on earth, ey_vana is used predicatively after krt_ni, just as _dharam is in b after _kar; cp. iv. 80, 22: y_s t_ vihv_ni cicyus.6 who hast shaken the whole world, d_sam, v*tr.nam: the non-Aryan colour (-----l_..n_m v_x_.am), the aborigines; note the difference of accent in the substantive d_s_ and the adj. d_a. _kar : root ao. of k.r (148, 1 b), to be construed with both _lharam (make inferior-_ subject) and gfih_ (_ut in hidkng _- cause to disalapear, drive away). When a final Visarjanlya in the S.arphita text represents an etymological r, this is indicated in the Pada text by putting iti after the word and o. _ A_ repeating the latter in its pause form: _ar ity _,kah.. jlg_vam : pf. pt. of ji win (139, 4) ; on the Sandhi see 40, 3. Since the normal metre requires v _ - after the caesura .,(p.o 441, top), this word was A_ here perhaps metrically pronounced jlglvam as it came to be regularly written in B. _dat: irr. a ao. (147 a 1) i'rein da give; though not analysed in the Pada text, it must owing to the sense be = _-_lat has taken, ary_s : gen of art (99, 3) ; this word appears to be etymologicaUy a By. = having no wealth (ri = rai), either for oneself (whence the sense needy, sup'pliant) or to bestow on others (whence the sense niggard, foe). [If a single meaning has to be given, devout is misleading, and suiol_liamtshould be substituted for it in the VedAc Grammar, p. 81, f. n. 1; 99, 8; and in the Index, p. 478.._

iL IS, 6] 5 y_m sm_ preh_nti ghor_m, kdha

INDRA s6ti

49

The terrible one of whom they . ask' where _ he.', of whom they also say ' he is not'; he diminishes the _vossessiom of tl_ niggard like the (player's) stake. Believe in him: he, 0 men, is Indra.

ut6m _hur n_is.6 ast_ti enam ; s6 'ry_.h pus._r vija xva mmati." "_ " /rr_d asmai dh_tta : s_, jan_sa, _ndra._

sm_ (p. 250) is metrically lengthened, the second syllable of the Pada favouring a long vowel (p. 441, top). p.rch_nti : pr. of praoh. s6ti for s_ iti : the irr. contraction of sa with a following vowel is common (48 a). im anticipates enam: see p. 220. f_hur: pf. of ah say, 139, 4; this vb. not being accented, b has the form of a principal clause, though the almost invariable use of relative clauses in this hymn would lead one to expect that the yam of the first clause would accentuate the second also. s6 ary_s : the initial a,,. though written, should be dropped ; otherwise the irr. contraction v_eva is just possible, but ,_ - for v v following a caesura after the - . . fifth syllable is rare. 5 c is parallel to 4 c: a mmatt to _lat ; ary_.h p .u_2h.-.to arya.h pu0.tam; vlja.h to lak_._m. U.sas {iv. 51) is in i. 92, 10 described as wearing away the life of mortals,. _vaghn_va .kFtnd.r vija am _'n_na diminishing it as a skinful gambler _ the stakes, min_ti : pr. of m5 damage. _rltd dhatta {2. pl. ipv. of clh_) believe, with dat. (200 A. l e). The Padas a b mention doubts as to the existence of Indra ; c implies that he does exist; and d calls for belief in him.

6 y6 radhl'{_ya sya, y6 brahm_.o kirah. ;.

codi.'t_, y_l_ k_._.

Who/s furtherer of the rich, of the 2oor, of the sttffpliant Brahmin .singer; who, fair-liFFed, is the helper of him that has l_ressed 8oma

n_lh_mmaa_ya

50 yukt_gr_vno sut_somasya drab..

INDRA y6 avit_ su_ipr_.h : s_, jan_sa, :_n-

[ii. 12,6

and has sel fo work the stones : he, 0 men, is Indra.

codit_ governs the three genitives (the rich, the pool', the priestly poet) of'a b, as the three relatives show; while avit_ governs that of c. su-_ipr_s : By. cd., p. 455, c a. The exact meaning of _ipra is somewhat doubtful, but as it is regularly dual, has the attributive tawny, h_ri-_ipra being parallel to h_ri-_ma_ru tawny-bearded, and is associated with Indra's drinking of Soma, it can hardly mean anything but lips or moustaches ; it could not well mean jaws which are h_nft, yukt_-gr_vnas: of him who has set in motion the stones with which the Soma shoots are pounded.

W_I' _rri_-_I_I. _i_-_--_i':

_i_ i_i_i_:

i w_j i _i_

i _:

" 7 y_y_v_sa, h A gavo, y_sya grama, " -

pradi_i, y_sya

y_sya vifive r_-

In whose control are horses, kine, clans, all chariots; who creates the s_, the dawn ; who is the guide of the waters: Indra. 1_, 0 men, _s

th_sa.h; y_. sunam., y_ u_._sa.m jajana ; .... " y5 ap_m net_: s_, janfma, ][ndra.h.

u_sam : often also u_asam ; du. N. A. us_s_ and u.sasa ; N. pl. u4_sas and u_sas ; see 83, 2 a, f. n. 1.

ii. _, 9] 8y_m

INDRA

51

kr_ndasi samyat_ vihv_yete, p_r_ _vara ubh_y_ amitr_h. ; sam_n_m eid r_tham atasthi.I. vamsa n_n_ havete : s_, jan_sa, Indra._

Whom the two battle-ar_rtys, coming together, call upon divergently, both foes, the farther and the nearer; two having mounted the self-same chariot invoke him separately: he, 0 men, is Indra.

sa.m-yat_: pr. pt. du. n. of s_m-i go together, vi-hv_yete (from hv_) and n_n_ havete (from ha2, the Sampras_frana form of hv_) A _ are synonymous = call on variously; cp. i. 102, 5. 6: nana hi tv_ h_vam_n_ j_nfi ira6 these men calling on thee (Indra) variously ; and (Ltha j_ni vi hvayante sis_s_va.h so men call on thee variously, desiring gains, p_r6 'rata: must be read p_r_ *tvara, though the succession of five short syllables before the caesura is irregular (p. 440, 4). The second Pada explains kr_ndasi: ubh_yfis (never used in the dual) = both groups of foes, that on the farther and that on the nearer side, from the point of view of the speaker ; according to S_yana, the sul_erior and the inferior, sam_n_m contrasted with n_nfi : two who are on the same chariot, that is, the fighter and the driver, invoke him separately, havete: not being accented must be taken as the vb. of a principal clause ; cp. note on 5 b.

9Y_ism_n n_rt_ vij_yantej_n_so, y_m y_idhyam_n_ _vase h_vante ; y6 y6

Without whom men do no_ conquer, wlwm they when fighting call on for ]_p ; whe has been a

vi_vasya " " pratimana.m ba- match for ever?/one, who moves the bh_va, immovable : he, 0 men, is I_ra. aeyutacyait : s_, jan_a, :[ndra .h. _.2

52

INDRA

[ii. 12, 9

n_ _ : must be pronounced n_rt_ (19 a). vi-j_yante : pr. of ji conquer, hAvante: cp. vihvAyete in 8 a. Avase: final dat. (p. 814, B 2). pratimanam" : ep. iv. 18, 4: nah_ nti asya larati_ m_uam _sti ant_r jft_.su ut_ y6 j_nitvf .hfor there is no nmtch for him a_nong those wha have been born nor these who will be born. acyuta-eyfit : cp. 4 a; also iii. 30, 4: tv_._ ey_v_yann _cyutfni . . c6xasi thou continuest shaking unshaken things.

_,_'I{,,,.,, _r___1_,_: ,,_:,_:, _r_,_:,_r.m_: _

10 y_.h @_tvato m_hi @no d_dhfnfn
_ A

Who slays with his arrow the unex_ecting many that con_mit great sin; who forgives not the arrogant man his arrogance, wha slays the 1)asyu : he, 0 men, is lndra.

_manyam_nf5 ch_rua jaghana ; y_.h _ixdhate n_nud_h_ti _rdhA yam, y5 d_syor hant_: s_, janfso, _[ndrah. .

hixlh_an: pr. pt. A. of dhf. The Sandhi of fin (89) is not applied between Padas (cp. i. 35, 10 c). _manyamfmfin: not thinking scil. that he would slay them ; on the Sandhi of n + _, see 40, 1. _rvf : with his arrow (inst., p. 80) ; with his characteristic weapon, the v_jra, he slays his foes in battle jagh_aa: has slain (and still slays} may be translated by the present (213 A a). anud_d_ti : 8. s. pr. of _nu + df forgive, wi_h dat. {cp. 200 A f). d_syos : of the demon, a term applied to various individual demons, such as _ambara (11 a).

_ _ _m_ __-_ __, ,,:, _,_I, _I,_, m_ _'__" _: _ m-_, _ __ _I-_, _.: ,,_: _,:, _

ii, :,2] :2, ii y_.h_mbara.m y_ntam _ . eetvarxm. _yam vindat ;

INDRA

53

p_rvate.su ks.i- Who in the fortieth autumn found out Sambara dwelling .in _ar_di anv_the mountah_s ; who has slain the se_ent as l_e showed his strength,
o

ojRy_m_nam, y5 _him. jaghana, D_mum _yanam : s_, jan_sa,

the son of 1)(znu, as he lay : Ix, 0 men, is I_dra.

Ind_._
_ambara,next to V!'tra, Vala_ and Susna,isthe most frequently mentioned demon foe of Indra, who strikes him down from his mountain. He is often spoken of as possessing many forts, ksiy_ntam: see note on i. 154, 2 d. catvamm_yam : that is, Indra found him after a very long search, as he was hiding himself. anv_vindat : ipf. of 2. vial find. The second hemistich refers to Indra's slaughter of Vrtra. ojRy_mRnam: cp. ifi. 32, 11: _hann _him pari_y_nam _rna oj_y_mRnam tlwu slewest the serpent showing his strength as he lay around the flood. D_num : this is strictly the name of Vrtra's mother, here used as a metronymic ----D&nava ; cp. i. 82, 9 : D_aut_ _aye sah_vatsR n_ dhenfi.h 1)Omulay like a cow with her ctdf(i, e. V.rtra). Ji_y_nam : pr. pt. -_. of _i lie (134, 1 c). q_ _1':____,___r4_ t_. _[: I _i'_'_'_: I __: I_

12 y_l_ sapt_-w_mi_ vr_labh_s tdvis.mRn av_s.rjat sKrtave sapt_ slndhfm ; y5 Ranhln._m d_sphurad v_jrabRhur
.L

The mighty seven-reir_edb_l who let loose the seven streams to flow ; who armed "with the bolt s_urned l_auhi_,a as he sealed heaven : he, 0 men,isI_u.

dyam _trdhantam:

s_, jan_sa,

:[ncl_._
The term v_a. bh_ is very often applied to gods, but especially to Indra,' as expressing mighty strength and fertility, sapt_r___m_ :

54 having seven reins Sayana interprets (parjanyas) that mant is separated on the Sandhi see of sr. flow (p. 192, hin_m : a demon t dygm a-r6hantam

INDRA-

[ii. 12, 12

probably means ' hard to restrain ', ' irresistible' ; the cd. to mean 'having seven kinds of clouds shed rain on the earth '. tlivi.s-m_n: the suffix in the Pada text only after vowels, as g6 _ mfi.n ; 10 a. ava-gs.rjat : ipf. ofs.rj emit. s_rtave : dat. in 4). saptg slndh_n : ep. 8 a and i. 85, 8 b. Raumentioned in only one other passage of the RV. : ascending to heaven in order to attack Indra.

13 Dy_v&cidasmaiP.rthiv_namete; _i_i.smac oid asya p_trvat_ bhayante; h somapa nicit6 vtijrabahur, yt_. y5 v_jrahasta.h -" s_, _ndrah.. janfi_a,

Even Heaven and .Earth bow down before him/ before his ve. hemence even the mountains are afraid. Who is known as the SomadrPake_',holding the bolt in his arm, who holds the bolt in his hand : lw, 0 men, is Indra.

Dy_va . .. P.rthiv_ : the two members of Devata-dvandvas are here, as often, separated by other words (186 A 1). asmai: dat. with nam bow (cp. 200 A 1 k, p. 311). bhttyante : see no_e on i. 85, 8c. _d.smfi_l: ep. I c. soma-p_s (97, 2): predicative nora., (196 b). ni-oit4s : on the accent see p. 462, f. n. 4.

,r:,

ii. 12,15]

INDRA

55

14 y_.h sunv_ntam _vati, y_.h p_eantam, y_.h _ .msantam., y_.h _a_am_n_m fit_ ; y_sya br_iJama v_rdhanam, y_sya sbmo, y_syed_m r_u2ha.h: s_, janasa, _ndra._

Who with his aid helps him that _resses Soma, him that bakes, Idm that offers praise, him that has _repared the sacrifice; whom prayer, whom Soma, whom this gift strengthens : he, 0 men, is Indra.

sunv_ntam: all the participles in a and b refer to some act of worship: pressing Soma; baking sacrificial cakes, &c. ; praising the gods; having prepared the sacrifice. _la_am_n_m: explained by Sayana as stotram kurv_, am offering a Stotra ; by the Naighan..tuka, iii. 14, as arcantam singing ; by the Nirukta, vi. 8, as _a .msamfmam .praising. flt_ : contracted inst. of fiti (p. 80) to be construed with _vati; cp. i. 185, 4 : _vas_ _vanti helping with aid. v_rdhanam : to be taken predicatively with each of the three subjects brahma, sbmas, r_lhas, of w]wm prayer, &c. is the strengthening, that is, whom prayer, &c. strengthens; y_sya being an objective gem (p. 320, B I b). id_.m r_trlhas this gift = this sacrificial offering.

15 y_.h sunvat_ p_cate dudhr_ _ old .o va_a.m ddxdar.si, s_ kil_si saty_h.. vay_Im ta, Indra, vi_v_ha priy_sa ._ . A suvzraso vid_tham a vadema.

As he who, most fierce, enforces booty for him that _resses and him that ba_es, tlwu indeed art true. We ever dear to thee, 0 Indra, with strong sons, would utter divine worship.

This concluding stanza is the only one that does not end with the refrain s_, j_hafma, :[ndra.h. Instead_ the poet_ changing from the 8.

56

INDRA

[ft. _,15 I

to the 2. prs., substitutes at the end of b the words s_ kila_asi saty_.h as such thou art indeed t_.e ----to be depended on (cp. note on _ty_tm in i. 1, 6 c) ; while e and d axe a prayer ending with an adaptation of the favourite refrain of the Gautamas, the poets of the second Man..dala : brh_d vadema vid_the suv{r_.h we would, accompanied by strw_g sons, s_eak ala_d at divine worship. _ cid: perhaps better taken as emphasizing dudhrKs-(cp, p. 216) than with d_rd_r.si (int. of d._). te: gen. with priy_a_ (p. 322, C). vid_tham: the etymology and precise sense of this word have" been much discussed. There can now be hardly any doubt that it is derived from the root vid.h worship, and that it means divine worship, scarcely distinguishable from yajfi_, of which it is given as a synonym in l_aighan.tuka, iii. 17 ; ep. note on i. 85, 1.

RUDR/_
This god occupies a subordinate position in the RV., being celebrated in only three entire hymns, in part of another, and in one conjointly with Soma. His hand, his arms, and his limbs are mentioned. He has beautiful lips and wears braided hair. His colour is brown; his form is dazzling, for he shines like the radiant sun, like gold. He is arrayed with golden ornaments, and wears a glorious necklace (ni.sk_). He drives in a car. HIS weapons are often referred to: he holds the thunderbolt in his arm, and discharges his lightning shaft from the sky; but he is usually said to be armed with a bow and arrows, which are strong and swift. Rudra is very often a_ociated with the Maruts (L 85). He is their father, and is said to have generated them from the shining udder of the cow P_ni. He is fierce and destructive like a terrible beast, and is called a bull, as well as the ruddy (aru_) boar of heaven. He is exalted, strongest of the strong, swift, unassailable, unsurpassed in might. He is young and unaging, a lord (_fma) and father of the world. By his rule and univeral dominion he is aware of the doings of men and goda He is bountiful (mi.dhv_. u), easily invoked and auspicious (_iv_). But he is usually regarded as malevolent ; for the hymns addressed to him chiefly express fear of his terrible shafts and deprecation of his wrath. He is implored not to slay or injure, in his anger, his worshippers and their belongings, but to avert his great malignity and his cow-slaying, man-slaying bolt from them, and to lay others low. He is, however, not purely maleficent like a demon. He not only preserves from calamity, but bestows blessings. His he_ilng powers are especially often mentioned; he has a thousand remedies, and is the.

_ i

li. 33,1]

RUDRA

57

greatest physician of physicians. In this connexion he has two exclusive epithets, j_d_.a, cooling,and j_l .fi_a-bhosaja,possessi_ujcoolin remedies. 9 The physical basis represented by Rudra is not clearly apparent. But it seems probable that the phenomenon underlying his nature was the storm, not pure and simple, but in its baleful aspect seen in the destructive agency of lightning. His healing and beneficent powers would then have been founded partly on the fertilizing and purifying action of the thunderstorm, and partly on the negative action of sparing those whom he might slay. Thus the deprecations of his wrath led to the application of the euphemistic epithet _iiv_, which became the regular name of Rudra's historical successor in post_Vedicmythology. The etymological sense of the name is somewhat un.ce14_in,but would be ' Howler' according to the usual derivation from rud cry. ii. 33. Metre : [email protected].

v :l

1 _ te, pitar etu :

Marut_m., sumn_m

f_t th_/good will, 0 _athor of the _Iaruts, come (to us) : sever us not from the soht of the sun. 21lay th_ hero be rnercifuZto us in regard to our steeds; maid we be trro_ific with offsprin#.

m_, na.h s_-Tasya s.amd_.'_oyuyothe. abhi no vir6 fia'vati lr_ameta; oY. pr_ j_yemahi, Rudara, prajabhib.

pitar Marut_m : the whole of a compound voc. expression loses its accent unless it begins a sentence of P_da; in the latter case only the first syllable would be accented (p. 465, 18 a). yuyotl_s : 2. s. inj. A. of 2. yu separate, with irregular strong radical vowel (p. 144, _). samd_._as :. abL 201 A 1. vir_s = Rudra, with change from 2. to 3. prs., as is often the case (cp. i. 85, 5 c). _rvati abhi k_ameta = may he not injure us in our steeds, may he spare them. Rudra must be read as a trisyllable (15, 1 d).

58

RUDRA

[ii. 33, 2

2 tv_dattebhi, Rudara, 6_mtamobhih hat_.m hima a_iya bheoaj6bhi.h, vl asm_d dv_so, vitar_.m, vi _.mho, vi _miv_ e_tayasv_ vlsftci.h,

.By the most saYutary medicines given by thee, 0 Rudra, Z would attain a "hundred winters. .Drive far away from us hatred, away distress, away diseases in a_l directions.

tv_-dattebhi : the first member of this cd. retains the inst. caseform (p. 273) ; Sandhi, 47. _at_m : on the concord see p. 291, b ; life extending to a hundred winters or autumns (_ar_das) is often prayed for. a_iya : root so. op. ,g-. of ana. i (p. 171, 4). vl : the prp. _ of a cd. vb. is often repeated with each object, the vb. itself being used only once. vitar_m : adv. of the cpv. of vl farther (cp. fit-tara) employed only with verbs compounded with vi. eatayasv_ : ipv. A. cs. of eat, with metrical lengthening of the final vowel vl.sfmis : A. pl. f. of vi.svaflc turned in various directions, is used predicatively like an adv.

8_r6stho jat_sya, A . yam,

Rudara,

_ri-

Tlwu art the best of what is born, 0 Rudra, in glory, the mightiest of the migl_y, 0 wielder of the bolt. Transport us to the farther shore of distress i_ safety. Ward off all attacks of mischief.

tav_stamas tav_sfim, vajrab_ho, la_v_i na.h pfia_m _mhasa.h suastl; vi_v_ abhtti r_paso y_wodhi,

ii. 33, 4]

RUDRA

59

j_t_sya : the pp. used as a n. collective noun = that which has Seen born, creation, vajra-baho : it is only here that this specific epithet of Indra is applied to any other deity; the voc. o of u stems is regularly treated as Pragrhya by the Pada text, hut not in the Sa.mhita text (where for instance vayav _ and vaya ukthdbhi.h are wl_tten), p_rs.i : from p.r take across, is one of a number of isolated 2. s. pr. indicatives in form, but ipv. in sense (p. 349, fl). nas: initial n eerebralized even in external Sandhi (65 A c). laar_m: acc. of the goal (197 A 1). svasti : this word is not analysed in the Pada text (like sumati, &c.)becauseasti does not occuras an independent substantive; ereit isa shortened h form of the contracted inst. svastl(p.80,n. 2); it is several timesused in the senseof a final dat. svast_ye,abhttis ---- itfs, ---: abhl hence the Svarita (p.464, 17,1 a); Sandhi,47. yuyodhi: 2. s. ipv.of yu separate, withirr. trongradical s vowel (p. 144,a).

I.

4 m_t tv_, Ruclra, n_mobhir, mR dtis.tuti, hfltZ fin no vir_t_ bhir : bhi_kktamam nomi.

oukrudh_tmR m_ s_-

_lay we not anger thee, 0 Rudra, with our obeisances, _or with iU _'aise, 0 bull, nor with joint invocation, tCaise ula our heroes with remedies : I hear of thee as the best _hysician of _hysicians.

v rsabha, arpaya

bhesajd-

tv_ bhi_jR .m _F-

cukrudh_ma: this form, red. (cs.) ao. (149, p. 174) might in itself be either sb. or inj., because the 1. pl. P. of these moods is identical in a stems; but the use here of the prohibitive pcl. m_, which is employed with inj. forms only (180), decides the question, n_aobhis: that is, with ill or inadequate worship; ep. d_ti in b ; the latter form is a contracted inst. (p. 80) ; on

60

RUDRA

[ii. _3, 4

the internal Sandhi of this word see 43, 3 a. sahfxti: contracted inst. ; invocation with other deities whom Rudra might consider inferior, dd arpaya: cs. of lid r (p. 197, irr. 1)= raise up, strengthen, bhis._m : partitive gen. (see 202 B 2 b, p. 321) ; cp. 8 b. _.rn.omi: pr. of _ru hear ; with double acc., 198, 1.

5 h_vimabhir bhir,

h_vate

y6

havir-

.Rudra who is called on with invocations and with oblations, I would alo_ease with songs ofpraise: may he, the com1_assionate, easy to invoke, ruddy 5roum, fairlilr#ed, not subject us to that jealousy of his.

_va st6mebhi Rud_ .m di.siya : .rdfid_ra_ snh4vo m_ no asy_i babhrdl_, su_ipro riradhan ma. , naya_,

hllv_rna_ : from hfx call, but havls from hu sacrifice. _va dis.iya: s ao. op. ,_. of d_ give (144, 8). .rda2daras is not analysed in the Pada text, perhaps owing to a doubt whether it is = .rdu-ud_ra or tedf_-d_ra (the former is the view of Yaska who explains it as m rdu-udara) ; for .rd_-p_ and .rda2-v_.dh are separated and data is separated in puxam-dar_. Both this word (according to the former analysis} and su-h_va are By. (p. 455, ca). babhrtis : this colour is attributed to Rudra in rift. 9, 15 also; otherwise it is applied more often to Soma (viii. 48) as well as once to Agni. su-_ipraa : see note , on ft. 12, 6 c. riradhat : inj. red. ao. of randh, asy_i ._ manayax: that is, Rudra's well-known wa.at.h is deprecated ; ep. 4 a b. There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of this stanza. The chief objection to the above explanation is the necessity to take l_vate in a ps. sense (-- hfxyate according to S_y .aoa). The following sense has also been suggested: 'he who invokes Rudra (thinks), "I would buy off Rudra with songs of praise": let not Rudra subject us to that suspicion (on his part).'
t

ii. s3, 7]

RUDRA

61

6 fi.n m_ mamanda rdtvfiJa tvl_k_.-yas_ nam.

v_abh5
A

Ma-

The 5ull accompanied Maruts has ghOSted

try the

me, the sup-

v_yasa

nadhama-

_Tiant, with his most vigorous force. I wouZdu_scathed attain shade in heat as it were : I wouZd desire to win the good will of Rudra.

J gh._fi-va c h- ayam arapaJ a_iya : viv_seyam Rudardsya sumn_m.

dd... mamanda : pf. of mand (nasalized form of mad) gladden ; intransitive, be g_ad, in A. only. _abh_s: Rudra. Mardtv_a: though this epithet is characteristic of Indra, it is also twice applied to Rudra (as father of the Marutm, see 1 a) as well as very rarely to a few other gods who are associated with Indra ; on the Sandhi see 40, 2. gl_..niva has been much discussed. The only natural explanation (following the Pada text) is gh#.'.ni ira, taking gh.#.ni as a contracted inst. f. (p. 80) expressing either cause ---- reason o/ by heat (199 A 8) or time----in heat (199 A 5); Saya.na's explanation is gh#..n_ iva _ike one heated by the rays of the sun ; hut a word gh_.Tn N. g h_. _ does not occur, and the accent is wrong. For the simile cp. vi. 16, 38 : fipa chay#_m iva gh#.'n.er_'ganma _rma te vay_m we have entered thy shdter _ike shade (protecting) from heat (p. 817, 2). mtiya: see 2 b; on the Sandhi of the final vowel of the Pada, cp. i. 160, 4 c. _ viv_seyam : op. ds. of van win.

62

RUDRA

[ii. 33, 7

7 ktia sy_ re, Rudara, m.r[ay_kur h_to y_ _sti bhesaj6 j_l_sah. ? apabhart_ r_paso d_iviasya abhl nfi m_, v._.abha, cak.samith_h..

Where, 0 Rudra, is that merciful hand of thine which is healing and cooling ? As remover of injury coming from the gods, do thou, 0 Bull, now becompassionate towards
_ne.

kva_l sya: see p. 450, b. bhesaj_s is an adj. here and in one other passage; otherwise it is a n. noun meaning medicine, apabhart_ : on the accent see p. 453, 9 d. d_ivyasya : derived from the gods, that is, such as is inflicted by Rudra himself; on the Sandhi of the final vowel, cp. 6 c. abh_ : final vowel metrically lengthened in the second syllable of the Pada, but not in 1 c. caks.am/thfLs : 2. s. pf. op. of ks.am (p. 156, 3).

8 pr_ babhr_ve v._.abh_ya fivitie6 mah6 mah_m su_..tutim iray_mL namasya kalmaliklna.m n_mobhir. glmi-n_si A nares, tves_m Rudr_sya

For the ruddy-broum and whitish bull I utter forth a mighty eulogy of the mighty one. I will adore the radiant one with obeisances. We invoke the terrible _am_e of l_u_ra.

pr_.../ray_mi: an example of the prp. at the beginning, and the vb. to which it belongs at Lhe end of a hemistich, fivitie& : D. s. of _vity_/fe (cp. 93). mah_s : gen. s. m. of m_h, beside the ace. s. f. of the same adj. (S_yana : mahato mahat/m), of the great one (Rudra); cp. L 1, 5 c. namasy_: according to the Pada thia form has its final syllable metrlcally lengthened for namasy_, which is the 2. a ipv. ; otherwise it is the 1. asb. {p. 128), which is the more likely because the third syllable does not favour metrical lengthening, and because the 1. prs. is used both in the preceding

ii. 33, 10]

RUDRA

63

and the following P_da The metre of c is abnormal because the caesura follows the third syllable, and there is a secondary caesura after the eighth, gr._Tml_si : 1. pl. pr. of _.. sing (p. 188).

9 sthir6bhir _hgai.h purur_pa ugr5 babhrti.h tlukr6bhi.h pipi_e hlra. nyai.h, _nfid asy_ bhdvanasya bh_rer nl_v_ u yo_l_:l Rudar_ asury_m.

With his firm limbs, having many forms, the mighty one, ruddy. brown, has adorned him_els w_th bright gold ornaments. From the ruler of this great world, from Rudra, let not his divine dominion del_art.

sthir6bhir _hgai.h : probably to be construed with pipi_e, by means of his firm limbs 1_ has adorned himself with golden ornaments, that is, his limbs are adorned with golden ornaments; Saya_.a supplies yukt_s furnished with firm limbs, pipi_o : pf.._, of pi_. i_uf_cl : pr. pt. (agreeing with Rudrf_l) of _ r_de over with gen. (202 A a) ; the pf. pt. is _gn_. bh_res: agreeing with bh_ivanasya; cp. vii. 95, 2: c_tanti bhtivanasya bh_tro.h taking note of the wide world (where bh_res could not agree with any other word} ; Sl_ya.na takes it with Rudr_d. yo.sat: s ao. of yu separate (p. 162, 2; 201 A 1). asury_m: an examination of the occurrences of this word indicates that as an adj. it should be pronounced asur_a, but as a substantive asury_.

64
. A _ .

RUDRA

[ii. _, 1o

10 _ha_u blbh_m sayake_ db_uva Worthythoube_rest arrows _d _han ni?k_m, yajatAm _ri_v_-fi-ow; worthy thy adorable b allpare; coloured _lave ; worthy thou _rhs_un id_mdayase vi_vam _bhyam : n_ v_ 6jiyo, Rudara, tv_d asti. wieldest a_l this force : there _s nothing mightier than thou, 0 l_udra.

bibhax.si: 2. s. pr. of bhr bear; this pr. stem is much less common than that according to the first class, bh_ra. _rhann : 52. id_m: this, viz. that thou possessest, dayase: 2. s..__ pr. of 2. di divide. S_yana interprets id_m dayase _bhvam as thou _rotectest this very extensive (_bhvam) world, tv_d : abl. after cpv. (p. 317, 3).

11 stuhl 6rut_m g_dam ydv_nam, mr.g_m n_b_m_m upahatndm, u_. . o m$..l_jaxxtr6 RudSva stay,no : any_.m t_ asm_n ni vapantu s_n_.

_Praise him, the famous, that sits on the car-seat, the young, themighty, that slays like a dread beast. 0 Rudra, being l_raised be gracious to the singer: l_t thy missiles lay low another tl_n us.

ydv_nam : other gods also, such as Agni, Indra, the Maruts, are spoken of as young, mr.g_.m n_ bh_m_m : cp. note on i. 154, 2 b ; either a bull (vtr.sabh6 n_ bh_mK.h vi. 22, 1) or a lion (slm.h5 n_ bI_m_._ iv. 16, 14) may be meant, m.r.l_ : ipv. of mrd.; with dat., p. 311, fl stay,has : here, as nearly always, in a pa sense, asm_kl : abl. with any_, p. 317, 3. e6n_s: that this word here means m/ss//es is rendered probable by the parallel passage VS. 16, 52 : y_s te s_h,tqram het_yo 'ny_m asm_n nl vapantu t_ may those thousand missiles of thine lay low another than us.

ii. 83,]3]

RUDRA

65

12 k_m_r_@ eitpit_ram v@nclam_. ,4 sonbows towards hisfather ham. who al_#roving aJg_vroaehes im, 0 h pr_ti n&n_ma Rudaropsy_ntsm. .Rudra. E sing to the true lord, bh_rerdgt_rams_tpatimgrn_.o: stut_s ttulm bho.saj_ r&si asm6. the giver of much : =#raised thou givest remedies to us.

The interpretation of a b is doubtful. It seems to mean : Rudra, as a father, approaches with approval the singer, as a son ; Rudra, being addressed in the voc., is told this in an indirect maturer. I cannot follow S_yana (pratinato 'smi I have bowed down to) and several translators in treating nangma as 1. s. pf., which in the RV. could only be nanama (p. 149, n. 1). n_nfima : =pr. ; the lengthening of the first syllable is not metrical, see 139, 9. The meaning of c d appears to correspond to that of a b: Rudra, being praised, shows his favour by bestowing his remedies; the singer therefore extols him as the giver of riches, gr.n_.e: an irr. form of the 1. s. _-. of g_. si_g. asm6 : dat., p. 10_ ; 200.4.1.

_ _ _ _ __: _'__ _ ___:___V_ _ _____: __,. _ _ _ __ _ _ __._ ___:_ ___:_

13 ya vo bhosaja, Marutah., _ticini, ya _m. tam_, v.r_ano, yk mayobhti,

.

Your re_nedies, 0 Maruts, tha_ are.pure, that are most wholesome, 0 mighty ones, that are beneficent, thatManu, our father, chose: these and the healing and blessing of Rudra Z desire,
]_

yam M_nur _vrnit_, pit_ nas : t_ _.m ca y6_ ca Rud_r_lsya va_mi

190_

66

RUDRA

[it. 83, is

Marutas: the Maruts, as the sons of Rudra (cp. 1 a) are here incidentally invoked, and their remedies associated with Rudra's. mayobhti : the short form of the N. pL n. (p. 82, n. 7, and p. 83, d). Mgnus: the ancestor of mankind, often spoken of as a father or ' our father ', and the institutor of sacrifice. _v.rnit_ : 3. s. ipf. A. (with metrically lengthened final vowel) of 2. v.r choose. _tlm, y6s : these words are frequently used in combination, either as adverbs or substantives.

m"_ _ _ "_,_r_" _"_a _r__ __.__ _ _ _*r_-_, _

m'-_: IS:,_ i __ i _'__ i_ _'_'_'_'_'_'_'_'_ _r__,u,_-ct L k_'__.t_,_: i _, _:, __, _*_r_, __,
May the dart of _udra 3ross us by, may the great ill will of the terrible one go by us : slacken thy firm (weapons) for (our) liberal Tatrons ; 0 bounteous one, bemerciful to our children and descendants.

14 p_ri no het_ Rudar_sya vrjy_.h, p_ri tvos_sya durmatir mall{ g_t. t_va sthir_ maght_vadbhyas tanu0.va; ml.dhvas, tok_ya t_nay_ya m r.la.

v.rjyas : 3. s. root ao. prc. (p. 172 a) of v.rj twist, gat : root ao. inj. of ga go. magh_vadbhyas: the I. D. Ab. pl. of maghttvan are formed from the supplementary stem maghgvant (91, 5). tLva tanu0va sthir_: relax the taut, with reference to the bow, the special weapon of Rudra ; used with the dat. because equivalent to mtdhvas : voc. of the old unreduplim.r.la be merc/fu/to (p. 311f). ' cared pf. pt. mi.dhv_ms, cp. p. 66"; 157 b (p. 182). mr.la: = m._l.a, p. 437, a 9.

ii. 35]

APA.I_

NAPAT
.

67

15 ev_, babhro v.rsabha eekit_na, y_tha, deva, n_ hrn_s6 n_ h_msi, havana_rdn no Rudareh_ bodhi, brh_d vadema

So, 0 ruddy brown, far-famed bull, listcning bc here, Rudra, to 0 our invocation, inasmuch as t]w_ god. We would, with strong sons, speak aloud at divine worship.

vidAthe suv_r_h, art not wroth and s_yest _wt,0

6va: to be taken with c, since in the normal syntactical order it should follow y_th_ in the sense which it here has (p. 241, 1) ; when yath_ moaning so that follows, it is normally construed with the sb. (241, 2), not with the ind., as hero. cekit_na: roe. int. pr. pt. of eit Mote; Sayana explains it as knowing all, but the act. only has this sense (e. g. olkttvams knowing); this and the two preceding vocatives aI_e unaccented because not beginning the Pada (p. 466, 18 b). hr.n_.6: 2. s. A. pr. of 2. h.r be angry, h_.msi: 2. s. pr. of hart; Sandhi, 66 A 2. bodhi: 2. s. root ao. ipv. of bhfi (p. 172, n. 1). nas: dat. to be taken with bodhi, lit. be invocation-hearing for us (not gem dependent on havana, lit. lwaring the invocation of us). vadema : see note on it. 12, 15 d.

APA.M

N_PAT

This deity is celebrated in one entire hymn (ii. 35), is invoked in two stanzas of a hymn to the Waters, and is often mentioned incidentally elsewhere. Brilliant and youthful, he shines without fuel in the waters which surround and nourish him. Clothed in lightning, he is golden in form, appearance, and colour. Standing in the highest place, he always shines with undimmed splendour. Steeds, swift as thought, carry the Son of Waters. In the last stanza of his hymn he is invoked as Agni and must be identified with him ; Agni, moreover, in some hymns addressed to him, is spoken of as ApE.m nap_t. But the two are also distinguished; for exan_ple, ' Agni, accordant with the Son of Waters, confers victory over V.rtra '. The epithet a_u-hdman swiflly-spesding, applied three times to ApE.m napEt, in its only other occurrence refers to Agni. Hence Ap_,.m nap_t appears to represent the lightning form of Agni which lurks in the cloud For Agni, besides being directly called Ap_..m nap_t, is also termed the embryo (g_rbha) of the waters ; and the third form of Agni is described as kindled in the waters. This deity is not a creation of Indian mythology, but goes back to the Indo-.Iranian period. For in the Avesta Ap_m nap_t, is a spirit of _he F2

68

APA.M NAPAT

[ii. 35,1

waters, who lives in their depths, who is surrounded by females, who is often invoked with them, who drives with swift steeds, and is said to have seized the brightness in the depth of the ocean. ii. 35. Metre : Tri.s.tubh.

q 4_,_(-_

_'

"

_.

1 dpem as.rksi va_ayur vaoa_yam. : Desirous of gain I have sent c_no dadhita n_di6 giro me. forth this eloffuenee (to him) : may Ap_.m nhp_d Mah6mR kuvit s_ the son of streams gladly acce__t sup_asas karatiP j6._i.sa4 d.hi. my songs. ]Viii he, the Son of ]Vaters, of swift impulse, 29erchance make (them) well-adorned? For he will enjoy (them). as.rk.sl : 1. s A. s as. of s.rj, which with fipa may take two ace., so that n_dyam might be supplied. On im see 180 (p. 220). dadhita : 3. s. pr. op. A. of d3aa, which with c_nas takes the ace. or lee. n_dy_, which occurs only here, is evidently synonymous with ap_m. n_pat in c. _huh6ma, though a By., is accented on the second member: see p. 455ca. karati: 3. s. sb. root ao. of kr.: unaccented because kuvit necessarily accents the verb only if i_ is in the same Pada. sup_asas well-adorned = well-rewarded; ep. &. ii. 34, 6: dhlya.m vadapesasam a .prayer adorned with gain; on the accent see p. 455 ca; on the Sandhi (-s it.) see 43, 2a. j6.ais.at: 3. s. sb. i_ as. of jmb hi explains why he is likely to accept them ; it aeeents j6._at, which, however_ as beginning a new aentenee (p. 466, 19 a), would be accented without it,

il.5, 3 3] 2 imam

AP_.M

NAPAT

69

sd asmai h.rd_ _ sdCu.uT_rewould verily utter fi'om our ,_m heart this well-fashioned hymn for m_ntram vocema: kuvid asya him. Pcrchance he will take note v6datp Ap_m. n_p_d, asuriasya mahn_, of it. The Son of Waters, the lord, by the greatness of divine dominion,

vi_v_ni ary6 bhdvan_ jajfina, has created all beings. hrd_ _: this expression occurs several times, e.g. iii. 89, 1: matir hrd_ _ vaey_m_n_ a 1_rayer welling from the heart, stitas.tam well-fashioned, like a car, to which the seers frequently compare their hymns ; on the accent see p. 456, 1 a ; cp. p. 462, 13 b. asmai and asya : unaccented, p. 452, 8 B c ; dat. of prs. with vac : cp. 200, 1 c. v6dat: 8. s. pr. sb. of rid know, with gem, cp. 202 Ac. asury/_sya : see p. 451, 6.

3 a_n

any_ y_nti, any_.h : samfin_m firv_m

_ipa nadia.h

yanti

While someflow together, others flow to (the _a) : the streams.fill p.r- the common receptacle; him the pure, the shining Son of Waters, the pure waters stand around.

.nanti. t_m a _ticim

_am

_dcayo p_ri

didiv_tmt_sthur

Ap_m. n_p_tam _pa.h. y_nti : accented any_h., the first vb. f_rv_m : = ocean, into it. nady/_s :

because of the antithesis expressed by anya.h-then being treated as subordinate (see p. 468 fl). saman_m : common, because all streams flow cp. asury_sya in 2 c. p.rnanti : from p_ fi/l.

70

APA.M NAPAT

[ii. 3_,3

fi: u is often lengthened in the second syllable of a Pada before a single consonant (see p. 220). didiv_tmsam : pf. pt. of eli shine, with lengthened red. vowel (139, 9) and shortened radical vowel; _he sense is illustrated by 4 d. pkri tasthur : ----they tend him.

4 tam _smer_ yuvat_yo yaivfinam Him, _he youth, the young marm.rjygmAnfi.h pgri yanti _- maidens, the waters, not smiling, pa.h : making him bright su_'ound : he s_ _nkr_ibhi.h _ikvabhi rev_cl with clear flames shines bounti asm_t fully on us, without fuel in the A _ o . . didayanxdhm6 gh.rtamrn.ag apsu. waters, having a garment of ghee. _lsmor_s : it is somewhat uncertain what is the exact sense here

implied ; but judging by iv. 58, 8, where the drops of ghee are described as hastening 'to Agni like beauteous maidens, smiling, to meeting-places ', it may mean that the waters attend seriously on this form ot Agni, not as lovers. 3rtivf_nam: a term applied to Agni in several passages, marm.rjy_m_m_s: the vb. m.rj is often used of making Agni bright, with ghee, &c. /dkvnbhis : the precise sense is somewhat doubtful, but it must mean ' flames' or the like. Note that though in this word the ending bhis is separated in the Pada text, it is not so in _ukrabhis because _6kre is not a stem. asm6 : _ . dat. Pragrhya, 26 c. d_daya: 3. s. pf. of di shine, with long red. vowel (139, 9). an-idhm_s : accent, p. 455 c a ; ep. x. 30, 4 : y6 anidhm6 didayad apsti ant_r who shone without fuel in the waters, ghrt_nirn.ik :' an epithet otherwise applied only to Agni and (once) to the sacrifice (yajfta) : note that the second member appears in the Pada text as nirnik, in accordance with the analysis ni.h-nik when the word occurs uncompounded.

ii. 6] 35,

APA.M

NAPAT

71

.-

5 asmAi tisr6 avyathlaya namr O_ hi,_, the im,mvable god, three dev_ya dev_r didhisanti _nnam : divine women desire to bestow food : k._t_ iv6pa hi prasarsr_ apsti ; for he has stretched forth as it were s_ piy_.am n_m. dhayati pfirvas_to the breasts (?) i_z the waters : Ire sucks the milh of tl_ that first bring forum.

tisr6 dev_.h : the waters in the three worlds are probably meant ; in iii. 56, 5 Agui is spoken of as having tln'ee mothers (trim&t_), and three maidens of the waters (yos_n_s tisr6 _py_h.) are there mentioned : they wish to feed him, while he desires _o drink their milk. didhi_.anti : ds. of 1. clh_ bestow : this is the usual form, while dh_tsa is rare. k._t_s : the meaning of this word, which occurs here only, is quite uneertah_, pr_-sarsr6: 8. s. pr. int. of sr. dhayati: 3. s. pr. of 2. dh_ s_c_. pur.vasunam : i.e. Ap.am nap'_t is their first offsrring ; cp. x. 121, 7 : _po jan_yant_r Agnim the waters_rod_ing Agni.

mf_,
6 _va_ya _tra j_nim_sy_ ca sv_r. p_hi The birth of this steed is here a_d in heaven. 39o thou l_rotect the patrons fi'om falli_g i_ with _mIice and injury. Him thaA is not to be forgotte_, far away i_ u_ba.ked citadels, hostilities shall not reach nor falsehoods. dxuh6 rig_.h sftr_n, samp._ca.h

_m_su pftt_ par6 apram.r._y_m n_rfitayo vi haman nan rtam." * -

72

AP.M NAP T

[i;. z, 6

Though every word is clear in this stanza the meaning of the whole is somewhat uncex_ain. It seems to be this: Apa.m napltt is produced from both the terrestrial and the heavenly waters. He is invoked to protect sacrificers from injury. He himself dwells beyond the reach of foes. E_vasya: Agnl is often spoken of as a steed. Etra: here, i.e. in the waters of earth, svbr: this is the only passage in the RV. in which the word is not to be read as sdar; it is here aloc. without the ending i (see 82c). p_hi: the change fi'om the 3. to the 2. prs. in the same stanza is common in the RV. with reference to deities. On this form depends the abl. inf. samp._eas as well as the two preceding ablatives : lit. yroteet the patrons from n2aZiceand from injury, from falling in with them (cp. p, 337 a). amasu- : in the unbaked, i.e. natural (cloud) citadels. _ pfir_.fi : loc. pl. of pdr, 82. pares : note the difference of accent between this adv. and the N. s. adj. p_tras yonder, other, na_at: inj. pr. of 3. nsA rea':h.

7 sv_

_ d_me

sudtigh&

yGsya

He, in whose own house is a cow yielding good milk, _wurishes his vital force, he eats the excellent food; he, the Son of TTraters, atherg in# strength within the waters, shines forth for the granting o] wealth to the advantage of the worshiper.

dhentih, svadh_m, pipaya, subhd _imnam atti ; s5 'p_,m n_p_d _Srj_yan.u aps_ ant_r, vamud_y_ya vidhat_ vi bh&ti,

svg _, ddme: that is, within the waters; in 2. 1, 8 sv_ d_me refers to the sacrificial altar on which Agni grows, that is, flames up. The first three Padas merely vary. the sense of 5. The food that he

iL35, 9]

APA.M

NAP]_T

73

eats is the milk that he receives, and that strengthens him. svadh_m : this word is not ana]ysed in the Padap_.tha of the RV. and AV. (as if derived from a root svadh}, but it is separated in that of the TS. as sva-dh_, pip_ya : 3. s. pf. of pi swell, with lengthened red. rowe.1 {139, 9). s6 ap_m must be read as s5 'p_m since a must here be metrically elided (21 a; p. 465, 17, 3). On apsv /Inter see p. 450, 2 b [where apsviantal_ should be corrected to a psvainta.h], vidhat6: dat. of advantage (p. 814, B 1); on the accent see p. 458, 11, 3. vasudh6y_ya: dat. of purpose, ibid., B 2. vi bh_ti : here Apam napat is thought of as the terrestrial Agni appearing on the sacrificial altar.

8 y_ apsd _, _dcin_, d_iviena

A A. A A .

],Vho 4n the wa_ers, with bright divinity, holy, eter_zaZ, widcly shi_es forth : as offslwots of hfm ofl_er beings and 2lants propagate themselv_ w_th_roge_y.

.rtavajasra urwya wbhat, : A A _ . vaya id anya bhuvanam asya .. pr_ jfiyante virddha_ ca pra_abhih. .

_icin_ d_ivyena : = divi_e brightness. rtava: note that in the _ Padapa.tha the orioinal short a is restored (cp. i. 160, 1}. ray's : other beings are his offshoots because he produced them ; cp. 2 d : vi_v_ni bhdvanfi jajfina. prajabhm : cp. ii. 33, 1, pr_ j_yemahi "_ " . . pra3abhi .h.

74

AP._.M NAP&T

[ii. 35,9

9 Ap_m. n_p_d _ hi _sth_d upSstha .m jihm_nAm, firdhv6 vidydta.m v_s_na_., t_sya jy6.s.tha.m mah_manam " " v_hantir, hiranyavarnfi.h pgri yanti yah-

The Son of Waters lms occupied the lal_ of the lrrone (waters), (himself) upright, clothing himsdf in lightnirff]. .Bearing his highest greatness, golden-hued, the swift streams flow around (him).

..

The lightning Agni is again described in this stanza. 3xhmanam firdhvfi.h: these words .Lare_ in c6ni;l'ast; cp. i. 95, 5 of Agni: .. vardhate . . . _su jihmanam firdhvg.h . . . upgstho he grows in them, u2aright in the lap of the larone, ttlsya mahxmanam his greatness -- him tlm great one. hiran.yavarnfia : because he is clothed in lightning, pgri yanti: cp. 3aand 4b. yahvls : the meaning of the word yahvg, though it occurs often, is somewhat uncertain: it may be great (Naighan._uka, Sayana), or swift (Roth), or young (Geldner).

_I_iT ___ BL_ _'ILEeI_: t

-'SJxiT_I _lXl_ I _: I _'(T.I _T _

I0 hlranyarfipah., _ hlran.yasam.d_.g; Ap_. ngpAt s6d u hlranyav_rna.h; hirany_yat pgri y6ner niot_dyfi, hiran.yada dadati gnnam asmai.

He is of golden form, of gol&n aspect; this Son of Waters is of golden hue; to him (ooming))%m a golden womb, after he has sat down, the givers of gold give food.

In this stanza the terrestrial Agni is described. He is spoken of as 'golden' because of the colour of his flames, s_d: 48a. pgri as a prp. here governs the abl. (176, 1 a). The golden soume of Agni

ii. 11] SS,

APA.M

NAP._T

75

may be the sun, as Durga thinks; thus the solar deity Savitr is spoken of as distinctively golden (cp. i. 85); but hirany_ya y6ni may = hiranyagarbh (x. 121, 1) at the creation, when Agni was produced from the waters (x. 121, 7). S_tyana wishes to supply r_jate after ni_dya = having sat down shines. This is quite unnecessary; it is more natural to take c and d as one sentence, nis._dya ,_ferring to asmai : to Idm, after he l_as sat down, tt_eg give (cp. 210). Note that the Pada text shortens the final vowel of nis_dyK (cp. 164, 1). hiranyad&s: that is, those who give gold as a sacrificial fee, the patrons of the sacrifice. In a hymn in praise of the daks.in_ the sacrificial fee (x. 107, 2) it is said hiranyad& amrtatv_m bhajante the givers of gold 9artake of immortality, dadati : 8. pl. pr. act. of dft give (p. 125, f. n. 4). _nnam : the oblation (cp. 11 d).

11 t_d asyanikam_ u.t_ c_tl nama_ apiela .m vardhate n_ptur ap&m. yKm indhKte yuvatya.h sm itth_ hlranyavarn.am: ghrt_m _nnam asya.

_IWatface of his and the dear secret name of the Son of Waters grow. Of him, w]wm, goldencoloured, the maidens kindle thus, ghce is the food.

_n_kam : the flaming aspect of Agni seen at the sacrifice, apfcyb.m : secret; cp. gdhyam c_ru n_ma the dear secret name of Soma (ix. 96, 16) ; the secret _w_mco/the Son of Waters _rows means that the sacrificial Agni, under his secret name of Son of Waters, grows in the waters, cherished by them ; another way of expressing what is said in 4 and 7. The cadence of b is irregular, the last syllable but one being short instead of long (cp. p. 440}. yuvatAyas: the waters (cp. 4 a). s_ma : the prp. after the vb. (p. 468, 20). gh!;t_tm _nnam asya : cp. ghrtfinixnik in 4 d and subhv finnam-atti in 7 b.

76

APA.M

NAPAT

[ii. _, n

The general meaning of the stanza is: Agni, who in the hidden form of Ap_.m Nap_t is nourished in the waters, is at the sael_fice fed with ghee.

r_m _mf_':,

m-_:, _

i_

I_:_:,

12 asm_i bahfin_m avam_ya s_khye yajfigir vidhema n_mas_ havirbhi.h : s_.m s_nu m_xjmi; didhisami bilmair ; d_dh_mi _nnai.h; p_ri vanda .rgbh_ .h.

To him the nearest friend of many we offer worship with sacririces, homage, oblations : r rub brioht (his) back; I suirloort(him) with shavings; I su2xl_ly(him) with food; I. extol (him) with stanzas.

avam_ya: lit. the lowest, that is, the nearest; bah_n_m (accent, p. 458, 2 a): of many {gods). In iv. 1, 5 Agni is invoked as avamg and n_di.s.tha nearest; and in AB. i. 1, 1 Agni is called the lowest (avatar) of the gods (while Vi.snu is the highest param_), , because A he is always with men as the terrestrial fire. sam. marjmi: ep. marmrjy_mgn_s in 4 b ; on the accent cp. i. 85, 9 c. The prp. s_m may be supplied with the other two following verbs, didh_fimi : pr. ds. of dh_ put ; accented as first word of a new sentence, bilmais : with _havings, to make the newly kindled fire flame up. _nnais: with oblations, chtdhfiani: pr. of dhl_lm_t.

ii. 85, 14]

APX.M NAP.&T

77

13 s_ _. v._s._janayat t_su g_rbha.m; s_ im _ifiur dhayati; t_.m rihanti; s5 'p_m. n_p_d _nabhiml_tavary. o any_syeveh_ tanfia vivesa.

lie, the bull, generated in them that germ ; he, as a child, sucks them ; tIwy Mss him ; he, the Son of Waters, of unfaded colour, works here with the body of another.

In a and b Apam napat reproduces himself in tile waters; in c and d he appears as the sacrificial fire on earth, im anticipates g*trbham ; him, that is, a son. t_su : in the waters, as his wives. im in b = them, the waters, who here are both the wives and mothers of Apa.m napat, Z dhayati: cp. 5 d. rihanti: lit. lick, as a cow the calf. s5 apam: here the a, though written must be dropped after o, as in 7 c. _nabhimlata-var.nas: he is as bright here as in the waters; cp. hiranyavar_.as in 10 b ; on the Sandhi, cp. note on i. 1, 9 b. any_sya ira : of one who seems to be another, but is essentially the same. ih_: on earth, in the form of the sacrificial Agni.

14 asmin pad6 param6 tasthiv_mtlim stationed in this highest sam, Iolace, shining for ever with un. adhvasm_bhir vfitv_ha didiv_m. - dimmed (rays), the Waters, bringing sam, thee as food to (their) son, swift, J. ape, naptre ghyt_m_nnam v_h- themselves fly around with their anti.h, robes. svay_m _tkai.h yahv_l_ p_ri diyanti

pad_ param6 : in the abode of the aerial waters, adhvasmt_bhis : a substantive has to be supplied : flames or rays ; cp. 4 c, _nlc_-61ahil_

78

AP._.M

NAPAT

[ii. 35, 14

_ikvabhir didaya, _ _ n_ptre: apam is omitted because apas immediately precedes. _tkais : the meaning of this word is not quite certain, but it most probably means garment; the commentators give several senses. The expression perhaps implies that the waters cover him up for protection or concealment, p_ri diyanti (di fly) ; cp. p_ri yanti in 4 b and 9 d, and p_ri tasthur in 3 d.

__-_

__

__'_:

_1_r_ I _v_i _

i _'_.1IVif-_11

15 _y_.msam, Agne, suk.sitim j_n_ya ; t[y_msam u maghtivadbhya.h suvrktim : v_va.m tdd bhadrfi.m yt[d tivanti
A

I have bestowed, 0 Agni, safe dwelling on the _eo_le ; I have also bestowed a song of _raise on the _alrons : au_icious is all tltat the gods favour. We would, with strong sons, speak aloud at divine worship.

deva.h, brht[d vadema vidt[the

suwra.h,

L.

fiy_ .msam : 1. s. s ao. of yam. Agne : the sacrificial Agni is here addressed, jtin_ya: on (our)_eol_le, by means of this hymn. suvrktim: a hymn that will produce the fulfilment of their wishes. bhadrtim: if a hymn finds favour with the gods, it will produce blessings, vadema : the poe_ desires this also as a reward for his hymn. The final hemistieh also occurs at the end of ii. 28 ; and the last Pada is the refrain of twenty-three of the forty-three hymns of the second Ma.n.dala.

MITRI
The association of Mitra with Varu.na is so intimate that he is addressed alone in one hymn only (iii. 59). Owing to the scantiness of the information supplied in that hymn his separate character appea_ somewhat indefinite.

iii. I] _9,

_ITRA

79

Uttering his voice, he marshals men and watches the tillers with unwinking eye. He is the great _ditya who marshals, y_.tayati, the people, and the epithet yitay_j-jana arrayi_g men together appears to be peculiarly his. Savit.r (i. 35) is identil_ed with Mitra because of his laws, and Vis..nu (i. 154) takes his three steps by the laws ofMitra : statements indicating that Mitra regulates the course of the sun. Agui, who goes at the head of the dawns (that is to say, is kindled before dawn), produces Mitra, and when kindled is MiCra. In the Atharvaveda, Mitl_ at sunrise is contrasted with Varun.a in the evening, and in the Brahman.as Mitra is connected with day, Varun.a withnight. The conclusion from the Vedic evidencethatMitra was a solar deity, iscorroboratedy the Avestaand by Persianreligion n general, b i where Mithraisundoubtedly sun-god a god of light a or specially connected with thesun. The etymology of the name isuncertain, ut itmust originally b have meant 'ally' 'friend or ',fortheword oftenmeans 'friend' the RV., in and the AvesticMithra is the guardianof faithfulness.s the kindly A natureof the god isoftenreferred in theVeda, the term must in the to beginning have been appliedto the sun-godin hisaspectof a benevolent power of nature.

iii. 59.

Metre:

Tristubh,

1-5 ; GRyatri_

6-9.

ml-m-

1 Mitr6 Mitr6 Mitri.h

j_n_n yRtayati bruv_n. 6 ; dRdhRra prthiv_m utA k.r.s.t_r _imi.s_bhi gh.rt_vaj cas..to : ju-

Mitra s#ealdng stirs men ; Mitra SUl_orts earth and heave_; Mitra regards the _veo2plewith unwinking offer the oblation eye : to _itra with ghee.

d_m; Mitr_ya havy_m hota.

y_tayati: stirs to activity, bruvRnas: by calling, t.hat is, arousing them; cp. what is said o.f Savitr: ' who makes all beings hear him by his call' (v. 82, 9) and ' he stretches out his arms that

80

MITRA

[iii. 59, 1

all may hear him' (ii. 38, 2). Sayana interprets the word as being -praised or making a noise. Some seho]ars take the pt. with Mitres in file sense of he who calls himself Mitra, but this in my opinion is in itself highly improbable, while this construction cannot be shown to exist in the RV., and even later seems only to occur when the name immediately precedes, i.e. Mitr6 bruv_nh.h. This Pada oeeurs slightly modified in vii. 36, 2 as j_na.m ca Mitr6 yatati bruv_n_.h, d_dh_ra : pf. = pr. ; p. 342 a (ep. 139, 9) ; note that the red. syllable of this pf. is never shortened in the Pada text (ep. i. 154, 4). dy_tm: ace. of dy6 (102, 3). _nimisK: inst. of li,-nimi_; it iS charaetelSstie of Mitra and Varun.a to regard men with unwinking eye. ca.s.to: 3. s. of eaks. ; on the Sandhi see 66 B 2 a. juhota : 2. pl. ipv. irr. strong form occurring beside the regular juhut_ (p. 144, B 3 _).

2 pr_ sG, Mitra, m_rt6 astu pr_yasvan, y_is ta, _ditya, _iksati vrat6na. n_ hanyate, n_ jiyate tu6to : nCtinam _,m. e '_noty _,ntito n_ h durat,

.Let that mortal offering oblations, 0 Mitra, be pre-eminent who .pays obeisance to thee, 0 _iditya, according to (thy) ordinance. He who is aided by thee is no_ slain nor vanquished: trouble reaches him neither from near nor from fa_;

tv6tas : tva must often be read as tua ; tu6tas is therefore more natural than the prosodical shortening {p. 437 a 4) of t3rti-_tas. The fourth Plida has one syllable goo many as written in the Samhi_a text. By dropping the a-after o the correct number of syllables is obtained, bu_ the break (-- _) remains quite irregular (p. 440_ _ B).

iii. _9, 5]

MITRA

81

_:_ __il
_ A

-_,r___i, V--_,_:, __K, _

Free from disease, delighting in the sacred food,/b'm-_need on the expanse of earth, abiding by the ordinance of the .4diOa, may we remain in the good will of Mitra. is n., varim_n,

3 anamlvasa i.lay_ m_danto, mit_jflavo v_rimann _ prthirye, , b AdityJtsya vratgm upaksiy_nto, vayg .m Mitrgaya sumatgu sigma,

vgriman : loe. (90, 2) with _ ; note that vgriman m. (p. 453, 9 e). Adity_sya : that is, of Mitra.

_ _1___-_*v:l _I_ _ ,_-

_r_, _:, __T__ ,_m:_ _, T_K_ _'!'_ _F _ _F-_O_,

This Mitra, adorable, most 1_roloitious, a king wielding fair sway, has been born as a dis.poser : may we remain in the goodwill of him the lwly, in his aus2aicious good graces.

4 ay_m. Mitr6 namasia.h su_@vo, A .... A raja su_.atr6 ajams.ta vedh_.h : t_sya vay_m sumat_u yaj_iyasya, _pi bhadr6 saumanas6 sigma,

[email protected]: 3. s.A. is ao. of jan. vedh_s: that is, as a wise moral ruler ; on the dec. see 83, 2 a. _tpi : to be taken as a verbal prp. with as be.

I_I

(l

82

MITRA

[iil. 59,

5 maham _dity6 n_masopas_dyo y_tay_jjano g.rn.at6 su_6va.h: t_sm_ ot_t p_nyatam_ya jd.s.tam agn_u Mitr_ya havir _ juhota,

The great Aditya, to be a_,vroached with homage, stirring men, to the singer most 2aro_vitious : to him most higldy to be _raised, to _litra, offer in fire this acc_table oblation.

maham : 89. y_tay_jjanas : on the accent of governing cds. see p. 455b. g.rnat6: dat. of pr. pt. of g.r sing; accent, p. 458, 8. jti.s.tam : a pp. ofju.s enjoy, with shift of accent when used as an adj, meaning welcmne (cp. p. 884). juhota : cp. note on 1 d.

6 Mitr_sya earsa.nidh._to, _vo dev_sya sfinasi, dy_mn_m oitr_ravastamam.

Of.Mitra, the god who su21oorts the folk, the favour brings gain, (his) wealth brings most brilliant fame.

carsanidh._tas : the Pada text restores the metrically lengthened short vowel of cars.ant. -dh._t6 'vo: p. 465, 17, 8; cp. note on i. 1, 9 b. citrtL_ravastamam : see note on i. 1, 5 b.

7 abhl y6 mahin_ diva.m Mitt6 babh_va sapr_th_ ._ abhi _r_vobhi.h prthiv_m :

Mitra the renowned, who is superior to heaven by his greatness, superior to earth by his glories :
J.

abhl bhf_ surpass takes the aec. mahin_ for mahimn: 90, 2. divam: acc. of 4yd, 99_ 5 : cp. dy6_ 102, 8. babll_va: the pf.

iii. 5D,"9]

B .I_HASPATI

83

here is equivalent to apr. ; p. 342 a. In e babh_va must be supplied with tim repeated prp. ; ep. note on it. 33, 2. The cadence of e is irregular : - v _, - instead of ,-'- _, - ; ep. p. 438, 3 a.

_l __ qll_._l_i_l';_

II

_1: I __WI-_I _W_

I _I'_

II

8 Mitr_ya phSea yemire jGna abhi.s.tiavase : s_ devon vi_v_n bibharti,

To Mitra, strong to help, the rice peoples submit : he su2ports all the gods.

phSea jhnR.h: the five peoples, here = all mankind, yemire : 3. pl. pf. )x. of yam (see p. 150, f. n. 1). bibharti: 3. s. pr. P. of bh.r. vi_vRn : this is the regular word for all in the RV. : its place begins to be taken by s_lrva in late hymns. The general meaning of the stanza is that gods and men are dependent on Mitra. The cadence of e is trochaic instead of iambic (see p. 439 a).

9 Mitr6,dev_.su aydsu, j_nRya v.rkt_barhi.se i.sa i.s_vratR akah.,

2_litra, amo_g gods and mortals, l_asiarovided food, according to the ordinances he desires, for the man whose sacrificial grass is _read.

i.s_-vratfis: a By. agreeing with i.sas, food regulated by the ordinances which Mitra desires, i.e. to be eaten according to fixed rules.

B.I HASPXTI
This god is addressed in eleven entire hynms, and in two othe_ co_jointly with Indra. He is also, but less frequently, called Br_hma_an p_ti, ' Lord of prayer', the doublets alternating in the same hymn. His physical features are few: he is sharp-horped and blue-backed; golden-coloured o2

8_

B .RHASPATI

[iv. 5o, 1

and ruddy. He is armed with bow and arrows, and wields a golden hatchet or an iron axe. He has a car, drawn by ruddy steeds, which slays the goblins, bursts open the cow-stalls, and wins the light. Called the father of the gods, he is also said to have blown fo_h their births like a blacksmith. Like Agni, he is both a domestic and a brahman priest. He is the generator of all prayers, and without him sacrifice does not succeed. His song goes to heaven, and he is associated with singers. In several passages he is identified with Agni, from whom, however, he is much oftener distinguished. He is often invoked with Indra, some of whose epithets, such as magh_van bou_tlful and vajrin wielder of the bolt he shares. He has thus been drawn into the Indra myth of the release of the cows. Accompanied by his singing host he rends Vala with a roar, and drives out the cows. In so doing he dispels the darkness and finds the light. As regards his relation to his worshippers, he is said to help and protect the pious man, to prolong life, and to remove disease. B bhasp_ti is a purely Indian deity. The double accent and the parallel name Br_Lmanas pAti indicate that the first member is the genitive of a noun b._h, fL'om the same root as bl_hman, and that the name thus means ' Lord of prayer'. He seems originally to have represented an aspect of Agni, as a divine priest, presiding over devotion, an aspect which had already attained an independent character by the beginning of the Rigvedic period. As the divine brahmn priest he seems to have been the prototype of Brahm_,, the chief of the later Hindu triad. iv. 50. Indra is invoked with Brhaspati in 10 and 11.

Metre : Tri_tubh

; 10 Jagati.

I y_s

tast_mbha _nt_u

s_has_

vi

jm_

B.rhaspati who occupying three seats with roar has prol_ed asunder with might the ends of the ear_l_

B_hasp_tis

trisadhasth6

r_vena,

t_m. pratn_sa _ayo d_dhi_n_l_ put6 vipr_, dadhire mandr_ihvam.

him, the char_ni_g.t_ngued, the ancient seers, the wise, pondering, placed at their head.

iv. 50, 2]

B_HASPATI

85

vi tast_mbha, the prp. here foUows the vb. and is separated from it by an intervening word: p. 468, 20. jm_s: gem of jma (97, 2). Pronounce jm_ ant_m (p. 437 a 4). Cosmic actions like that expressed in a are ascribed to various deities. B._hasp_tis : note that this cd. is not analysed in the Pada text, while its doublet Br_hmanas p_ti is treated as two separate words, tris.adhasth_s : refers to the three sacrificial fires and is a term predominantly applied to Agni, cp. v. 11, 2: pur6hitam Agnim. n_.ras tri.sadhasth_ s_m idhire men have kindled Agni as their domestic priest in his tri_le seat ; on the accent see p. 455, 10 c a. rven.a : referring to the loud sound of the spells uttered ; the word is especially used in connexion with the release of the cows from Vala ; cp. 4 c and 5 b. put6 dadhire : appointed their Purohita, a term frequently applied to Agni, who is also continually said to have been chosen priest
hymen.

_j-_ __ _r _'_" t

,_

I _'__'__'__'__'__'_w __ __:_ _','__

'
2 dhun6taya.h supraket_m madante B._ha__pate, abhi y_ has tatasr$ p._santa.m srpr_m fidabdham farv_m. ; B._haspate, r_k.satad asya ySDim.

'

'

T'Trlw with resounding gait, rejoicing, 0 Brhas_ati, for us have attacked the con_icuous, variegated, extensive, uninjured herd : OB.rhasl_ati, 2rotect its dwelli,g.

This is a very obscure stanza, the allusions in which can only be conjectured. The subject of a-e is not improbably the ancient priests, mentioned in 1 c, who with the aid of Brhaspati recaptured the cows confined in the stronghold of Vala- mAdantas: being exhilarated with Soma. tatasr_ : 3. pl. pf. )_. of tams shake, p_.santam: perhaps in allusion to the dappled cows contained in it. supraket_m: easy to recognize, i.e. by their lowing, cp. i. 62, 3,

86

B .RHASPATI

[iv. _,

.Brhaxpati fou_d the cows) the heroes roared (v_.va_ianta) with the ruddy kine. The fourth Pada is a prayer to B.rhaspati to protect the recovered kine. Pada c is a Dvipada hemistich : see p. 443 a. r_k.eat_t : 2. s. ipv. of rak.s : on the accent see p. 467 A c.

8 B._haspate, ya param_ par_v_d, _ta _ ta .rtasp._o ni .sodu.h. tfithya.m kh_t_ avat_ _dridugdha m_idhva.h4cotanti _{_m. abhltovizap-

0 B.rhas_ati, that which is the .farthest dislance, fi_m thence (coming) those that cherish the rite have seated tl_'mseh,es for thee. _'or thee s_rings that have been dug, pressed out with stones, d_p superabundance of mead on all sides.

_ta _ nl s.edur : cp. it. 35, 10 e. .rtasp._as : perhaps the gods ; or the ancient seers mentioned in 1 c and perhaps in 2 : they have come from the farthest distance and have seated themselves at the Soma libation offered to thee. khat_s... _dridugdJaas : two figures alluding to the streams of Soma, ivhich flows in channels and is pounded with stones, m_dhva_: on this form of the gen. see p. 81, f. n. 12.

ion,
4 B_hasp_tih mano pratham_.m j_ya.B.q'hassati when first being born .from the great right in the highest

iv. 50, 5]

B.RHASPATI

87

mah6 jy6ti_.a.h, param6 vioman, sapt_asyas tuvijfit5 r_vena vi sapt_ra_mir adhamat t_mam sL

heaven, seven.mouthed, high-born, with his roar, seven-rayed, blew asunder the darkness.

mah_s: ab]. of m_h, agreeing with jy6ti.sas (cp. 201 A 1). The Sun is probably lneant ; cp. it. 35, 10 c. sapt_syas in iv. 51, 4 is an epithet of _gira (in iv. 40, 1 B!'haspati is Aflgiras_) ; it is parallel to sapt_ra_mi, an epithet applied also once to Agni and once to Indra. r_yena: cp. 1 b and 5 b. vi adhamat: ipf. of dham. Agni and Sarya are also said to dispel the darkness.

5 s_ sus..tfibl_, s_ ._kvat_ gan.6na val_.m ruroja phalig_.m r_vena: B._hasp_tir usriyfi havyas_da.h k_nikradad v_va_atZv lid _jat.

1-Iewiththewell-praising,jubi_an_ throng burst o_en with roar the enclosing cave: .Brhaspati bellowing drove out the lowing ruddy kine that sweeten the oblation.

gan. 6na : the Afigirases, who in i. 62, 8 are associated with Indra and B.rhaspati in the finding of the cows: B._ha_p_tir bhin_cl _drim, vide1 g_l_: a_m usriy_bhir v_va_anta n_ira.h .B.rhas_ati cleft _he mountain, he found the cows; the heroes (: the Afigirases) roared with the +_tddy Mne. phaligtim: the exact meaning of this word does not clearly appear from its four occurrences ; but it must have a sense closely allied to receptacle : e.g. viii. 32, 25, y_ udn_.h phalig_m bhint_n, ny_k sindhfi_r av_rjat who (Indra) cleft the recezvtacle of water (and) discharged the streams downwards; in three passages it is spoken of as being rent or pierced, and twice is associated with Yala; and in the Naighan.tuka it is given as a synonym of megha cloud, r_ven.a: with reference both to Brhaspati and the line (cp. 5 d). havya-s_da_: that is, with milk. kGnilrxadat : intv. pr. pt. of krand ; ep. 173, 8 ; 174 b. v_vafiatis : intv. pr. pt. of va_ (cp. 174).

88

B.RHASPATI.

[iv. 50, 6

6 ev_ pitr_ vi_v_doviys v._s_.e yaj2i_ir vidhema, n_mas_,havlrbhil_., Bfhaspate, supraj_ vir_vanto
_ .t

Then to the father that belongs to all the gods, the bull, we wo_hl" offer worshigo with sacrifices, obei-. sanee, and oblations. 0 B.rhas_ati, with good offspring and heroes we would be lords of wealth.

vay_m sifima p_ttayo rayanam,

ev_: with final vowel metrieally lengthened. The sense of the 1)c]. here is : such being the case (cp. 180). pitr$ : B!'haspati. The term is applied to Agni, Indra, and other gods. vir_vantas : that is, possessing warrior sons, ep. i. 1, 8 c. vayhm: this line occurs severhl times as the final Pada of a hymn ; cp. viii. 48, 13.

.L._

7 sd id rada pr_tijany_ni

vi_v_

That Icing with his, imj_ulse and his heroism overcomes all hoshTe forces, who keeps B.rhas2ati wdlnourished, honours him, and t_raises him as receiving the first (portion of the offering).

_ds.mena tasth_v abhl viriona, B_hasp_tim. y_17 stibht_tam hibhfirti, valgfiy_iti, v_ndate pfarvabh_jam.

abhl: the prp., as often, here follows the vb. mibh.rtam bibhlirti : lit, cherishes him as well.cherished (predicative). All three verbs depend on y_s, though the last two, as beginning a Pads and a sentence, would even otherwise be accented, valgfiy_ti: note that this denominative is treated as a cd. in the Pada text (cp. 175 A 1). pftrvabh_jam : predicative.

iv. 5o, 9]

B_HASPATI

89

8 s_ it k_.eti sddhita 6kasi sv6, & tasm_ Jig pinvate vi_vadfinma ; tasmai vi_a.h svayam ev_ hamante, yasmin brahrn_ r_jani p_va ati.

That king dwells well-established in his own abode, to him the consecrated food always yields abundance; to him his subjects bow down of their own accord, with whom the ]priest has ]precede_we.

ks oti: from 1. k_.i ]possess or dwell, sd-dhita: this form of the pp. of dh_ is still preserved as the last member of cds. (otherwise hita); the word is explained as su-hita in the AB. 6kasi sv$: cp. sv_ dame in i. 1, 8 c. i lA : explained as food (annam) in AB. viii. 20, 7, and as earth (bhfimi) by Sayana. yaamin r_jani: the loc. here = in the _vresence of whom, in whose case ; the antecedent is hero put in the relative clause, while in 7 a it accompanies the corr. (sa id r_ja), p_rva Sti: with reference to this line the AB. viii. 26, 9 remarks, purohitam evaitad f_ha thus o_e calls him a Purohita; cp. also AB. viii. 1, 5: brahma khalu vai ksatrgt paStrvam the Brahman. a cerlainly 2recedes the .Ks.atriya.

9 aprat_to jayati sam dh_n_ni pr_tijany_ai ut_ y_ s_janyfi, avasylive y6 variva.h k.rn6ti brahm_u0 rata, tam avanti dez._ va.h. -.

Unresisted he wins wealth both bdonging to his adversaries and to his own _eoffie. The king wlw for the _riest de_irh_g (his) helJ_ ]procures _rosperity, him the gods help.

90

B .RHASPATI

[iv. _0, 9

After the statement in 7 that the king who honours Brhaspati prospers, it is added in 8 and 9 that the king who honours the Brahman, the counterpart among men of B!'haspati, also prospers. jayati s_m: prp. after the vb. (p. 285 f). dh_nani : he wins wealth both abroad and at home. avasy_ve--avanti: both words from the same root av: the gods help the king who helps the Brahman.

II 10 ][ndra6 ca s6mam pibatam, Brhaspate, asmin yajfi_ mandasana, _ vrsan... vasfi : v_.m vi_antu indava.h su_bh_ivo ; asm6 rayim sGrvaviram ni yachatam. 0 Indra and 33.rhas2ati, drink the Soma, rejoicing at this sacrifice, 0 ye of mighty wealth ; let the invigorating drops enter you two; bestow on us ricltes accoml_anied allogether w_th sons.

:[ndra6 ca: nora. for voc. (196ca; cp. _ca, p. 228, 1 and la). A pibatam : 2. du. ipv. of p_ drink', mandasana : ao. pt. of mand = mad. v._san-vasf_: here v_..an = migldy, great ; _tyana explains the word as if it were a governing cd. (189 A), the normal form of which would, however, be var_n-vasu (189 A 2; cp. p. 455 b). Note that in the Pada text the cd. is first marked as PragT.hya with iti and then analysed; also that in the analysis the first member here appears not h_ its pause form v.r.san (65) but in its Sandhi form with n. as not final, raylm, s_irvaviram: that is, wealth with offspring consisting of sons only: a frequent prayer (cp. i. 1, 8 c). yachatam: 2. ipv. pr. of yam. Here we have the intrusion of

iv. so,

11]

B .RHASPATI

91

a Jagatz stanza in a Tris.tubh hymn (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7). In this and the following stanza Indra is associated with B!'haspati, as ill the whole of the preceding hymn, iv. 49.

11 B_haspata, Ind"ra, vfrdhatam. 0 .B.rhas_vatiand Indra, cause na.h ; us to prosper ; let that benevolence s_c_ s_ vRm sumatir bhfitu of.yours be with us. .Favoyr (our) asmd. _rayers ; arouse rewards ; weaken avis.tm, dh_yo ; jigrt_m pdra .m- the hostilities of foe and rivals. dhir ; jajast_m ary6 vands_m Rr_tih.. B._haspata Indra: ,contrary to the general rule the second voc. is here unaccented (p. 465, 18 a) ; this is doubtless because the two are here treated as a dual divinity, as in the preceding hymn (iv..49), in every stanza of which they are invoked as IndrR-B.rhaspati. Inclra must be pronounced trisyllabically (cp. p. 15 d). vftm gen. (109 a). bhfitu : 3. s. Jpv. root ao. of bhfi. asmd : loc. with s_c_ (177, 5) and (as in 10 d) Prag!'hya (26 c). avis..t_m : 2. s. du. ipv. of the is ao. of av favour (145, 5). ji .g_im: 2. du. red. ao. of g.r _vaken; accented becausQ beginning a new sentence (p. 467 b). dhiyas.., ptiram, dhis : these words often appear side by side and in contrast: the former theh meaning prayers for gifts, the latter the bestowal (d.hi from dh_ bestow) ofl_lenty (pfiram an ace. ; cp. the Padapitt.ha), ptiram, dhTs here is also opposed to _rRtis (fit. lack of liberality) in d. jajast_m: 2. du. Jpv. pf. of jas. ary_s: gen. of ari (99, 8) ; cp. note on H. 12, 4. The genitives ary_s and vandsftm are co-ordinate and dependent on _r_t_s ; this appears from various parallel passages, as ary6 _r_til_. hostitities of the:foe (vi. 16, 97);

9o.

B .RHASPATI

[iv. 50, n

agh_ny ary6, vands_m _x_taya.h ev// deeds of tt_e foe, hostilities of ivals (vii. 83, 5) ; abhltim ary6, vantis_m. _v_msi the onset of the .foe, the might of rivals (vii. 21, 9 d). 11 a = vii. 97, 9d.

usis
The goddess of Dawn is addressed in about twenty hymns. The personification is but slight, the physical phenomenon always being present to the mind of the poet. Decked in guy attire like a dancer, clothed in light, she appears ifi the east and unveils her charms. Rising resplendent as from a bath she comes with light, driving away the darkness and removing the black robe of night. She is young, being born again and again, though ancient. Shining with a uniform hue, she wastes away the life of mortals. She illumines the ends of the sky when she awakes; she opens the gates of heaven; her radiant beams appear like herds of cattle. She drives away evil dreams, evil spirits, and the hated darkness. She discloses the treasures concealed by darkness, and distributes them bountifully. She awakens every living being to motion. When Usas shines forth, the birds fiy up from their nests and men seek nourishment. Day by day appearing at the appointed place, she never infringes the ordinanee of nature and of the gods. She renders good service to the gods by awakening all worshippers and causing the sacrificial fires to be kindled. She brings the gods to drink the Soma draught. She is borne on a shining car, drawn by ruddy steeds or kine, which probably represent the red rays of morning. U.sas is closely associated with the Sun. She has opened paths for Sfrya to travel ; she brings the eye of the gods, and leads on the beautiful white horse. She shines with the light of the Sun, with the light of her lover. S_rya follows her as a young man a maiden ; she meets the god who desires her. She thus comes to be spoken of as the wife of SOrya_ But as preceding the Sun, she is occasionally regarded as his mother ; thus she is said to arrive with a bright child. She is also called the sister, or the elder sister, of Night (x. 127), and their names are often conjoined as a dual compound (u.sas/i-n_ktt_ and nfJ_to.saelt). She is born in the sky, and is therefore constantly called the 'daughter of Heaven '. As the sacrificial fire is kindled at dawn, Usas is often associated with hgni, who is sometimes called her lover. Us.as causes Agni to be kindled, and Agni goes to meet the shining Dawn as she approaches. She is also often connected with the twin gods of early morning, the A_vins_vii. 71). When the A_vins' car is yoked, the daughter of the sky is born. 'They are awakened by her, accompany her, and are her friends.

iv. 51, 1]

U.SAS

93

Us.asbrings the worshipper wealth and children, bestowing protection and long life. She eonfel_srenown and glory on all liberal benefaetol_ of the poet. She is characteristically bountiful (maghbni). The name of Us.as is derived from the root vas, to shine, forms of which are often used with reference to her in the hymns in which she is invoked.

iv. 51.

Metre : Tri.s.tubh.

1 id_m u tyGt purut_ma .m pur_st_ jy6tis t_maso vayain_vad asth_t. nfan_i.m div6 dnhit_ro vibh_t_r g_tfim k_.navann Us._so j_n_ya,

This familiar, mostfrequent light in the east, with clea_'nesshas stood (forth) from the darkness. 2Vow may the Dawns, the daughters of the sky, shining afar, make a _ath
for ma_.

typed: see p. 297, 5. purut_imam: because appearing every morning ; hence U.s_sas the 29awns in d. t_imasas : abl. dependent on asthfit = _id asth_t. The word vayaima, though very frequently used, is still somewhat uncertain in meaning. The commentators explain it variously as m_rga road, prajfl_na cognition, and krmti beauty. Pischel favours the first of these. Sayana here explains vayfinavat as ' very beautiful or possessed of knowledge = showing everything '. It probably here means ' making the way clear', ep. g_taima in d. nfiuam: note that in the RV. this word always means now. div6 4uhit_ras : from the point of view of the daily recurrence of the phenomenon, Dawn is ph throughout this hymn. gattim : cp. vi. 64, 1: 'she makes all fair paths easy to traverse '. lq'oa, van: 3. pl. sb. ; explained by Saya.na as 3. pl. ipf. ind., akarvan.

94

US.AS

[iv. l, s

2 _sthur u citr_ Us_sa.h put,stUn, . o mlta lva sv_rav5 adhvardsu, vi ft vraj_sya t_maso du_r_ uch_ntfr avraff chticaya.h pav_k_.h. ,

The brilliant .Dawns have stood in the east, like posts set up at sacrifices. Shining they have unclosed the two doors of the pen of darkness, bright and puri fijing.

Us._sas : that is, each of the preceding Dawns and the present one. mit_s: pp. of mi fix. sv_ravas: that is, shining with ointment; cp. i. 92, 5: sv_ru.m n_ pd_o vid_the.su _fijaS, eitr_m div6 duhit_ bh_ndm a_ret the daughter of heaven has sl_read her brilliant beam, like one who at divine worship anoints the post, the ornament (of the sacrifice). Note that u in c is lengthened though followed by two consonants (p. 437 a 3). vraj_sya : a simile with ira omitted ; cp. i. 92, 4 ; g_vo n_ vraj_m vi Us_ avar t_ma.h .Dawn has u_wlosed thv darkness as the cows their stall, dv_r_ : the two folds of the door, the dual of dyer often being used thus. vi: to be taken with arran, 8. pl. root ao. of vT cover, uoh_intis : pr. pt. of 1. vas shine. huc_ya.h pRvak_l_ : these two adjectives very often appear in juxtaposition. On the pronunciation of pavak_ see p. 437 a.

_i_zl*ll"l/_l__

_'

'_lzlT'_ll":

I "dl_l': I _l',_'_f

8 uch_ntir ady_ mtayanta bhojan ' _hining to-day may the bounteous " "_ radhoddyaya U_so magh6m-l_. 1)awne stimulate the liberal to th_

iv. 51, 5]

U.SAS

95

aeitr_ ant_.h pan._yah, sasantu, _budhyamanf_s t_maso vimadhye.

giving .of weaTtl+. In obscurity ?et the niggards slee_, unwakening in the midst of darkness. by Sayana as an indicative :

citayanta : 8. pl. A. inj. ; explained prajS_payanti they instruct.

4 kuvlt sG, devi_ san_yo nt_vo v_ 2. . A yamo babhuy_l, U.saso, v5 ady: y_nf_ Nvagve, Ahgire, Dtt_agve s_p_mye, revati, revAd f_._iP

Should this be an old course or a new for you to-day, 0 divine .Dawns: (is it that) by which ye have shone wealth, ye wealthy ones, upon _Aravagva,Ai_gira, and .Da. gagva the seven-mouthed ?

babhftyCtt : op. pf. of bh5, accented on account of kuvit (cp. notes on ii. 85, 1.2). The general meaning is the hope that Dawn will bring wealth to-day as of old. Navagva, Afigiras, and Dagagva are the names of ancients associated with Indra in the release of the cows enclosed by the Panis and by Vala. The allusion in sapt_sye is uncertain; in iv. 50, 4 it is an epithet of Brhaspati, wire is also associated with the capture of the cows and may therefore be meant here. The meaning would then be: bring us wealth to-day as ye did to Navagva, Afigiras, Dagagva and B!.haspati. rovati rov_t :' these words are found connected in other passages also. fisa : 2. pl. pf. act. of 1. vas shine.

'., '___: _

_'_, _, ___:,_"m:_.rr-++: _ _ ..-_:,

_mmmpmtt _ '

'm__,+m-(, ,,+- +,:,m,

_+,'Tin:

96

U.SAS

[iv. 51, 5

5 yfiy_m hi, dovLr, .rtaydgbhir _vai.h paripray_tl_ bhfivan_ni sadye.h, prabodh_yantir, U.sasah., sas_ntam., dvip_ c_tus.p_c oar_th_ya jiv_m o

._br you, 0 goddessa%with your steeds yoked in due time, proceed around the worlds in one day, awakening, 0 Dawns, him who slee_s, the two.footed and the fourfooted living worZd, to nwtion.

paripray_th_: accented owing to hi; on the accentuaLion of verbal prepositions see p. 469 B a. prabodh_yant[s: cp. i. 92, 9, vi_vam j[v_m car_se bodh_yanti wakening every living sou_ to nwve. c_tusp_d: note that catdr when accented as first member of a cd. shifts its accent to the first syllable. This word, dvip_4 and jiv_m are all neuter.

6 kda svid asa.m y_y_ vxdhana n_n ? _dbha.m ytLc o_ranti, nfi vi jfifiyante

katam_ puram * vidadhdr .rbh_tchubhr_ Us_safi

z sad_.'_ir ajurya., h

Where, Fray, and which ancient one of them (was it) at which they (the gods) imposed the tasks of the R.bhus ? When the beaming dawns proceed on their shining course, they are not distinguished, alike, unaging.

_s_m: of the dawns, y_y: in a temporal sense-_ at whose time. vidadhtir: they, the gods, enjoined: this probably refers to the most distinctive feat of the _bhus, that of making one bowl into four; ep. i. 161, 2: 6ka.m camas_.m eatdra.h k.rgotana, tad vo dev_ abruvan 'make the Aone bowl four', that the gods said to you ; _ that was one of their vtdhana tasks. _tibham : cognate ace. mi vi jfL_yante _: they _ are always the same ; cp. i. 92, 10, pfina_..punar o. _ 2; 3ayamana puram samfm_m v_rnam abhi. _timbham_n_ bring

iv. 51, 8]

US.AS

97

born again and again, ancient of days, adorning herself with the same colour; whero dawn is, as usually, spoken of as a single goddess reappearing day after day, whereas ill this hymn many individual dawns that appear successively are referred to.

7 t_ gh_ t_ bhadr_ U.s_sa.h puJ. rasur, abhis.tldyumna rthj_tasaCya.h; J. yasu ij_nh.h _a_am_n ukth_i.h stuv_, chmsan, dr_vinam sady_ _pa.

Tlmse indeed, those Dawns have formerly been ausyicious, stvlendid in hellg,19unctually true ; at which t]_ strenuous sacrificer with recitations praising, chanting, has at once obtained wealth.

On purr with pf. see 213 A. ijan_s : pf. pt. A. of yaj sacrifice. _a_amnA : pf. pt. A. of _am labour, stuvAit eh_ .msan = stuvn + _msan (40, 1). The general moaning of the stanza is: former dawns have brought blessings to the sacrificer; may they do so now.

_r_ _ _t

_-_ _

_-_._ i _t _,'rh i_ __:

8 t_ _ earanti, saman_ pur_st_t, samfm_ta.h aaman_ paprathn_l_. .rt_ya dev_l_ s_tdaso budh_$., g_v_.m n_ s_rg_, U_o jarsnt_,
19@11 H

They ai_roach e_lually in the east, _yreading themselves equally from the same _lace. The goddesses waking from the seat of order, like herds of kine let loose, the Dawns are active.

98
A

U.SAS

[iv. 51, s

samana: always in the same way. sam_nat_s ; cp. i. 124, 8: praj_nat_ iva, n_ dido min_ti as one who knows (the way). she loses _ot her direction, rt_sya s_dasa.h: abl. dependent on budhfm_l_ (cp. 10) ; cp. i. 124, 3 ; rthsya p_nthfim tinv eti srtdhti she follows straight the joath of order, budhfin_s: ao. pt,, awaking (intr.), not = bodhayantyas wakening (trans.) according to Sayao.a ; when A. and without an object, budh is intr. ; cp. _bodhi has awoke, said of U.sas (i. 92, 11 ; iii. 61, 6; vii. 80, 2). gav_.m n_ sfixg_h. : ep. iv. 52, 5, pr_ti bhadr_ ad.rksata g_v_m s_rga n_ ras"m" aya.h the aus__icious rays (of dawn) have appeared like kine let loose, jarante : are awake = are active, are on the move (cp. _ earanti in a and 9 a, b) ; are praised (st_tyanto) according to Sayana.

e m____,__t__t___ __t _r_(v_,

_: ir_ _ i______l ____:i _'_t: I_t: I____ _

9 tot in nti eva saman_ saman_r, _mitavar0. a Ers_a_ caranti, g_thantir abhvam sitam., rdfiadbhi.h _ukr_s tanubha.h, fideayo, rue_
_ 2. shah,

Those Dawns even _ww equally the same, of unchanged colour, move on ; concealing the black monster, In'oht with gleaming forms, brilliant, beaming.

On the accentuation of nv @v_ see p. 450, 2b. _bhvam: ep. i. 92, 5, b_dhate k_n_m _bhvam she drives away the black monster (of A night), r6_adbhis: m. form irregularly agreeing with the f. tanubhm. Note that the Pads text does not separate the endings bhy_m, bhis, bhyas, su from f. stems in long vowels, nor of m. stems in a because the pure stem in these cases appears in an altered form, e. g. priy6bhis, but pit._ @bhis.

iv. 51, 11]

U.SAS

99

10 rayi .m, dive duhitaro, vibh_t_.h .A _ A prajavantam yachatasmasu, devi_.. 2. . . , slonadava.hpratlbudhyamana.h, suvh'iasya p_taya.h siama,

0 daughters of Heaven, do ye shini_g forth bestow on us, goddesses, wealth acco_:vanied by offs)rin.a. Awakb_g from our soft couch towards yo,, we would be lords era host of stro_g sons.

yachata: pr. ipv. of yam, here construed with the loc.; the usual case is the dat. (200 A 1). pratibddhyamanas : with _ and abl., cp. buclh_n_ with abl. in 8 c.

l 1 tad vo, dive duhitaro, vii_h_t_r dpa bruva, Usaso, yajii_ketu.h : vay_m si&ma ya_soj_nesu; tad Dy_u_ ca dhatt_m P.rthiv_ ca dev_.

l?or _h,2tI whose ba_mer is the sao'ifice, 0 daughlers of Heaven, implore you that shi_e forth, 0 Dawns: we would befamous among me_ ; let Heaven and the goddess ,Earth grant that.

vibh_t_r: to be taken with vaa tipa bruve: with two acc. (p. 304, 2). yajii_ketus: the singer thus describes himself; in i. 113, 19 the Dawn is called yajit_sya ketfi.h the signal of the sacrifice, ya_iso (accent, p. 453, 9 A a) j_ne.su : this phrase frequently occurs in prayers, vay_m: the poet having in b spoken in the sing. on his own behalf, now changes, as often, to the pl., so as to include the others who are present, dhatt_m : 3. du. of dha, accented, though not beginning a sentence, because of ca . . . ca (see p. 468/_). H2

100

AGNI

[v. ]1, :

AGNi
SeeIntroduction 1 onthen_,ture toi. ofAgni. v. 11. Metre: JagatL

_'-_ _

_'w: -st-+,

_w_._ _ r_,

_ _: ,'s_:, __-_-___

1 J_nasya gop_ ajanis..ta j_g.rvir Agni.h sud_l_a.h suwtaya n_vyasg, gh.rt_pratiko brhat_ divisp._'R dyum_d vi bhfi_i bharatdbhia.h _ici .h.
A

C-_mrdian of the _eople, watchful, most skilful, Agni has been born for renewed welfare. Butter-faced, bright, he shines forth brilliantly for the Bharatas with lofty_ heaventouching (flame).

gopas - 97, 2. ajanis.ta : is ao. of jan generate, su-d_l_.as : suwtaya :" final dat. (p. 314, B 2). n_vyase : a By. (p. 455ca). "_ dat. of cpv. of n_va new. gh.rt_-prat__kas : cp. y_sya pr_tikam _huta .mg .hV_na whose face is s'larinkled with butter (vii. 8, ]) as an analysis of the cd. b.rhat_t: supply tdjasa, bharatdbhyas: for the benefit of (p. 314, 1) the Bharatas, the tribe to which the seer belongs.

___r____ _ __: __ _

_,p_,__v_, _ i_:_r-#_, _ _-.-._ ___,, _:_ _ __:_ _-_ _

As ban_er of sacrifice, as first domestic priest, men have kindled Agni in the threefold abode. (Coming) on tl_same car with Indra

2 yajif_isya ketd.m, prathamG.m patrdhitam, Agnim n_ras, tri_aclh_sth6 sd_n idhi_o,

v. n. 3]

AGNI

101

_ndren.a dev_ih sax_tham, s_ barhi.si sldan ni h6t_ yaj_th_ya sukrgLtuh..

and fhe gods may that most wise Invoker sit down on the sacrificial grass for sacrifice.

kettim: in apposition to Agnim, in allusion t_"the smoke of _ sacrifice ; cp. viii. 44, 10, h6tfLram.., d]aftmketum.., ya_itanam kettim the Invoker, the smoke.bannered banner of sacrifices; cp. 3 d. pratham_m: first-appointed in order of time. pur6hitam': see i. 1, 1. n_ras: N. pl. of n._ (p. 91). tri-.sadhasth6: on the three sacrificial altars ; Sandhi 67 b. s_tm idhire : pf. of idh kindle ; have kindled and still kindle (cp. p. 342a). sar_tham: adv. governing :fndren.a and devis (cp. p. 309, 2). s_dan ni: the ipf. expresses that he sat down in the past when he became Purohita ; the prp. as often follows the verb (p. 468, 20). yaj_th_ya: final dat. (p.814, B 2).

3 _sam.m_?.toj[tyase m_tar6.h _dcir. mandr_.h kavlr lid atl.stho Viv_svata.h, ghlct6na tv_vardhayann, Agna f_huta, dhfun_s te kotfir abhavad divi _rit_h..

Uncleansed thou art born bright from thy two l:arents. Thou didst arise as the gladdening sage of Vivasva_t. "With butter they strengthened thee, 0 Agni, in whom the offerlng is _voured. Smoke be. came thy banner t/u_t reached to

thes_y.
_gsam.-m.rs.tas: pp. of m_j w/toe, opposed to _6cis, though uncleansed, yet bright, m_tr6s: abl. du. : the two fire-sticks, from which Agni is produced by friction. _id ati.s.thas : 3. s. ipf. of sth_ stand. Viv_lsvatas : gen. dependent on kavls ; the sage (a common designation of Agni) of Vivasvant, the first sacrificer, tv_: the

102

AGNI

Iv. 11, 3

caesura, which should follow this word (p. 442, 6), is here only apparently neglected because the following augment may be treated as dropped, avardhayan: that is, made the fire burn up with the ghee poured into it ; explained by _-huta. dhfim_s, &c. : affords an analysis of Agui's epithet dhfim_iketu (cp. note on 2 a). divi : ]oc. of the goa_p. 3"25b). Note the use of the imperfects as referring to past events (p. 345, B).

4 Agnir

no

yajfiGm

fipa vetu grh_-

Let Agni come straightway

_o

sadhuya, A_nlm. n_ro vi bharante gThe. Agnir dfit6 vahano. abhavad

o_r sacrifice. Men carry Agni Mther and thither in every house. Agni became the messenger; the carrier of oblations. In choosing Agni theg choose one who has the wisdom of a seer

dhavya-

Agnlm v.r_._n_ v.r_.ate kavikraturn.

vetu : 3. s. ipv. of vi. bharante : see note on bh.r, it. 33, 10 a. g.rhd-g.rhe : 189 C a. dfit&s : Agni is characteristically a messenger as an intermediary between heaven and earth, dhavyav_aanas : Sandhi, 54. vrnanas: pr. pt. A. of 2. v.r, choosiug Agni as their priest, v_.ate : 3. pl. pr. A of 2 v.r.

v. n, 6]

AGNI

103

5 tdbhyed_m, Ague, m_idhumatFor thee, 0 Agni, let this most tamam, vticas, honied speech, for thce this prayer tfibhyam mani.s_ iy_m astu _m be a comfort lo thy heart. The hrd6. songs fill thee, as the great rivers tu_.m gfrah., sindhum ivfi.vt_n_r the Indus, with owcr, a_d mah_r, stre_lgthen thce. p_. anti _vas_,vardh_yanti ca. t_bhya : this form of the dat. of tv_m occurs about a dozen times in the Samhita text beside the much commoner t_bhyam (as in b) ; it occurs only before vowels with which it is ahvays contracted, _ z . . having only once (v. 30, 6) to be read with hiatus, mam_.a _yam : _ . in this and two other passages of the RV. the _ of manm.a is not contracted in the Samhita text, because it precedes the caesura. _im: in apposition, as a delight or comfort, sindhum ira: this simile occurs elsewhere also; thus :[ndram ukth_ni vgvrdhu.h, samudr_m ira sindhava.h the hymns strengthcn Indra as the rivers the sea. _ p.rnanti: from p._ fill. fi_vasR: because hymns, like oblations, are thought to give the gods strength, vardh4yanti : cs. of v.rdh grow ; accent, p. 466, 19 a.

6 tu_ma, Agne, hitiim

Aflgiraso

gtih&

Thee, 0 Agni, the Aflgirascs discovered hidden, abiding in every wood. Thus thou art born, whct_ rubbed with mighty strength: tl_g call thee the son of strength, 0 Ai_giras.

_av avindafl ehi/rriy_nt_.m v_nevane. s_ jgyasd mathy_mfina.h s_ho mah_t : tu_m _huh. s_hasas putr_m, AAgirab,

104

AGNI

[v.n, s

_[.hgirasas : an ancient priestly family (cp. x. 14, 3-6), Agni being regarded as their chief (cp. d and i. 1, 6). They are said to have designed the first ordinances of sacrifice (x. 67, 2). gdh_ hit_m 2_laced (pp. of dh_) in hiding, concealed, explained by _i_riy_n._.m vfine ; having betaken himself (pf. pt. of/wi) to, resting in, all wood. tiny avindan : they found him out as a means of sacrifice ; Sandhi, 40. vne-vane : 189 C a. s_ : as such = as found in wood (ep. p. 294 b). mathydmnas: pr. pt. ps. of math stir, being produced by the friction of the kindling sticks, s_tho mahAt: cognate ace. =with mighty strength (cp. sahas_ y6 mathit6 j_yate n._bhi.h he who when rubbed by men with strength is born, vi. 48, 5); this being an explanation of why he is called s_haaas putrfim son of strength: this, or s_hasa.h sfind.h, is a frequent epithet of Agni; Sandhi, 43, 2 a. Aflgiras : see note on a.

PARJ%NYA
This deity occupies quite a subordinate position, being celebrated in only three hymns. His name of'ten means 'rain-cloud' in the literal sense; but in most passages it represents the personification, the. cloud then becoming an udder, a pail, or a water-skin. Parjanya is frequently described as a bull that quickens the plants and the earth. The shedding of rain is his most prominent characteristic. He flies around with a watery car, and loosens the water-skin ; he sheds rain-water as our divine (gmura) father. In this activity he is associated with thunder and lightning. He is in a special degree the producer and nourisher of vegetation. He ,also produces fertility in cows, mares, and women. He is several times referred to as a father. By implication his wife is the Earth, and he is once called the son of Dyaus. v. 83. Metre : 1.5-8. 10. Tris.tubh ; 2-4. Jagati ; 9. Anuqtubh.

'

v.83, 3]

PARJANYA

105

I Ach_ vada tav_sa.m girbhir fLbhi.h; stuhi Parj_nyam ; namasa2- vi" vasa. k_nikradad v_abh6 jirgLdfi, nfi r_to dadh_ti 6sadhisu gfirbham. _ch_: with final vowel syllable of the Pada. vada ds. of van win. knikradat jfrAdfi,nfi: Sandhi, 47; his g_rbham: as apposition to of plants with rain.

Invoke tl_ mighty one with these songs ; _vraise Parjanya ; seek to win him with obeisance. Bellowing, the bull of quickening gifts places seed in the lglants as a ge_n.

metrically lengthened in the second : the poet addresses himself, vivasa : : see iv. 50, 5 d. v.rs.abhfis : Parjanya. quickening gift is rain = rStas in d. r_ttas, Parjanya quickens the growth

2 vi v_k.s_n hanti nt_ hanti k._gmo: vfilva .m bibhKya J. havadhat.

J. _ .

rama-

He shatters the trees and he smites the demons : the whole World fears him of the mighty weapon. Even the sinless man .flees before the mighty one, when _Parjanya thundering smites the evil.doers.

bhdvana.m
,_

utanag_ _.ate v.rsmavato, y_t Parj_nya.h stan_yan

h_nti

d.u_._ah..
bibhEya: pf. ofbhi=pr. (p.842a). mah_vadh_t: a By. owing to its accent (p. 455c). v._.sny_vatas: Parjanya; abl. with verbs of fearing (p. 816 b). _nag_s: with irr. accentuation of the privatire an- in a By. (p. 455 c a and f. n. 2). This word is here contrasted with du.sk._tas ; hence the ut_ before it has the force of even. On the internal Sandhi of dusk._t see 43, 2 a.

10_

PAI_T'_ YA N

Iv. 83,

_, _r_:, _, _: ,, _r_,
8 rath_ ira kaayasvam p_nn, abhik.siZil_ a charioteer lashing his "hors_ with aw]@ he makes mani__.r d_t_n k.rn.ute varsi_ Aha. lest his messengers of rain. __rom d_r_t slmb_isya stan_th_ dd afar arise the thunders of the li_, irate, when Parja_lya makes rainy the y_t Parj_nya.h nAbha.h. krnut_ varsiam sky.

rathe: N. of rathln, much less common than rathe, N. rath_s. The contraction rath_va also occurs in x. 51, 6 ; rathlr iva is much commoner and would have been metrically better here. d_t_m: the clouds, simh_sya stan_th_.h: condensed for 'the thunders of Parjanya like the roars of a lion. var.syAm: predicative acc. ; on the accent of this form and of vars.y_n in b, see p. 450, 2 b. k.r_.ut_ : no_e that k.r follows the fifth class in the RV., k.rndti, &c. ; kardti does not appear till the AV., cp. p. 145, 4.

r_ _-_ _ _ _: _..,_n 4 pr_ v_t_ v_nti;

_ _:, ,, rO,_,_WF_T_,___, _i-_:, _,_-_., _,

viThe winds blow forth, the light.

pat_yanti

dytita; nings fall; the plants shoot ul_; dd 6saShirjihate; plnvate allah., heaven overflows. _Vurture is bor_ irf_vi_vasmai bh_ivan_yajf_yate, for the whole world whe_ Parjanya y_t Parj_nyal_ vatL prthiv_m r6tas_quick2ns the earth with seed.

v. 8_, 6]
. .

PARJANYA

107

vantl, jihato (2. ha go) are both accented as antithetical (p. 468, 1913) to the two following verbs patAyanti (itv., 168), pinvate, which are accented as beginning new sentences (p. 466, 19 A a); ep. also note on b_lhate, i. 35, 9 c. On the secondalT root pinv see 134, 4/3. ira: the rain. shed by Parjanya makes the earth productive (cp. 1 c, d). Note that the preceding JagatI triplet (2-4) is bound together by a refrain beginning with y_t Parj_nya.h and varying the idea ' when Parjanya rains '.

5 y_sya vrat6 prthiv_ n_nnamiti ; yGsya vrat6 haph_vaj j_rbhuriti, yAsya vrat_ 69adhir vi_vArfip_.h: s_ ha.h, Parjanya, mhhi _rma yacha,

I_ w]wse ordinance the earth bends low ; in whose ordinance hoofed animals whose ordinance form, as such, 0 mighty shelter on lea_ about; in _lants are om_iPa_:ianya, bestow us.

y_sya vrata: that is, in obedience to whose law. n_nnamiti: int. of ham (see 173, 2 b ; 172 a). _alah_vat : that which has hoofs, used as a n. collective, j_rbhuriti: int. of bhur quiver (174 a). 6sadhi__ : the following adj. vi_vArfip_ .h is most naturally to be taken predicatively, like the verbs in a mad b. s_ : as nora. corr. followed by the roe. : as such, 0 I_arjanya. yacha : ipv. of yam.

_:,

6 div6

no v_..tim., Maruto, dhvam ;

rari-

Give us, 0 Maruts,

_he rain

of heaven; _our forth the strean_s

108

PAI_ANYA

Iv. 83, 6

pr_ pinvata v._.sn.o_i_va_ya dh_r_h.. 2o aryan etana stanayitndn6hi, ap6 nisifie_nn _.sura.h pit_ na.h.

of your stallion. 1tither with this thunder come, 3_ouring down the waters as the divine syirit our father.

div_s: this might be abl., from heaven, as it is taken to be by S'ayana; but it is more probably gen., being parallel to A_vasya _ .o dh_r_h ill b ; cp. ix. 57, 1, pr_ te dhara, div6 n_, yanti vrst_yah o lhg streams 90 forth lilce the rains of heaven, raridhvam : 2. p]. pr. ipv. of r_ give (cp. p. 144, B 1 a). Marutas: the storm gods, as associated with rain, are in a b invoked to bestow rain, which is described as water shed by their steed (as also in i. 64, 6 and ii. 34, 13). v._.s.no _vasya:-----staTlion. In c d Parjanya is again addressed, stanayitn(m_hi: the accent alone (apart from the Pada text) shows that this is a con[faction not of -nil ihi (which would be -nohi), but of -n_ _hi, which would normally be-n_ihi ; -n6hi is based on the artificial contraction -n_ (=-nil _)+ihL The same Sandhi occurs in indr6hi (i. 9, 1) for _ndra _ ihi. With stanayitnCm_ cp. stan_yan in 2 d and stan_th_s in 3 e. apes--v.rs.t-lm in a and dh_r_s in b. _sura.h pit_ na.h: as appositional subject of the sentence, with the 2. ipv. ihi ; ep. s_ in 5 d with the voc. Parjanya and the 2. ipv. yaeha. The two epithets are applied to other gods also, such as Dyaus, whom in his relation to Eal_h Parjanya most resembles.

7 abhikranda; dh_ ;

stan_ya;

g_rbham

J_e_low towards u_; thunder; deposit the germ; fig around with thy water-bearing car. .Draw well the! water-shin unfastened downward : let the heights a_ugvalleys be level

udanv_t_ p_ri diy_ r_thena, d._tim, sd kava vis.ita.m niafloam. : . sam_ bhavantu udv_to mp_la.h,

v. _, 8]

PAI_'ANYA

109

stan_ya : accented as forming a new sentence, g_rbham : cp. 1 d, r6to dadh_ti 5sadhisu ggrbham, dhfis: '2. s. root ao. sb. of 1. dh_. diy_: with final vowel metrically lengthened, d._tim: the rain-cloud, here compared with a water-skin, doubtless like the leather bag made of a goat-skin still used in India by water-carriers. vi.sitam (from si tie) : untied so as to let the water run out. nyfifcam: predicative:----so that the untied orifice turns downward. sam_s : that is, m_y the high and the low ground be made level by the surface of the water covering both.

8 mab_uta.m s.iSea; sy_ndantam, r_st_t, gh.rt$na suprap_n_m bhyah..

k6@am kuly_

aid

ae_,

ni pu;
o_

Draw u# the great bucket, 19our it down ; let the streams released flow forward. Drench heaven and earth with ghee; let there be a good drinking 2lace for the cows.

vi_ita.h

dy_vEptrthiv_ bhavatu

vl undhi aghma-

The process of shedding rain is here compared with the drawing up of a pail from a well and pouring out its contents, ae_: metrical lengthening of the final a. ni .sifiea : Sandhi, 67 c. pur_tEt : according to S_ya.na eastward, because ' rivers generally flow eastwards' ; but though this is true of the Deccan, where he lived, it is not so of the north-west of India, where the RV. was composed. gh.rt6na : figuratively of rain, because it produces fatness or abundance. dyavap_thiw: " z Pragr.hya, but not analysed _ . in the Pada text (ep. i. 35_ 1 b). undhi : 2. s. ipv. of ud wet -_ unddhi. This Plida is equivalent in sense to 7 d. suprapEn_m : note that in the

110

PARJANYA

Iv.83, S

Pada text this compound is written with a dental n, indicating that this was regarded by the compilers of that text as the normal internal Sandhi (see 65 b).

9 y_t, Parjanya, k_nikradat, stan_yan h_msi dusk4_t.' .h, a prAtid_ .m vi_vam modate, A , y_t klm. ca prth_vyam adhL

W7_en, 0 _Pa_:_anya, bellowing aloud, thundering, thou smitest the e_'il-doers, this whole world exuZts, whatever is u_on the earth+ yAt Ibis

y_t Parjanya: cp. 2d. hAmsi: 2. s. pr. of hart (66A2). ki.m ca: indefinite prn., whatever {19 b), explains id_m. vi_vam world ; if a verb were expressed it would be bhAvati.

I0 _var_i.-r var.m_m: t_d u .m_gl'- Thou h_tshedrain: +++wwholly bh_ya ; cease; thou ]_ast made the deserts _kar dh_nv_ni _tietav_ u. passable aga_. Thou hast made _jijama 5_adhir bhdjan_ya k_m ; oA " uta prajabhyo avido man,.am, the plants lo grow for the sake of food ; and thou hast found a hgmn of l_raise from (thy) creatures.

This concluding stanza, implying that Parjanya has shed abundant rain, describes its results.

vi. 54,i]

PI_SAN

111

_varsis : 2. s. s no. of vFs. u s_ : on the Sandhi see 67 c ; on tho meaning of the combination, see under u and sli, 180. gT.bh_ya: this pr. stem is sometimes used beside _..bh.n_tL _kar: 2. s. root no. of k.r. _ti-etav_i : cp. p. 463, 14 b a. _jijanas : ep. I d and 4 b. k_m : see 180. Here we have the exceptional intrusion of a Jagat! Pada in a Tri.s.tubh stanza (p. 445, f. .A n. 7). avidas : a no. of vid find, thou hast found = received, prajabhyas: abl., fi'om creat2_res in gratitude for the bestowal of rain.

POSAN
This god is celebrated in eight hymns, five of which occur in the sixth Man._tala. His individuality is vague, and his anthropomorphic traits.are scanty. His foot and his right hand are mentioned ; he wears braided hair and a beard. He carries a golden spear, an awl, and a goad. His car is drawn by goats instead of horses. His characteristic food is gruel (karambh_). He sees all creatures clearly and at once. He is the wooer of his mother and the lover of his sister (Dawn), and was given by the gods to the Sunmaiden Sfiry_ as a husband. He is connected _vith the marriage ceremonial in the wedding hymn (x. 85). With his golden aerial ships Piis.an acts as the messenger of Sfrya. He moves o,_ward observing the universe, and makes his abode in heaven. He is a guardian who knows and beholds all creatures. As best of charioteers he drove downward the golden wheel of the sun. He traverses the distant path of heaven and earth; he goes to and returns from both the beloved abodes. He conducts the dead on the "far-off path of the Fathers. He is a guardian of roads, removing dangers out of the way ; and is called 'son of deliverance' (vim_oo nAp_t). He follows and protects cattle, bringing them home unhurt and driving back the lost. His bounty i_ often mentioned. ' Glowing' (_ghra.i) is one of his exclusive epithets. The name means 'prosperer', as derived from pu.s, cause to thrive. The evidence, though not clear, indicates that Pfi_an was originally a solar deity, representing the beneficent power of the sun manifested chiefly in its pastoral aspect. vi. 54. Metre : G_yatrL

112 1 s_.m, Pfisan, vidt_.a naya, y_ _fijasanusasati, ..... y_ ev_chim iti br_vat,

POSAN

[vi. 54, 1

Conjoin us, 0 Pf_s.an, with one that knows, who shall straightway instruct us, and who shall say (it is) 'just here '.

vidd.sa: inst. governed by the sense of association produced by the combination of nays (ni lead) with s_m : cp. p. 308, I a. The meaning is: 'provide us with a guide . anu-/laeatl (3. s. pr. sb.) : who shall instrucg us where to find what we have lost. id_m : not infrequently, as here, used adverbially when it does not refer to a particular substantive, br_vat : 3. s. pr. sb. of br_

2 s_m u Pfisn_ gamemahi, y6 gT.h_/_, abhi_sati, im_ ev_ti ca br_vat,

We would also go with _Pas.an, who shall guide us to the houses, and shall say (it is) 'just rinse '.

u : see p. 221, 2 ; on its treatment in the Pads text, p. 25, f. n. 2. Pflsn_: see note on vidtisa, 1 a. gamemahi (a ao. op. of gain): we would preferably go with l_s.an as our guide, g.rh_n : that is, the sheds in which our lost cattle are.

s_f _T

slrlq_ _l_el: H

si'T_'_ I _li'_i I _IPq"_I q_:

3 Pf_.n_ eakr_m nzl risyati, n_ k6_6 _va padyate ; n6 asya vyathate laavil_

Poz..an's wheel is not injured, the well (of his car)falls not clown; nor does his.felly waver. va: on the p. 452, B c. as the edge improbable

n6:=n_ u, also not; on the Sandhi ep. 24. k6_6 Sandhi accent, see p. 465, 17, 3. asya: unaccented, Sayana explains oakr_m as Posan's weapon, and pavls of that weapon. Bu_ this is in the highest degree

vi. 54, 6]

PCS.AN

118

because the weapon of P_.san is a spear, an awl, or a goad ; while his car is elsewhere mentioned, as well as the goats that draw it, and he is called a charioteer.

4 yO asmai ]_vi.savldhan, n_ tg.m Pfis_,pi m.r.syate : pratham6 vindate v_su. asmai: PQsan ; on the syntax, see p. 452 B c. _pi : verbal prp, to the man who worships Posan.

Ilim whohasworshi_edhim with oblation P_an forgeLs not : he is the first that cu',quireswealtl_ see 9,00, A l f; on loss of accent, be taken with mrs. pratham_s :

7:,
5 1"_._ g_ _nu etu na.h; Pfi_ rak.satu _rvata.h ; Pfis_ v_jam sano_u na.h. let -P_*.an go aflo" our cows; let P@_.ar_ _roteet our steeds; let PO4.an gain booty for us. raks.atu :

gnu etu : to he with them and prevent injury or loss. to prevent their being los_.

"6 P_.ann, _nu prti g_ ihi y_jamanasya sunvat_.h, asmakam stuvatam ut_. tinu pr_ ihi: of the sacrifice,
l)OJ

0 P_,yan, go forth after the cows of the sacrificer wl_o1_ressesSoma, and of us who l_raise thee.

cp. p. 468, 20 a. ytljam_nasya: of the institutor stuvat_m : of the priests as a body,

][

114

P0.SAN

[vi. 54, 7

_,r4_,_i '_

_f-_: _, i iB_i

_i

? m_kir ne_n ; m_iki ri.san; .m m_kim sgm. _ri k6va.te : hth_ris.tabhir _ gahi.

Let notany onebe lost let ; it not be injured ; let it not suffer _'acture in a _it : so come back with them u_injured.

ne_at: inj. ao. of nag be lost (see 149 a2). ris.at : a ao. inj. of ri.s. _ari : ps. ao. inj. of _._crash, hristabhis : supply g6bhis.

_r_@r_-4_, __ It_ i,
8 _._.v_intam. Pfi.sgna .m vaygm, iryam _na.s.tavedasam, _ana .m ray_ imahe,

r_. i,r,_ _"_. i _ i r__:i i, t__

P_._.'an,wlto hears, the watcl_fal, whose 1_roperty is never lost, w]_o disposes of riches, we ap])roach.

_nas.ta-vedasam : who always recovers property that has been lost; he is also called Ana.s.ta-pafiu : whose cattle are never lost; ep. 1, 2, 5, 6. 7. ray,s: gen. dependent on zsanam (see 202 Aa). imahe: 1. p]. pr. A. of i go governing the ace. Pfis._n.am: cp. 197 A 1.

9 P_.an, t_va vrat6 vay_m. n_ ri.syema k_da can_ : stot_ras ta ih_ smasi.

0 P_an, in tIay service may we never suff_r injury : we are thy _raisers l_ere.

P_.an t_va: note the Sandhi (40, 2). vrat6: that is, while abiding in thy ordinance, emasi : 1. pl. of as be ; e gives the reason for the hope expressed in a b.

vii. 49]

._PAS

115

10 p_ri pdnar

Pfis_

pard.stUd dadhgttu dd, l_.inam :

3".el _Pfl,..an ])ut

his

right hand

dh_stam

around us from afar : let hi_ drive _qJ for us again what has been lost. 437, a 8). na.st_m: meaning cows are

no na.s.t_m _atu.

parAst_d : the gt to be pronounced dissyllabically (ep. p. p_ri dadhgtu : for protection, d.h_stam = h_stam : 54. from na_ be lost ; cp. _na.s.tavedasam in 8 b. _-jatu : the of the vb. shows that by the n. na.s_m tchat is lost intended.

PAs
The _Vaters are addressed in four hymns, as well as in a few scattered verses. The personification is only incipient, hardly extending beyond the notion of their being mothers, young wives, and goddesses who bestow boons and come to the sacrifice. They follow the path of the gods. Indra, armed with the bolt, dug out a channel for them, and they never infringe his ordinances. They are celestial as well as terrestrial, and the sea is their goal. They abide where the gods dwell, in the seat of Mih_-Vaxun.a, beside the sun. King Varun.a moves in their midst, looking down on the truth and the falsehood of men. They are mothers and as such produce Agni. They give their auspicious fluid like loving mothers. They are most motherly, the producers of all that is fixed and that moves. They purify, carrying away defilement. They even cleanse from moral guilt, the sins of violence, cursing, and lying. They also bestow remedies, health, wealth, strength, long life, and immortality. Their blessing and aid axe often implored, and they are invited to seat themselves on the sacrificial grass to receive the offering of the Soma priest. The Waters are several times associated with honey. They mix their milk with honey. Their wave, rich in honey, became the drink of Indra, whom it exhilarated and to whom it gave heroic strength. They are invoked to pour the wave which is rich in honey, gladdens the gods, is the draught of Indra, and is produced in the sky. Here the celestial Waters seem to be identified with rite heavenly Soma, the beverage of Indra. Elsewhere the Waters used in preparing the terrestrial Soma seem to be meant.When they appear bearing ghee, milk, and honey, they are

116

APAS

[vii. 49, 1

accordant with the priests that bring well-pressed Soma for Indra. Soma (viii 48) delights in them like a young m._n in lovely maidens; he approaches them as a lover; they are maidens who bow down before the youth. Th.e deification of the Waters is pre-Vedic, for they are invoked as 5#o in the Avesta also

vii. 49.

Metre : Tri.s.tubh.

T'-q--n'_ ,.._l"4I"q_,_,: I

T_n': I _

I _Jff--t,_i_z(,.,._,: I

1 samudr_jye.s.thfi.h dhyat
_ .

salil_sya

m_-

Having the ocean as their chief, fi'om /he midst of the sea, purify. ing, they flow unresting : let those 14raters, the goddesses, for wlwm Zndra, thebearerofthebolt, themighty one, _ened a 1_ath, help me l_ere.

punana yanti hnivi_sm_n_.h : 2. :[ndro y_ vajr_ vr.sabh6 rarada, t_ _po dover il_ m_m avantu.

samuda4-jye_.thas: that is, of which the ocean is the largest. 2. salil_ya : the aerial waters, referred to as divyas in 2a, are meant. _ 2. _ 2. punanas: ep. pavakas in c. hzLivi_am_nfis: ep. i. 82, 10, where the waters are alluded to as _ti_..thantis and hnive_an_ standing not still and resting _wt. rax_cla : of Indra, it is said elsewhere (ii. 15, g), v_jron.a l_ny at.r.nan nad_n_rn with his bolt he pierced channels for the rivers, t_ ape, &c. is the refrain of all the four stanzas of this 2. hymn.

vii. 49, 4J

APAS

117

2 y_ Ikpo divy_ ut_ v_ sr_vanti _h khanltrim_ ut_ v_ ya. svayamj_h ; .t samudrartha y_t.h _ticaya.h pavak_s: t_ _po dev_r ih_ m_m avantu,

2'he Waters that. come from heaven or that fl_w in channels or that arise spontaneously, that clear and purifying have flte ocean as their goal : let those ]aters, the goddesses, help me here.

divy_m: that fall fi'om the sky as rain: ep. salil_sya m_dhyfit in 1 a. khanitrimfis: that flow in artificial channels: cp. _ndro :ya rax_da in 1 e. svaya.mjas: that come from springs, samudr_rthas: that flow to the sea; cp. samudr_ye.s.thf_h. punana _ " yanti in 1 a, b. pavakas: this word here and elsewhere in the RV. must he pronounced pav_k_ (p. 437 a 9).

__!__: _:___r_ _:, _ _

._ _ A._ A .

_I_:' _:'___:,

3 yasam raJa V_ru_.o yatx m_dhye, saty_nrt_ avaph_yaif j_nKnKm, madhu_etitah sucayo ya.h pa_ " .Iv_k_s: & ta Ape dev_r ih_ m_ma avantu,

In the midst of whom Ki_g Varun.a goes looking down ulgon the truth and untruth of men, who distil sweetness, clear and purifying : let those Waters, desses, help n_e here. the god-

V_runas : this god (vii. 86) is closely connected with the waters, for the most part those of heaven avap_yan: this shows that the celestial waters are here meant; on the Sandhi see 40, 1. sat'y_nrta : Pragrhya (26 ; cp. p. 437, note 3) ; accent : p. 457, 10 e. Note that Dvandvas are not analysed in the Pada text. madhu_etitas : that is, inherently sweet.

___ rr____ __ __

nr_ _rr_ __-_: _nr_ __r_: _

118

A.PAS

[vii. 49, 4

4 y_su Vi_ve
t

r_j_ V_ru_. o, y_su dew anti;

J.

S6mo, madpr_-

In whom King exhilarating

Varu_.za, in whom dri_zk whom let hel2 into

y_su yasu

_rjam. Agnl.h

Soma, in whom tl_e All-gods strength, Agni'Vaigvdnara tlwse Waters, me here. has entered: the god&sses,

vamvanar6 vis.tas: t_ _,po dev_r

ih_ m_,m avantu,

_rjam : cognate ace. with m_danti (cp. 197 A4) = obtain vigour in exhilaration, that is, by drinking Soma which is associated with the Waters. vai_vanar_s : belonging to all men, a frequent epithet of A_ni. pr_vi_..tas: Agni's abode in the Waters is very often refer]ed to; cp. also his aspect as Ap_.m n_pat 'Son of Waters' (it. 85).

MITRA-VARU .NA
This is the pair most frequently mentioned next to Heaven and Earth. The hymns in which they are conjointly invoked are much more numerous than those in which they are separately addressed. As Mitlu (iii. 59) is distinguished by hardly any individual traits, the two together have practically the same attributes and functions as aruna alone. They are conceived as young. Their eye is the sun. Reaching out they drive with the lays of the sun as with arms. They wear glistening garments. They mount their car in the highest heaven. Their abode is golden and is located in heaven ; it is great, very lofty, firm, with a thousand columns and u thousand doors. They have spies that are wise and cannot be deceived. They are kings and universal monarchs. They are also called _ Asm_as, who wield dominion by means of maya occult power; a term mainly connected with them. By that power they send the dawns, make the sun travm_e the sky, and obscure it with cloud and rain. They are rulers and guardians of the whole world. They support heaven, and earth, and air. They are lords of rivers, and they are the gods most frequently thought of and prayed to as bestowers of rain. They have kine yielding refreshmentl and streams flowing with honey. They control th_ rainy skies and t]_e streaming waters. They bedew the pastures with ghee (= rain) and the

vii. 6t, 9]

MITR._-VARU

.N._

119

spaces with honey. They send rain and refreshment from the sky. Ruin abounding in heavenly water comes from them. One entire hymn dwells on their powers of bestowing rain. Their ordinances are fixed and cannot be obstructed even by the immortal gods. They are upholders and cherishers of order. They are barriers against fk]sehood, which they dispel, hate, and punish. They afliict with disease those who neglect their worship. The dual invocation of these gods goes back to the Indo-Iranian for Ahura and ]_Iithr_ are thus coupled in tlle Avesta. vii. 61. ]_Ietre : Tris.tubh. period,

1 dd v_m. e_k.sur, tikam, dev_yor

Varun_,

supra-

Up tI_e lovely gods, 0 (Mitra

eye of you

two

and) Varu_.m, rises, all beings observes among mortals.

eti S_.rias m_rtiesu

tatanv_n, c_is.te, _ ciketa,

the Sun, having spread (his light); he who regards their intention

abhl y6 vi_v_ s_ manydm,

bhfivan_ni

c_ks.us : ep. vii. 63, 1, rid u eti... S_rya.h... c_k.sur Mitr_sya V_runasya up rises U_eSun, the eye of Mitra and Varu.ua. Varu.na: has the form of the voc. s., which could be used elliptically ; but the Padapa.tha takes it as the shortened form of the elliptical dual Varun. _ (cp. 193, 2 a) ; cp. deva in 7 a. It is, however, difficult to see why the _ should have been shortened, because it conforms to the normal break (_ _-) of the Tri.s.tubh line (see p. 441). abhi . . . c_s.te : the Sun is 'elsewhere also said to behold all beings and the good and bad deeds of mortals, manytim: that is, their good or evil intentions, eiketa : pf. of cit perceive (cp. 189, 4). In d the caesura irregularly follows the third syllable.

120

MITRA-VARU .NA

[vii. 61, .2

___:_,
2 pr_ v_m s_, Mitr_-Varun_v, .r_v_ vlpro m_nm_ni dirgha_rfid iyarti, yhsya brhhmani, sukratfi, _v_tha, y_t kr_itv_ n_ithe. n_ _ar_dah. p.r-

_:,
.Forth for you two, 0 3ditra. Varun.a, this .pious .priest, heard afro; sends his hymns, that ye may favour his .prayers, ye wise ones, that ye may fill his autumns as it wcre with wisdom.

iyarti: 3. s. pr. of r go. y_sya . , , _vgtthas = y_t t_sya _vfithas: on the sb. with relatives see p. 356, 2. sukratfl: see note on .rt_vari, i. 160, 1 b. The repeated unaccented word in the Pada text here is not marked with Anud,_ttas because all unaccented .L r. syllables following a Svarlta are unmarked, a p.r$.mthe : 2. du. sb. pr. of p.r$. fill. The meaning of d is not quite certain, but is probably 'that ye who are wise may make. him full of wisdom . all his life '. _argdas: autumns, not var.sam rains (which only occurs in the AV.), regularly used in the RV. to express years of life, because that was the distinctive season where the RV. was composed.

._d[.T-,,q_,., __: _ _v_ ___: _-_ _

_ __:_ ____ _____ :_ _ _ __:_ __ __:____

v___ __-__. _;_, ,0-__ _-_,_" , _ _,_: ____, ,_ _

3 pr_ ur6r, Mitr_-Varun._, rye]a, prthi-

_ _,,

_'rom the wide earl/,, 0 Mitra. Varun.a, from tlte high 7ofty dcy,

vii. 61, 4] pr_i divR ._v_xl

MITR,ix-VARU .N__ b.rhata.h, su-

121

0 bounteous ones, ye have .placed your spies that go separately, in plants and abodes, ye that .protect with unwinking eye.

dRnfi, sp_o dadhfithe 6.sadhi.su vik.s6 ._clhag yat6, 'nimi.sa.m r_k.sam_.. a.

ur6s : here used as f. (as adjectives in u may be : 98), though the f. of this particular adj. is otherwise formed with i : urv-i, sudanfi : see note on sukratfi in 2 c. spgLfias: the spies of Varuna (and i_fitra) are mentioned in several passages, dadhathe: Pragrhya (26 b). 6sadhisu: the use of this word seems to have no special force here beyond expressing that the spies lurk not only in the houses of men, but also outside, yaths: pr. pt. A. pl. of i go. _nimis.am: acc. of _-nimi.s f. non-winking, used adverbially, to be distinguished fl'om the adj. a-nimi.sa also used adverbially in the ace. The initial a must be elided for the sake of the metr_.

4 h_a. sfi Mitr_sya V_runasyadh_I will .praise the ordinance of ma : Mitra and Va_n. a : their force _smo r6dasi badbadhe mahitva..presses " apart the two worlds with ayan m_m_ _yaivanam pr_ y_iif_manma _avarah; vrjana .mtir_te, might. May the months of nonsacrificers .pass without sons; may he whose heart is set on sacrifice extend his circle. "

_'_tm. sa: this form may be the 2. s. P. ipv. with metrically lengthened final vowel, as the Pada text interprets it ; or the 1. s. sb. P. (p. 125). The latter seems more likely because the poet speaks of himself in the 1. prs. (twice) in 6 a, b also. badbadhe : int. of b_dh (174 a) ; cp. vii. 23, 3, vi b_tdhi_ta sy_ r6dasi mahit-v_ he has,teased asunder the two worlds with his might, mahitv_ : inst.

122

MITRA.VARUN.

[vii. 61, 4

(p. 77). fiyan: 3. p].pr, sb. ofigo(p. 130). avlras_ : predicative z -----as-_m/ess5 on the accent see _p. 455, 10 c a. _ajfi_manm_," contrasted with yajvanam (accent p. 455, f. n. 2). pr_. tirte: 3. s. sb. pr. of t_ cross; this ed. vb. is often used in the sense of prolonging life (A. one's own, P. that of others), here of increasing the number of one's sons (as opposed to av_ras in c); cp. prA y6 bndhum, tirAnte, gvy_, prfcAnto asvya magham who further their kin, giving abundantly gifts of cows and horses (vii. 67. 9).

v[ _

""

"'"J vi_va, v.rsa_.av, d_d.r_e, im_ n_ ya: no 0 wise mighty (praises) marvel is seen ones, a_l these nor mystery.

5 _.mfira, v_m.,

are for you two, in which

n_ y_-su citr_m, ks_m. dm!ba.h saoante

.

_n.rt_ j_nhnf_m acite abhfivan,

Avengers follow the falseIwods of men : there have been no secrets for you not to know.

n_ vam nmyam

The interpretation of Padapa.tha I take _mfir_ vi@a for vi@as (contrary these (sc. stut_yas), n_ d_dr_e : 3. s. pf. /k. with the spies of Vartm. a (cp. nothing hidden from you.

this stanza is uncertain. Following the to be a du. m. agreeing with vTsanau , but to the Pads) f. pl. N. agreeing with imps citr_m: that is, no deceit or falsehood. ps. sense, as often (cp. p. 842 a). drfihas : 3 c). n_ rim.yam: explains c: there is a-clte : dat. inf. (cp. 167, 1 a).

vii. 61,7]

MITRA-VARU .NA With revere'neeI_Zl

123 consecrate

6 s_im u v_m yajfi_,m mahayam. n_mobhir ; v_m, Mitr_-Varu_fi, sa. badhah.. pr_ vfLm m_nmgni .reUse n_vgni ; krt_ni b r" " " . " _ ahma jujusann 1mare. huv6

for you the sacrifice ; I call on you two, Mitra- Varun.a, wilh zeal. (These) new Uwughts arc to praise you ; may these .prayers that have been offered be pleasing.

s_m mahayam: 1. s. inj. cs. of mah. huv6: 1. s. pr. A. of hfl call. sab_dhas : note that the pcl. sa is separated in the Pada text, though the privative cl. a is not. pr . . . regse : dat. inf. from are_raise (see p. 192, b 1 ; cp. p, 463, notes 2 and 8). ngvgni : the seers often emphasize the importance of new prayers, br&hma : it. pl. ; see 90, p. 67 (bottom) and note 4. jujus.an : 3. pl. sb. pf. of ju.s (140, 1).

_-_-'__

_W_I

_'_11q__._ I _h"I_'( I

7 iy_m., dev_, pur6hitir yuv_bhy_.m yajfi4s.u_ Mitr_-Vartua.gv, akgri; vi_vanidurga_ ptprtam . tir6 no. . yfiy_m
D.aho

517fis priestly service, 0 gods, has been rendered to you tu'o at sacririces, 0 __ilra-Varun. a. Take us ac_vss all hardshi_vs. .Doye _rotect us evermore with blessi_gs.

p_ta

suastibhih,

s_d_

This final stanza is a repetition of the final stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 60) ; d is the refrain characteristic of the hymns of the Yasi0..tha family, concluding three-fourths of the hymns of the seventh M_.dala. deva : voc. du., shortened for dew (cp. Varuna in 1 a) as restored in the Pada text. yav_bhyam: note the difference between this form and ydvabhy_m, dat. du. of ydvan youth.. Mitr_-Varun.au : note that in the older parts of the RV. the du. ending au occurs

124

MITR._.VARU

.Nil,

[vii. 61, 7

only within a PRda before vowels, in the Sandhi form of _.v. akRri : ps. ao. of k.r do. pip rtam : 2. du. ipv. pr. of pr put across. yfiyRm: pl., sell. devRs, because the line is a general refrain addressed to the gods, not to Mitra-Varu.na.
.C

SURYA
Some ten hyums are addressed to Sfirya. Since the name designates the orb of the sun as well as the god, Sfirya is the most concrete of the solar deities, his connexion with the luminary always being present to the mind of the seers. The eye of Sfirya is several times mentioned ; but Sfirya himself is also often called the eye of Mitra and Varun.a, as well as of Agni and of the gods. He is far-seeing, all-seeing, the spy of the whole world ; he beholds all beings, and the good and bad deeds of mortals. He arouses men to perform their activities. He is the soul or guardian of all that moves or is stationary. His car is drawn by one steed called eta_t, or by seven swift mares called h_rit bays. The Dawn or Dawns reveal or produce Sfirya ; he shines from the lap of the Dawns ; but Dawn is also sometimes Sfirya's wife. He also bears the metronymic _.ditya or __diteya, son of the goddess Aditi. His father is Dyaus or Heaven. The gods raised him who had been hidden in the ocean, and they placed him in the sky; various individual gods, too, are said to have produced Sfirya or raised him to heaven. SSrya is in various passages conceived as a bird traversing space; he is a ruddy bird that flies ; or he is a flying eagle. He is also called a mottled bull, or a white and brilliant steed brought by Dawn. Occasionally he is described as an inanimate object : he is a gem of the sky, or a variegated .L stone set in the midst of heaven. He is a bl_lliant weapon (ayuctha) which Mitra-aruna conceal with cloud and rain, or their felly (pavl), or a brilliant car placed by them in heaven. Sfirya is also sometimes spoken of as a wheel (cakr_), though otherwise the wheel of S_rya is mentioned. Sfirya shines for all the world, for men and gods. He dispels the darkness, which he rolls up like a skin, or which his rays throw off like a skin into the waters. He measures the days and prolongs life. He drives away sickness, disease, and evil dreams. All creatures depend on him, and the epithet 'all-creating' (vi_.-karman) is once applied to him. By his greatness he is the divine priest (asury_ pur6hita) of the gods. At his rising he is besought to declare men sinless to Mitra-arun.a and to other gods. The name S_rya is a derivative of sv_tr tight, and cognate with the Avestic hvare s_,n, which ha8 swift horses and is the eye of Ahura Mazda.

vii. 6a, 2] vii. 63. Metre : Tris.tubh.

SURYA

125

'_ ___ _: __ _'__ __*_ _: ,,

_, __ ___, __:, _v-_ _, _ _:, __.r_, -_, __:, _

UI_ rises the genia? all-seeb_g Sun, commo_z to all raen, the eye of Mitra and Varun.a, the god who rolled u__ the darkness like a skin.

1 lid u eti subh_go vi_v_eaks._h. s_ml/afirana.h S_-io manusanam, _ .- .c_iksur Mitrsya V_runasya dev_, e_rmeva y_.h samvivyak t_m_msi.

vi_v_caks_s : cp. uruck.sfis in 4 a ; on the accentuation of these two words cp. p. 454, 10 and p. 455, 10 c a. c_ks.us : cp. vii. 61, 1. sam-_vivyak : 8. s. ipf. of vyac extend, c_rma ira : cp. iv. 13, 4. " ra_m_ya.h Sur_asya carmevavadhus _ " " _ t_mo apsti ant_.h the rays of the sun have deposited the darkness like a skin wilhi_ the waters.

__'_r-_ _

"_ _"_,(Cfi_ i __t _

i_-

_,._.,_,: _,

,_r_,

2 dd u eti prasavxta jan_nam mah_n ketttr arnav_h. S_riasya, sam_n_mcakr_mpari_vlvTtsan, y6d Eta_6 v_hati 4hfiroti yukta.h,

Up rises tl_ rouser of the l_eotgle, the great waving banner of the Sun, desiring to revolve hither the uniform wheel, which _taga, yoked to thepole, draws.

126

SORYA

[vii. 63,

prasavit_: with metrically lengthened i (cp. p. 440, 4) for prasavitg as restored by the Padapa.tha; cp. 4 c, jt_nfi.h. $_-yena prC_sfita.h, samarium: uniform, with reference to the regularity of the sun's course, cakr_m : a single wheel of the sun, doubtless with reference to the shape of the luminary, is regularly spoken of. pary_vivrtsan : ds. of v.rt turn ; cp. p. 462, 13 a. Eta_fi,s : as the name of the sun's steed, is several times mentioned ; but SQrya is also often said to be drawn by seven steeds ; cp. i. 164, 2, sapt_ yufijanti r_tham _kacakram, _k5 _vo vahati sapt_n_m_, seven yoke the one-whecled car, one steed with seven names draws it. dhfirsfi : the loc. pl. as well as the s. of this word is used in this way.

3 vibbx_jam_na u.e_s_m up_sth_d rebh_ir dd eti anumadyhmana.h, e.s_ me dev_l_ Savit_ cachanda, . . y_.h samfin_ .mn_ prammatx dhama.

Shining fo_qh he rises from the lal_ of the dawns, greeted with fladness by singers. He has seemed to me god Savitf wlw infringes not the uniform law.

cachanda: here the more concrete god SQrya is approximated to Savit.r (i. 35), who is in several passages spoken of as observing fixed laws. In this hymn SraTa is also referred to with ,terms . . (prasawta, pr_sfit_s) specially applicable to Savitr. n_ prammati : cp. what is said of Dawn in i. 123, 9, .rt_sya n_ minati dla_ma she infringes _wt the law of Order.

viL 6_, 6] 4 div6 rukm_ urue_k.sa

S_RYk 6d oti,

127 77le golden gem of the sky, far-

da_r_arthas tar_nir bhrajam_nah., nfin_m, j_ng.h S_rien. a prsfxtfL _yann tlrthani, k.rn_vann _p_m. st.

seebuj rises, whose goal is distant, speeding onward, shining, hrow may men, aroused by the Sun, attain their goals and iJerform their labours.

div6 rukm_h. : ep. vi. 51, 1, rukm6 nt_ div_ fidit_ vy _dyaut like a golden gem of the sky he has shone forth at sunrise; and v, 47, 3, m_dhye div6 nihitah, p._nir *t_m& the va_@gated stone set in the middle of the sky. dfir6arthas: SQrya has far to travel before he reaches sunseL liyan: 3. pl. pr. sb. of i go. _rth_ni: note that this word is alvrays n. in the RV. except in two hymns of the tenth book, in which it is m. k rn_van : 3. pl. pr. sb. of k.r do ; accented because beginning a new sentence (p. 465, 18 a).

5 y_tr_ cakrfir am._t_ g&t_im asmai, fiyon6 n_ dlyann t_nu eti p_tha.h, Jl_r_ti v&m., s_ra fidito, vidhema n_mobhir Mitr_-Varunot_ havy_ih. .

Where the immortals have _rade a way for him, like a flying eagle he follows his path. To you two, when the sun has risen, we would __ay worship with adorations, 0 Mitra. Varun.a, and with offerings.

y_.tr&: _he final vowel metrically lengthened, am._t&s: various gods, as Varuna, Mitra, and Aryamau (vii. 60, 4), are said to have made paths for the sun. pr_ti to be taken with vidhema, s_ra fidite : loc. abs. (205 b).

128

SORYA.

[vii. _, 6

_I__ ___ ___ _e _ _-_: _

6 7a_ Mitr5

_ _: u
nas

_, __:,_, _,r_, __, _r_, __-e_, _:, _, __: u

1Vow may Aryaman ourselves to traverse. Mitra, Varun.a, and grant wide space to us and Lo our offspring. be fair and easy us ever1)o ye _rotect

V_run5
.

Aryam_

tmanetokayav_rivo dadhantu: 2. ,t -suga no vasva sup_th_ni santu, yfiyhm, nab.. pata suastibhil_, s_da

Let all our pat]_

more with blessings. n_: to be pronounced with a slur as equivalent to two syllables (_ -, cp. p. 437 a 8) ; only n_ occurs as the first word of a sentence, never nd (p. 238); the Pada text always has ntL tn_no: this word (cp. 90, 2, p. 69) is often used izl the sense of serf, while attain is only just beginning to be thus used in the RV. (115 b a) and later supplants tan_ body altogether, dadhantu: 3. pl. pr. according to the a conj. (p. 144, B 3 _) instead of dadhatu, sug_: lit. may all (paths) be easy to travel mzd easy to traverse. This final stanza is a repetition of the final stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 62). On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

AgViI_&
These two deities are the most prominent gods after Indra, Agni, and Soma, being invoked in more than fifty entire hymns and in parts of several others. Though their name (stir-in horseman) is purely Indian, and though they undoubtedly belong to the group of the deities of light, the phenomenon which they represent is uncertain, because in all probability their origin is to be sought in a very early pre-Vedic age. They are twins and inseparable, though two or three passages suggest that they may at one time have been regarded as distinct. They are young and yet ancient. They are bright, lords of ]tmtre, of golden brilliancy, beautiful, and adorned with lotus-garlands. They are the only gods called golden-pathed (hira_ya-vartomi). They are strong and agile, fleet as thought or as an eagle. They possesB profound wisdom and occult power. Their two most distinctive and frequent epithets are dam_ wondrous and nasatya true. They are more closely associated with honey (m_tAhu) than any of the other gods. They desire g honey and are drinkers of it. They have a skin

vii. 7_]

ASVINS

129

filled with honey ; they poured out a hundred jars of honey. They have a honey-goad ; and their car is honey-hued and honey-bearing. They give honey to the bee and are compared with bees. They are, however, also fond of Soma, being invited to drink it with Us.as and SfilTa. Their car is sunlike and, together with all its parts, golden. It is threefold and has three wheels. It is swifter than thought, than the twinkling of an eye. It was fashioned by the three divine artificers, the .Rbhus. It is dl,_wn by horses, more commonly by birds or winged steeds; sometimes by one or more buffaloes, or by a single ass (r_sabha). It passes over the five countries; it moves around the sky; it traverses heaven and earth in one day ; it goes round the sun in the distance. Their revolving course (varti_), a term almost exclusively applicable to them, is often mentioned. They come from heaven, air, and earth, or from the ocean; they abide in the sea of heaven, but sometimes their locality is referred to as unknown. The time of their appearance is between dawn and sunrise : when darkness stands among the l_ddy cows ; Us.as awakens them ; they follow after her in their car ; at its yoking Us.as is born. They yoke their car to descend to earth and receive the offerings of worshippers. They come not only in the morning, but also at noon and sunset. They dispel darkness and chase away evil spirits. The A_vins are children of Heaven ; but they are also once said to be the twin sons of Yivasvant and Tv_.t!"s daughter Saran.y_ (probably the rising Sun and Dawn)." Pfis.an is once said to be their son ; and Dawn seems to be meant by their sister. They are often associated with the Sun conceived as a female called either Sfiry_ or more commonly the daughter of Sfirya. They are Sfiryg's two husbands whom she chose and whose car she mounts. Sfiry_'s companionship on their car is indeed characteristic. Hence in the wedding hymn (x. 85) the A.4vins are invoked to conduct the bride home on their car, and they (with other gods) are besought to bestow fertility on her. The A_vins are typically succouring divinities. They are the speediest deliverers from distress in general. The various rescues they effect are of a peaceful kind, nol_ deliverance from the dangm_ of battle. They are characteristically divine physicians, healing diseases with their remedies, restoring sight, curing the sick and the maimed. Several legends are mentioned about those whom they restored to youth, cured of various physical defects, or befriended in other ways. The name oftenast mentioned is that of Bhujyu, whom they saved from the ocean in a ship. The physical basis of the A_vins has been a puzzle from the time of the earliest interpreters before Y_ska, who offered various explanations, while modern scholars also have suggested several theories. The two most probable are that the A_vins represented either the morning twilight, as
190_ K

180

AgVI_TS

[vii. 71,

half light and half dark, or the morning and the evening star. It is probable that the Wins date from the Indo-European period. The two horsemen, sons of Dyaus, who drive across the heaven with their steeds, and who have a sister, are parallel to the two famous horsemen of Greek mythology, sons of Zeus, brothers of Helena ; and to the two Lettic God's sons who come riding on their steeds to woo the daughter of the Sun. In the Lettic myth the morning star comes to look at the daughter of the Sun. As the two A6vins wed the one Sfiry_, so the two Lettic God's sons wed the one daughter of the Sun; the latter also (like the Dioskouroi and the A_vins) are rescuers from the ocean, delivering the daughter of the Sun or the Sun himself. vii. 71. Metre : Tri_.tubh.

1 _pa sv_s_r
,

Us_so

N_g jihfte
.

:
_

Night

departs

fi'om

her

sister

rm. aktx k_...m.r a_u.saya _v_maghfi, gSmagh_, vema : div_ n_ktam yotam, _m

p_ntham. v_m huasm_td yu-

Dawn. The black one yields a 2ath to the ruddy (sun). 0 ye tlmt are rich and .from night us. in lwrses, ward rich in cows, off the arrow on you two we would ca_l : by day

Nglr (_. of ng6) : this word occurs ]_ero:gnly. gpa jihite : 8. s. fix. from 2. hg. U.mlsas: abl., wi_h which svgsur agrees. Night and A . Dawn are of_on called sistel,, e.g. svgs& svtksro jyayasyat y6nim _aik the (one) sister lms yidded her place to her greater sister (i. 124, .L 8)_ ; and their names aro often joinod as a dual divinity, nakto.sma. Tho hymn opens thus because the _vilm are deities of the early ara_g dawn. k_.._ (dee., p. 87) : night ; ep. i. 113, 2, _vet_g _gacl _ " u .k_n._ s_danfmi asy_.h the bright one has come; the _lack om. has yielded her abodes to _r. rin.(_kti: 8. s. pr. of rio leave, aru.saya : to the sun ; cp. L 113, 16, _raik p_nth_m yatave suryaya she has

_-ii. 71, 3]

ASVINS

13i

yielded a path for the sun Iv go. pnthgm : on the dec. see 97, 2 a. g6maghR: on the accentuation of this second roe., see p. 465, 18a. _rum: the arrow of death and disease; for the A_vins are characteristically healers and reseuel_, asmhd: p. 104. yuyotam: 2. du. of yu sel_arate, for yuyutam ; ep. 2 c and note on it. 33, 1 b.

W: II 2 up_yRtam, dfi_d.se m_rtiRya r_thena vRm_m_ A_vi_, vhhantR. yusrut_,m asm_d _nirRm _midivR vRm.: nakt_m., th_.m nab.. mRd3avi, tr_siCome hither to the aid of the pious mortal, bringing wealth o_ your car, 0 Agvins. Ward off" from us languor and disease: day and night, 0 lovers of honey, may you protect us. "

npa-_-yRtam: 2. du. ipv. of yR go; on the accent see p. 469, 20 A a a. mfidhvi : an epithet peculiar to the A_vins. tr_sithRm : 2. du.._, s ao. op. of trR protect (143, 4) ; irregularly accented as if beginning a new sentence.

3 _ v_m r_tham s.t_n sumn_y_vo

avam_syRm, vlu-

Let your kindly stallion,s whirl hither your car at (this) latest day: break. 290 ye, 0 Ageins, bring it

v._an.o vartayantu,

_2

132 syumagabhastlm rtayugbhir vair, a,A_vma,vasumantamvahotham,

I o , o

A_VINS a_

[vli. n, 3

that _ drawn with thongs with your horses yoked in due time, hither, laden with wealth.

avam_syam : prn. adj. (120 c 1). sumnay_tvas : the vowel is metrically lengthened in the second syllable, but, when this word oeeu10ies another position in the Pada, the short vowel remains.

f'_ _ _r_mm, +i r.rr _ t _

_,_, _w_:, _+m-.t, _m,+ni'_,

4 y6

v_.m rGtho, vo.lh_,

n.rpati,

Gsti

The car, 0 lords of men, if+atis your vehicle, three-seated, filled with riehes, farin# at daybreak, _vith that come hither to us, .Nasatyas, in order that, laden with all food, for you it ma+j approach us.

rivandhur6 v_isuma_a usr_iyamS, t & na on8, _aty_, tips y_tam, abhl y6d vK.m vi*'vapsnio jig_ti,

trivsnd3aur6_ : accent, p. 455 c a. vtlsum_a : Sandhi, 89. .g tips y_tam : 1 468, 20 a ; e10. note on up_y_t_m o. in 2 a. on_ : 10. 108. y_d: 10. 857. v_m: ethical dat. vi_v_pmay_s: the meaning of this word being doubtful, the sense of the whole Pads remains uncertain, jig_ti 3. s. sb. of g_ go, indistinguishable from the ind.

vii. 1, 7 6]

A_VINS

133

6 yuvhm Cy_vRnam jar_so 'mumukta .m, nl Pedava fihathu2 R_tim _yam ; nir _mhasas t_masa.h spartam _trim, nl J_hus_.m _ithird dhRtam ant_.h.

Ye two releasal _3avana from old age, ye brought a swift horse to Pedu; ye rescued Atri from distress and darkncr_s; ye _laeed J(ehuz..ainfi'eedom.

yuv_m : note that this is the nom., yuvam being the ace. : p. 105. " " Cy_vfma is several times mentioned as having been rejuvenated by the A_vins. jar_sas: abl. (p. 316 b). amumuktam: ppf, of rune (140, 6, p. 158). ni fihathur: 2. du. pf. of yah. P_d_ve: Pedu is several times mentioned as having received a swift, white, se_ent-killing steed from the Ahvins. ni.h spartam: 2. du. root ao. of sp.r (ep. 148, 1 a). The. ao. in c and d is irregularly used in a narrative sense, ni dhRtam : 2. du. root ao. of dhfi. In i. 116, 20 it.is said of the Avins : ' ye carried away at night Jahu.sa who was encompassed on all sides '.

6iy_m [email protected],_y_m,A_wn_,g_r. This is my thought,his, t 0 im_.m suv_ktlxn., v_an._,[email protected]@vi_s, my so_g. Acceptgladly them. this o_#o.f__raise, s ye mighty ones. " .t. . A . area br_hm_m 2ravayum agman. These prayers have gone addressed yfiyam, l_ta suastibhi_, s_dR to you. 1)o ye _rotect us ever_wre na.h. _ai_hblessings. mam.sa : this is one of the four passages in which the nora. of the der. & dec. d_s not contract with a following vowel in the Samhita text, here owing to its p_eeding the caesura (cp. note on v. 11, 5b).
_ ,I.

134

A_VINS

[vii. 71, 0

g]r: 82. agman: 3. pl. root ao. of gain (148, 1 e). This stanza is a l_po_ition of the last stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 70), which also is addressed to the A_vins. On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

VARU .NA
Beside Indm (if. 12) Varun.a is the greatest of the gods of the RV., though the number of the hymns in which he is celebrated alone (apart from Mitra) is small, numbering hardly a dozen. His face, eye, arms, hands, and feet are mentioned. He moves his arms, walks, drives, sits, eats, and drinks. His eye with which he observes mankind is the sun. He is far-sighted and thousand-eyed. He treads down wiles with shining foot. He sits on the strewn grass at the sacrifice. He wears a golden mantle and puts on a shining rol_e. His ear, which is often mentioned, shines like the sun, and is drawn by well-yoked steeds. Varun.a sits in his mansions looking on all deeds. The Fathers behold him in the highest heaven. The spies ol_ Varun.a are sometimes referred to : they sit down around him ; they observe the two worlds ; they stimulate prayer. By the golden-winged messenger of Varu.aa the sun is meant. Varun.a is often called a king, but especially a universal monarch (samr_j). The attribute of sovereignty (k.satr_) and the term 3mura are predominantly applicable to him. His divine dominion is often alluded to by the _ A word maya occult power; the epithet m_yin c_ufly is accordingly used chiefly of him. .Varun.a is mainly lauded as upholder of physical and moral order. He is a great lord of the laws of nature. He established heaven and earth, and by his law heaven and earth are held apart. He made the golden swing (the sun) to shine in heaven ; he has made a wide path for the sun ; he placed fire in the waters, the sun in the sky, Soma on the rock. The wind which resounds through the air is Varun.a's breath. By his ordinances the moon shining brightly moves at night, and the stars placed up on high are seen at night, but disappear by day. Thus V,arun.a is lord of light both by day and by night. He is also a regulator of the waters. He caused the rivers to flow ; by his occult power they pour swiftly into the ocean without" filling it. It is, however, with the aerial waters that he is usually connected. Thus he makes the inverted cask (the cloud) to pour its waters on heaven, earth, and air, and to moisten the ground. Varun.a's ordinancesbeing constantly ._id to be fixed, he is pre-eminently called _vrat_ u,hose laws alv established. The gods themselves follow his ordinances. His power is so great that neither the birds as they fly nor the rivers as they flow can reach the limits of his dominion. He embraces

vii. 86, 1]

VARUN. A

135

the universe, and the abodes of all beings. He is all-knowlng, and his onmiseienee is typical. He knows the flight of the birds in the sky, the path of the ships in the ocean, the course of the far-travelling wind, beholding all the secret things that have been or shall be done, he witnesses men's truth and falsehood. No creature can even wink without his knowledge. As a moral governor Varun.a stands far above any other deity. His wrath is aroused by sin, the infringement of his ordinances, which he severely punishes. The fetterB (1_i_) with which he binds sinnel_ are often mentioned_ and are characteristic of him. On the other hand, Vamn.a is gracious to the penitent. He removes sin as if untying a rope. He releases even from the sin committed by men's fathers. He spares him who daily transgresses his laws when a suppliant, and is guaeious to those who have broken his laws by thoughtlessness. There is in fact no hymn to Varun.a in which the prayer for forgiveness of guilt does not occur. Vamn.a is on a footing of friendship wi_h his worshipper, who communes with him in his celestial abode, and sometimes sees him with the mental eye. The righteous hope to behold in the next world Varun.a and Yama, the two kings vho reign in bliss. The original conception of Varun.a seems to have been the encompassing sky-. It has, however, become obscured, because it dates from an earlier age. For it goes bank to the Indo-Iranian period at least, since the Ahur_ Mazda (the wise .spirit) of the Avesta agrees with the Asura Varun.a in character, though not in name. It may even be older still; for the name Varun.a is perhaps identical with the Greek o_pa_g_ sky. In any ca_e, the word appears to be derived from the root v_ corer or encompa_%

vii. 86.

Metre : Tris.tubh.

__TI"_i

_q_1_m'_ 11 _'_

_ I _I_'_. l -_'_

_.'__ I _r-_

Idla_rr_ tu" asya mahma ' _anm9.._, " " " " vi y_fs tasl_mbha" r6dasi old urvL

Intelligent indeed are the genera. tions by the m_ght of him who has _rop_ed asunder eve_ the two wide

136

VARU .N.A.

[vii. 86, 1

prti n_.kam .r.svtl.mnunudo b.rh_nta .m, dvit_t n_k.satra.m; papr_thae ca .I. bhuma,

worlds. He has 2_ushed ttway the hi#h, lofly firmament and the daystar as well; and he spread out the earth.

dh_r_: ep. 7 c, lloetayad acita.h; and vii. 60, 6, aeotEisam vie citayanti d_ks.ai.h they with their skill make even the unthinking fhink. asya = Varu.nasya. mahin_ = mah_mna" (see 90, 2, p. 69). Varuna. _ (as well as other gods) is several times said to hold apal_ heaven and earth (e. g. vi. 70, 1), which were supposed to have originally been united, pr_ nunude : pushed away from the earth ; ep. vii. 99, 2 of Vis.nu : rid astabhnK n_kam .rs.vfian. brhAntam thou didst 19ro3_3_ u the high loft# firmament, n_Lkam : means the vault of heaven ; there is nothing te show that it ever has the sense of sun which S_yana gives it here. Sayana also makes the verb nunude, though unaccented, depend on the relative in b; c is, howevel; equivalent to a relative clause (ep_ it. 12, 5 b. 8 d). ngk.satrnm : in the sing. this word regularly refers to the sun, in the pl. to the stars. Yaruna and other gods are often said to have raised the sun to, or to have placed it in, heaven, dvit_: doubly to be taken with nunude; that is, he raised up from the em_h both the vaul_ of heaven and the sun. papr_that: pp of prath (140, 6); accented because it begins a new sentence, bh_tma: no_e the difference between bh_man n. earth and bhfungn m. multitude (p. 259).

2 ut_ swiy_ tanti_ s_m vade t_t : kad_, n_i ant_r V_ruoe bhuv_ni P kimmehavy_,m _hrn_noju_eta? kad_ m.rl.ikt_m sumtln_ abhi khyam I_

And I converse a_us with myself: 'when, yray, shall I be in com. reunion with Vamn. a ? W'hat oblat/on of mine ,eould he, free fi'om wrath, end#? When shall I, of good d_eer,lxreeive his mercy ?'

vii. 80,4]

VARU .NA

187

svgyg tanvk : with my own body = with myself (cp. p. 450, 2 b). nv /_nt_r ;loc. ciL Note that when a final original r appears in the Samhita text, it is represented by gisarjantya only in the Pada text ; on the other hand, antA.h in viL 71, 5 appears as antgr iti ; within Varu_.ta_ united with Varu_.la. bhuvfini : 1. s. sb. root ao. of bhfi be. khyam : 1. s. inj. a ao. of khya.

3 prch6 t_id 6no, Vamz.na, did_.k.su ; ripe emi cikitd.so vip._cham ; samgnt_m in me kav_ya_ cid ghur : ay_.m ha ttibhyam. Vfir_.o hrn.ito.

I ask about that sin, 0 Varun. a, with a desire to find out; I ap_roach the wise in order to ask ; the sages say one and the san_e thing to me : ' this Varun.a is wroth with thee.'

p.rch6 : 1. s. pr. ind. A. of prach ask. did(k.su is a difficulty : it has been explained as L. pl. of a supposed word did_.'fi, a volt improbable formation -- among those who see ; also as N. s. of a ds. adj. didfl_.u, with wrong accent (p. 461f) and wrong Sandhi, for did_lr4mr (ripe) -----desirous of seeing (i. e. finding out). It is probably best, following the Padapa.tha, to take the word as n. of the ds. adj. used adverbially (with adv. shift, of accent) = with a desire to see, i. e. find out. ripe ---_ipa u (24). oikittl.sas : A. pl. of the pf. p_t.of cit _erceive. _ri-p._eham ace. inf, (167, 2 a). .hrni.'to: 3. s. pr. A. of h r I
I

be angry ; w. dat. (200/).

138

VARUN.'A-

[vii. 86,'4

_r_t_I
4 kim _ga _sa, Varttu. a, jy6stham y_t stot_ra.m jigh_m, sasi sakh_yam ? pr_ t_in me voco, dfa.labha svadhKvo : _va tvanenan_mas_ z tur_iy_m, lVhat has been that chief sin, 0 Varu_._a, that thou desire.st to slay. thy praiser, a fi'iencl ? Proclaim that to nw, thou that art hard to deceive, selfde_e_zdent one : thee would I, free fi_n sin, eagerly aPl_easewith adoration.

jy_s.tham = jy/_istham, to be pronounced as a trisyllable (15, l f). ygtt : that as a cj. (p. 942). jlgh_ .msasi : ds. of ban slay. pr_ vocas : inj. ao. of vae say. d_.abha : 49 c. tur_iy_m = turh.h iy_m top. of i go), to be pronounced, with irr. secondary conti'aetion (cp. 22 a ; 48 a), as tur6yam, ava to be taken with iyam (cp. 5 a-c).

_,_ _____r_rr _ _ _:

_ __ __'[n"t __'_"_'!'__ _ _ _'ff"_t_':

5 _iva drugdh_ni _va

pitri_ srj_ no,

Set us frce fi'om

t1_ misdeeds

y_ vayhm, cak.rm_ tan(xbhih., _iva, rajan, pafiutt_pam ntt t_yfnn. , "& s.rja, " vats_m n_ dam II no, V_si_ham.

of our fathers, from those that we have committed by ourselves, l_e. lease Vasis.tha, 0 It'ing, _ike a cattle-stealing thief, like a calf from a ro_e.

_va srja (metrically lengthened final, also in d) : note the different construction in a: ace. ofobject and dat. of prs.; and in c d: ace. of . prs. and abl. of that from .which Y. is set free. drugdJakat_" pp;

vii. s0, 6]

ARUI_:A

189

of dxuh. oakl_m_ : metrical lengthening of final vowel, tan6bhis: in the sense of a ref. prn. av s.rj_: i.e. from sin. t_snim: as one releases (after he has expiated his crime) a thief who has been ... _[ bound; cp. vm. 67, 14:t6 n, Adit_r_aso, mum6_t_'st_nfi,.m baddhfim ira as such set us free, 0 Adityas, like a thief who is bound. d_mnas: distinguish d_man n. bond and d_aan n. act of giving from cl_mfin m. giver and gift.

im i

6 ng sg svfi claikgo,Varmga , dhr_ti.h s_ : " stlrg manytir vibh{dako gcittih; . . _ astt _yayan k_niyasa up,r6 ; svgpna_ can6d _In.rtasya prayot_.

It was not my own intent, 0 Varm?a, it was seduction : liquor. anger, dice, thoughtlessness; the elder is in theoffenceof the younger; _mt even slee2 is the warder off of tovng,

The general meaning of this stanza is clear : the sin with which Varu.na is ang_T has not been due to asi.s.tha's intention, but to seduction of one kind or another. The exact sense of three important words is, however, somewhat doubtful, because none of them occurs in any other passage. It can therefore be made out from the etymology and the context only. dhrtitis : from the root dhru = dhv.r (cp. 167 b, 9 ; 171, 2), which occurs at the end of one or two cds., as Varun.a-dhrti-t deceiving Varun.a ; cp. also v. 12, 5 : _lhftr._ata svay_m et6 v_oobhir rjftyat6 vDmam " bruv_nta.h these have "" _ deceivcd themselves with their own words, uttebing crooked things to the straightforward man. Thus the meaning of dhvliti appears to be deception, seduction. The meaning of c depends on the interpretation of upRr6. This word is natmally to be derived (in ac6ordanca with the analysis of the Pada text) from upa + "_ra (.r go). The cd. vb. xipa t_ occurs two or th_o times, e.g. AV. vii. 106, 1 : ygd fiamt'ti Oak.rmti kim. cid, u.pgrimg egrane if through forgetfulness we have

140

VARUN. A

[vii. s6, 6

done anything, have offended in our conduct. The sense of the noun would therefore be offence, the whole Pada meaning: the eider is (involved) in the (= is the cause of the) offence of the younger, that is, an elder has led me, the younger, astray. The use of the loc. here is illush_ted by vi. 71, 2 : y_.h . . . prasav6 . . . _si bh_mana.h who {Savit.r) art in the stimulation of the world, i.e. art the cause of the stimulation of the world prayot_ : this word might be derived from pra + yu join or pra + yu se__arate; the latter occurs in the RV. in the sense of drive away, while the former does not oeeur in the RV., and later means stir, mingle. The probability is therefore in favour of the sense warder off.. can_ then would have the olfiglnal sense of not even (pp. 229-30). sv_pnas : i.e. by producing evil dreams.

7 _ra.m, d_s5 n_, mi_hdse kar_ni I will, ikea s_ave, service l do ahem d evaya bhurnaye _naga.h. sinless "/" .i. tothebounteous angrygod. _cetayad acito dov6 ary5 ; The noble god made the thoughtless g_sam ray6 kavltarojtm_ti, think; he,. the wiser, s_veeds the experienced nmn to wealth. mqhti.so: dat. s. of mi.dhv_.ms, karl.i: 1. do ; to be taken with the adv. aram (p. 313, 4}. g._tsam : even the thoughtful man Varu.na with urges on. r_y6: final dat. (of r_i), p. 814, 2. jfx saveed. s. sb. root ao. of k.r _icetayat : see eit. his greater wisdom j_a_ti: 8. s. pr. of

____I

__ I_r_:1_a_:

I__ I_ I

vii. 103, 1] 8 ay_im sti tdbhyam., dhavo, h$.dl st6ma dpa_rita_

IVIAN.. D OK._S Varnn. a svaon eid astu.

14 [

.Let this l_raise be well imlJressed fhy heart, .Let 0 self-dependent also in us ever. Varuna. us have Invsperity

_i_.m na.h k.s6me, _m u y6ge n6 astu. J yfiy_m, p_ta suastlbhlh, s_cl_ na.h. tdbhyam: dat. of advantage On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

in possession, l_rospcri 0 acquisition. Do ye l_vtect more with blessings. astu na.h:

(p. _14, B 1).

p. 320f

MA.N .DUK__S
The following hymn, intended as a spell to produce ruin, is a panegyric of frogs, who are compared during the drought to heated kettles, and are described as raising their voices together at the commencement of the ruins llke Brahmin pupils repeating the lessons of their teacher, vii. 103. Metre: Tristubh; 1. Anu_..tubh.

1 sa. vatsar_m brahma_a

_a_ayana like

The fi'ogs having lain for a year, Brahmans _ractisi_g a vow, have uttered forth their voice roused by 2a_anya.

v_atacarm.a.h,

vaea .m Parj_tnyajinvitf_m p_4 man.ddka avadi.sub.,

sa_m.vatsar_m : ace. of duration of time (197, 2). _ahayanas _ : pf. pt. A. of _i lie (p. 155, f. n. 1). brf_hman._s: i.e. like Brahmins. vratacari_.as : i. e. practising a vow of silence. Parj_nya-jinvitAm : because the frogs begin to croak at the commencement of the rainy season; on the accent see p. 456, 2 o_ avfi_li.sur: is ao. bf vad (145, 1).

142

MAN..DUK._S

[vii. zo3,2

2 divy_, _.poabhi y_d enam ayan, When the heawnly waters came d_.'tim, n_ 6d.skam., saras{ 6Gy_- upon him lying like a dry leathernam, bag in a lake, then the sound of the g_v_m _ha n_ tnfiydr vatsinifrogs unites like the lowing of cozos nam. , accoml_anied by calves. mand._kan_.m eti
. A

vagnfir

_tr_ s_m

divya apah. : the rains, enam : collective ----the frogs ; cp. the sing. mand._tka.h in 4 "cused collectively. _yan : ipf. of i (p. 130). saras_: loc. of saras{ according to the primary i dec.(cp, p. 87). A driedup lake is doubtless meant, g_vfim: 102, 2 ; p. 458, c. 1. _tr_ (metrically lengthened): here as corr. to y_d (cp. p. 214).

3 y_d im enema tUlat5 abhy _var-

When he has raine'd u_on them

.sit the eager, the thirsty, the rainy agat_yam, season having come, one with a t_yavata._ larav._.m " - a_h_l_a, pitAram n_ pu- croak of joy a_roaehes the other trS, "while he _eaks, as a son (apany5 any_zn _pa v_dantam eti. proaches) his father. .

vii. los, 5]

_IAN. D.0K._S

143

im: see p. 220, 2. u_at_s (pr. pt. A. p]. of va_ desire) : lo_u3ingfor rain. ,tvarsit is. ao. of v.rs.: if the subject were expressed it would be Parjanya. prfLv._s.i lee. abs. (see 205, 1 b). akhlrhalik_ty_ : : see 184 d ; the final of this gd. may be regarded as retaining the original long vowel rather than metrically lengthening a short vowel, though it always appears with a in the Pada text. any_s i.e. ma_..d_kas.

4 any5 anytim tinu g.rbhn_ti enor, ap_m prasarg6 y_d _mandisatfizn, mand.Clko y_d abhiv.rs.ta.h k_nis.kan, p._ni.h samp.r_t_ h_ritena v_cam.

One of the two greets the other when they have revelled in the discltarge of the waters. When the frog, rained upon, leavs about, the speckled one _ningles his voice with {that of) the yellow one.

enos : gen.. du., of them two (112 a). g.rbhn, fiti : 3. s. pr. of grabh. amandis_tf_m : 3. du.._, is. ao. of mand exhilarate, man d._kas : in a collective sense, ksiniskan : 3. s. inj. int. of skand /cap (= kaniskandt), see 174 b. Note that this form in the Pada text is k_niskan, because in the later Sandhi s is not cerebralized before k (cp. 67). The use of the inj. with yhd is rare. sam-p.rhkt6 : 3. s.._. pr. of p.re mix.

5 Yftd eg_m any6 ani*tsya v_a_, fi_ktti_yeva v_dati _iks.am_na.h,

When one of them repeats the speect_of the other, as the learner

144 s_rvam t_4 p_rva

MA .1)I.DOKAS es_,m sam,_dheva apsti,

[vii. lo3, 5

that of his teacher, aU that of them is in unison like a lesson that eloquent ye repeat u_vonthe waters.

y_t suv_eo v_dathan_dhi

e.sKm: cp. enos in 4 a. sam._dhfi: the interpretation of c is uncertain because of the doubt as to the form and meaning of this word, and because of the many senses of p_rva. It has accordingly been very variously explained. The above rendering is perhaps the most probable, sam._d.h_ : inst. ofsam._dh, lit. growing together, then unison, harmony, pArvan, joint, then a section in Vedic recitation. Thus c would be an explanation of b, the voices of the frogs sounding together like those of pupils reciting a lesson after their teacher. vcidathana : see p. 125, f. n. 3 ; change, as often, from 3. prs. to 2. _tdhi : 176, 2 a (p. 209).

Ir :l

6 g6m_ym" _ko, aj_na_yur

_ika.h;

One lows like a cow, one bleats like a goat ; one is _eckled, one of them is yellow. Bearing a common name, they have different colours. In many ways they adorn their voice in speaking.

p._nir 6ko ; h_rita 6ka e._m. saman_m n_ma bibhrato virfapf_h., l_urut/4 v_oa.m anta.h, pipi_ar vhd-

g6mayus : cp. 2 c. la_[nis, haritas : cp. 4 d. samfinam : they are all called frogs, though they have different voices and colours. blbhratas : N. pl. pr. pt. of bh_. (p. 132). purutr_ : note that the suffix in words in which the vowel is always long in the Samhita text (as in devatr_ asmatr_, &c.) is long in the Pada text also ; while in others like _tra,in which it is only occasionally lengthened metrically, the vowel is ahvays short in that text. pipi_ur : they modulate the sound of their voices (cp. a),

vii. lo3, 8]

MAN .D_KAS

145

7 brahman.asoatlratr@_ s6mo, n LikeBrahminsattl_over-night s_iro n_ p_Lmg._mabhito,v_d- Soma sacrifice s_ealcing aroundas anta.h, it werea full Mke,ye celebrate tl_zt sa.mvatsar_sya t_cl _hah p_ri day oftlm yearwhich, Fro#s,as 0 h .s.tha, be#unthe rai_. y_n, man. dfikf_.h, pr_vrs_nam baA bhuva. atir_tr_ : this is the name of a part of the Soma sacrifice in the ritual of the Yajurveda. Its performance lasted a day and the following night. Its mention in the RV. shows that it is ancient. st_ro nt_ : as/t were a/ake, a hyperbolic expression for a large vessel filled with Soma. abh/tas : 177, 1. p_ri .stha: lit. be around, then celebrate; ep. p_ri car go round, then attend u_oon, honour; on the Sandhi, cp. 67 c. pr_v_{nam babh_va : luts become one that belongs to the rainy season.

8br_.hman._ts_h akrata_

somino

v_eam

Soma#ressing Brahmins, they have raised their voice, offering their yearlg l_rayer. Adhvaryu l_riests, l_eated, sweating, the9 appear; none of tlwm are hidde_

brtlhma k rnv_nta.h pa_ivatsar_x_am, adhvary_vo gharmin.a.h si_vid_v/r bhavanti;

190_

gdhi_ nt_ k6 it.

T_

146

MAN..DOKAS

[vii. 103,8

brahman. _sas : n_ need not be supplied (as in 1 b), the frogs being identified with priests, somiuas : celebrating a Soma sacrifice, which expresses much the same as s_ro n_ pfirn_m abhita.h in 7 b. A vacam akrata: cp. v_dantas in 7 b. akrata: 3. pl.-_, root ao. of k F (148, 1 b). brahma : with b cp. 7 c, d. gharminas is meant to be ambiguous: oppressed with the heat of the sun (frogs), busied with lwt milk (priests). Here we already have a reference to the Pravargya ceremony ill which milk was heated in a pot, and which was fsaniliar in the ritual of the Brahmanas. si_.vidan_s : pf. pt. __. of svid; note that the cerebralized initial of the root is restored in the Pads text ; cp. k_ni.ska_ in 4 c. _vis : see p. 266, b.

Wn

n
They have guarded the divi_e order of the twelvemonth : these _nen infi'inge _wt the season. In a year, the rai_z time haviny come, the "heatedmilk-offerings obtain rdease.

9 dev_hitim, jugupurdv_da_sya: .rttim. n_ro n_ pr_ minauti et_. . _ sa .mvatsar$, pr_v._.si agutayam, tapt_ gh_rm_ a_nuvate visaxg_m.

devahitim : on the accent see p. 456, 2 a jugupur : pf. of g'up 19roted. dvf_la_sya: note the difference of accent and inflexion between dv_la_a twelve (104)and dvfixla_ consisting of twelve, twelftk (107); supply samvatsar_sya from c. In the Aitareya Brahma.na the year, samvatsara, is called dv_da_a consisling of twelve months and caturvimha consisting of twenty-four half-months. The gem naturally depends on dev_hitim, as being in the same Plida. Prof. Jacobi understands dvf_la_sya as the ordinal twdfth supplying . masasya month, and making it depend on .rtdm in the next Pada. This interpretation is then used as evidence to show that the beginning of the year was held in the period of the RV. to com. mence with the rainy season at the time of the summer solstice, and taken in conjunction with another reference in the RV. td the rainy season at the period to furnish an argument for the very early date of the RV. But there is no trace here of any reference to the

vm. _]

vI_vE ImVXl#

147

end of the year : sam.vatsar6 in c denotes _in the course of the year at the rainy season '. ngras : here again no pm_icle of comparison, minmati: from mi damage; ep. 7 c, d. sam.vatsar6: cp. 203, "3 a. prfLv._.si_g_tAy_m : loc. abs. as in 3 b. tupt_ gharm_h, is meant to be ambiguous: heated milk-2ots with reference to the priests (cp. adhvarygvo gharmin.a.h in 8 c) and dried up cavities with reference to the frogs (cp. t._.y_vatas in 3 b). a_nuvate (3. p]. A. pr. of am._ obtain) visargt_m obtain release or discharge, i.e. the milk-pots are emptied (and become cool), and the cavities in which the frogs are hidden let thorn out (and are cooled by the rai,,), cp. _vir bhavanti in 8 d.

I0 g6mAyur ad@,d, ajgmAyur adgt, He that lows a cowhasgicen like p._finir ad_d, 0ht_rito no v_sfuai. _ts riches, he that bleats like a goat gt_vRm man d_kR dtidata.h _a.L . tam, sahasrasRv, l$ pr_ tiranta "_ h ayu. has given them, the speclded one has given them, and the yellow one. The frogs giving us hundreds of cows tgrolong our life in a thousandfold Soma ln'essing.

g6mgyus &e. (cp. 6 a) : the various kinds of frogs are here represented as taking the place of liberal institutors of sacrifice in giving bountiful gifts, dttdatas: N. pl. of pr. pt. of d_ give (cp. 156}. sahasras_v_ : lee. of _ime like samvatsar6 in 9 c ; the term probably l_fe_ to a Soma sacrifice lasting a year with three pressings a day (amounting roughly to a thousand), d is identical with iii. 53, 7 d.

VlgVE I)EV_&H
The comprehensive group called Vifive dev_. or All-Gods occupies an important poaif2on,for at least forty entire hymns are addressed to them. It is an artificial sacrificial group in_ended to include all the gods in order L2

148

YL_VE

DEVAIzI.

[viii. 29, i

that none should be left out in laudations meant for the who!e pantheon. The following hymn though traditionally regarded as meant for the Vive dev_l._is a collection of riddles, in which each stanza describes a deity by his characteristic marks, leaving his name to be guessed. The deities meant in the successive stanzas are : 1. Soma, 2. Agni, 8. Tva.Ltr,4. Indra, 5. Rudm, 6. P_an, 7. Vi_nu, 8. A_vins,9. Mitra-Varuna, 10. Afigirases. viii. 29. Metre : Distichs of a Jagati + G4yatri (p. 445, a.).

I
1 babhr6a6ko visuna.h sfin_ro One is brown, varied in form, bountiful, young. He adorns him. self with golden ornament. yd.v_,, a_i ahkto hirany_yam,

babhrds : this epithet is distinctive of Soma, to whom it is applied eight times, while it otherwise refers to Agni only once, and to l_udra in one hymn only (ii. 33). It alludes to the colour of the juice, otherwise described as arun.g ruddy, but most often as h_ri tawny, vl.sun.as: probably referring to the difference between the plant and the juice, and the mixtures of' the latter with milk and honey, ytivA: here and in a few other passages Soma, like Agni, is called a youth, as produced anew every day. aflji : cognate ace. {p. 300, 4). afikte : 3. s. A. of aflj anoi/nt, with middle sense anoints himself, hiranygyam: cp. ix. 86, 43, mgdhung abhi afljate.. hira_.yap_v_ _su g.rbhn.ato they anoint him (Soma) with mead; 1furl. fying with gold, they seize him in tl_,,rn (the waters), in alhmion to fingers with golden rings.

2 y6nim 6ka _ sasada dy6tano, ant_ devf_m m_dhiral_,

One lugs, shining, oeeulaied his rece)#aele, the wise among the gods.

ydnim : the sacrificial tireplaee ; cp. iii. 29, 10, ay_t.m te y6nir .rtviyo, y_to j&t6 ttxoeath_h. : tli.m j_n__un, Agna, _ sida this is thy regular receptacle, born from which thou didst shine: ?enowing it, Agni,

viii. 29,5]

ISVE

DEVA.I_

149

occupy it. dydtanas : the brightness of Agni is constantly dwelt on. mddhiras: the wisdom of Agni is very frequently mentioned; in i. 142, 11 he is called devd devdsu mddhimh the wise god among the go&.

3 v_im

6ko bibharti

hi_sta _ya-

One bears in his hand an iron axe, strenuous anzo_g the gods.

s_m, ant_r dev6.su nidhruvi.h.

v_im: this weapon is connected elsewhere only with Agni, tile .Rbhus, and the Maruts. But Agni cannot be meant because he has already been described in 2 ; while the Rbhus and the Maruts would only be referred to in the plural (cp. 10). But x. 53, 9 indicates sufficiently what god is here meant: Tv_.s_.. ap_s_m ap_stamal_.. _i_ite nf:n_p, para_lim su_yas_m Tva4._T,_wst active of workers, _ow sharpens his axe nmde of good iron. nidh_uvis: strenuous as the artificer of the gods, a sense supported by ap_stamas in the above quotation.

4 v_ram 6ko bibharti tam : t_na v_tr_ni jighnate.

l_sta

-'ahi-

One bears a bol_ _laced in his hand : with i$ he _ays his foes.

_-hitam : pp. of dh_ Dlace ; accent, p. 462, 13 b. jighnate : 3. s. pr. A. of ban sZay, see p. 432. v_jram : this, as his distinctive weapon, shows that Indra is meant.

4f_r_1"_r_iTf _" f'__ _r__

_m_

1_rdi: __ I ___ I_'__j_ I

5 tigm/_m 6ko bibharti h_sta _yudiem, _ficir ugr6 j_l_. abhesaja.h,

One, bright, fierce, with cooZing remedies, bears in his hand a sharD_ weapon.

150

vISVE

DEV._.H

[viii. 29, 5

_yudham : bow and arrows are usually the weapons of Rudra ; in vii. 46, 1 he is described by the epithets sthir_dhanvan having a strong bow,ks.ipr6su swift-arrowed, tigm_yudha having a slu_r2o weapo12, and in vii. 46, 3 his light_2ing shaft, didyait, is mentioned, ugr_s: this epithet is several times applied to Rudra (cp. il. 33). jgl_.abhesajas : this epithet is applied to Rudra in i. 43, 4 ; Rudra is also called j_l_sa, and his hand is described as j_l_.a (as well as bhesaj_) in ii. 83, 7 ; these terms are applied to no other deity, b has the irregularity of two redundant syllables (p. 438, 2 a).
. T* .....

6 pathg 6ka.h yathA

pipAya ;

tgskaro

One makes thepathsl_ros_erous; like a thief he knows of treasures.

es_, veda mdh_nam. path_is : it is characteristic of P(l.san (vi. 54) to be a knower and guardian of paths, pfpAya: pf., with lengthened red. vowel, from Ao _ pi (= pyA) make full or abundant ; cp. vi. 53, 4 : v-i path5 vajasataye cinahi clear the vaths for the gain of wcalth (addressed to Pasan) ; and x. 59, 7 : dadgLtu ptina.h Pfis._ pathi_m y_ suasti.h let .P_.san give us back tlwloath that is_ropitious, tgskaras : to be taken with b ; like a thief he knows where hidden treasure is to be found; cp. vi. 48, 15 (addressed to PIlsan) : gvlr gf.lh_ vgsft karat, suv6dg no v_sfi karat may he ma_e hidden wealth manifest, may he make wealth easy for us _o find ; he also finds lost cattle ; ep. vl. 54, 5-10. yatha_a : unaccented (p. 453, 8 B d) ; nasalized to avoid hiatus (p. 23,f.n. 1). veda: with gen. (202 Ae). mdhmam: " - * accent (p. 458, 2 a) ; lhe final syllable to be pronounced dissyllabically.

7 tr_.i 6ka urugfiy6 vi oakrame, y_tra devaso m_danti,

One, w/de-/_ac/mj, _wkes three sb,wles to" _here the god, are exs h_larated.

viii. 29, 9]

VISVE

DEVA._

151

trlni: cognate ace. (p. 300, 4) supply vikr_ma_Rni (cp. y_ya urds.u tri.sfi, vikr_,mane_u, i. 154, 2). The three strides are characteristic of Vi.s.nu(see i. 154). urugf_y_ : an epithet distinctive of Visnu (cp. i. 154, 1.3. 5). y_tra : to the place (the highest step) where (p. 240) the gods drink Soma (cp. i. 154, 5). b has the trochaic variety of the GayatrI cadence (see p. 439, 3 a, _).

8 vlbhir du_ carata, 6kay_ sah_ : pr_ prav_6va vasatah.,

"With birds two fare, togethei. with one woman : like two travellers the_ go on journeys.

vibkis : cp. i. 118, 5, p_ri v_,m _ivf_h pats .mg_, v_yo vahantu arus._.h let the flying steeds, the ruddy birds, drive you (Ahvins) round. dv_ . . dkay_ sah_: the two Ahvihs with their one companion, Sarya; cp. l. e. ; _ yam r_tham, yuvatis tis.thad .., duhit_, S_ryasya the maiden, the daughter of tl_e Sun, mounted your car; also A v. 73, 5: _ y_d vKm Surya r_tham tis.that when Sary(_ mounted your car pr_ vasatas : they go on a journey in traversing the sky in their car. laravasa : this word occurs here only, apparently in the sense of one who is abroad on travels (like the post-Vedic pravf_sin) ; Jn the Sara'as and in classical Sanskrit it means sojourn abroad. Some scholars regard l_ravf_s6va as irr. contraction for pravas_m ira: they travel as it were on a journey.

9 a_4o 4_ oakra_ upam_ divi : samra_a saxlair_uti,

Two, as highest, have ma& for themsdves a seat in heaven: two sovereign kings who receive_adted butter as their draught. ,_

152
.L._

VI_VE

DE__ ._

[viii. 20, 9

samraJa, as N. du., is applied to Mitra-aruna exclusively. cakrgto: 8. du. pf. A. of k.r with middle sense, make for onesdfi .t ._ npama .L : No du. in apposition to dv_, further explained by samraja.

___ __ 10 _reanta ake rata :

.L

U
2.

_ sama man-

t _ll_

I _i_'q_q__ U

m_hi

Singing, some thought of a great chant : by it they caused the sun to shine.

tana suryam

arocayan,

grcantas : singing is characteristic of the Ahgirases ; e.g.i. 62, 2, s_ma yan_.. _rcanta ._figiraso g_ _vindan the chant by which the Ai_girases, si_2ging,found the cows ; the Maruts are described in x. 78, 5 ,_ vi_vtirftp_ _.flgiraso n_ s6maabhi.h manifold with chants like the Aizgirases. The Afigirases again are those yg rtana s_'Tam _rohayan divl who by their rite caused the sun to mount to heaven (x. 62, 3). Saya.na and some other interpreters think that the Atris are meant. But nothing is ever said of the singing or the chants of the Atris. Again, though in one hymn (v. 40) it is said in the last s_anza that the Atris found the sun: y_m v_i s_ryam Sv_rbh_nus t_mas_ _vidhyad, iktrayas t_m gnv avindan the Atris found the sun which Svarbhanu had assailed with darkness (9), this is only a repetition of what is attributed to Atri in the sing. : gfi.lhg .m s_tryam tAmasg, . br_hman_ avindad _.tri .h A tri by prayer fowad the sun hidden by darkness (6)and _.tril_. s_a-yasya divi c_ksur _dh_t Atrisl_laced the eve of the sun in heaven (8) ; and in the AV. and the _B., it is Atri (not the Atds) who performed a similar act. Thus even this deed is not characteristic of the Atris (plural), but at most of Atri (singular). The Afigirases must thel_fore undoubtedly be meant here, ake : the pl. is here used to express an indefinite group beside aims and dv_ in the rest of the hymn (cp. 105). manvata: 8. pl. ipf. A. (without augment) of man think, arocayan : ipf. ca of ruc shine.

s0tA
As the Soma sacrifice formed the centre of the ritu_l the RV., the of god Soma is one of the mosO prominent deities. With rather more than 120 hymns (all those in M_ala ix, and about half a dozen in others)

viii. 48]

SOMA

158

addre_ed to him, he comes next to Agni (i. 1) in importance. The anthropomorphism of his character is less developed than that of Indra or arun.a because the plant and its juice are constantly present to the mind of the poet. Soma has tenible-and sharp weapons, which he grasps in his hand ; he wields a bow and a thousand-pointed'hhaft. He has a car which is heavenly, drawn by a team like _yu's. He is also said to l_de on the same car as lndra. He is the best of charioteers. In about half a dozen hymns he is associated with Indra, hgni, Ph.san, and Rudra respectively as a dual divinity. He is sometimes attended by _he Maruts, the close allies of Indra. He comes to the saelifiee and receives offerings on the sacred grass. The Soma juice, which is intoxicating, is frequently termed rad_hu or 8u,eet d,_ught, but oftenest called indu the bright drop. The colour of Soma is brown (babhr_), ruddy (aru.n_), or more usually tawny (h&ri). The whole of the ninth book consists of incantations chanted over the tangible Soma, while the stalks are being pounded by stones, the juice passes through a woollen strainer, and flows into wooden vats, in which it is offered to the gods on the litter of sacred grass (barhis). These processes are overlaid with confused and mystical imagery in endless variation. The pressing stones with which the shoot (am._) is crushed are called _dri or gr_vam The pressed juice as it passes through the filter of sheep's wool is usually called lo_vam_na or laun_n_ flowil_g cZear. This purified (uno mixed) Soma is sometime_ called _udclh_pure, but much oftener dukr_ or fiuoi b,'ight ; it is offered almost exclusively to V_yu or Indra. The filtered Soma flows into jars (kal_fia) or vats (drhna), where it is mixed with water and also with milk, by which it is sweetened. The verb mr.j." cleanse is used with reference to this addition of water and milk. Soma is spoken of as having three kinds of admixture (_ir) : milk (gh), sour milk (dfi_lhi), and barley (y_iva). The admixture being alluded to as a garment or bright robe, Soma is described as ' decked with beauty'. Soma is pressed three timesa day: the .Rbhus are invited the eveningpressing, to Indra to the midday one,which ishisexclusively, while,he morning libation t ishisfirst drink. The threeabodes(sadh_tstha) Soma which arementioned proof bablyrefer threetubsusedinthe ritual. to Soma's connexionwii.h the waters, resulting from the admixture, isexpressed inthe most various ways. He isthedropthatgrows inthewaters ; he isthe embryo of thewatersortbeirchild theyare hismothersor his ; eisters; is lordand king of streams he produceswatersand causes he ; heavenand earthto rain. The sound made by thetrickling Soma isoften alluded to,generally hyperholical in language, ithverbsmeaning toroaror w bellow,or even thunder. He isthus commonly called bullamong the a waters,hich figurescows. Soma is w a moreoverswift, being often compared with a steed,sometimes with a birdflying'to wood. Owing to his the

154

SOMA

[viii. 4s

yellow colour Soma's brilliance is the physical aspect most dwelt upon by the poets. He is then often likened to or associated with the sun. The exhilarating power of Soma led to its being regarded as a divine drink bestowing immortal life. Hence it is called am_a dtu_tght ofimmo_'_ tality. All the gods drink Soma; they drank it to gain immortality; it confers immortality not only on gods, but on men. It has, moreover, medicinal powem: Soma heals whatever is sick, making the blind to see and the lame to walk. Soma also stimulates the voice, and is called 'lord of speech'. He awakens eager thought: he is a generator of hymns, a leader of poets, a seer among pl_ests. Hence his wisdom is much dwelt upon ; thus he is a wise seer, and he knows the races of the gods. The intoxicating effect of Soma most emphasized by the poets is the stimulus it imparts to Indm in his conflict with hostile powers. That Soma invigorates Indra for the fight with V.rtra is mentioned in innumerable passages. Through this association Indra's warlike exploits and cosmic actions come to be attributed to Soma independently. He is a victor unconquered in fight, . born for battle. As a warrior he wins all kinds of wealth for his worshippers. Though Soma is several times regarded as dwelling or growing on the mountains (like EIaoma in the Avesta), his true m4gin and abode are regarded as in heaven. Soma is the child of heaven, is the milk of heaven', and is purified in heaven. He is the lord of heaven ; he occupies heaven, and his place is the highest heaven. Thence he was brought to earth. The myth embodying this belief is that of the eagle that b_ings Soma to Indra, and is most fully dealt with in the two hymns iv. 26 and 27. Being the most important of herbs, Soma is said to have been born as the loxd (p_ti) of plants, which also have him as their king; he is a lord of the wood (v_i_nasp_ti), and has generated all plants. But quite apart from his connexion with herbs, Soma is, like other leading gods, called a king: he is a king of rivers ; a king of the whole earth ; a king or father of the gods ; a king of gods and mortals. In a few of the latest hymns of the RV. Soma begins to be mystically identified with the moon ; in the A. Soma several times means the moon ; and in the B_hman.as thisldentification has already become a commonplace. We know that the preparation and the offering of Soma (the Aves_an Haoma) was already an important feature of Indo-Iraniau worship. In both the RV. and the Avesta it is stated that the stalks were pressed, that the juice was yellow, and was mixed with milk ; in both it grows on mountains, and its mythical home is in heaven, whence it comes down to earth ; in both the Soma draught has become a mighty god and is called a king ; in both there are man,y other identical mythological traits relating to Soma. It is possible that the belief in an in_xicating divine beverage, the home of which was in heaven, goes back to the Indo-European period. It

/.

viii. 4s, 2]

SOMA

155

must then have been regarded as a kind of honey mead (Skt. m_dhu, Gk. _i0t,, Anglo-Saxon medu). The name of _oma (_ Haoma) means pressed fldce, being derived from tile root su (= Av. hu) press. viii. 48. ]_etre : Tris.tubh ; 5. JagatL

1 sv_d6r

abhak_.i

v_yasa.h

sume-

Wisely

I have _artake;_

of the

dh_.h sufidhio varivovittarasya, vihvo y_.m dew ut_ m_rtiaso, abhi sam. c_r-

szoeet food that stirs good though/s, best banisher of care, to which all gods and mortals, come together. calling it ho_ey,

m_4hu "bruv_nto_. anti.

_bhak.si : 1. s. __. s ao. of bhaj share ; with partitive gen. (202 A e). sumedh_s: appositionally, as a wise man; svadhy_s: gen. of svadh_ (declined like rathe, p. 85, f. n. 4). y_m : m. referring to the n. v_yas, as if to s6ma. abhi sam c_ranti : p. 469, B a.

2 ant_ avayat_

ea praga,/kditir h_raso

bhav_si, sakhi_m _nu jur_y_

If thou hast entered within, thou shalt be Aditi, aI_easer of divi_c 0 Indu, of Indra, the _ole, u_'ath. enjoying like an ._d_nce Mayest _wu, the frie_dslfil_ obediert _rare us tO u,ealth.

&Liviasya.

:[ndav, _[nd_asya _.an_h., _irkag_va r dhy_l_. dhdram,

156

SOMA

[viii. ds,
A _

ant_ : cp. note on vii. 86, 2 b. Soma is here addressed, pragas : the Padapa.tha analysis of this as pr_ _gR.h is evidently wrong, because in a principal sentence it must be pr_ ag_.h (p. 468, 20) or in a subordinate one pra-_gR.h (p. 469, 20 B); here it is the latter, because of ca ----if (p. 229, 3). _ditis: because Aditi releases" from sin (e. g. an_tg_st-v_m no/kditi .h krnotu may Aditi produce sinlessness for us, i. 162, 22); that is, may Soma purify us within. ]friday: vocatives in o are always given as Pragrhya in the Pada text (o iti) even though their Sandhi before vowels may be av or a in the Sa .mhita text ; cp. note on it. 83, 3 b. _r_us..ti : this word occurs only here, and its meaning is uncertain; the most probable sense is obedient mare. r_yd : this analysis of the Padapa.tha makes the construction doubtful because an ace. is wanted as parallel to dhfiram ; has may be supplied ; then the sense would be : ' as a willing mare advances the yoke (of a car), so mayst thou advance (us or the yoke of the sacrifice) for the attainment of wealth.' rdhyas : root ao. op. of rdh thrive.

3 _pRma s6mam j am._tR abhf_ma; ]rim nfm_m _m_n k_.avad _ r_tih ? )r_Lmu dhfxrtir, amrt_, rn_iasya ?

We have drunk Soma; we have the light; we havefound the gods. WT_atcan hostility now do _o us, and what themalice of mortal man, 0 _mmortal one ?

_gamma jy6t_.r i _wdama dovma, become immortal ; we have gone to

This stanza describes the mental exaltation produced by drinking Soma. Note the use of the aorist four times and its characteristic sense (p. 345, C.). _pKma: root ao. of p_ drink, abhftma : root ao. of bhft become. _ganma : root ao. of g_m go. jy6tis : acc. of the goal (197 A 1). hvid_ma: a ao. of 2. rid find. k ._'Qavat: 3. s. pr. sb. of kr. do (p. 134). am.rta: Soma.

viii. 4s, 5]

SOMA.

157

4 _m

no bhava hrc_ _ pi_, Indo; pit6va, Soma, sfm_ve su_6va.h, sakheva s_khya, uru_am, sa, dl_. ra.h, .t .. pr_ n.a ayur jxvase, Soma, t_ri.h,

Do good to our heart when drunk, 0 lndu," kindly like a father, 0 Soma, to his son, thoughtful like a fi.iend to his friend, 0 far-famed one, prolong our years that we may rive, 0 Soma.

_m hrd_ refreshing to the heart occurs several times ; the emphasizing pel. _ is here added to the dat. pr_ na.h: Sandhi, 65 c. jiv_se : dat. inf. of jiv live. _ : is ao. inj. from t_ cross.

,_ _ _,r_ ___ _ _,'_

_r_:_',rt_r_'q,

___ _ _ __r2-_:, _'_:,___:_

_r., _ _: __. ___-___ _

5 im_ m_ l_it_ ya_isa uru_. _vo, _tham n_ g_va.h, s_m anfiha l_rvasu; t_ m_ rak$.antu visr_sa_ earltrod, ut_ m_ sr_mf_d yavayantu in. davab. varivovittarasya in 1 b. an_ha:

These glorious, freedom-giving (drops}, ye have knit rae together _n ray joints like straps a car ; let those dro2_s_rotect me from break. i_u a leg and save rae fi'om 3 disease.

this seems to be an irregular pf.

ira6: supply indavas

from d. ya_sas

: p. 59.

urus.y_vas:

cp.

158

SOMA

[viii. _s, 5

form from nah bind for nanaha ; cp. gdbhi.h s_m.naddho asi thou art bound together with straps (said of a car) ; another irregularity is the 2. p]. strong radical vowel (ep. 137, 2). visrhsas: abl. inf. (of vi-srat!a,s) with ]_ttracted object in the abl. earltrad: p. 337, 3a. Note that Pada c is a Tri.s.tubh. yavayantu : es. ipv. of yu separate. Change in c and d, as often, from 2. to 3. prs.

,ran'__ _ ,_ "(:_"__ _r _r_r__ _ "_r,',',',',',',',_l i _i _

i "_'_t_: t i ,T:

6agni.m n_ m_ didipa.h ; pr_

mathittlm

s_m

Like fire lJmlle._ by frictiort inflame me ; illumine us ; make us wealthier. For the, in thy intoxication, 0 Soma, I regard myself as rich. _Enler (into us) for__ros2acrit#.

cak#a, ya; k.rnuhi v_isyaso na.h. _tha hi to m_da _, Soma, m_nyo revam ira. prg carg pub.tim gcha.

didipas : red. ao. inj. of dip shine, prti eak0.aya : es. of oaks see (cp. 3 b). k.rnuhi: cp. p. 134; accented as beginning a sentence. v_syasas : A. pl. of vtLsyAm, (epv. of vtLsu, 108, 2 a). gth_ (metris cally lengthened): then, when inflamed by Soma. rev_n: predicatively with mgnyo (196 a), ira being sometimes added, prti carK (mett{cally lengthened): cp. 9 a, ant_ ca prggA.h, pu_.tlm tlcha: give us actual prosperity also.

. ___,,,_ _

_,#_, ,,_, _, _

>

,_"

viii. 4s, s]

SOFIA

159

1
7 isir@n, te m_nas_ eut_sya a bhak?im_hi, pitriasyeva r_y_.h, S6ma rgjan, tgrir, gh_niva s_io prg n.a _yfims.i

,,

Ofthecprcssed with devoted mind we would partake as of paternal weal#_. King Soma, l_'olong our years as the sun the days of sj0ring.

vfisar_ni,

bhaksimghi: s ao. op. of bha_ sha_:e, pitryasya ira: because Soma is regarded as a father, cp. 4 b. S6ma rKian: being a single voc. (rfijau is in apposition), S6ma alone is accented (p. 465, 18). prg has: cp. 4d. _ris: ep. 4d. _la_ni: 91, 2.

8 S6ma r_jan, m.r.l_y_ na.h su.Kin# Soma, be gracious _o us asti ; for welfare ; we are thy devotees : t_va smasi vratifis : tAsya vial- know that. There arise might and d.hi. wrath, 0 In&t : abandon us not _lartid_k.sa ut_ manydr, Indo; according to _he desire of our m_ n6 ary6 anuk_m_m p_r_ foe. d_..

(p. 467, 19 A c); final vowel metrically lengthened, svasti: shortened inst. s. (p. 80, f. n. 2) used adverbially like a dat. ; this word though obviously = su + asti is not analysed in the Padap_.tha (ep. note on i. 1, 9). smasi: 1. pl. pr. of as be. t_mya: with vial

m_..hiy_:

accented as beginning

a sentence after an initial roe.

160

SOMA

[viii. 48,8

know about, 202 A c. vidd.hi : 2. s. ipv. of rid know. _larti : 8. s. pr. int. of .r go (174 a). nry_s: gen. of ari foe (ep. p. 81, f. n. 1 ; 99, 3), dependent on anul_m_m ; ep. _rati_ in 8 e. d_.h : 2. s. root ao. inj. of da give.

9 turin, hi has tand_, Soma, gop_, z _ . , _ , _ gatre-gatrem_atthan.rcak._a.h, y_t to vay_m prammama vra" _ t_ni, sa no m.r.la su._alda_, dove, v_sya.h,

Since thou art the 19rotector of our body, 0 Soma, thou as surve_or of men hast settled in ever!l limb. If toe infringe thine ordinances, then be gracious to us as our good fi'iend, higher welfare. 0 god, for

t_n_ias : gen. of toax_t bed#. gop_ : 97 A 2 (p. 79). g_e-g_tre : 18.9 (3. _i-_attha: 2. s. pf. of sad ; eerebralization of s (67 a); metrical lengthening of final a (p. 441, a). y_d: p. 242, 8. prnmmama: sb. pr. of pr_-mL s_: p. 294, b. su-._akh_; on the eerebralization of s see 67 b ; the accent is that of a By. (p. 455, c a) ; that of a Karmadharaya (p. 455, d 1) is su-._ildaR ; the former is irregularly used in the latter sense, v_syas: the epv. adj. is here used as an ace. adverb (p. 301, b).

n:

i,

viii. 4s, 1_]

SOMA

161

10 rdfxd_rena sfildxi_ sacoya, y6 mfi n_ rlsyed, dharia_va, p_t_.h, ay_m. y_ s6mo ni_dh_yi asm6, t_smrt lfndram pratiram emi _yu.h.

I would associate w_h the wholesome friend who having been drunk would _ot injure me, 0 lord of the bays. For (the enjoyment of) that Soma which has been de2_ositedin us, I a2rproach fndra 1o _rolong our years.

.rdfid_ren_: not analysed in the Padap_t.tha (cp. note on ii. 33, 5 c); A cp. tv_m has tanv5 gopa.h in 9 a. s_khyfi : 99, 2. y6 n_ ris.yot : cp. 4 a. harya_va: a characteristic epithet of Indra, who as the great Soma drinker is here addressed, nyhdh_yi: 3. s. ao. ps. of dhf_/rut; this (like pragas_ in 2 a} is irregularly analysed in the Padaprt.tha as ni _dh_yi instead of ni-fi_lh_yi (p. 469, B). asm6 : loc. (p. 104) ; Pragrhya (26 c). omi : 1. s. pr. of i go to with ace. (197, A 1). pratlram: ace. inf. of t._ cross (p. 336, 2 a) governing the ace. ayus (cp. 11 d}. t_smai : for the sake of that = to obtain or enjoy that, final dat. (p. 314, B 2).

l_,_nFd_,_:

_I: I _r'_1_ I a_-d_T1"_: I_!I:

11 _pa tya asthnr amra, anaxva nlr atrasan, t_misicir _bhai.suh.. II _ s6m5 asm_Tx aruhad vihfiy_ : h _ganma y_ltra pratir_nta ayu..

Tlwse ailments have started off, diseases have _ed away, the _owers of darkness have been affrigl_ted. Soma has moun_ed in us witl_ might : we have gone to where men l_rolong their years.

asthur: 8. pl. root ao. of sth_. atrasan: the ipf. is here irregularly used beside the two aorists; ep. the uniform use of the ao, in 3. t_mi_ieis : this word, as occurring here only, is somewhat doubtful in sense ; but i_ is probably a f. adj. formed from a stem in

162

SOMA

[viii. 4s,1 1

aficadded to t_imis (int_mis-r_t _rkm.ss) cp.93a and 95. The : meaning is thata draughtof Soma drives away disease nd the a powersof darkness (cp. b). _bhais.ur s ao.of bhifear. _,aru3 : hat: a ao. ofruh" cp. theEnglish phrase,go to thehead'.tlganma ' y_tra:= ' have arrived t thepoint we a when '. d isidentical with L 118,16 d ; it referso therenewal t oflifetdawn. a

12 y6 na indu.h, pitaro, h.rtsd pit6, _martio m_rti_h Rvivdfia, t_smai S6m_ya ema: havis& vidh-

The dro_ drunk in our hearts, .Fathers, that immortal has

entered us mortals, to that Soma we would _ay worship with oblation ," we would abide in his mere9 and good graces.

m_..lik6 asya sumatRu sigma,

pitaras: the Fathers, often spoken of as Soma-loving (som,y_), are called to witness (ep. 13 a). h.rts6 pith.h : ep. 2 a antd_ ca pr_gft.h and 10 c y_h s6mo ni_dh_yi asmd.

_fT :

13 tuGm., Soma, pit._bhi.h sa .mvid_n6, 2. _ . 1. anu dyavaprthxvx _ tatantha. td_mai ta, Inclo, havis_ vidhema : _ J. vay_m aiRma p_tayo raym. am.

Tlwu, 0 Soma, uniting with the _athers, hast extended thyself over Heaven and Earth. To thee as such, 0 Indu, we wozdcl pay worshi2_ with oblation : we would be lords of riches.

viii. 48, 15]

SOMA

163 : = hast become

sam-ridings : se_ x. 14, 4 b. gnu #Ltatantha famous in. d is identical with iv. 50, 6 d.

__

___

_m-c, i __T_: _5__, _N, _:,

14 tr_t_ro dev_, _dhi mR no nidr_ i_ata, vaygm SSmasya 2. yasa.h, suv_raso vldgtham

voeat_ no. mStg j_lpi.h. vi_v_ha pri_ vadema,

Ye :protecting gods, spea_ for us. .Let not slee2 overl_owerus, nor idle taZk. We aZways dear to Soma, _ch in strong sons, wotdd utter divine worship.

tr_t_ro dev_.h: accent, see note on 7 c. ,_dhi voeat_: 2. pl. ao. ipv. of vac sl_eak ; final vowel metrically lengthened ; -- take our part, defend us (nas, dat.), nidr_ : probably for md_.h: see note on svadhf_, x. 129, 5d. _ata: 3. s. sb. A. (not inj., which correct_ p. 872/; with gen. has (202, A a). nidr_ and j_lpi.h probably refer to the vows of waking and silence in the rite of initiation (dik.sfi) to the Soma sacrifice, c d are identical with it. 12, 15 c d excepting that there ta Indra takes the place of SSmasya. prlyasas: with gem (p. 822 C).

_ _ _I: _-_ __ _
_ _ __ _@FITI" I '_-_I-_: ___ml_ _ ._-_ n

_:, _'_: ____ ___:_:_

_'_I _:_I-_ I_IT_J_ I @_I_: I _ I _r_: I

15 tu_.m nab., Soma, vi@v_to vaThou art, 0 @oma, a giver of yodl_, strength to us on aU sides. Thou tug_. suarvid. _. vi_i& n_ks.&l_, art a finder of light..Do thou, as ,_2

164 tudm ha, Inda, _tibhi.h saj6_.h p_hi pa_c_t_cl ut_ vf_ pur_stgt,

SOMA surveyor thou, 0

[viii. 4s, 15 of men, enter us. Do Indu, protect us behind wilh lhine, aids ac-

and before eo_vlant.

vi_: final vowel metrically lengthened. Inda: for Indav (21 b) ; on the Padapa.tha, cp. note on 2 c. fltlbhis to be taken with saj6s_, ut_ v_ : or -- and.

FUNERAL

HYMN

The RV. contains a group of five hymns (x. 14-18) concerned with death and the future life. From them we learn that, though burial was also practised, cremation was the usual method of disposing of the dead, and was the main source of the mythology relating to the future llfe. Agmi conveys the corpse to the other world, the Fathers, and the gods. He is besought to preserve the body intact and to burn the goat which is sacrificed as his portion. During the process of cremation Agni and Soma are besought to heal any injury that bird, beast, ant, or serpent may have inflicted on the body. The way to the heavenly world is a distant path on which Savit_ (i. 35) conducts and Pfi.san (vi. 54) protects the dead. Before the pyre is lighted, the wife of the dead man, having lain beside him, arises, and his bow is taken from his hand. This indicates that in earlier times his widow and his weapons were burnt with the body of the husband. Passing along by the path trodden by the Fathers, the spirit of the dead man goes to the realm of light, and meets with the Fathers who revel with Yama in the highest heaven. Here, uniting with a glorious body, he enters upon a life of bliss which is free from imperfections and bodily frailties, in which all desires are fulfilled, and which is passed among the gods, especially in the presence of the two kings Yama and Varun.a. x. 14. Metre: Tri_.tubh; 13. 14. 16. Anu_tubh; 15. B_'hatL

x. 14, 2]

FUNERAL

HYMN

165

1 pareylvamsam, prav_to mah_r gnu, bahdbhya.hp&nth&manupaspa_ n_m, Yaivasvat_m samg_manam j_n&n_m, ... Yam_m rajanam havls_ duvasya.

Him who has passed away along the mighty steeps and has spied out the path for many, him the son of Vivasva_t, the assembler ofpeo.ple, Yama the king, do thou _resent with oblatwn.

a is a JagatI (see p. 445, f. n. 7). pareyxvamsam : pf. pt. act. " " . aylva.msam (89 a) of i go, with ptlr_ away. prav_tas: the steep paths leading to the highest heaven where Yama dwells ; cp. ix. 113, &._ 8, yt_tra raja Vaivasvat6, yt_tr&var6dhanam div_.h., t_tra xn_m am._ta.m k.rdhi where the king, the son of Vivasvant, and where the secret pZace of heaven is, there do thou (Soma) make me immortal. mah_s : A. pl. f. of m_h great, p&nth&m : 97, 2 a. Vaivasvat_m : Yama is in several passages called by this patronymic ; of. also 5 c, and x. 17, 1 : Yam_sya mat_,- paryuhy_m_nfi _ mah6 jaya'- Vivas_ vata.h the mother of Yama being married as the wife of the g_at Vivasvant. bahdbhyas: for the many that die and go to the other world, anu-paspa_fm_m: pf. pt. A. of spa_i see. sa.mg_manam: as gathering the dead together in his abode, rajanam : Yama is several times called a king, but never expressly a god. duvasya : addressed to the sacrificer.

m-<+@' ;_:
2 Yam6 no g_tdm pratham6 veda: n_io_ g_vy_tir gpabhartav_ _atr& na.h p_rv_ pit_ra.h re_ia',
1.. Z

@',
Yama l_s first found out the way for us : this .pasture is not to be u. _ak.en away. Whitl_r our former laa- fathers have passed away, thither those that have been born sinee(l_S away) ah_ tJ_eirseveral.paths. vi-

ena ]ajtffi_.h

pathi_ _nu sv_]_

166

FUNERAL

HYMN

Ix. 14,

Yam_s : a explains what is said of Yama in the preceding stanza viveda: pf. of 2. vidfind, g_vy_tis : used figuratively to express the abode which Yama has found for those who die. _pa-bhartav_i: dat. inf. with double accent (p. 452, 7); her_ it has a passive force (p. 335, a). b is most naturally to be taken as forming a hemisiich with a, not as beginning a new sentence antecedent to y_tra. The exact sense of ed is uncertain owing to the doubtful intel_retation of en_ and jajfi_n_s. The former word is probably corr. to y_tra, and the latter the frequent pf. pt. A. of jan generate. It might be from jfi_ know (from which, however, this pt. does not seem" to occur elsewhere) : the meaning would then be, ' knowing the way thereby (end),' because Yama found it for them. sv_s: by their ow'a l_aths, each by his own, each going by himself.

_--_,,_--_-__ __: __: _,,_:,_:, _i_ _ I __ _.:, __:, _ __ i

_i-_ _t_ _ _ __T

3 M_tali Kavy_ir, Yam_ _figiroblair, BflmspAtir l_.kvabhir v_ .v_h_nigh., yam. ca dev_ v_v.rdhdr, y6 ca devon, sv_h_ any6, svadh_y_ny6 anti. mad-

_Matal_having grown strong with the Kavyas, Yama with the Ahgi. rases, Brhas'pati with the R.kvans, whom the gods have made strong and who (have made strong) the gods, some rejoice _n the call Sv_hd, others in the offering to the dead.

M_tali: mentioned only here ; one of seven m. stems in i (100, I b). Sayan.a thinks this means Indra because that god's charioteer (in later times) is m_ttali and therefore m_tali (N. of m_talin) is ' he who is accompanied by m_tali'; but the accent of words in in is invariably on that syllable (p. 454 B a). Kavydis : name of a group of ancestors ; the inst. used in the sociative sense (199 A 1). /_gi

x.14, 5]

FUNERAL

HYMN

167

robhis: another group of ancestors, otherwise associated with B!'haspati (who exclusively is called/ihgirasA). _kvabhis : another group of ancestors; cp. s_ ._kvatR gandna he (B.rhaspati) with the sb_gi_g lwst (iv. 50, 5). vRv.rdhRnAs : by means of oblations, y_m_ ca : the ancestors whom the gods strengthened by their aid, and who strengthened the gods with their offerings, sv_hR anyd : some, by their association with the gods, rejoice in the call svaha, which is addressed to the gods, others in the funeral oblations offered to them as ancestors, madanti: with inst. (p. 308, 1 c).

4 imam, Yams, prastar_m _ hi s_da, _hgixobhi.h lait._bhi.h sam.vidan_.h. tv& m_ntr_.h kavihast_ yahantu_ . ena, rajah, havi.sR mfi_layasva.

U_vonthis strewn grass, 0 Yarna, pray seat thyself_ uniting thyself with the Ai_girases, the fathers. :Let the spells recited by the seers bring thee hither. 1)o thou, 0 k_ng, rejoice in this oblation.

s_da : 2. s. ipv. of sad sit w. ace. hi : p. 252, 2 ; cp. p. 467, B. plt_bhis : apposition to /khgirobhis (cp. 8 a). sa .mvid_n_s : pr. pt. A. of 2. rid find according to the root class (158 a a). kavi-_ast_s : on the accent cp. p. 456, 2 a and p. 462, f. n. 4. en_ : here (cp. 2 d) inst. of ena (112 a) agreeing with havi_ ; accented because beginning the Pada (and always as an adv., cp. 2 d). m_layasva : with inst., cp. mad.anti in 8 d.

168

FUNERAL

HYMN

Ix. 14, s

5 _girobhir _ gahi yajfiyebhir ; Y_na, Vairfip_ir ih_ m_layasva, Vivasvanta.m huve, y_.h pith to, asmin yaj56 barhi.si _ nis_dya.

Come hither with the adorable A_egirases; 0 _Yama, with the sons of Virapa do thou here rejoice. I call Yivasvant wlw is thy father, (let him rejoice), hav_ngsat himself down on the strew at this sacrifice.

J_figirobhis: sociative inst. (199 A 1). _ galii: root so. ipv. of gam (148, 5). VairOp_is: sociative inst.; this patronymic form occurs only here ; Virfipa occurs once in the sing. as the name of one who praised Agni (viii. 64, 6), and three times in the p]. as of seers closely connected with the Ahgirases, as sons of heaven or of Ahgiras. huve: 1. s. pr. A. of hfi ca//. y_s: supply _sti. e is defective by one syllable (p. 441, 4 B a). barhi_i _ : to be taken together (cp. 176, 1, 2). ni.sfidya: gd. of sad s/t; agreeing with Vivasvantam (ep. 210): it is not the priest who sits down on the strew, but the god; d occurs in iii. 35, 6 as applied to Indra.

6 _giraso, na.h pit,re, N_vagv_, _tharvan.o, Bh._gava_h, semiSsa.h : t_.sam, vay_m sumatAu yaifliyan_,m _pi bhadr6 saumanas6 sigma.

The Aizgirases, our faO_ers, the i_avagvas, the Atharvans, the Bhrgus, the 8oma-lovi_g : we wou_d abide in the favour, the goodg_uces of them the adorable ones.

x. 14,8]

FUNERAL

HYMN

169

na.h pitra.h : in apposition to the names ; cp. 4 b. N_vagv_s &c., names of ancient priestly families. _pi sy_ma to be taken together; _pi as =.to take part in.

7 prdhi, prdhi pathlbhih, pfirvidbhir, y_tr_ na.h p_u-ve pit_ra.h pareydh, ubh_, rajana svadh_yfi .... m_dant_, Yam_m pa_y_si V_trunam ca dev_m.

Go forth, go forth by Owse ancient _vatbs on which our fathers of old have 2c_ssed away. Thou shalt see both kings rejoicing in #_e offering to the dead, Yama and "Varm.m the god.

pr6hi pr6hi : addressed to the dead man ; note that this repeated ed. vb. is not treated as an ._mred.ita; in fact only one repeated verbal form is so treated in the RV., viz. piba-piba (p. 282, g}. Note the remarkable alliteration in a b ; cp. the repetition of -_ in c and of-am in d ; of a- in 9 c d, and of-au in 10-12. p_rve : prn. adj. ra3ana : note that both Yama and Varu.na are called kings, (p. 1_6). _- but Yaruna alone a god (cp. note on 1 d). svadb_yR: cp. 3 d. pahyRsi: 2. s. pr. sb. of laa_ see (cp. p. 353).

170 8 s_m

FUNERAL

HYMN

Ix. 14, 8

gachasva pit._bhi.h, s_m Yam6na, i.s.t_pfirt_na param6 vioman, 2. _ hitvayavadyam pfinar _stam 6hi : s_.m gachasua tantla suv_rca._

Unite with the .Fathers, unite with Yama, with the reward of thy sacrifices and good worfcs in the highest heaven. .Leaving blemish behind go back to thy honw,; unite with thy body, full of vigour.

i_.ta-pfirt6na: note that this old Dvandva cd. (see vocab.) is not analysed in the Pads text. param6 : the abode of Yama and the Fathers is in the highest heaven; m_td.hye div_.h in x. 15, 14. vioman : loc. without i (p. 69). hltv_ya : gd., 163, 3. _stam : the " ' home of the Fathers ; cp. 9 b-d. tanv_t suv_rc_.h : being free fl'om disease and frailties, the dead man unites with a body which is complete and without imperfections. The AV. often speaks of such being the stale of things in the next life. In d the rare resolution of v in -sva is required.

i
9 _peta, v_ta, vl ca sarpatato : . asma ot_m pit_ro lok_m akra_; _hobhix adLbhfr akttibhir vlaktam, 2 Yam6 dad_ti avasanam asmai, This stanza is addressed Begone. disperse, slink offfrom here : for him the Fathers have Iarepared lids place. Yams gives him a resting-place distinguished by days and waters and nights.

to the demons to leave the dead man

alone, vita: for vl its (see p. 464, 17, 1 a). asm_i: accented because emphatic at the beginning of a Pads, but unaccented at the end of d (cp. p. 452, A c). akran : 8. p]. act. root so. of k.r make. _thobhir adbhi.h: cp. ix. 113, where the joys of the next world are

x. 14, 11]

FUNERAL

HYMN

171

described, y_tra jy6tir _jasram., t_smin m_m dhehi am._te 16ke where there is eternal light, in that immortal world place me (7), and .L y_tra am_r yahvgtir apas, t_tra m_m am._ta .m k.rdhi where are those swift waters, there nla'ke me immortal (8). aktfbhis : nights as alternating with days. vyAktam: pp. of vi + afj adorn, dis. tinguish.

10 tlti drava s_ramey_u _u_nau, eaturak.s_u _ab_lau s_dhlin_ path_ ; _thfL pit._n suvidlltr_a dpehi, Yam6na y6 sadham_lam anti. m_id-

Bun by a good l_ath past the two sons of Sarama, the four-eyed, brindled dogs; thcn afflrroaeh the bountiful. Fathers who rejoice at the same feast as Yama.

s_ramey_iu: in this and the following duals (including 11 a b) the ending au is irregularly used; in the old parts of the RV. is employed before consonants and at the end of a Pada. _v_nau: to be read as a trisyllable (cp. 91, 8). eaturalr_au : doubtless meant to imply keen sight ; thus this epithet is also applied to Agni. In the Avesta a four-eyed dog watches at the head of the bridge by which the souls of the dead pass to the other world, and scares away the fiend from the holy ones. b is a Jagat_ (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7). _th_: the second syllable metrically lengthened. Yam6na: sociatire inst. (p. 806, 1). saclb_m_dam: cognate aec. with m_danti

(p,3oo, 4).

,,

172

FUNERAL

HYMN

[x. ]4, 11

i_ i

11 y_u te _u_nau, Yama, rau, eaturak.s_u pathir_k_i sau,

rak.sit_n_.c_ksa-

Give him over to those two, 0 King, that are thy dogs, 0 Yama, the guardians, four.eyed, watchers of the l_ath, observers of men; bestow on him welfare and health.

t_bhiam enana, p_ri debt, rajah : svastl cfism_ anamiv_m ca dhehi.

y_u : au in this and the following duals for _, as in 10. nre_ksasau: as Yama's messengers (cp. 12 b). b is a JagatT (cp. 10 b). enam : the dead man. dehi (2. s. ipv. of d_ give) : that they may guide him to Yama's abode, dhehi : 2. s. ipv. of dh_ _ut.

12 urunasav, asut.rpa, udumbalhu, Yamhsya d_t_u "carato jan_a _nu ; 2.._ t_v asmbhyam, dr_ye sur_aya pfinar d_tfizn Asum ady_h_ bhadrl[m.

Broad-nosed, life.stealing,., the two as messengers of Yama wander a_nong men ; may these two give us back here to-day auspicious rife that we may see the sun.

urfa-n,asau: the second syllable is metrically lengthened; on the cerebralization of the dental n see 65 b ; here we have the normal use of au as _v before a vowel within a Pada; broad-nosed, that is, keenscented, asut./pa u-: on the Sandhi see 22; the literal meaning delighting in rives implies delighting in taking them, while they

x. )4, 14]

FUNERAL

HYMN

173

wander among men as Yama's messengers, udumbal_u : this word occurs here only, and there is no means of throwing any light on its sense; the au of this dual, as of dgtt_u, for _, shows the same irregularity as in the preceding stanzas, caratas: in order to seek out the lives of those about to go to the abode of Yama. asm_bhyam: dat. pl. of ahem. dr_ye: dat. inf., with attracted acc. (200 B 4). d_trtm : 3. du. ipv. root ao. of d_ give ; as having a|ready marked us for their victims, let them give back our life to-day.

__t _r-_._:,
ol

__m_, _,_-_-__:, .___

13 Yam_ya s6ma .m sauuta, J. . _ , Yamaya mhuta havi.h ; YamGm. ha yaj55 gaehati, Agnidf_to dramk.rta.h.

:For Yanm press the Soma, to Yama offer the oblalion ; to Yama goes the sacrifice well _repared, with Agni as its _nessenger.

juhutf_: with metrically lengthened final vowel; 2. pl. ipv. of hu sacrifice addressed to those officiating at the sacrifice. Yamm t acc. of the goal _197, 1 ; cf. 204, 1 b). Agnidfltas : the idea underlying this figurative expression is that the smoke of the sacrificial fire goes up to heaven where Yama dwells.

q8_

_._.

- _m____ _:,

14 Yam_ya gh_-t_vad dhavir juh6ta, pr_ ca tis..thata ; s_ no dev_.su $-yamad, dirgh_m _yul_. pr_ j[v_se,

To Yama offer thc oblation aboun&ng in ghee, and step forth; may he guide us to the gods tha$ we may liv_ a long life.

174

FUNERAL

HYMN

[_- 14, 14

juh6ta : the irr. strong form (p. 144, B. 3 a) with a long vowel in the second syllable is here utilized for metrical purposes, as the regular form juhuta has its final vowel lengthened in 13 b. pr_ t_thata : ste2a forward, in order to offer the oblation ; cp. the use of prtt bhr bring forward an oblation. _ yamat : inj. of root ao. of yam extend; this form constitutes a play on the name of Yama. nas: acc. governed by _ yamad; ep. ix. 44, 5, s_ na.h S6mo dev_su yamat may he, Soma, guide us to the gods ; on the lee., cp. 204 B 1 b. A ayus : cognate acc. (197 k 4). prt_ jivtkse : cp. p. 463, f. n. 8. The meaning of cd is : ' may he keep us (the survivors) to the worship of the gods (and not lead us to the Fathers), so that we may enjoy long life on earth' (ep. 12 c, d).

15 Yam_ya mb.dhumattarnam r_0iie havy_m juhotana, id_.m nt[ma ._sibhya.h pftrv_(_, bhial_, purveb h yah. pathik._dbhia.h. .L

To :_ama the king offer the most honied oblation. This obeisance is for the seers born of old, the ancient makers of the path.

juhotana: again the strong form to suit the metre (ep. 14 b). pathik._dbhyas : because they were the first_ after Yama had shown the way, to tread the path leading to Yama's abode (the pit.ry_na the _vad of the _athers). This sbmza is a Brhat! in the middle of Anus..tubhs, differing from them only by the addition of four syllables in the third P_da (see p. 444, 9 b).

x. 1_, 16]

FUNERAL

HYMN

175

16 trikadrukebhi_, patati. .s_.l urv_r, $kam id brh_t, tris..t_b, g_yatr_, ch_nd_msi, sarva ta Yam_ ahita,

It flies through the three Soma vats. The six earths, the one great (world), trist.ubh, gayatr_ and (the other) metres, all these are placed in Yama.

The meaning of a b in this final stanza is obscure, partly because the subject is not expressed in a, and partly because it is uncertain whether b is syntactically connected with a or not. The probability is that here we have tw_ sentences, one consisting of a, the other of b-d. The first then probably means that the Soma draught is ready for Yama; the second expresses the greatness of Yama by stating that all things are contained in him. trikadrukebhis : this word, occurring six times in the RV., always appears in the pl., and always except here in the locative. It is four times directly connected with Soma, and once alludes to it ; e.g. trlkadrukesu apibat sut_sya he (Indra) drank of the _ressed 8oma in the three vessels (L 32, 8). The term trikadruka in the ritual of the BrAhmanas is the name of three days in a Soma ceremony. The metaphor of flying is applied to the flowing Soma compared with a bird, as ' the god flies like a bird to settle in the vats' (ix. 3, 1). The allusion therefore _eems to be to the Soma which the priests are called upon to press in 13 a. _gd urv_.h : this expression is probably equivalent to the three heavens and three earths: cp. time6 dyava, h nihit_ antgr asmin, tisr6 bh_mir _iparg.h, .sgd.vidhgnK.h the three heavens are _laced within him (Varun.a) and the three earths below, forming a sixfold order (vii. 87, 5). _kam id b.rh/Lt : by this expression is probably meant the universe, otherwise spoken of as vi_vam 6kam, idgm 6kam &c., the one being contrasted with the s/x ; ep. i. 164, 6, vi ygs tast_nbha s_l im_ r_msi., klm _pi svid _kam ? wlw prop'l_ed asunder these six s_aces ; wlmt _.ay is the one? tris.tlibh, g_yatr_ : these two names of metres are only mentioned in this and one other hymn of the tenth Ma.n.dala. This and the following four hymns (x. 15-18} are among the latest in the RV. The concluding stanza here, as in some hymns addressed to other deities, sums up the greatness of the god by saying that he embraces all things; cp. i. 32, 15 (Indra};

v. 18,6 (Agai).

176

PITARAS

Ix. 15,1

PIT_RAS
Two hymns (x. 15 and 54) are addresqed to the Pitaras or Fathers, the blessed dead who dwell in the third heaven, the third or highest step of Vis.n.u. The term as a rule applies to the early or first ancestors, who followed the ancient paths, seers who made the paths by which the recent dead go to join them. Various groups of ancestors are mentioned, such as the Afigirases and Atharvans, the Bhrgus and Vasis.t.has, who are identical in name with the priestly families associated by tradition with the composition of the Atharvaveda and of the second and seventh Mand.alas of the Rigveda. The Pitaras are classed as higher, lower, and middle, as earlier and later, who though not always known to their descendants, are known to Agni. They revel with Yama and feast with the gods. They are fond of Soma, and thirst for the libations prepared for them on earth, and eat the offerings along with him. They come on the same car as Indl_ and the gods. Arriving in their thousands they range themselves on the sacrificial grass to the south, and drink the pressed draught. They receive oblations as their food. They are entreated to hear, intercede for, and protect their worshippers, and besought not to injure their descendants for any sin humanly committed against them. They are invoked to give riches, children, and long life to their sons, who desire to be in their good graces. The Vasi.s.thas are once collectively implored to help their descendants. Cosmical actions, like those of the gods, are sometimes attributed to the Fathers. Thus they are said to have adorned the sky with stars, to.have placed darkness in the night and light in the day; they found the light and generated the dawn. The path trodden by the Fathers (pinyOn. a) is different from that trodden by the gods (devay_na). x. 15. Metre : [email protected] ; 11 Jagati.

! i ;

1 rid iratgm _vara, tit ptlrgsa, fin madhyam_l_ pit_ra.h somi6aah. ; _sua!a yg xyair av_.ka _a]nas, " t@ n5 avantu pittiro h_vesu,

.Let the lower, .let the higher, let the middlemost 8oma-lovingFathers arise ; let those Fathers who, friendly, lenotving right, have gone to l/re eternal, favour us in our

invocations.

x. 15, 2]

PITARAS

177

rid iratEm : note that cd. verbs are often repeated by means of the prp. (here rid twice) alone. _vare (on the dec., see 120 c 1) &e.: these three words refer to the Pitrs dwelling in the three divisions of the world, earth, ah', heaven (ep. y$ p_rthive rjasi in 2 e ; and the division of heaven into three, the lowest, the middlemost, and the third in which the Fathers sit: AV. xviii. 2, 49). SRyana thinks that here the degrees of their holiness is meant, but in this same stanza, when it appears in the AV. (xviii. 1, 44), he thinks that degrees of merit or of age are intended ; but degrees of age are expressly mentioned in 2 b by p_u-vRsas and tlparRsas. _sum : life in the heavenly world, immortal life (the Pitaras are called immortal ill AV. vi. 41, 3) as opposed to terrestrial life. iyur : 3. pl. pf. act. of i go.

2 id_m pit._bhyo n_m6 astu ady_, A y6 purvaso, y_ dpar_sa iyfi.h ; y6 p_rthive r_jasi _ ni.satt_, y6 v_ nfin_m auvrj.'_n_su vikstL

.Let this obeisance be made to-day to the Fathers who have departed earlier and later, w]w have seated themselves in the terrestria_ air or who are now in settlen_nts with .fair abodes.

purvasas : in x. 14, 2. 7 the prn. form purve is used {see 120, 2)_ iyttr: in x. 14, 2. 7 the more distinctive cd. pareydr appears, a ni_attfis (pp. of sad s/t, cp. 67 a, b ; cp. _ ni_lya in x. 14, 5). p_rthive r_jasi: in the atmospheric region above the earth ; here the Pitaxas in the air intermediate between heaven and earth are meant, while in h and d those in heaven and on earth respectively are intended, suv_jtm_su viks.fi : cp. the frequent m_nus.is.u vik_._i human settleme_, with reference to the Fathers present at the funeral offerings on earfli.
1901

178

PITARAS

[x. 15,s

3 _h_m pit._n suvid_tr_a avitsi, n_p_tam ca vikr_mana.m ca Vls.n.o.h : barhis._do y6 svadh_y_ sut_sya bh_janta laitv_s_ t_ il_gamis.thfi.h,
.t , .

I have won hither the bountiful .Fathers and the grandson and the wide stride of Vi_..nu: they who, sitling on the strew, shall _artake of the pressed drink with the offering to the dead, come most gladly here.

l : , ; i i 1 [ ! '_

a-av_tm (1, s.._. s ao. of 2. vial find) ; = I have induced to come to this offering, n_patam : it is somewhat uncertain who is meant by this ; according to Prof. Geldner's ingenious explanation Yama (with whom the Pitaras are associated) is intended, because in the VS. (xxix. 60) Vis.n.u (here coupled with n_patam) is called the husband of Aditi, whose son (TS. vi. 5, 6, 2) was Vivasvant, the father of Yama (see note on x. 14, 1) ; but it is doubtful whether this later statement was part of the mythological belief of the RV., where Yama is the grandson of Tv_.tr (x. 17, 1). Oa the other hand, the word may be used ellip_ically to designate Agni = s_haso n_patam (Agni is called n_ptre s_hasvate in viii. 102, 7) ----s_hasa.h sfin_m son of strength, a frequent epithet of Agni, for which once (vi. 4, 4) sfino son alone is used in an Agni hymn ; and below (9 c) Agni is invoked to come with the Fathers: agne yf_hi suvid_trebhil_, lait._bhi.h. There is here also a good example of the fanciful interpretations of Sayana : Visnor (= yajilasya) n_p_tam (=- vin_&bh_vam) the non-destructio_ of the sacrifice, vikr_manam: Vis.nu's third step (= the highest heaven), where the Fathers dwell (ep. i. 154, 5). bh_anta: 3. pl. inj. _,. of bhaj share, with partitive gen. (202 A e). pitv/m : gen. of lait-fi (p. 81). a-gamin.has : accent, p. 453, 9 A b.

x. 15, 5]

PITARAS

179

t'+tT- mrt

t V+tt:

4 b_rhi_.ada.h pitara, ftt[ arvag_; im_ vo havy_ cakrm_: justdhvam ; t_ _ gata _vas_ _mtamena ; _tla_ na.h _m ySr arap5 dadh_ta,

:Ye Fathers that sit on the slrew, come hither with aid ; these offer. {ngs we have made to you : enjoy lltvm ; so come with most be_eficen| aid; _hen bestow o_ us health and blessing free from hurt.

b_rhisadah pitarah. : see note on viii. 48, 7 c. f_t_ : inst. of fatl (p. 81, f. n. 4}. arv_k : hither ; the vb. _ gata co_e is easily to be supplied from c. cakrm_: with metrical lengthening of the final syllable, jus_dhvam: accented because it forms a new sentence {p. 466, 19 b). t_ : as such, as enjoying our offerings, gata: 2. pL ipv. root ao. of gain go. _th_: metrically lengthened, dadh_ta: 2. pl. pr. ipv. of dh_ iv/ace, with irr. strong form of the pr. stem instead of the normal dhatta (p. 144 B 1 b).

..L

5 _ipah_t_l_ pit_ra.h som_aso bavhi_esu ni_h_?u priySsu; t_ _ gamantu; t_ ih_ _ruvantu; _clhi bruvantu; t_ avantu . asman,

InviLed are th_ _.%ma4ov_ng 2'athers to Lhe dear de3_osits t_laced on the strew ; let them came; let them listen here ; let them _eak fov us; let them aid us.

_pa-hfxtRs : pp. of hfi call. nidhl.su : the offerings deposited on the sacrificial grasa gamantu : 8. pl. ipv. root no. of gain go. _ruvautu : 8. pl. ipv. root no. of _ru hear. _2

180

PITARAS

[x.15, e

._

,A

6 acya janu, dak.sinat5 nisfldya, imam yajfi_m abhl .gr_fi-tavifive ; m_ him. sis.ta, pitara.h, k6na oin no, y_d va _ga.h purus_t_ kdx_ma,

:Bending the knec, sitting down to the south do ye all greet favourably this sacrifice ; injm_ us not, 0 _'alhers, by reason of any sin that we may have committed against you through human fi'ailty.

i i _,, ;

_-acy_ (gd. of ac bend): note that the suffix -y_ is much oftener ,A long than short (164), but in the Pada text it is always short. 3anu : probably the left knee ; cp. the SB. ii. 4, 2, 2, where the gods bend the right knee, the Fathers the left knee. In rites connected with the dead, the auspicious direction is reversed, left being substituted for right, daksinat_s : to the right (of the v6di altar), that is, to the south, because the south is the region of Yama and the Pitaras. .g_.ita: 2. pl. ipv. of 1. gT. s/ng. him. si.s.ta: 2. pl. inj. is ao. of hires injure, kdna old yitd _ga.h for k6na cid _gasR ygd, the substantive being put into the rel. instead of the principal clause, vas : dat. of disadvantage (p. 814 B 1). purus._t_ : inst. s. identical in form with the stem (97, 1, p. 77). k_rgana: 1. pl. root ao. sb. (p. 171) ; in the sense of an indefinite past.

'.,

}: j!

_r_: f__.__: _ _ _-___ _r_,

7 asmaso aru_._ _m upt_sthe raFim, dhatta d_fit_e m_rti_Fa.

_:, ____:, _,_:, __ _r__ __ __i_,__-__ _ _

Sitting in the lap of the ruddy (dawns) bestow wealth on the a.'_r-

. _

x. 15, 9]

PITARAS

181

putrfibhia.h, pitaras, tgsya vgsva.h pr_ yaehata; t_ ih6rjam dadh_ta,

shi__i_u mortal d To your sons, 0 l'_athers, l_resent a share of those riches; so do ye here bestow strength.

_sinasas: irr. pr. pt.._, of Rs sit: 158 a. aru.n_nam: aru_._ _ddy is the colour of dawn, and the f. of this adj. sometimes appears as an epithet of the dawns ; that these are here meant is also indicated by vii. 9, 1; 63, 3, where Agni and SQrya are _id to awake or arise u.s_sam up_sth_t from the la1_of the daw_2s, dhatta and dadhata : here both the regular and the irr. ipv. of dha are used (cp. note on 4 d). t_sya v_sva.h : referring to raylm in b ; on the form of the gen. see p. 81. td : anaphoric use (cp. p. 294 b). = _ T _t _m_:: __'_'_'_ _'.U-__ _ _ _--_I_:, _, __ 1I: I _', f'_r(: _a_ i'L_m I @r_n'_: , i_'(_t:,

8 yd na.h purve pit_ra.h somlaso, anfthir'{f somapithgmVd_i.s.thgh., t6bhir Yam_.h samrarfin.6 hay

Those forefathers of ours, the Soma-loving, the Yasi,yt.has, who fare after him to the So,mdraught, with them let l'ama, sharing their gifts, eat the oblations at l_easure, he the eager with them the eager.

l_a.sx, mi_ma u_dbhi.h, attu.

pratikam_n

a_u-fihir6 : the derivation and m_ning are somewhat doubtful ; most probably pf. of yah drive, in this case meaning who have driven after Yama to tl_eSoraa-draught ; it may possibly come from fih consider, _hen meaning who have been considered worthy of the Somadraught. V_si_.tbRs: as one of the groups of ancient seers, samrarRn_s (pf. pt. A. of ra give) : sharing with them their gifts to their descendants (cp. 7 b c).

182

PITARAS

Ix. 15, 9

-_I _ _tr_

_t, ,__r_ _ ,___: ,

9 yd tftt._.dr devatr_ jdhamRnR, hotr_vida.h [email protected] arkhi.h: .I., _gne,yfihi suvid_trebhir aryan satyih, kavy_i.h pit._bhir gharmas_dbhi.h.

Who,

g_ing,

have

thirsted

among the gods, knowing oblations, having praise fashioned for them with songs : with them the bountiful Fathcrs, the true, the wise that sit at the heating vessel, come hitlwr, 0 Agni.

: i : i

tRtrstir: pf. of tr.s,.with long red. vowel (139, 9); such vowels reg,larly appear in their short form in the Pada text (cp. note on devatra: in heaven; trR isone of thesuffixes which iii. 59, lb). _ in the Pada text is separated, being treated as the second member of a cd. stom_-tas..tRsas: this Tp.,fashioned with _rai_e, otherwise used with matt ---hymn, is here applied to persons and thus comes to have the sense of a Karmadharaya By. (189, 1)----tas_-stomRsas; the latter kind of cd., with a pp. as first member, does not exist in the RV. ark_is: to be taken with the 1).receding wordby means of songs. aryan: 93 b. kavy_is: _" this word occurs in only two other passages, the original meaning apparently being----karl wise (cp. kavy_tR wisdom) ; here it may be intended to denote a particular group of Fathers (cp. x. 14, 3). gharmas_dbhis : probably in heaven ; cp. x. 16, 10, s_ gharm_m invRt paramd sadh_sthe : may he (Agni) fu1_ther the gharma in the highest abode ; this word as well as jdhamRnas may be intended to contrast with tRt.r.s6_v cp. vii. 103, 9. ;

_o _ _ _ _ _ _: _ _t_:, __::__,_:, _

_,_T_I:, _:_:, _:_t:, _,_:, ___ _ _-,_:, @:,_._:, _t_:, _m:,

x. I_, 111
t .

PITARAS
.L

183

i0 y6 saty_so hawr_do hawspa lfndren.a dev_i.h saxtham d_dhfin_.h, _gne yahi sah_sram devavand_i.h p_rai.hp_rvai.hpit._bhirgharmas_dbhi.h.

They w],o are true, eating the oblation, drinking the oblation, havi_g the same car with Indra and the gods, with tIwse thousand god--praisingremote forefathers tl_at sit at the heating vessel, come, 0 A gni.

sa-r_tham : this word, primarily a By., havi_u3the same car, is then often used as a cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) with yrt _--go (on a journey} with the same car (here with dhfi in place of y_); then adverbially {p. 301, 5 b). d_dhanas: pr. pt.._, of dhf_-put (cp. p. 460, f. n. 3) ; the pf pt. A. would be dadhan_s (159}. sah_sram : agreeing with pit._bhis: more usual would be sah_srena pit._bhis : cp. 194 B 1 b (p. 291) ; p_rais : the primary meaning of this word is farther (opposed to nearer _vara, less often lipaxa, _ntara), more remote, then also higher ; there is no opposition here to p_rvais (opposed to which are _vara and 6para), which in any case would be in the reverse order, pClrvai.h pardi.h; the meaning is the remote, the early Fathers; cp. vi. 21, 6, p_ixa.ni pram_ remote, ancient deeds opposed to _varasas later men.

'

11/_gnisv_ttA.h pitaxa, 6h_ gaYe Fathers that have been dcchata; voured by fire come hither ; sit you s_da.h-sada.h sadata, supran.idown each on his seat, ye that have taya.h; good guidance ; eat the oblations attar hav_ms.i lar_yat_ni baxhi.si ; .proffered on the strew ; then bestow lith_ rayim s_rvaviram dadh_wealth accom-panied entirely by tana. strong sons.

184

PITARAS

[x.15, 11

_gni-.sv_tt_: with the voc. accent on the first syllable; the ordinary accent would be Agni-.sv_tt_s like other Tps. formed with Agni, but such cds. with a pp. as second member usually accent the first (cp. p. 456, 2 a). svRtt_ts : pp. of svRd sweeten (cp. 67 b). s_da.hsada.h: itv. cd. (p. 282 a; p. 454, 10 a), governed by sadata. sadata: 2. pl. ipv. a ao. of sad sit (147, 5). supra.nitayas: having good guidance, well led, coming in good order; the Pada text does not recognize the cerebralization of the n (65 a, b). att_, _thfi : final a metrically lengthened, pr_-yat_ai : pp. of yam. dadhatana : irr. strong form (cp. note on 7 d) and suffix tana (p. 925).

12 tu_m, Agna, il.itS, jatavedo, _vfi.d d.havy_ni surabl_ni kr.tv_. A _ pr_a.h pitt_bhyah. ; svadl_y_ t_t aksann ; addhl trY.m, dora, pr_yat_ hay. _m.m.

Thou, 0 Agni, having been im.plored, 0 J(ttavcdas, hast conveyed the oblations, having made them fragrant. Thou hast .presented them to the _Fathers; with the funerat offering they have eaten them; do thou, 0 god, eat the oblations .proffered.

il.it_s : by us. jfita-vodas : a very frequent and exclusive epithet of Agni ; it is a By. as its accent shows, meaning having knowledge of created things as explained by the RV. itself: vi_v_ veda j_nima j_t_vedah. Jatavedas k/news all creations (vi. 15, 18) ; this is also the explanation of Sayana here : j_tam, sarvam, jagad, votti, iti j_tavedft.h. . _v_t: 2. s. s ao. of yah carry (144, 5). d.h_vy_ni: for havyam (54). k.rtv_ : gd. of k.r (163, 1). ad_ : 2. s. root so. of d_ (148, i a). ak4m_ : 8. pl. root ao. of ghas eat (p. 170, e). addhi: 2. s. ipv. of ad eat.

x. 15,14_

PITAR_kS

185

_'_

_-_" "_ _ _I"_' ]:_-q-_ I

_I'I'_.I _r i_r_" i _IT"_, _ _'_ I _I' I _I'I I

_"_t-'_r _ _: _f'_r

_r,_,_ t

13 y6 ca ihG pit_ro y6 ca n_h_, ca viclm_ yam u ca n_ pravidm_, tu_m vettha y_ti t6, j_tavedah; svadh_bhir yajfl_m sfikrtam jusasva,

Both the Fathers who are here and who are not here, both those whom we know and whom we know not, tlmu knowest how many they are, 0 Jdtavedas ; enjoy the sacri. rice well 1afeared with funeral offerings.

y$ ca : supply s_nti, vidm_ 1. pl. pf. of vial know (p. 154, 3) ; the 1. pl. pr. is ridings, yam._ ca : Sandhi, 40 a. yam u : 39, and p. 25, f. n. 2. pra-vidm_ : _now exactly, vettha: 2. s. pf. of vial know (p. 154, 3). y_ti : cp. 118 a. t6 : supply s_nti.

_:
14 y_

, ._,.- . _
Agnidagdh_ dagdh_, y_ _nagni-

Those who, burnt with fire and n.ot burnt with fire, are exhilarated by the funeral offering in the midst of heaven, as sovereign ruler do thou with them fit his body according to thy ._ower for this s_iritguidance.

m_lhye div_h, svadh_y_ m_chi.-t yante, t_bhil_ suar_l _sunitim et_m yath_va_m tantia.m kalpayasva,

yii gmagnidagclhf_. : that is, buried, m_dhye div_l_ : note that the Fathers enjoy in heaven the funeral offering conveyed to them by

186

PITARAS

Ix. 15, 14

Agni, as well as eating the oblations offered them on the sacrificial grass (11 c). t6bhis: in association with them (199 A 1), as they J know the path of the dead. svar_,.t: as sovereign lord who acts according to his will (yath_va@_,m) ; the subject is Agni who is addressed in 9 c and 10c (Agne), and in 12a and 13c (jatavedas) or mentioned in lla (_gnis.vfitt_s), and in this stanza itself (Agaidagdh_s). tanvhm kalpayasva: the body of the deceased; the words ,svay_,m. tanv_.m kalpayasva (VS. xxiii. 15) are explained in SB. xiii. 2, 7, 11: svay_.m rfip_.m kurus.va yad._@am ich_si assume thyself the form that thou desirest ; cp. also iii. 48, 4 b and vii. 101, 3 b yathfivafi_m tanv/_m, eakra (---- cakre) e.s_.h he has taken a body according to his will ; the corresponding PAda in the AV. (xviii. 3, 59) reads yathav_ .m tanv/L.h kalpayfiti may he fashion our bodies according to his will ; cp. also in the following funeral hymn (x. 16, 4) the hemistieh: _s te flirts tunvS, j_taveda_, t_bhir vahainam, suk_fim u lok_m with those which are thy auspicious bodies, 0 J(ttavedas, conduct him to the world of the righteous. _sunitim et_m : dependent, like tanv_m., on kalpayasva: _re_are his body and this spiribleading =2repare it for this spirit.leading; Agni conducts the _irit (_,su) of the dead man, who is cremated, to the next world (cp. x. 16, 4, just quo_ed) where it unites with a new body (tan_) ; cp. x. 14, 8 cd : _stam ehi; s_m. gachasva tanv_ go home ; unite with thy (new) body; and x. 16, 5 s_,m gaohat_m tanvg, j_taveda.h let him (the deceased) unite with a (new) body, 0 J(ttavedas.

HYMN

OF THE

GAMBLER

This is one, among the secular hymns, of a group of four which have a didactic character. It is the lament of _t gambler who, unable to resist the fascination of the dice, deplores the n_in he has brought on himaelf and his family. The dice (ak.s_) consisted of the nuts of a large tree called vibh_claka (Terrninalia beUerica), which is still utilized for this purpose in India. x. 34. Metre: Tris.tubh; 7. Jagati.

my :,

x. 34, 2]

THE

GAMBLER

187

1 pravepa m_ brhat5 m_dayanti pravatej_ irino v_rv.rtana.h, s6masyeva Maujavat_sya bhaks6, vibl_dako jagrvir "z . m_hyam ach_n,

The da_2gling ones, born in a windy place, of the lofty (tree) gladden me as they roll on the dice-board. Like the draught of the Soma from Mftjavant, the enlivening Vibh_daka has pleased me.

v_rv.rtfinRs : int. pt. of v.rt turn. Maujavat_sya : coming from Mount Mujavant as the best. ach_n : 3. s. s no. of chand (p. 164, 5). Verbs meaning to21easc take the dat. (p. 311 h).

_,_ _I_f_m _ _-_'_ _1"r

_" I m i f-'_I_i'i _ i _I@'_ i _'_r1" i

2 n_ raft mimotha, hiv_ s4]cb_bhya sit.

n_ jih_a e.s_ : ut_ m_hyam

She does not scold me, she is not angry : she was kind to friends and to me. For lhe sake of a die too high by one I have driven away a devoted wife.

aks._tsy_h_m ekapar_sya hetdr . ._ A anuvratam _pa jayam arodham,

mimetha: pf. of mith d/spute, jihil.a: pf. of hid. be angry (cp. p. 3, f. n. 2). s_khibhyas: dat. (p. 313, 3). ekapar_sya: according to the accent this is a Tp. adj., exceeding by one, alluding to an unlucky throw {called kali) in which when the number of dice thrown is divided by four one remains over (while in the best throw, the k_a_ nothing remains over). _pa arodham : root ao. of rudh obstruct. The meaning of the stanza is : 'rejecting the kindly advice of my wife, I gambled and lost '.

188

THE

GAMBLER

[x. 34, s

._

3 dv6s.ti @vaSter; _pa jaya runaddhi ; n_ n_thit6 vindate mard.it_ram : _vasyeva j_rato v_sniasya 2. . _ naha.m vmdaml kitav_sya bh6gain,

My mother-in-law hates me; n_y wife drives me away : the man in distress finds none to _iiy him : ' 1 find no more use in a gambler than in an aged horse that is for sale.'

_laa run.addhi (3. s. pr. of rudh) : turns him away when he asks for money to gamble with. nrtthit_s : the gambler speaks of himself in the 8. prs. _vasya_iva: agreeing with kitav_sya, j_ratas: pr. pt. of j_ waste away. kitav_sya bh6gam: objective gen. (p. 820, B b).

4 any6 3ayam. p_ri m_anti asya, Others embrace the wife of hint y_Lsy_g_lhad v_dane vfi_ aks_.h, for whose1_ossessions the victorious lait_ mat_ bhr_tara enam ahur : die _s been eager. :Faiher, mother, n_ j_nimo, n_yatf_ baddh_m brothers say of him, ' we know him et_n ". not, lead him away bound'. _gr._bat : a ao. of g_h object (p. 325, 1 e). v_j_ : cp. p. 441, 4 a) ; accent, p. 1. pl. pr. of jif_ know. be greedy, governing vSdane, loc. of the to be read with a short final (p. 487, a 4, 450, b. f_hur: pf. of all say. ja_aimas : n_yata : accented as beginning a new

x. 34, 6]

THE GAMBLER

189 (ep. p. 441,

sentence (p.466, 19 a) ; final vowel metrically lengthened line 2). baddh_m : as a debtor.

5 y_d

adidhye : ' n_ davi_ni ebhi.h; parfLy_dbhyo tlva ttiye s_khibhya.h', nlupt_ ca babhr_vo vacam_ _ltrata/_ _ 6m_.desrt.m nisk.rt_ .m jfia'iniva,

Wizen I think to myself, 'I wilt not go with them; r shall be left behind by my friends as they delgart (to play)', and the brown ones, thrown down, have raised their voices, [ go straight, like a courtesan, to their _laee of assignation.

_-d_dhye: 1. s. pr. #x. of dhi think, davi.s_ni: is ao. sb. of du go (of which other forms occur in the AA. and the YV.); some scholars think the sense of play to be so necessary that this must be an irr. form (is ao. sb.) from d.iv 2olay (like a-s.thavisam, in a SQtra, from s.th_v spit), ebhis : with the friends. _va hiye : pa of 1. h_ leave; I am left behind with abl. (ep. 201 A 1). npt_s : pp. of vap strew. _Ikrata: 3. pl.._, root ao. of k.r, accented because still dependent on y_d.. Here we have a Jagatl Pada interposed in a Tris..tubh stanza (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7) ; the same expression, vacam akrata, by ending a P_da in vii. 103, 8 produces a JagatI P_da in a Tris..tubh stanza. The final vowel of the vb. is here nasalized to avoid the hiatus at the end of the P_da (cp. i. 35, 6 a) ; viii. 29, 6 a ; see p. 23, f.n. 1). dmi id : I go at once (p. 218). e.sRm : of the dice.

t90

THE

GAMBLER

Ix. 34, 6

6 sabh_n eta kitav_.h prch_m_no, jesy_m_ti, tanti_t_uj_na.h, aks._s5 asya vl tiranti k_mam, pratid_vne d_dhata _ k.rt_ni,

The gambler goes to the assembly hall, asking himself, ' shall I conquer', trembling with his body. Tke dice run counter to his desire, bestowing on his adversa_:y at play the lucky/throws.

tanv_: accent, p. 450, 2 b. _u_uj_nas: as this pt. is the only form of the vb. occurring, and is itself only found in one other passage (also with tanvk), its exact meaning is doubtful ; but it must express either fear or confidence, tiranti: 3. pl. pr. of t_ cross. pratid_van: dec., 90, 3; dat. with verbs of giving (200 A 1). dadhatas: N. pl. pr. pt. of dh_ (156, p. 181, top) agreeing with al_._sas ; with prp. following (p. 462, 13 a a). k.rt_ni : probably in the specific sense of the highest throws, pl. of n. k.rt_m.

7 ak_sa id ahku_ino nitodlno, nik_tvfmas t_pan_s t_payi_n_va.h ; kum_r_desn_, j_yatah, punarhti,n o, m/tdhv_ s_mprkt_.h bathing. kitav_sya

The dice are hooked, __iercing, deceilful, burning and causing to burn; .presenting gifts like boys, striking back the victors, swe2tsned with honey by magic power over the gambler.

t_payi.sn_vas : causing the gambler to pain others by his losses. kum_r_-de.sn_: giving gifts and then taking them back like children. punarhd_.as: winning back from the winner, equivalent in sense to the preceding word ; Sandhi, 65 b. s_m-prkt_s : pp. of p.re miz. barh/,n_ : inst. s. (p. 77) ; with objective gem (p. 820).

X. 34, 9]

THE

GAMBLER

191

__ _ __

_1

__:_l _k m,t_ u

___

8 tripaficf_.h kril.ati vr_ta e.sg_m., Their host of three fifties plays dev_ ira Savit$. satydha_rmg : like god Savit.r wlwse laws are ugr_.sya tin many,re n_, ham- true : they bow not before the wrath ante; of even the mighty; even a king raja cid ebhyo n_ma it k.rgoti, loays them obeisance.

tripafiegfigs : the evidence is in favour of interpreting this word as meaning consisting of three fifties, not consisting 2.of fifty-three, as the . number of dice normally used. devg ira Sawta: the point of the comparison is that the action of the dice is as independent of the will of others as the action of Savitr, who observes fixed laws of his own (iv. 53, 4; x. 139, 3), and whose will and independent dominion no being, not even Indra, Varuna, Mitra, Aryaman, Rudra can resist (ii. 38, 7. 9; v. 82, 2). n_: the only example in the RV. of the metrical lengthening of n_. namante, n/Lmas : with dat. (p. 311, k and 812, 2 a).

,_rt _

__: _V_.

_:

__

__w__ _f-r-__ __

_
9 nie_ vartanta,

__ _t:
up_ri sphuranti.

_: _ _-r:, _-_, n_m.:,

They roll down, they sFring up. ward. Though without hands, they overcome him that has hands. .Divine coals thrown down u_on the gaming.board, being cold, they burn uj) the heave.

ahast_so h_stavantam sahante, divy$- ILhggr9,irine nluptg.h_ _it_l_ sfmto, hfdayam, nit dabanti.

192

THE GAMBLER
_ &

Ix. 34, 9

Every Pada in this stanza contains an antithesis: mea--uparl; ahast_sa.h -- h_stavantam ; divy_.h -- irine ; _it_h -- nit dahanti. divy_s: alluding to their magic power over the gambler; cp. barh_n_ in 7 d. _g_r_s: the dice are compared with bits of charcoal lying in a hollow; cp. SB. v. 3, 1, 10: adhid6vauam v_ agnis, t_sya et6 'fig_r_ y_d ak.s_.h the gaming.board isfire, the dice are its coals.

..

.I.

2.

102aya tapyate kitav_sya hina, mat_ putr_sya cAratah, k_ia svit.

_ &

:Forsaken the wife of the gambler is grieved, the mother (too) of the son that wanders who knows where. Indebted, fearing, desiring money he aptrroaches at night the house of others.

.rn. va blbhya4 a dh_aam iohAmano, any_.s_m _stam tipa n_ktam eti.

hin_: pp. of h_ leave, putr_sya : the gambler, tapyate must be lengthening of final a before v supplied with mfit_. .rna-va: (15, i c). bibhyat : pr. pt. of bhi fear. _pa eti : probably for the purpose of stealing, to explain c. n_ktam : see 178, 2 ; 195 A 5 a.

11 striyam, d_. _ya t_pa,

._ ,

kitav_m. stik.rta.m

Caca

It _aim the gambler when he sees a woman, the wife of others, and tl_rwelborderedhome. Since he yokes the brown lwrses in the

any_.sa.m jayam, y6nim,

x. 34,12] pg.rv_.hni_' _van yuyuj6

THE

GAMBLER morning, he fails

193 down (in the

hi ba-

bhr_n, s5 agn_r _nte vrsal_.h pap_da.

evening) near the fire, a beggar.

tatapa : used impersonally with the acc. ; this and the following two perfects may be translated as presents, because they express habitual actions continued into and included in the pr. (213 _4.a). c_.s.tv_ya: gd. of d.rh see, agreeing with kitav_m as the virtual subject (210). striyam (p. 88, fl) : jay_m as apposition, a woman who is the wife of others; that is, when he sees the wives of others and their comfortable homes, he is reminded of the unhappiness of his own wife and the bareness of his own home. _fivan: the brown dice are here figuratively called horses, which he yokes ; that is, lie begins a long spell of gambling with them. pap_da: he consequently falls down, exhausted and overcome, on the ground beside the fire in the evening, having lost everything.

itt

il tl-4"i" _

itt_ i _

Iil

i t-,l-4"tI t"L-_f'<lti

12 y5 yah senator mahat5 ganasya, .... Z_ A raja vra t asya pratham5 babh_.va, tAsmai krnomi, 'n_ dhan_ ruadhmi '; d_ah_ .m precis, d_mi '. ' t_d rt_,m va-

To him u.]w as the general of your great throng, as king has become the first of your host, I stretch forth my ten fi_lgers-' I withhold _w money--this is truth I say '.

y6 vat_ : no specific die is meant, the expression only implying a chief, in the abstract, of the total number of dice played with. Z _ d_a k._omi pracill. : 1 _vut the ten (sc. fingers)forward, that is, I stretch out my two hands, prac_s: A. pl. f. of praffc, used predicatively (198, 1). t_smat : dat. of advantage (200 B 1). n_ dhan_
ll, Ol O

194

THE

GAMBLER

[x. 34, 12

rtm adhmi : that is, 2. ' I have no money left for you ;' these words in _ sense come after praem, expressing what is implied by that gesture. rtAm: predicative, I say this as true (198, 1).

13 ak.sir m_- divya.h ; k.r_.'m it k.r.smava; vittd ramasva, bahd m_nyamg_nah.; t_,tra g_va.h, kitava, t_tra jaya'- : _ A , t_n me vi ca.s.t_ Sawtayam ary_h..

' Play not with dice; -vly thy tillage; rejoice in thy laroaverty, thinking much of it; there are thy cattle, 0 gambler, there thy wife' : this Savitr. here, the noble, reveals to me.

This stanza is spoken by the gambler, who in a-c quotes the advice of Savitr. divyas: 2. s. inj. of div -vlay with m_ (p. 240). ramasva : with loc. (204, 1 a). t_tra : cattle and wife can be regained by acquiring wealth, cas..to : 3. s. pr. of oak.s, me : dat. (200 A c). aygtm : as actually present, ary_s : noble, as upholder of moral law.

14 miCr_m _n.u4hvam. ]_a_lu, mr..l_,t_ no. m_ no ghor6.na oaratg,bhi dh.r._gfx.

_ray ma_ friendshi_, begracious to us. Do not forcibly bewitch us with magic vower. Let your wrath, your enmity _ow come to rest. Let

x. 90,I] nl any6 vo mi _r_tir. manydr

PURU.SA vi_atf_m, pr_sitau nti

195

another now be in the toils of the brown ones.

babhraSn_.m astu.

m.r.lat_ (2. pl. ipv. of m.r.d, p. 3, n. 2): accented as beginning a new sentence ; with final vowel metrically lengthened, nas: dat. (p. 311, f). carata_abhi : with prp. following the vb. (p. 468, 20 A). dh._.n.d: ace. adv. (p. 301, b). In this final stanza the gambler adjures the dice to release him from their magical power.

PURU.SA
There are six or seven hymns dealing with the creation of the world as produced from some original material. In the following one, the well-known Puru.sa-sfLkta or Hymn of )Jan, the gods are the agents of creation, while the material out of which the world is made is the body of a primaeval giant named Puru.sa. The act of creation is here treated as a sacrifice in which Puru_ is the victim, the paints when cut up becoming portions of the universe. Both its language and its matter indicate that it is one of the very latest hymns of the Rigveda. It not only presupposes a knowledge of the three oldest Vedas, to which it refers by name, but also, for the first and only time in the Rigveda_ mentions the four castes. The religious view is moreover different from that of the old hymns, for it is pantheistic: ' Puru.sa is all this world, what has been and shall be'. It is, in fact, the starting-point of the pantheistic philosophy of India. x. 90. Metre : Anus..tubh ; 16 Tri_ubh.

1 seaxtiera_irs_, Ptiru.sa_., sahasr&k_nL.h, sah/mrap_t, s_ bh_mi_ vinyl.to vFtva, " _,ty ati_.th_ d_fa_, 02

Thousand-headed thousand-eyed, havi_g covered

was the earth

.Puru_.a, He on all

tlwusand-footed.

sides, extended beyond it the length of ten fingers.

196

PURUS.A

[x. 90, 1

sahsra_rg_ &c. : that is, having innumerable heads, eyes, and feet, as representing all created beings (cp. _). sahasr_ks._s : of the very numerous By. cds. formed with sah_sra this and sahasraargh_ are the only ones with irr. accent (cp. p. 455, 10 c). da_hgul_m: probably only another way of expressing that his size was greater even than that of the earth, ati#.that : ipf. of stha stand.

_I_VI,IIIn_.I_ICl II 2 Ptiru_.a ev6d_m s_rva .m y_cl bhfit_ .m y_c ca bh_viam." utam.rtatv_sy$_ano, y_d _nnen_tirShati.

_I-_.I _

I_'_I_'_'_ II

Purus.a is this all, that has been an,.1 that will be. And he is the lord of imr_ortality, which he grows beyond through food.

Puru.sa is coextensive with the whole world including the gods. bh_vyam: a late and irregular cadence, am.rtatv_sya: of the immortals, the gods. y_d : there is some doubt as to the construction of d ; the parallelism of _ty ntis.that in 1 d and of _ty aricyata in 5 c indicates that Purusa is the subject and y_id (the gods) the object, and that the former exceeds the latter _nnena, that is, by means of sac_icial food. The words have also been interpreted to mean: wlw (the gods) grow u_ by (sacrificial) food ; or, and of that which grows by food, that is, creatures other than the gods. In these interpretations the meaning of _ti does not seem to be sufficiently brought oat.

8 et_v_ a_y_ _him_,

. J.

Suchishisgreatness, more and titan that is Purus.a. A fourth o]

ate jyay_m_ ca P_trt_.a.h.

x. 90, 5] p_do 'sya vi_v_ bhfit_mi ; tripod asy_m._tam divi.

PURUSA

197

ldm is all beb_gs, three-fourths of him are what is imnzortal in heaven.

ot_v_n asya : irr. Sandhi for et_vK_a asya (occurring also in x. 85, 45 : putr_n _), is a sign of lateness, this being the regular post Vedie Sandhi (89). Atas: equivalent to an ab. after the epv. (201, 3). 3yayam. s 'ca: on the Sandhi, see 40 a. P_rusas: a metrical lengthening for Pfirusas (cp. the Pada text) to avoid a sequence of four short syllables, cp. 5 b. am._tam : equivalent to am.rtatvA.

4 trip_d fird.hvG _id ait Ptirt_.ah ; p_do 'syehabhavat _ " punal_, t_to visvah vi ak.r_mat sfi_anKna_an6 abhi.

With three _uarters .Puru.ya rose u_vward ; one _uarter of him here came i_to being again. Thence he _read asunder in all directions to what eats and does not eat.

_id ait (3. s. ipf. of i go, p. 130) : to the world of immortals, ih_ : in this world, ptinar : that is, from his original form. t_tas : from the earthly quarter, vi akr_mat abhi: distributed himself to, developed into. sfi_ana-ana_an6 : animate creatures and inanimate things ; this cd. represents the latest stage of Dvandvas in the RV. (186 A 1, end).

198j
5 t_m_d
A,

PURU.SA
Vix_.l aj_yata,

Ix. 90,

Hrom him Vi_j was born, from Vir_j Puru.sa. When born he reached beyond the earth behind and also before. Puru.sa. Vir_.: as _he evolved Puru.sa ; u _,diti.h' p_ri from Oil the Sandhi, see

V_ra_6 _dhi P_'u.sa.h. o e sa j_t5 _tty aricyata pa_e_cl bh_.mim _tho pur.h,

t_sm_d: from the undeveloped quarter of intermediate between the prlmaeval Puru.sa and cp. x. 72, 4 : _diter D_l_.o ajfiyata, D_l_._d Aditi Da_va was born, and from Daks.a Aditi. p. 3, n. 2. Withcdep. led. _tho: 24.

6 y_t P_rus.o .n_ havis._ dev_ yaji_4m _tanvata, vas_tllt _ asyf_sa4 z. _ a_yam., gri.sm_ idhm_h., hax_cl dhavi.h,

When the gods_erformed a sacri. flee with Purus.a as an oblation, the spring was its melted butte_; the summer its fuel, the autumn its oblation.

Here the gods arevepresented as offering with the evolved Puru.ea an ideal human sacrifice to the primaeval Puru_a. _tanvata : 3. pl. ipf. A. of tan stretch; this vb. is often used figuratively in the sense of to extend the web of sacrifice = to carry out, perform, dhavis : 54.

_,
7 t_.m yajS_m barhi_i pr_uks.an Pdru_.a .m j_tAm agrat_.h : That Purus.a, born in the beginning, _y_d as a sacrifwe

x.90, 9] tdna dev_ ayajanta_ sRdhy_ ._.saya_ ca yd.

PURU .SA on the strew : with him

199 the

gods, the Sadhyas, and the seers sacrificed.

jat_m agrat_ts: the evolved Purus.a, born from Vii_j (5 b), the same as in 6 a. prh-auk.san: 3. pl. ipf. of 1. uk.s sprinkle, ayajanta: = yajfiam _tanvata in 6 b. Sfi_lhy_s : an old clads of divine beings (here probably in apposition to dev_s), cp. 16 d. ._s.ayah ca ya: and those who were seers, a frequent periphrastic use of the rel. = sire ply rsayas. ' *.

8 t_mRcl yaj i_. "L sarvahdtah at sm.bhrtam p_adRji_m : pa_tn t_m_ cakre vKyavyku, Rrany_n, gr_mi_t_ ca yd.

_From ft_at sacrifice coml)letely offered was collected the clotted butter .. he _nade that the beasts of

the air, of the forest, and those of the village. t_ismRd : ab. of the source (201 A 1). sam. bhrtam : as finite vb_ p_ad-_jy_m : accent, p. 455, 10 d 1. pah_n : Sandhi, 40, 2. t_tm : attracted to laah_n for t_t (p._.ad_y_m); Sandhi, 40, 1 a. vRyav_n : one of the rare cases where "the independent Svarita remains in t)ronunciation (p. 448, 1); _tn here remains unaffected by Sandhi because it is at the end of a Pada (p. 31, f. n. 8) ; this is one of several indications that the internal Padas (those within a hemistich)as well as the Aexternal Padas were originally independent (cp. p. 465, f. n. 4). _ ._ .t aranyan : that is, wild. gramy_ ca yd = gramyan, that is, tame ; cp.._saya ca yd in 7 d.

200 9 t_sm_d yajfi_t sarvahdta A ...... ._ca.h samara jajmre; ch_ncl_msi jajfiire tCLsmfid; y_jus t_sm_d aj_,yata,
2. _

PURU.SA

[_- _o, 9

From that sacrifice completely offered were born the hymns and the chants; the metres were born from it ; the sacrificial formula was born fi'om it.
.

._cas: the Rigveda. samara: the Samaveda. jajfiire: 3. pl. pf. ,_. of jan beget, y_us: the Yajurveda. This is the first (implicit) mention of the three Vedas. The AV. was not recognized as the fourth Veda till much later.

10 t_sm_d _v_ aj_,yanta A y6 k6 ca ubhay_latah, A .... gavo ha ja3mre t_tsm_t ; t_Lsm_,jjata aj_v_yah., "

terom that arose horses and all such as have two rows of teeth. Cattle were born from that; from that were born goats and she_.

y6 k6 ca: whatever anima|s _esides the horse, such as asses and mules, have incisors above and below, ajav_yas : a pl. Dr. (186 A 2) ; Dvandvas are not analysed in the Pada text.

11 y_t Pdrusam. vi_da .dhuh, When they dividecl Puru4.a, into katidh_ vi akalpayan P how many warts did they disloose mukham kim asyaY l_u bfih_xP him ? What (did} his mouth O_eA A ka uru p_l_, ueyete P come) ? What are his two arms, his two thighs, his two feet called ?

x. 9o, 18]

PURUS.A

201

vi-_dadhur: when the gods cut up Purusa as the victim ; here the Padapa.tha again (see note on viii. 48, 2 a, 10 c) accents the prp. in a subordinate clause (p. 469, 20 B). k_u : the dual ending au for the normal _ before consonants (cp. note on x. 14, 10 a); k_ and p_lfi, before _ : 22. ucyete : 8. du. pr. ps. of vao sneak : Pragl.'hya, 26 b.

12 brfi2_aan. 5 'sya mtikham _sid, b_h_t rkjania.h krt_.h ; fir_ td,d asya y_d v_,i_ya.h ; padbhy_m _fidr6 aj_yata,

His mouth was the .Br(dtman, his two arms were made the warrior, his two thighs the Vai$ya ; from his two feet the ,_dra was born.

In this stanza occurs the only mention of the four castes in the RV. brfihman5 'sya: Sandhi accent, p. 465, 17, 3. r_jany_s: predicative nora. after a ps. (196 b). krt_s attracted in number to rSjanyk.h, for k.rtt_u (cp. 194, 3). y_d vd,i_yas : the periphrastic use of the rel. (ep. 7 d and 8 d), lit. his t_oo thighs became that which was the _ VaiSya. pa_lb h yam : abl. of source (77, 3 a, p. 458, 1).

13eand__m_ m_nasojf_t_'; c_k_o.h s_-*y6 ajfiyata ; mfi.khad _ndra_ ca Agni_ ca, pr_n._ V_ydr aj_yata.

The moon was born from his mind; from his eye the sun was born ; from his mouth Indra and Agni, from his breath Vaya was born.

202

PURU.SA

Ix. 90,

Note that candrg-m_s is not analysed in the Pada text. cgk.sos : ab. of cgks.u used only in this passage = the usual cgksus ; in the Funeral Hymn (x. 16, 3) s_ryas and cgk_. s, v_tas and Attar, are also referred to as cognate in nature.

14 nabhya _sid ant_riksam; fir.sn6 dy_uh s_m avartata; A J. , padbhya .m bhumtr, difah, fir6trot : .L "_s t_thfi lokam akalpayan,

From his _avel was produced the air; from his head the s_'ywas evolved; from his two.feet the earth, from his ear the _uarters : thus they fashioned the worlds.

nKbhyas : ab. of n_bhi inflected according to the i dec. (p. 82 a}. fiirs.n_s : ab. of firs_n (90, 1 a ; p. 458, 2). s_m avartata : this -b. is to be supplied in c ; cp. _dhi s_m avartata in x. 129, 4. akalpayah : ipf. cs. of 14.p ; they (the gods) fashioned.

_II

--

15 saptasyasan par_dh_yas; tri_. sapt_ samidha.h k.rt_h. ;

.t. , J.

_even were his enclosing .,st.irJ_ ; thrice seven were the faggots _nade, when the #o_p_]crming the sacririce,b_d 2:_r_a as the victim.

dora yad, yajif_m tanvana, _badhnan Ptirtlsam pa_t_m,

paridh_yas : the green stlcks_utround the sacrificial fire to fence it in. generally three in _amnber. sapt_: as a sacred number. tanw_u_ : cp. 8 l_ &tm_buan : 3. pl. ipf. of bandh ; cp. pdru_ena hav_- in 6a and t_m yajfi_m Puru_..am in 7 a b. pa_t_m : as appo_aal acc. (198).

x. 127, 1]

R._TRi

203

_ _ _',__:
16 yajfdna v_s: t_ni dh_rmRni td ha n_kam cants, y_tra p_rvo devAh.. yajfi_m

_
ayajanta

_,__,r_,_:, _
de-

__T__ _,

With the sacrifice the gods sacririced to the sacrifice: these where the gods. were are the first ordinances. reached the firmament Sadhyas, the ancient These powers

prathamam _ " _san. mahim_na.h Sfirlbi_.h sas$_nti,

ayajanta: this vb. ordinarily takes the ace. of the person worshipped and the inst. of that with which he is worshipped (308, 1 f) ; the meaning here is: they sacrificed to Puru.sa (here appearing as a sacl_fice, like i.s.nu in the Brahma.has) with the sacrifice in which 3. he was the victim, td mahlmana.h: probably the powers residing in the sacrifice. This stanza is identical with i. 164, 50.

RATRi
The goddessof night, under the name of R_tri isinvokedin onlyone hymn (x.127). She isthe sister ofUs.as, and like her isculled daughter a ofheaven. She isnot conceived thedark, as but asthebright starlit night. Decked with allsplendour shedrives away thedarkness.At herapproach men, beasts,nd birdsgo to rest She protects a herworshippers from the wolf and the thief, guidingthem to safety.Under the name of nd.ktan., combinedwith us.as,ight appearsas a dual divinityith Dawn in the N w .C form of Us_s_-n_kt_ and NRkto.sas_, occurring in some twenty scattered stanzas of the Rigveda. x. 127. Metre: G4yatrL

__ ___f_:,

_,

__,_:,

204 1 R_tri vl akhyad _yati purutr_ dev_ ak.s_bhi .h : vistva _dhi firiyo 'dhita.

R.g,TRi

. [x. 1_7,1

Night afflaroaching has booked forth in many _Zaceswith her eyes: she has _ut on aZlgbories.

vi akhyat: a ao. of khy_ see (147 a 1). R-yat{: pr. pt. f. of a+i go (95 a). devi : accent, p. 450, b ; metre, p. 437, a 4. ak_._bhis : 99, 4; the eyes are stars. _dhi adhita: root ao. A. of dh_ pt_t (148, 1 a). _riyas (A. pl. of hr_ ; 100 b, p. 87) ; the glories of starlighf.

2 _ urv _pr_ _marti_ niv_to devl udv_ta.h : jy6tis_ b_dhate t_mah,

The immortal goddess has 3oervaded the wide s'laace,the deptl_s, and the heights: wi#_ light sl_e drives away the darkness.

apras : 3. s. s ao. of l_ra fill (144, 5). with starlight.

dev{ : cp. 1 b.

jy6ti_.a :

3 nix u svGsfixam askrta U.s_sam. devI _yat_ : _p_d u hasate t_mah.,

The goddess a.p')roaching has turned out her sister .Dawn ; away too will go _he darkness.

nlr ask.rta: 3. s. root ao. of ky do ; the s is here not original (Padapa._ha ak.rta), but is probably due to the analogy of forms such as ni.s-kuru {AV.); it spread to forms in which k.r is compounded with the prps. p_ri and s_m (pari_k_.nv_nti, p_risk4"ta, s_ .msk.rta). U.s(_sam: _Oawn here used in _he sense of dayZight (dec., 88, 2 a). ]air u-- _pa id u : in Che second clause the pcl. is used anaphorically (p. 221, 2), with special emphasis (id) on the second prp., = and the

x. 127,6]

RATRi

205 hgsate : 3.

darkness will also be dispelled by the starlight (cp. 2 c). s. sb. __. of the s ao. of 2. hR go forth {p. 162, 2).

Z_ _ _r_red _

_ I__: _ Ivet: I___r_. I i

4 s_ n5 ady_, y_sy_ vay_m ni te y_mann _viksmahi, v.rks6 n_ vasatim vtiya.h,

So to us to-day thou (hast approached), at whose ayproach we have come home, as birds to their _est upon lhe tree.

s_ : p. 294, b ; a vb. _ has Zhere to be supplied, the most natural one being hast come, from ayatz in 3 b. y_sy_s., te for tv_m y_sy&s, .t a prs. prn. often being put in the tel. clause, yaman: loc. (90). hi.. t_viksmahi : s ao. -_.,we have turned in (intr.). vasatim : governed by a cognate vb. to be supplied, such as return to. v_yas : N. p]. of vi bh'd (99, 3 a).

5 n_ gramas6

avik.sata,

Home have gone the villages, home o'eatures u,ith feet, home those with wings, home even the greedy hawks.
2. _

ni padv_nte, ni pakslna.h, ni _yen_sa_ cid arthina.h,

nl avil_ata : 3. pl. A. s ao. of rift enter, gramasas : = villagers. ni : note the repetition of the pip. throughout, in place of the cd. vb.: a common usage.

206 6 y_v_y_ vFkiaIp v._kam.,

RATRi

Ix. _7, 6 Ward off the she-wolf and the

yav_ya sten_m, _rmie ; _th_ na.h sut_r_ bhava,

wolf, ward off the thief, 0 _l_igllt; so be easy for us to 2ass.

y_v_y_ : cs. of yn separate ; this and other roots ending in d, as well as in i, F, may take Guna or Vrddhi in the cs. (168, 1 c), but the Padapa.tha invariably gives yavaya; the final vowel is metrically lengthened (in b it is long by position before st). vrky_m : accent, p. 450, 2 b. _th_ : final metrically lengthened {cp. p. 214).

'__

_"_l"__._:

_ I _ I"_IC_I_. _: I

7 _ipa m_ p6pi_at t_ma.h, krsn_m, viaktam asthita : U@ar_va y_taya.

The darkness, thickly Ioainti_zg, black,_alpable, has aloproachedme: 0 Dawn, clear it off like debts.

fil_a asthita : 8. s. ,L of root ao. of sthfi stand, p4pi_at : int. pr. pt. of pih paint, as if it were material. _i.sas : Dawn, as a counterpart of Night, is invoked to exact -- remove the darkness from Ratty, as one exacts money owing. In hymns addressed to a particular deity, another who is cognate or in some way associated, is not infrequently introduced incidentally, y_taya : cs. of yat.

8 _laa te g_ i_karam, v_._.v_, duhitar divah., R_tri, stSma .m n_ jigy_i.se,

L_ke kite I have delivered u_ to thee a hymn--choose it 0 daughter of heaven, 0 _iyht--like a song of Iaraise to a victor.

_ilaa _ akaram (1. s. root ao. of k_) : I have driven up for thee my song of p_ise, as a herdsman delivers up in the evening the cows which he has herded since the morning; cp. i. 114, 9, fipa t_ stSm_n

x. 129, 1]

HYMN

OF

CREATION

207

pa_up_ " lva_akaram I have driven up songs of praise for thee Zike a herdsman, v.rni.sv_ : 2. s. ipv. __. from vr choose, b is parenthetical. stdmam is to be supplied with _karam. jigytise : dat. of pL pt. of ji con_uer (157 b a).

HYMN OF CREATION
In the following cosmogonic poem the origin of the world is explained as the evolution of the existent (s_,t) from the non-existent (_sat). Water thus came into being first ; from it was evoh'ed intelligence by heat. )t is the starting-point of the natural philosophy which developed into the Sfiflkhya system. x. 129. Metre : Tris..tubh.

1 n_sad n_id kim

_sin,

n5

s_d

f_sit par5 P

tad_y_t. k_sya ga-

There nor

was not the non.existent Then ; there was

him. ; r_jo n5 viom_ avar_vah. P _rmann P k_ha

the existent

_wt the air nor the heaven which is beyond. Where ? What did it contain ? In whose _rotection ? water, unfathomable,

d_nbhal_ kim _sid, bhi_m P

gdhanam

Was there _rofound ?

Cf. _B. x. 5, 8, 1 : n_iva v_ id_m _gr6_ead _sid n_iv_ s_d Rsit verily this (universe) was in the beginning _eit_er _mn-existent #$_r existent as /t were_ tacl_mim : before the creation. _sit : the u_ual

208

HYMN

OF CREATION

Ix. 129, 1

form of the 3. s. ipf. of as be ; the rarer form occurs in 3 b. n5 : for n_ u (24). vlomg: the final vowel metrically lengthened (ep. p. 440, 4B). l_ar_s: adv.; on the accent ep. note on ii. 35, 6c. avar_var : 3. s. ipf. int. of v.r cover (cp. 173, 3) ; what did it cover u.p_ conceal or contain ? kd_ha : where was it ? k_sya _rman : who guarded it ? ldm: here as an inter, pel. {p. 225). _mbhas: ep. 3 b, and TS., _po v_ id_m _gre salfl_m _sit this (universe) in the beginning was the waters, the ocean.

_f'_ I"_ITII II 2 n_ m rtydr _sid, am._tam, n_ t_rhi, n_ ratria _hna _sit praket_.h, _ "_nid av_t_m svadh_iy_ thd akam. t'asm_l dh_nyhn n_ parhh klm
oanl_81t,.

There was not death nor immortality then. There was _wt the beacon of night, nor of day. That one breathed, windless, by its own _ower. Other titan that there was not anything beyond.

r_try_s: gen. of r#_tri (p. 87). _hnas: gen. of _han (91, 2). _nit: 3. s. ipf. of an breathe (p. 143, 3 a). t_smgd: governed by any_d (p. 317, 3). dha for ha: 54. any_n n_: 33. l_ar_s : ep. note on 1 b. gsa: pf. of as be (135, 2).

il_l.li,l__l_l,_nlil+tli

I _

I "tt'_l_IPlitlt.

I tltl. i

x. 1_, 4]

BYMN

OF CREATION

209

3 t_ma Rsit t_masR gfi_. _m _gro ; apraket_.m salil_.m s_rvam id_m. tuehydnRbhfi_pihitamy_d_sit, t_pasas t_n mahin_jayat_ikam, _

.Darkness was in the beginning" hidden by darkness; indistingui+:hable, this all was water. That which, coming into bei_2g, was covered with the void, that One arose through the power of heat.

gfi.lh_m : pp. of guh hide (69 c, cp. 3 b 7, p. 3 and 13). Rs : 3. s. ipf. of as be (p. 142, 2 b) ; this form is also found twice (i. 85, 1.7) alternating with Rsit. b is a JagatI intruding in a Tris._ubh stanza (cp. p. 445, f.n. 7). Rbhll : the meaning of this word is illustrated by R-babh_va in 6 d and 7 a. mahma = mahimn_ (90, 2, p. 69).

ff i,

4 k_mas

t_d Ggro s_m avarta-

.Desire in the beginning came upon that, (desire) first seed of mind. in their hearts with out the bond of the _on-existent. of v.rt turn, with s_m come into that was the Sages seeking wisdom found existent in the

t_tdhi, m_naso rdtah, pratham_m, yhd _tsit. satd b_ndhnm _sati nit avindan h rdi pratzsya kavayo man_.a. dxlhi s_m avartata: 3. s. ipf.._,

being ; itdhi upon makes the verb transitive = come upon, take possession of. t_d that _ t_cl dkam in 2 c, the unevolved universe. One of the two prps. here is placed after the vb. (cp. 191f, and p. 468, 20 A a). yAd: referring to k_mas is attracted in gender to the predicate n. rdtas, sates: they found the origin of the evolved world in the unevolved, prati-i.syR: the gd. in ya has often a long final vowel (164, 1) which is always short in the Padapa.tha. manY_ : inst. of f. in a (p. 77).
190_ P

210

HYMN

OF CREATION

[x. 1_: 5

5 tira_c_uo vitato ra_mir esfim : adh_.h svid ass 3 d, up_ri svid _si 3 t ? . _ . retodha asan, mah!mana fisan; svadh_ av_stat, pr_yatih, tftt. par_s-

Their cord was extended across : was there below or was there above? There were imlgregnators, there were l)owers ; there was energy below, there was impulse above.

r_mis : the meaning of this word here is uncertain, but it may be sn explanation of b_ndhu in 4 c: the cord with which the sages (referred to by es_m) in thought measured out the distance between the existent and non-existent, or between what was above and below ; cp. viii. 25, 18, p_ri y6 ra_minrt div5 Rnt_n mama p rthivy_.h who with a cord has measured out the ends of heaven and earth ; cp. also the expression s_tram, vitatam (in AV. x. 8, 37) the extended string with reference to the earth. _sft: accented because in an antithetical sentence (p. 468, 19 B fl). The i is prolated, and that syllable (and not _) has the Udatta, as in the final syllable of a sentence in questions (Panh_i viii. 2, 97); the second question upg_ri svid _si3t is quoted by Pa.nini (viii. 2, 102) as coming under this rule, but without . accent, retodh_s and mahunanas are contrasted as male and female cosmogonic principles, to which correspond respectively pr_yatis and svadh_. In TS. iv. 3, 11, 1, mention is made of tr_yo mahim_aa.h connected with fertility, svadh_: this is one of the five examples of a N. f. in f_ left uncontracted with a following vowel: it is probable that the editors of the Satp.hita text treated these forms as ending in _l_, while the Padapa.tha gives them without Visarjan_ya, doubtless owing to the greatly increasing prevalence of the nominatives in _.

x. 129, 7]

HYMN

OF CREATION

211

I ti: i

6 k5 addh_ veda? k_ ih_ pr_, Who Icnows truly? W7to shall vocat, here declare, whence it has been Ao_ k_ita ajat_, kdta iy_.m vis_..tih. 9 produced, whence is this creation':e arv_tg dev_ asy_ vis_rjanena : By the creation of this (aniverse) _thet k6 veda y_ita etbabh_va P the gods (come) afterwards : who then knows whence it has arisen ? voeat: a ao. inj. of vae. kut_s: b has one syllable too many (p. 441, 4 a). arv_k: the sense is that the gods, being part of the creation, are later than the period preceding the ereation, and therefore can know nothing of the origin of the universe. _thet: with metrically lengthened final vowel (p. 440, 4 ; cp. 179, 1).

7 iy_m. vis.rs.tir y_.ta etbabh_va ; y_di vet dadh$ y_xli vet n_ : ' y5 asyadhyaksa.h param6 vloman s_ afxg_ veda, y_h2i vet n_ v6da.

Whencethis creation has arisen ; whether he founded it or did not : he who _n the highest heave_+is its surveyor, he only knows, or else he knows not.

a and b are dependent on veda in d. asya : of this universe, b is defective by two syllables (p. 440, 4 a) : possibly a metrical pause expressive of doubt may have been intended, vybman : loc. (90, 2). vdda : the accent is due to the formal influence of y_tdi (p. 246, 3 a). P2

212

YAMA

Ix. 135, I

YAMA
Three hymns are addressed Yama, the chiefof the blesseddead. to There isalso another(x.10), which consists a dialogue of between him and hissisterami. He isassociated Y withVaruu.a, .rhaspati, especially B and Agni, the conductorof the dead, who iscalled hisfriend and hispriest. He isnotexpressly esignated god,but onlya being who rulesthe dead. d a He isassociated with the departedFathers, e_pecially ASgirases, the with whom he corses thesacrifice drinkSoma. to to Yama dwells the _emoterecess thesky. In hisabode, in of which is the home of the gods,he issurrounded songs and the sound of the flute. by Soma is pressed forYama, ghee isofl'ered him, and he comes to seat to himself atthe sacrifice. isinvokedto leadhisworshippers thegods, He to and toprolonglife. HisfatherisVivasvantand hismother Saran.yfi. her dialogue In with him Yami speaksofYama asthe'onlymortal', and elsewhere e issaidto h have chosen death and abandoned his body. He departedto the other world, havingfound out the path formany, to where the ancient Fathers passed away. Death isthe path of Yama. His foot-fetter (p_d.bi_a) is spoken of as parallel o the bond of Varun.a.The owl (ul_ka)and the t pigeon(kap6ta)arementioned as his messengers, but the two foureyed, broad-nosed,rindleddogs,sonsof Sarars_'t b (sRramey_u) are his regular emissaries. They guard the path along which the dead man hastensto join the Fatherswho rejoiceith Yama. They watch men and wander w about among the peoplesas Yama's messengers. They are besoughtto grantcontinuedenjoymentofthelight ofthesun. As the firstather mankind and the first f thosethatdied,Yarsa f of o appearstoha_e originally been regardedas a rsortal who became the chief of the souls ofthedeparted.He goesbacki,o the Indo-lranianeriod,or p f the primaevaltwins, from whom the human raceisdescended, ama and Y YamS, areidentical withthe Yima and Yimeh oftheAvcsta. Yama himself may in that periodhave been regardedas a king of a golden age,forin the Avesta isthe ruler an earthly, intheRV. that of a heavenly he of and paradise. x. 185. Metre : Anu..stubh.

x. _5, 3] 1 y_smin vrks_ supal_6 dov_i.h sam.pibate Yam_h., _tr_ no vi_p_ti.h pit_ A ,_s pur_nam _nu venatL

_YAMA Beside the fair-lea_

213 tree u_uter

which Yama drinks together with the gads, there our father, ntaster of the house, seeks fl_efriendshi_v of the men of old.

y_smin: the loc. is orion used in the sense of beside, _tear (cp. 203, 2). sampibate : drinks Soma w/lb. _tr_ : with metrically long final vowel (cp. 433, 2 A). nas: our i.e. of me and the other members of the family, pit_ : my deceased father, pur_.._n : ancient ancestors ; Sandhi, 39. hnu venati : that is, associates with them

2 puran..am anuv6nantam., c_rantam, la_p_y_muy_, asfiy_nn abh i_eBka_am. : t_sm_ asp.rhayam, ptinah,

Him seeking the friendshi_ of the men of old, faring in this evil way, I looked u2on displeased : far him I hinged again.

In this and the preceding stanza a son speaks of his father who has gone to the world of ama. amuy_: inst. s. f. of the prn. ay_m used adverbially with shift of accent (p. 109); with this is combined the inst. s. f. of the adj. pap_ similarly used, the two together meaning in fhis evil way, that is, going to the abode of the dead. a_fiy_n: being displeased, that is, with him, opposed to asp.rhayam, I longed for him, that is, to see him again, acf_ka_am : ipf. int_ of kf_, with shortening of the radical vowel {174).

214 3 yam, kum_ra, n_va .m r_itham aoakram manas_.k.rn, oh., 6kesam. vi_vata.h praiteam, " " .L apa_yann adhi tis..thasi,

YAMA

[x. 1_, S

The new cam;0 boy, the wheelless, which thou didst make in mind, which has one_ole, but faces in all directions, thou ascendest seeing it not.

In this stanza (and the next) the dead boy is addressed ; he mounts the car which he imagines is to take him to the other world, acakr_m : perhaps because the dead are wafted to Yama by Agni. 6ka and vi_v_tas are opposed : though it has but one pole, it has a front on every side. dpa_yan : because dead.

k 1 4 y_.m, um_ra,rP_artayo r_tham vlprebhias p_xi, 1 - A t_m. samanu pravartata, , o sam it6 n_vl ahitazn.

The car, 0 boy, that thou didst set rolling forth away from the l_riests, after that there roZled forth a chant _laced from here UlaOn ship. a

The departure of the dead is followed by a funeral chant, pra_vartayas : 2. s. ipf. es. of vr.t turn ; accent, p. 464, 17, 1 ; p. 469, fl ; analysed by the Padapatha, as pr_i avaxtayas ; ep. note on viii. 48, 2 a _inu pr_ avartata : 3. s. ipf. _ of vrt : accent, p. 464, 17, 1 ; p. 466, 19 ; p. 468, 20 a. viprebhyas : the priesls officiating at the funeral; abl. governed by p_i (176, 1 a); Sandhi, 43, 2 a. sam _-hitaza: accent, Ix 462, 13 b. n_vi: the funeral chant is placed on a boat as a vehicle to convey it from here (itAs) to the other world.

_: _ _:f__ _t _r_

,,:, _Ir_TO_, _, _:_ f-t__, -a, n __'___. _ _ryFt _

x. lSb, 7] 5 k_.h kum_r_m rt_tham ajanayad P P

YAMA Who generated rolled out his the boy ? ear ?

215 WTm

k6 nir avarLayat

WTw pray how his

kgh. svit tgcl ady_ no br_2F_d , anud6yi " yathabhavat p

could tell us tMs to-day, equipment (?) was ?

These questions seem to be asked by Yama on the deceased boy's arrival : Who was his father ? Who performed his funeral ? With what equipment was he provided for the journey ? nit avartayat : cp. ygm pr_vartayo rAtham in 4 a b. anud_yi: this word occurs only in this and the following verse ; it is a f. of anu-d6ya, which occurs in the sense of to be handed over ; the exact sense is nevertheless uncertain. It not improbably means that with which was supplied for the journey to Yama's abode. the deceased

6 ygth_bhavad anud_yi, t_t5 _gramaj_yata; pur_stad

. .

As the equipment was, so the Lop arose; in front the bottom ex..: tended ; behind the exit was made.

budhn_,

_tata.h; k.rt_m.

pa_caa

nxrayanam

The sense of this stanza is obscure, chiefly because the object of which the details are here given is uncertain. The car on which the deceased is supposed to be conveyed may be meant. There is evidently correspondence between ygthA and t_tas, t_gram and budhm_s, purtLst_cl and pa_c_d. There is no doubt about the grammatical forms or the meaning of the individual words (except anud_yi). If the reference is to the car, the general sense of the stanza is: in proportion to the equipment is the height of the tOl_ the space on the floor in front, and the size of the exit at the back.

216

YAMA

Ix. 135, 7

7 id_m. Yam_sya a_dana .m devam_n_m y,td uey_te, iy_n asya dhamyate na.lir, ay_m. girbhi.h p_ri_.krta.h,

This is the seat of Yama that is called the abode of the gods. This is his flute that is blown. He it is that is adorned with songs.

The boy here azTives at the abode of Yama. s_danam : note that the vowel of this word is always short in the Pads text, the compilers of which seem to have regarded it as a metrical lengthening; sadanam occurs about a dozen times in the RV., beside the much commoner shdanam, nfi.l_s: with s in the'nora. (100, I a). There is one syllable too many in c (cp. p. 428, 2 a). ay_m : Yama. p_risk.rtas: note that the Pads text removes the unoriginal s (p. 145, f. n. 1; cp. note on x. 127, 3 a). girbhis: dec. 82; accent, p. 458, c 1. L

VATA
This god, as V_ta, the ordinary name of wind, is addressed in two short hymns. He is invoked in a more concrete way than his doublet Vayf, who is celebrated in one whole hymn and in parts of others. V_ta's name is frequently connected with forms of the root v&,. blow, from which it is derived. He is once associated with the god of the rain-storm in the dual form of V_,tt_-Parjany_-, while _yu is often similarly linked with Indra as ][ndra-Vay_ V_ta is the breath of the gods. Like Rudra he wafts healing and prolongs life; for he has the treasure of immortality in his house. His activity is chiefly mentioned in connexion with the thunderstorm. He produces ruddy lights and makes the dawns to shine. His swiftness often supplies a comparison for the speed of the gods or of mythical steeds. His noise is also often mentioned. x. 168. Metre: Tri.s.tubh.

r-m--

m--I

x. 1_, 2]
.t

"V.._.TA

217

1 V_tasya nd mahimana.m r_thasya: ruj_nn eti, stan_yann asya ghS.sah., divisp_g yatl " arun.am" krn.v_nn ; _ ut5 eti prthivy_ rendm _yan.

(I will) now (proclaim) the greatness of Vata's car: its sound goes shattering, thundering. Touching the sky it goes producing ruddy hues ; and it also goes along the earth scattering dust.

mahlmanam : the vb. can easily be supplied, the most obvious one being lar_ vocam according to the first verse of i. 32, Indrasya nfi viry_.ni pr_ vocam, and of i. 154 Vionor nd kam. viry_ni pr_ ocam. ruj_n : similarly the Maruts are said to split, the mountain with the felly of their cars (v. 52, 9), and their sound is thunder (i. 23, 11). stan_yan: used predicatively like a finite vb. (207) or eti may be supplied, aru_._ai: alluding to the ruddy hue of lightning, with which the Maruts are particularly associated, asya : accent, p. 452. ut6: 24. prthlvya: inst. expressing motion over (199, 4).

II

2s_mpr_rate_nuV_tasyavi_h_: _ina.m gachanti s_manam y6sfih., t_bhi.h say_k sar_tha.m iyate, asy_ vi_vasya bhdvanasya

n_ dew raja, z._

The lwsts of Vata speed on together after him : they go to him as women to a festival. The god, the king of all this world, united with them, goes on the same car.

s_m pr_ irate : 8. pl. pr. _ of [r; p. 468, 20 a. vi.s.th_s : though the derivation is vi-stha (not analysed in the Pada text), the meaning is uncertain. It is probably the subject with which y6p_s are com-

218

rATA

[_ 168,2

pared, the sense being : the rains follow the storm wind (ap_m s_kh_ in 3 e), and accompany him on his course, sar_tham : an adv. based on the cognate acc. (197, 4). iyate: from i go according to the fourth class, from which the pr. forms iyase, iyate, iyante, and the pt. lyamana occur ; c is a Jagat! l_da.

D
/-

3 antAriks.e pathibhir lyamano, na ni vi_ate katam_o ean_ha.h, , .t at _ al_ .m sttkha prathama_a rtava, kda svij j_t_ ktita _ babhfxva ?

Goin 9 along his paths in the air he rests not any day. The friend of waters, the first-born, the holy, where pra_j being born, whence has he arisen ?

pathibhis : inst. in local sense (199, 4). iyam_nas : see note on 2 c. _has : ace. of duration of time (197, 2) ; cp. also 4 b and the Padapli.tha. .at apkm. s_kh_ : as accompanied by rain (ep. note on 2 a). prathama-_as : 97, 2. _t_vk : 15 c. kv/_ : = k_u_ (p. 448). jatAs : as a finite verb (9.08); cp. x. 129, 6 b, k_ita _ babhfava = what is his origin (cp. x, 129, 6 d) ; on the use of the pf. ep. 213 A a.

m__ "_l'_'_a__:I __ml

_W[_l _q_ll_ _ I_[r_: I I__IS___ I__I:

4 @,tm#_ devanam, _ -

bh_ivanasya

.Breath of the gods, germ of the world, this god fares accordin# to his will. His sou_ are heard,

g_rbho, yath_va/i_la carati dev_ e_b.

x. 16s, 4]

VAT__

219

ghS.s_ id asya _rnvire, n_ rftp_m. t_smai V_t_ya havis_, vid.hema,

(but) his form is not (seen). To that Vata we would __a# worship with oblation.

f_tm_: cp. x. 90, 13, where Vayu is said to have been produced from the breath of Puru.sa ; and x. 16, 3, where breath is allied to wind. grbhas: Vata is here called germ of the world as Agni is in x. 45, 6. asya : accent, p. 452. gh6s_s : cp. 1 b. _rn.vire : 3. pl. /k. pr. of firu with ps. sense (p. 145, _). n_ rflpm : the vb. d_yate is here easily supplied, vidhema : with dat. (200 A f).

VOCABULARY
Finite verbal forms are here given under the root from which they are derived, as also the prepositions with which they are compounded, even when separated fl'om them. Nominal verbal forms (participles, gerunds_ gerundives, infinitives), on the other hand_ appear in their alphabetical order. ABBREVIATIONS a. = adjective. A. = accusative.._ = ._.tmanepada, middle voice. A&. = Aitareya -_ranyaka. ab. _ ablative, ace. = accusative, act. = active, adv. = adverb, adverbial, ao. = aorist. Arm. = Armenian. Av. = Avesta, Avestic. By. = Bahuvrihi compound, cd. = compound, cj. = conjunction, cog. = cognate. corr. = correlative, cpv. = comparative, cs. = causative. D. = dative, dat. dative, dec. = declension, dem. = demonstrative, den. = denominative. der. _ derivative. Dv. -_ Dvandva compound, ds. = desiderative, du. _ dual. emph. = emphatic_ emphasizing, enc.= enclitic. Eng. _ English. = feminine. ft. = future. G. _ genitive, gd.= gerund, gdv. = gerundive, gen. = genitive. Gk. = Greek. Go. = Gothic. gov. = governing compound. I. = instrumental. ij. = interjection, ind. _ indicative, indec. = indeclinable, inf. = infinitive. inj. -_.injunctive. inst. = instrumental, int. = intensive, inter. = interrogative. ipf. = imperfect, ipv. = imperative, irr. = irregular, itv. = itorative. K. = Karmadh_.raya compound, m. = masculine, mid. = middle. L. = leo,tire. Lat. = Latin. le. = locative. Lith. = Lithuanian. N. = nominative. n. = neuter, neg. = negative, nm. = numeral, nora. = nominative. OG. = Old German. OI. - Old Irish. OP. = Old Persian. op. = optative. ord. -- ordinal. 0S. = 01d Saxon. OSl. = Old Slavonic. P. = Parasmaipada, active voice, pcl. = particle, pf. = perfect, pl. = plural, poss. = possessive. pp. = past passive participle, ppf. = pluperfect, pr. = present, prn. = pronoun. proh. = prohibitive, prp. = preposition, prs. = person, personal. ps. = passive, pt. = participle, red. = reduplicated, ref. = reflexive, rel. = relative, rt. = root. s. = singular, sb. = subjunctive, sec.= secondary. sf. = suffix. Slav. = Slavonic. spy. = superlative, syn. = syntactical. Tp. = Tatpuru.sa compound. YV. = Yajurveda. V. - vocative, vb. = verb, verbal, voe. = vocative.

a, prn. root tha_ in _-tas, _-tra, _-tha, a-smCii, a-sy_, am_ attain_ v. a_nSti, a_nut6 : see a_. (Lm]l.as, n. distr,, trouble_ ii. 3_, 2 3 ; iii. 59_ 2 ; vii. 71_ 5.

ak-t_, m. ointme_t ; beam of light ; (clear) night 7 x. 14_ 9 [a_ij anoint]. aks-_, m. die for playing, pl. dice, x. 34, 2. 4. 6. 7. 13 [perhaps ey8 = spo_.

ak.s-fm, n. eye (weak stem of _k.si), x. 127, 1. _-ks.iya-m_n.s, pr. pt. ps. u_ff'ailing, i. 154, 4 [2. k.si destroy]. aJrJakhali-k_ty_, gd. having made a croak, vii. 103, 3. Ag-ni, m. fire, ii. 12,3; iii. 59, 5 ; viii. 48, 6 ; x. 34, 11 ; god of fire, Ayni, i. 1-7, 9 ; 36, I ; ii. 35, 15 ; v. 11, 1-6 ; vii. 49, 4 ; x. 15, 9. 12 ; 90, 13 [Lat. ig-ni-s, Slav. og-n_], agni-dagdh/[, Tp. cd. burnt with fire, x. 15, 14 [pp. of dah burn]. agnidflta_ a. (By.) having Agni as a messenger, x. 14, t3. agni-sv_tt_, cd. Tp. consumed by fire, x. 15, 11 [pp. of svftd taste wall]. _g-ra. n. front; beginning; top, x. 135, 6; lc. _gro in the beginning, x. 129. 3. 4. agra-t_s, adv. in the beginning, x. 90, 7. a-ghn-y_, f. cow, v. 83, 8 [gdv. not to be slain, from han slayS. a_ku_-in, a. having a hook, hooked, attractive, x. 34, 7 [aflkud_ hook]. 1. _g-a, n. llmb, ii. 33, 9. 2. a_g_, emphatic pcl. 3ust, only, i. I_6; x. 129, 7 [180]. _g_ra, m. toed, x. 34, 9. /Lflgira, m. name of an ancient seer, iv. 51, 4. _figira_, m. p]. name of a group of ancestors, v. 11, 6 ; x. 14, 3. 4.5. 6 ; s., as an epithet of Agni, i. 1, 6 ; v. 11,6 _Gk. 5TT_ho-_ ' messenger ']. ac bend, I. P. 6ati. _d-, draw up, v. 83, 8. a--vakr_, a. (By.) wheelless_ x. 185, 3. A-cit, a. (K.) unthinking, thoughtless, vii. 86, 7. a-eft-e, dat. inf. not to know, vii. 61, 5. _-citti, f. (K.) thoughtlessness, vii. 86, 6. a-cirri, n. darkness, obscurity, iv. 51, 3. _-eyuta, pp. ( IL ) not overthrown, unshakable, i. 85, 4. acyuta-oydt, a. (Tp.) moving the iramovable, ii. 12, 9. _mha, p rp. with ace., unto, viii. 48, 6. aJ dr/r_, I. P. _jati [Lat. ago 'lead', 'drive ', Gk. _7% _lead ']. _- driw up, vi. 54, 10. _ld. drive out, ii. 12, 3 ; iv. 50, 5. aJ_-mftyu, a. (By.) bleating like a goat, vii. 103, 6. 10 [m_y_, m. bleat]. a-J_, a. (K.) unaging, i. 160, 4 [J_ waste away].

g_jasra, a. (K.) eternal, ii. 35, 8 [unfailing : jtts be exhausted]. sjavi, m. pl. Dr. cd. goats and sheep, x. 90, 10 [aj_ + _vi]. a-jur-ytL, a. unaging , iv. 51, 6 [jur u'asto away_. afij, VII. P. an_tkti anoint; ),. aahkt6 anoint oneself, viii. 29, 1. _fijas-_, adv. straigMway, vi. 54, 1 [inst. of _fijas ointment : m with ghding motion]. a_-i, n. ornament, i. 85_ 3 ; viii. 29, 1 [afij anoint]. _tas, adv. hence, x. 14, 9 ; = ab. from that, iv. 50, 3 ; than that, x. 90, 3. ati-r_tr_, a. (celebrated) orernight, vii. 103, 7 [r_tri ntgh_]. atka, m. robe, ii. 85, 14. _ty-etav_i, dat. inf. to pass over, v. 83, 10 [_ti + i go beyond]. _-tra, adv. here, i. 154, 6 ; ii. 85, 6. _-tr_, adv. then, vii. 103, 2 ; there, x. 135, 1. _tri, m. an ancient sage, vii. 71, 5. @t.hs,, adv. then ; so, vi. 54, 7. Athaz-van, m. pl. name of a group of ancient priests, x. 14, 6. _-th_, adv. then, viii. 48, 6 ; x. 14, 10 ; 15, 4. 11 ; 129,6; so, x. 127, 6. _tho, adv. and a/so, x. 90, 5 [_tha +hi. ad, eat, IL P. _tti, ii. 35, 7 ; x. 15, 8.11. 12 [Lat. edo, Gk. g_, Eng. eat]. _-dabdha, pp. (K.) uninjured, iv. 50, 2 _dabh harm]. /[-diti, f. name of a goddess, viii. 48, 2 [unbinding, freedom, from 3. d[_ bind]. ad-clh_ adv. t_dy, x. 129, 6 [in this manner : a_d this + dha]. a-dye, adv. to-day, i. 35, 11 ; iv. 51, 34 ; x. 14, 12 ; 127, 4 ; 185, 5; now, x. 15, 2 _perhaps = a-dyavi on this day]. _-dri, m. rock, i. 85, 5 [not splitting : dr. pierce]. _dxi-dugdJaa, Tp. cd. pressed out w/ff_ stones, iv. 50, 3 [pp. of dub milk]. 5Aha-ra, a./ower, ii. 12, 4. adh_s, adv. be/ow, x. 129, 5. _dht, prp. with lc., upon, i. 85, 7 ; v. 83, 9 ; vii. 103, 5 ; with ab. from, x. 90, 5. _lhy.aks.a, m. eye.witneSs ; surveyor, x. 129, 7 [having one's eye upon]. adhvar(_, m. sa_/es, L 1, 4, 8; iv. 51, 2. "

adhvary_]

223

[abhis.ti_avas [situated bet_en heaven and earth: k.sa = 1. k.si dwell]. _nti-tas, adv. from near, iii. 59, 2 [_nti in front, near]. _ndh-a_, n. 8oma ptant; juice, i. 851 6 [Gk. _v0-o_ ' blossom ']. _n-na, n. food, it. 351 5. 7. 10. 11.14 ; pl. 12 ; x. 90, 2 [pp. of ad eat]. any_, prn. a. other1 it. 35, 8. 8. 13 ; x. 34, 4. 10. 11. 14 ; 129, 2 ; with ab. = than, it. 33, 11 ; anyS-any_ oneanother, vii. 1031 3. 4. 5 ; any6any_, any$..h-any_h some-others, x. 141 8 ; it. 35, 8 [cp. Lat. aliu-s, Gk. 5Aho-_ _other ']. _p, Lwater, pl.N._pas, ii. 85, 3. 4 ; vii. 49_ 1.22. 8. 4 ; 103, 2 ; A. apes, v.83, 6 ; inst. adbhis, x. 14, 9 ; G. apam, i. 85, 9 ; it. 12, 7 ; 35, 1.2. 3. 7.9. ll. 13. 14; vii. 103, 4; x. 168, 8; L. apsd, it. 35, 4. 5. 7. 8 ; vii. 103, 5 [Av. ap ' water ']. apa-dh_, f. unclosing, it. 12, 3. apa-bhartav(d, dat. inf. to take away, x. 14, 2 [bhr bear]. apa-bhart_, m. remover, it. 83, 7 [bh.r . bear]. _-pa_yant, pr. pt. (K.) not seeing, x. 185_ 3. (_pas, n. work, i. 85, _ [Lat. opus ' work ']. apes, a. active, i. 160, 4. ap_s-tama, spy. a. most active, i. 160, 4. _.p_m n_pRt, m. son of waters 1 name of a god, it. 33, 18; 35, 1.3. 7. 9. _pi-hita, pp. cOrered, x. 129, 3 _d.hK put_. apic-yh, a. secret, it. 35, 11 [apic contraction of a presupposed apt-a/tel. a-l_raket_, a. (By.) indistinguishable_ x. 129, 8 [praket_loerception]. _-pratita, pp. (K.) irresistible, iv. 50, 9 [pratt+ pp. oft go]. a-pramr._y/i, gdv. not to be forgotten, it. 35, 6 [mr._ touch]. _-bud.hya-mKna, pr. pt. unawakening, iv. 51, 8 [bud.h wake]. abhi-ksip_nt, pr. pt. lashing, v. 83, 3. abhi-tas, adv. on all sides, iv. 50, 3 ; with ace., around, vii. 103, 7. abhimKt-in, m. adversa_?t, i. 85, 8 [abhimKti, f. hostility]. abhi .vxy_a..,pp. rained upon, vii. 103, g. abhi.st.i*dTumna, a. (By.) splendid in he/p, iv. 51, 7 [dyumn_, n. s$/endour]. abh_.ti_avas, a. (By.) stro_j to help, iii. 59,8[$_vas, n. wdght].

adhvar-y_, m. o.Oiciati_g priesq vii. 103, 8. a-dhvasm_n, a. (By.) undimmed, it. 351 14 [baring no darkening], an _reathe, II. P. (_aiti, x. 1297 2 [Go. anan ' breathe ']. _n-agni-dagdha, pp. (K.) not burned withfire, x. 15, 14. _n-abhi-mlKta-varna, a." (By.) hating an unfaded oo/our_ it. 85, 13. d.-na_..t.a-vedas, a. (By.) whose property is never lost, vi. 54, 8. an-amirS, a. (By.) diseaseless, iii. 59, 8 i n. health, x. 14, 11 [_mivRdisease]. _,n-itgas, a. (By.) sinless, v. 83, 2 ; vii. 86, 7 [_gas _in; Gk. <Iv-aT_ _innocent ']. an-idhm_, a. (By.) ha_ing _o fuel, it. 35, 4. a-nim_-am,(ace.)adv.unwinkingly, vii. 61, 3 [ni-mi.s, f. wink], _-nimis-K, (inst.) adv. with unwinking eye, iii. 59, I [ni-mis, f wlnkJ, _-nivi_amRna, pr. pt. A. unresting, vii. 49, 1 [ni + vi_ go to rest]. _n-ira, f. (K.) languor, ailment, vii. 71, 2 ; viii. 481 4 [ira, f. refreshment], _n-ika, n.fac_e, it. 35, 11 [an breathe]. tinu, prp. with ace., o2ong, x. 14, 1.8; among, x. 14, 12. anu-k_ma,n, (acc.) adv. according to desire, viii. 481 8. anu-d_yi, f. equitm_ent (?), x. 135, 5. 6 If. gdv. of anu-det to be handed over]. anu-paspa_u_, pf. pt. A. havi_ff s_ied out, x. 14, 1 [spa_ spy]. anu-mady_-mhna, pr. pt. ps. being greYed with gladness, vii. 63, 8. anu-v6nant, pr. pt. seeking thefriendship of (aec.), x. 135, 2. _nu-vrata, a. deroted, x. 84, 2 [acting according to the will (vrat_) of another]. _n-.rta, n. (K.) falsehood, it. 35, 6 ; vii. 61, 5 ; misdeed, wrong, 86, 6 [.rt_ right], an-on_s, a. (By.) guiltless, vii. 86, 4 [_nas guilt], /rata, m. end, iv. 50, 1 ; edge, proximity : lc. _nte near, x. 34, 16. antgw, prp. with le., with/n, i. 35, 9 ; it. 12, 8 ; 35, 7 ; iv. 51, 8 ; vii. 71, 5 ; 86, (= in communion with) ;viiL 48_ 2 ; among, viii. 29, 2. 8 [Lat. in_'], aut_,ri.ksa, n. air, atmosphere_ i. 35, 7. 11; it: 12, 2; x. 90, 14; 168, 3

abhRi]

224

[av_. k_ a-rend, a. (By.) dustless, i. 35, 11 [re.n_ m. dust]. ark-(_, m. song, i. 85, 2 ; x. 15, 9 [are sing]. arc sing, praise, I. arcati, sam-, praise universally, pf. _n.rc6, i. 160, 4. are-ant, pr. pt., singing, i. 85, 2; viii. 29, 10. a.r.na-va, a. wi_ring, viii. 68_ 2 ; m. flood, i. 85, 9. _[r-tha, n. goal, vii. 63, 4 [what is gone for : r. go]. arth-in, a. greedy, x. 127, 5 [having an object, needy]. ar-pt_ya, cs. of r go. gad- raise u_v, ii. 33,4. ary(L, a. noble, vii. 867 7 ; x. 34, 13 ; m. lord, ii. 35, 2. /Lrya-m/m, m. name of one of the Adityas, vii. 63, 6. ar-vant, m. steed, ii. 33, I ; vii. 54, 5 [speeding : r. go]. arv_k, adv. hither, x. 15, 4. 9 ; aftevwards, x. 129, 6. arv_._c, a. hithoward, i. 35, 10 ; v. 83, 6. arh-ant, pr. pt. worthy, ii. 83_ 10 a. avhel_,I.P, avati, i. 85,7; ii. ]2, 14 ; 35, 15; iv. 50, 9. 11; vii. 49, 1-4; 61, 2 ; x. 15, 1. 5 ; quicken, v. 83, 4. ava-t_, m. we/l_ i. 85, 10 ; iv. 50, 3 [tva down]. a-vadya, n. blemish, x. 14_ 8 _dv. not to be praised, blameworlhy]. ava-ni, f. rirer, v. 11, 5 lava down]. ava-p_dyant, pr. pt. looking down on (acc.), vii. 49, 3. ava-ma, spY. a. /ow_qt; nearest, ii. 85, 12 ; latest, vii. 71, 8 lava down]. ava-y_t_, m. apioea_r, viii. 48, 2. ava-ra, spy. a. tower, x. 15, 1 ; nearer_ ii. 12, 8 lava down]. av-as, n. hety, i. 35, 1; 85,11; ii. 12, 9 ; iii. 59, 6 ; x. 15, 4 lay help]. ava-s_na, n. resting place, x. 14, 9 [un_ binding, giving rest : ava + sa = ai tie]. avas-tAt, adv. below, x. 129, 5. avas.yfi, a_de_iringhelp, iv. 50,9. a-v_t_, a. (By.) windless_ x. 129, 2 [v_,ta wind]. av-i-t_, m. he_'per,ii. 12, 6. a-vL-_, a. (By.) son/ess, vii. 61, 4 [vir _[ hero]. a.vrk(_ a. (K.')friendly, x. 15, 1 [no_ harrniag : v_ka we/f].

abhiti, f. attack, ii. 83, 5 [abhi+iti]. abt_-vrta, pp. adorned, i. 85, 4 [1. vr cover_. " a-bhv-a, a. monstrous; n. force, ii. 33, 10 ; monster, iv. 51, 9 [non-existe?_t, monstrous : -bhfl be]. _t-manya-m_na, pr. p_. A. not thinking = unexpeeting, ii. 12, 10 [man think]. a-martya, a. (K.) immortal, viii. 48, 12 ; f. a, x. 127, 2. a-mitra, In. (K.) enemy, ii. 12, 8 [mitr_ friend], amita.varna, a.(Bv.)of unchangedco_our, iv. 51, 9. _mi-vfL, f. disease, i. 35, 9 ; ii. 33, 2 ; vii. 71, 2; rill. 48_ 11 Jam ha_Tn, 3. s. ainu-y-a, inst. adv. in this wag, so, x. 135, 2 [inst. f. of amga this used in tim inflexion of ayfim]. a-mfira, a. (K.) wi_e, vii. 61, 5 [not foolish : mfara]. a-m_Ca, a. immortal ; m. immortal being, i.'35, 2 ; vii. 63, 5 ; viii. 48, 3_; n. what is immortal, i. 35, 6 ; x. 90, 8 ; immortality, x. 129, 2 [not dead, m.rt_, pp. ofm_..dis;cp. Gk. dpgporo_'immortal'J. anarta-tva, n. immortality, x. 90, 2. _mi_h-as, n. water, x. 129, 1. a-yajvan, m. (K.) non-sacrificer, vii. 61, 4. a-y-am, dem. prn. N. s. m. th/s, iii. 59, 4 ; vii. 86, 8. 8 ; viii. 48, 10 ; x. 34, 18 (_ here) ; he, i. 160, 4 : x. 185, 7. a-y_s, a. nimble, i. 154_, 6 [not exerting oneeeOr: y_,s = yas heat onese[f], a-rapes, a. (By.) unscathed, ii. 33, 6 ; x. 15, 4 [rapas, n. i,.firmity, in3ury], (_vam-krta, pp. weU-l_r_ared, x. 14, 13 [made ready], _,r-am, adv. in readiness; with kr do se_oice to (dat.), vii. 86, 7. a-r_ti, f. hostility, ii. 85, 6 ; iv. 50_ 11 ; viii. 48, 8 ; x. 34, 14 [non-giving, niggardliness, enmity], a-ri, m. niggard, enemy, gen. ary_s, ii. 12,4,.5; iv. 50,11 ;viii. 48, 8 [having no wealth : ri = rai ; 1. indigent ; 2. niogardly], .. _-rista, pp. (K.) uninjured, vi. 54, 7 [ri.s injure]. ar.u_. , a. f. |, ruddy, x. 15, 7 ; n. ruddy 1,us, x. 168, I. ar.us._, a. ruddy, i. 85, 5 ; vii. 71, 1.

avyathy_]

225

[_ata asm_bhykm to us, i. 85, 12; x. 14, 12 ; asm6 to us, i. 160, 5 ; ii. 38, 12 ; Ab. asmadfrom us, ii. 38, 2 ; vii. 71, 1. 2; than us, ii. 83, 11; G. asm_,kam of us, vi. 54, 6; I2. asm6 in or on us, ii. 35,4 ; iv. 50, 10. 11 ; viii 48, 10 ; asmasu on us, iv. 51, 10. a-stain, L. of prn. root a, in this, ii. 35, 14 ; iv. 50, 10 ; x. 14, 5. _-smera, a. (K.) not smiling, ii. 35, 4. a-sinai, D. of prn. root a, to him, ii. 35, 5. 12 ; for him, x. 14, 9 ; unaccented, asmai to or/or him, ii. 12, 5. 13 ; 35_ 2. 10 ; vi. 54, 4 ; vii. 68, 5 ; x. 14, 9. 11. a-sy_., G. of prn. root a, of this, ii. 38, 9 ; x. 129, 6 ; 168_ 2 ; unaccented, asya his, of him, its, ofit, i. 85,7; 154,5; 160,3; ii. 12, 13; 85,2.6.8.11; iv. 50,2; vi. 54,,3; vii. 86,1; viii. 48, 12; x. 34,4. 6; 90,3 s. 4. 6.12 a. 15; 129,7; 185,7; 168, 1. 5.s-yant, pr. pt. scattering, x. 168, 1 [as throw]. a-sy_i, D. f. of prn. root a, to that, ii. 88, 5. ahsay: pf. 3. pl. hhur, ii. 12,5; v. ll, 6 ; vii. 86, 3 ; x. 3a, 4. _ha, emphasizing pcl., indeed, i. 154, 6 ; v. 83, 8 ; vii. 103, 2. _.han, n. day, viii. 48, 7 ; x. 129, 2. abe.m, pr_. prn., /,viii. 86, 7; x. 15,3 ; 34, 2. 8. 12. _har, n. day, vii. 103, 7. _as, n. day, x. 168, 3. aohastt_, a. (By.) hand/o_, x. 34, 9. _h-i, m. serp_tt, ii. 12, 3. 11 [Av. a_i, Gk. _X_-_ ' viper', Lat. angui-s]. _-hrn. _na, pr. pt. A. fre_from wrath [l_. be an_]. A, prp. with ab. flora, iL 35, 2 ; iv. 50, 3 ; 51, 10 ; with L., in, i. 85, 4 ; ii. 35, 7. 8 ; iii. 59, 3 ; viii. 48, 6. _, pel. qui_e, very, ii. 12, 15; with D., viii. 48, 4. _-gata, pp. c_, vii. 103, 3. 9 [gam go]. _-gam-istha, a. spy. coming most gladly, x. 15, 8. _g-as, n. sin, vii. 86, 4 ; x. 15, _ [cp. Gk. _7o_ 'guilt ']. _-ya, gd. bending, x. 15, 6 [l{+ac _]. _a._._, pp. Frodtwcd_ Z. 129_ 6 g_nera_]. _Jau

a-vyathyt_, gdv. immovable, ii. 35_ 5 [vyath waver]. saf reach, obtain, V. a_n6ti, alinulaf, i. 1_ 8; 85,2;'ii. 33,2. 6; iii. 59, 2; vii, '103, 9. abhi- attain to (aec.), i. 154, 5. _.man, m. rock, ii. 12, 3 [Av. asman ' stone' ; Gk. _v ' anvil ']. &t-va, m. ]_arse, ii. 12, 7 ; 35, 6 ; iv. 51, 5 ; v. 83, 3. 6 ; vii. 71, 3. 5 ; x. 34, 3. 11 ; 90, 10 [Lat. equu-s ' horse ', Gk. 7_ro-_, OS. _hu]. /ff_va-magha, a. _Bv.) rich in horses, vii. 71, 1 [magh_ bounty,. A_v-in, m. du. horsemen, name of the twin gods of dawn, vii. 71, 2. 3. 6. a_.t._u, rim. eight, i. 35, 8. as be, II.P.: pr. 2._tsi, i.l, 4; ii. 12, 15; 33,3; 8._ti, ii. 12, 5 ; 33,7.10; vii. 71, 4; 86, 6; x. 34, 14; pl. 1. smt_si, vi. 54, 9; viii. 48, 9; 8. s_nti, i. 35, 12; x. 90, 16; ipv. _tu, v. 11, 5 ; vii. 86, 8a ; x. 15, 2 ; s_ntu, vii. 68, 5 ; op. sy_ma, iii. 59, 3 ; iv. 50j 6 ; 51, 10. 11 ; viii. 48, 12. 13 ; ipf. 3. _s, x. 129, 8 ; _sit, x. 34, 2; 90,6.12.14; 129, la. 2_. 3L 4. 5_; i_aan, x. 90, 15. 16 ; 129, 5_ ; pf.-_sa, _ _ . vn. 86, 4 ; x. 129, 2 ; asur, _v. 51, 7. _pi- be or remain in _le.) ; sy_ma, iii. 59, 4 ; x. 14, 6. p_'ib_around, celebrate, 2. pl. stha, vii. 103, 7. pr_- haFts-eminent, ipv. astu, iii. 59, 2. fro-at, pr. pt. n. the non-_zis_nt, x. 129, 1. 4. a-sade_t, a. (By.) inezhaustibk, i. 160, 2 _having nO.second, salient : sac follow]. 5_-ita, (pp.) a. b/ark, iv. 51, 9. _rV-samm_'st&, pp. (K.) undeansed, v. 11.

f_j _.

_-u_ m. life, _ 14, 12 ; 15, 1 _t]. asu- .t_p, a. (Tp.) l_fe.stc_ding, x. [.trp de//gh_ in_. fi_u-niti, f. spirit-guidance, x. 15, f_su-ra, m. divin_ spirit, i. 35, 7. 83, 6 _Av. ahura].

[1. as 14, 12 14. 10 i v.

asu.r..yk,35,n. divine dominion, ii. 83, 9 ; 2. araby&at, pr. pt. di._lea._, resentfu/_ x. 135,2. , _-ta, mm_ _ m ho_, abode, _ 14, 8 ; 34, 10. prn. stem of 1. pra pL; A. us, viii. 48_ 8. 11 ; x. 15, 5 ; D.

_j-ya, n. melted butter, x. 90, 6 [_-aflj anoint], _mf, m. axJe-end, i. 85, 6x . 135, 6 [tan i_'tata, pp. extended, stret, h]. g-tasthivl_s., red. pf. pt. having mounted, ii.'12, 8 [_+sth&stand]. it-mdaa, m. breath, x. 168, 4 [Old Saxon d_om 'breath']. ikditya, m. son ofAditi, iii. 59, 2. 3. 5. ip obtain_ V. P. _pnSti ; pf. _pa, iv. 51, 7 [Lat.ap-/scor' reach ', ap-ere' seize'], /_-bhis, I. pl. f. ofprn, root a, with these, v. 83, 1. _,-bhd, a. co.min_ into beimj, x. 129, 3. gma, a. raw, unbaked, it. 35, 6 [Gk. &p6-s ' raw ']. /t-yat-f, pr. pt. f. coming, x. 127, 1. 3

tipa- go away, x. 14, 9. abhi- come upon. ipf. _yan, vii. 103, 2. ava- appease 83,op. iy_,m,83, 6; 86, 4.to, x. vii. _- come, it. : 1; v. go 14, 8. _pa _- come to (acc.), i. 1, 7. rid- r/se, vii. 61, 1 ; 63, 1-4 ; ipf. air, x. 90, 4. _lpa- approach, vii. 86, 3; 103, 3 ; x. 14, 10 ; 34, 10 ; flow to, it. 35, 3. pgr/t- pass away, pf. iydr, x. 14, 2. 7. part- surround, it. 35, 4. 9. pra- go.forth, i. 154, 3 ; x. 14, 7. /tnu prg- go forth after, vi. 54, 6. vi- disperse, x. 14, 9. sam- flow togett_r, it. 35, 3 ; uni{e, vii, 103, 2. lobe-mane, pr. pt. $.. desiring, x. 34, 10

EL go]. +i

[i._ _ish].

i_yas.a, a. L _, made of iron, viii. 29, 3 [ayes iron], &y-d, a. active ; m. living being, morto2, iii. 59, 9 [i go]. _-yud.h-a, n. weapon, viii.29, 5 [l_ + yuclh . flaM], gy.us, n. span of life, vii. 103,10; viii. 48, 4. 7. 10. 11; x. 14, 14 [aaivity: igo]. graD.ya, a. be/o_/ng to the forest, x. 90, 8 [/tran.a]. _r6hant, pr. pt. sca/ing, ii. 12,12 [rub mount], /tvie, adv. in view, with kr., make manifeat, v. 88, 8. _.d, 8, swift, viL 71, 5 [Gk. &_-_]. idu-h6man, a. (By.), of swift impulse, it. 35_ 1. /t-'sam, gee. p.l.f, of the prn. root a, of them, iv. 51, 6. lla-ina, irr. pr. pt. A., sitting T x. 15, 7 _,[_ s/t]. " .hire, pp. #aced in (Iv.), viii. 29, 4 ; x. 14_ 16; with aamplaced upon (le.), x. 185, 4 [dh/tpta]. l[-huta, pp. to whom offerine /s made, v. 11, 3.

Igo, II.P. 6mi, x. 34, 5; 6ti, iv. 50, 8; x. 84_ 6 ; 168, 1 _; ygnti, vii. 49, 1 ; aplwoa_h (ace.), viii. 48, 10 ; ayan, pr. sb. pa_, vii. 61, 4 ; attain, vii. 68, 4 ; pf. Iyflr, x. 15, 1.2. fmu. go q/_r, vi. 54, 5 ; follow (ace.)7 viii, _ 5.

i-t(m, adv. from here, x. 135, 4. f-ti, pel. thus. ii. 12, 52 ; vi. 54, 1.2 ; x. 84,6 _1_0]. it-thi, adv. thus, it. 35, 11 ; truly, i. 154, 5 lid + th_ ; 180]. i-d, emphasizing pcl. just, even, i. 1, 4. 6; 35,8; 154,3; it. 35, 8- 10; iv. 50, 7.8; 51,9; vii. 86, 3.6; x. 14, 16; 34, 5. 7. 8. 13; 127, 3 [Lat. id: 180]. i-d-gin, dem. prn. n. this, i. 154, 3 ; it. 12,14; 33,10; iv. 51,1; v. ll,5; x. 14, 15 ; 15, 2; 90, 2 ; 129, 8; 135, 7 ; lhis worhi, v. 83, 9 ; _ here, vi. 54, 1 [111]. t-d_im, adv. now, i. 35, 7. idh kindle, VII. A. inddh6. sam- kindle, 8. pl. indhato, it. 35_ 11; pf. idhi_6, v. 11, 2. idh-ma, m. Juel, x. 90, 6 [idh kindle]. ind-u, m. drop, Soma, viii. 48, 2. 4. 8. 12. 13. 15 ; pl. iv. 50, 10 ; viii. 48, 5. _ndra, m. name of a god, i. 85, 9 ; it. 12,1-15; iv. 50,10.11; v. 11,2; vii. 49_ 1; viii. 48, 2. 10;.x. 15, 10; 90_ 18. indr-iya, n. might of Indra, i. 85_ 2 [_mm]. i-nv go, I. P. fnvati [_econdaz T root fromigo according toclassv.: i-nu]. earn- br/ng, i. 160, 5. img, dem. prn. stem, th/s, A.. m. imama, it. 35_ 2 ; x. 14, 4 ; 15, 6 ; N.m. pL ira6, vi. 54, 2 ; viii. 48, 5 ; n. itS, / it. 12, 8 ; x. 15, 4 ; im]_ai, vii. 61, 6; 71, 6 [111].

iyAm]

227

[upar_ uk-th_, n. recitation, iv. 51, 7 [vac speak]. 1. uks sprinkle, VI. uks._ti, -re, x. 90, 7. pra- besprinkle, x. 90, 7. 2. uks. grow. uk.s-it_ pp. grown strong, i. 85, 2 [2. uks. =vak.sgrow]. ug-r_, a. mighty, ii. 33, 9; x. 34, 8; fierce, t_rible, ii. 83, 11 ; viii. 29, 5. uch(aut, pr. pt. shining, iv. 51, 2 [1. vas shine]. u-t_, pcl. and, i. 85, 5; 154, 4; ii. 12, 5 ; 35, 11 ; iii. 59, 1 ; iv. 50, 9 ; v. 83, 22. 10 ; vi. 54, 6 ; vii. 68, 5 ; 86, 2 ; viii. 48, 1.5. 8. 14 ; x. 34, 2 ; 90, 2 ; utA vfi., vii. 49, 22 ; = and, viii. 48, 15

i-y-(un, dem. pzn.f, this, v. 11, 5 ; vii. 61, 7; 71, 6_; x. 129, 6. 7 [111]. irfi,, L nurture, v. 88, 4. ir-ina, n. dice.board, x. 34, 1. 9. ir-ya, a. watd_fu/, vi. 54, 8. i-va, enc. pcl. like, i. 1, 9 ; 85, 5. 82 ; ii. 12, 4.5; 88,6; 35, 5. 13; iv. 51,2; v. ll, 5; 83,3; vii. 68, 1; 103,52; viii. 29, 8 ; 48, 4_. 6. 7a ; x. 84, 1. 3. 5. 8 ; 127, 7.8 [180]. i,s-i_, a. devoted, viii. 48, 7. "._.vrata, a. (Bv.)accordant with desired ordinances, iii. 59, 9. ist_-pflrt_, n. (Dv.) sacrifice and good works, x. 14, 8 [is-tfi, pp. du. of yaj sacr/.fw_ + pflrt_, pp. ot I_r. fill, be-

s_d].
i-h_ adv. here, i. 1, 2 ; 35, 1. 6 ; ii. 85, 13. 15; vi. 54, 9; vii. 49, 1. 2. 8. 4; x. 14,5.12; 15,3.5.7. 11. 132; 90, 4; 129, 6. fl_t, f. consexraledfood, iv. 5.0, 8. i i/o, IV. A. _yate, x. 168, 2 ; apI_roach, im_be, vi. 54, 8. a_at?_r-go betwe__ (ace.), i. 35, 9 ; 160, 1. ij-_a_, pf. pt. A. (of yaj), sacr_vr, iv. 51, _. idpraise, TI. _,., _le, i. 1, 1. _[.d-ya, gdv. praiseworthy, i. 1, 2 [i.d pra/ss], ira, enc. pcl. (acc_ of prn. i), i. 85, 11 ; ii. 12, 5 ; 33, 132 ; 85, 1 ; vii. 103, 8 [180]. _ya-m_, pr. pt.._, going, x. 168, 3

[18o].
utS, pcl. a_ui also, x. 168, 1 [ut_ + u]. fit-tara, cpv. a. ttpper, i. 154, 1 [ftd up]. dt-sa, m. spring, i. 85, 11; 154, 5 [ud wet]. ud wet, VII. P. un_tti, und_mti [cp. Lat. und.a ' wave ']. vi- moisten, drench, i. 85_ 5 ; v. 88, 8. ud-_n, n. water, i. 85, 5 [Go. war6 ' water ']. udan-v_t, a. wabff-laden, v. 83, 7. ftd-ita, pp. r/sen, vii. 63, 5 [i gel. udumbal_, a. brown (?), x. 14, 12. ud-v_.t, f. upward path, i. 35, 3; height, v. 83, 7 ; x. 127, 2 [dd up + sf. vat]. upa-ksiy6_t, pr. pt. abiding by (ace.), iii. 59, 3 [k.si dwd/]. upa-m_, spy. a. highest, viii. 29, 9. upa-y_nt, pr. pt. approashing, iL 33, 12

[i gel.
ir stir, ssl in motion, II. -_. _rte. gnu 8_u_. pr_- speed on tog_lher after, x. 168, 2. rid- ar/se, x. 15, 1 ; v. 83, 3. plY-, es. il_ya, uRerforth_ i i. 33. 8. i_ be ma,_r of, overpower, II. A. _[._., with gen., viii. 48, 14. _-_na, pr. pt. _,. ruling over, disposing _f (gem), vi. 54, 8 ; x. 90, 2 ; m. ruTer, ii. 83, 9. i mmove, I.._ati, -re, from (ab.), v. 83, 2. il.-it_, pp. tmplored, x. 15,12 [id. praise], U_ ene. pcl. now, a/so, i. 35, 6 ; 154, 4 ; ii. 88, 9 ; 8G, 10. 15 ; iv. 51_ 1. 2 ; v. _ 88, 105; vL 54,8;vii. 61, 6; 63,1.2; 86_ 8. 8; viii. 48, 8; x. 14, 2; 15_ 8 ; 127, 8" ; 129, 1_ [180].

[igo].
fipa-ra, epv. a./ater, x. 15, 2 [Av. upara 'upper', Gk. _po-_ 'pestle', Lat. s-uperu-s" upper ']. up6.ri, adv. upward, x. 84, 9 ; above, x. 129, 5 [Gk. _n_p, _n_ip = i,ntl_, Lat. s-u#er, 01d High German _bir 'over']. _tpa_rita, pp. impressed on (lc.), vii. 86, 8 [dri resort]. upa-s_lya, gdv. to be approached, iii. 59, 5 [s_d sit]. np_.sth_o m. lap, i. 35, 5. 6 ; vii. 63_ 3 ; x. 15, 7. upa-hatn_, a. s/ay/ng, ii. 33, 11 [ha-tnu from hxu s/ay]. dpa-hf_ta, pp. invited, x. 15, 5 [hfz ca//]. up_r_, m. offence, vii. 86, 6 [upa + ara from .r go : str/k/ng upon, offence].

q2

ubj]

22s

[et_

ubj force, VI. P., ubj_ti. nit- dr/re _d, i. 85, 9. . ubht_, a. both, i. 35, 9 ; x. 14, 7 [ep. Lat. am-bo, Gk. _p-_b_ ' both ', Eng. bo-th], ubh_-ya, a_ pl. both, ii. 12, 8. ubhay_-dat, a. having teeth on both jaws,

_. go, V. P..rn. 6ti, int. 6,1arti arise, viii. 48, 8 [Gk. 6p-vfJ-t,_ ' stir up ']. abhi- penetrale to (aec.), i. 35, 9. prA- send forth, III. iyarti, vii. 61, 2. ._k-van, m. pl. name of a group of ancestors, x. 14, 3 [singing from arc

x. 90, 10.
urod, a., f. urv-_, wide, i. 35j 6. 7 ; 154, 2; vii. 61,2; 86,1; x. 127,2 lay. vouru, Gk. *fip_-__]. uru-klman_, a. (By.) wide-striding, i. 154, 5 [_a, m. str/de]. uru-g_y_, a. (By.) wide-paced, i. 154, 1. 3.6 ; viii. 29, 7 [-gbya gait from g_ go]. ttwa-o_kseas, a. (By.)far.seeing, vii. 63,

sing].
._kovant, a. singing, jubilant, iv. 50, 5 [arcs/ng]. ._e, f. s_anza, ii. 35, 12 ; _2ect/on ofh_nns, .Rgveda, x. 90, 9 [arc s/ng, pra/sc]. .rcs-e, dat. inf. with*l_r_, to praise, vi. 61, 6 [are praise]. r-n_, n. debt, x. 127, 7. ._._-vtin, a. indebted, x. 34, 10 [.rn.

4 [o_k._s, n. _ght].
uru-vy_oas, a. (By.) far-externality, i. 160, 2 [vy_eas, n. eztent], v.ru-i .fL_, a. (By.) fir-famed, viii. 48, 4 [_(tm.sa, m. praise]. uru-.syd, a. freedom-giving, viii. 48, 5 [from den. uru-sya yput in wide space, rescue], urfl-.nas6., a. (By.) broad-nosed, x. 14, 12 [urft+n_ts nose]. ttrviyi_, adv. widely, ii. 35. 8 [inst. f. of urv_ wide], urv-_, f. earth, x. 14, 16 [urfi w/de]. u_-ttnt, pr. pt. eager, vii. 108, 8 ; x. 15, 8_ [va_ desire]. Efs-_, f. Dawn, ii. 12, 7 ; vii. 63, 3 ; 71, 1 ; x. 127, 3. 7; pl. iv. 51, 1-9 ; 11 [1. vas shine ; cp. Gk. ,}_ (for dus-6s), Lat-aur-or-a]. usr_-yarn_u, a. (By.) faring at daybreak, vii. 71, 4 [usr_ matu_ina/, yi[mau, n. course]. usr-iyft, f. cow, iv. 50, 5 [f. of usr-iya ruddy from us-r_ red]. _, eric. pcl., ii. 35, 8 ; iv. 51, 2 [metrically lengthened for u]. f_-ti, f. he//o, i. 35, 1 ; viii. 48, 15; x. 15, 4 [avfaumr]. _rfi, m. du_ thigh, x. 90, 11.12. _rj, f. vigour, strength, vii. 49, _ ; x. 15, 7. fxrj_ymat, den. pr. pt. gathering strength, ii. 35, 7. fardh.v_, a. upright, ii. 85, 9 ; upward, x. 90, 4 [Gk. 6p_6-_ for 6p0-f6-s; Lat. arduu-s ' lofty ']. fxrdhvma, acc. adv. upwards, i. 85, 10. _trmy_, f. night: x. 127, 6. far-v4, n. rerz_tar2e, ii. 35, 3 ; fo/d, herd, iv. 50, 2 [1. yr. cover].

debt].
r.-t_, n. settled order, i. 1, 8 ; iv. 51, 8 ; truth, x. 34, 12 [pp. (fir go, settled]. rtg-jgt_-satya, a. puncluaUy true, iv. 51, 7 [true as produced by established order]. .rt_-jfl_, a. knowing right, ,t. 15, 1. .rta-y_j, a. yoked in due time, iv. 51, 5 ; vii. 71, 8. rta-sp.f_, a. cherishing the rite, iv. 50, 3. _'t_-v_u, a. holy, ii. 35, 8; x. 168, 8; p/ous, vii. 61, 2 ; f. -vari observing order, i. 160, 1. .r-t-fi, m. season, vii. 108, 9 [fixed tints : from .r go]. .r-t6, adv. prp. with ab., _/thoU_, ii. 12, 9 [loc. of .rt_]. .rtv-tj, m. ministrant, i. 1,. 1 [rtfi+ij = y_J saer/flc/ng in sea._n]. .rdf_d6xa, a. contpass/onate, ii. 83, 5 i wholesome, viii. 48, 10. .rdh thrive, V. P. rdhn6ti. 6.nu- br/ng forward, op. 2. s..rdhy_l, viii. 48, 2. _dhak, adv. separately, vii. 61, 3. R bh-_l, m. pl. name of three divine artificers, iv. 51, 6 [s/c//fu/_ from rabh tak_ in hand]. ._.-i,m..seer, i. 1, 2; iv. 50, 1; x. 14, 15; 90, 7. lT-.ti , f. spear, i. 85, 4 Its. thrum]. ._.-v_, a. high, loft, vii. 61, 3; 86, I. _.-ka, nm. one, L 85, 6 ; 154, 3. 4 ; vii. 108, 6_ ; viii. 29, 1-8. 10 ; x. 14, 16 ; 129, 2. 3 [prn. root e]. eka_pax_, a. too high by one, x. 34, 2. 6k .eg_ a. hav/ng one po/e_ x. 135, 8 [I_._ +l_/e of a ear]. e-tA, derm prn. stem, this : n. etgtd, iii. 59, 5 ; ace. m. et4m this, x. 14, 9 ; h/m_

x. 84, 4 ; inst. et_na, v. 83, 6 ; n. pl. etA, x. 1o, 14 ; m. pl. et_ these, vii. 103, 9 [prn. root o + ta thisJ, 6ta-_a, m. steed of the Sun, via. 63, 2 [6ta speeding, from i go]. et_-vant, a. such, x. 90, 3 _prn. eta th/s + sf. vent], e-na, enc. prn. stem of :4. prs. he, she, it : ace. onam him, ii. 12, 5 ; iii. 59, 3 ; vii. 103, 2 ; x. 14, 11 ; 34, 4.; 168, 2; ace. pl. on_n them, vii. 103, 3 ; gen. du. enos of them two, vii. 103, 4 [prn. root e]. 6n-as, n.,ii. 12:10; vii. 71,4; 86,8. an[, inst. by it, x. 14, 4 ; adv. thither: x. 14, 2 [inst. of prn. root a]. e-bhis, I. pl. with them, x. 34, 5 [prn. root a]. e-bhyas, D. p]. to them, x. 34, 8 _prn. root a]. ev_[, pcl. thus, just, i. 1, 3 ; ii. 12, 1 ; iv. 51, 9 ; vi. 5_, 1.2 ; x. 90, 2 [prn. root o ; cp. 180]. e-v_ (= ova), adv. thus,]zest, ii. 38, 15; iv. 50, 8 [_prn. root e]. e-s(_ dora. prn. : N. s. m. e.s_ll, thi% x. 168, 4 ; he, ii. 12, 15 ; vii. 68, 3 ; viii. 29,6; f.e._thls, x. 14,2; she, x. 84, 2 [from prn. root e + sa]. e-s._zn, G. pl. m. of th_n: i. 85, 3 ; vii. 103:52. 6; x. 84,5.8; 129,5 [prn. root a]. Ok-as, n. abode, iv.'50, 8 [wontedla/ace: u_ be wont], 5j-as, n. might: i. 85, 4. 10 ; 160, 5 [uj = vaJ ; cp. Let. augus-tu-s ' mighty ', 'auguat']. oj_-y_m_aa, don.pr, pt. A. showing one's strength, ii. 12, 11 _6Jas]. 6j-iy_ .ms, epv. a. m/gM/er, ii. 88, 10. 5sa-dhi, f. p/an/, v. 83: 1. 4. 5. 10 ; vii. 61, 8 [v(a)e-a nurture (av furor') + dhi holding, from dhfi. ho/d], K_, inter, pn_. who ? i. 85, 7 ; x. 129, 6 ; 185, 5* ; G. k_[sya, x. 129, 1 ; du. kau, x. 90, llS; with cid: I. k6na cad by any, x. 15_ 6 ; pl. 1_. k6 cid some: viii. ]08, 8. ka-k_ibh, f. J_e_d_,i. 85, 8. ka-tam_, inter, prn. which (of many)? i. 85, 7 ; iv. 51, 6 ; with can_ any, x. 168,.8 [Lat. quo.turau-s].

kati-dl_,, adv.into how _nanyparts? _ 90 t 11 [ka.ti how many ? Lat. _ot]. ka-d_,inter, adv. when ? vii. 86, 2 ; with oan_, ever, vi. 54:9 [kS who?]. kanikradat, int. pr. pt. bellowing, iv. 50, 5 ; v. 83, 1.9 [krand roar]. ken - iyRms, e'pv. younger, vii. 86, 6 [ep. kan-ya, f. gwl ; Gk. K(uuo-_' new : for Ka_,_6-_]. kam, pel., i. 151, 1 [gladly : cp. p. 225, 2]. kar-tave, dat. ihf. of kr do, i. 85, 9. kalmalik-in, s. radiant, ii. 33, 8. kay-i, m. sage, v. ll, 3_ vii. 86,8; x. 129, 4 [Av. kavi' king ']. kavi-kratu,a. (By.) hav,ng the intelligence of a sage, i. 1, 5 ; v. 11, 4. kavi-tara, epv. a. wiser, vii. 86, 7. kavi-_astR, pp. (Tp.) recited by the sages, x. 14, 4. kav-y_i, a. wise, x. 15, 9 ; m. pl. name of a group of Fathers, x. 14, 3. kaY, f. whip, v. 88, 3. k_m-a, m. desire, i. 85, 11 ; x. 34, 6 ; 129, 4 [kam desire]. ki_ appear t int. e_.kaditi. abhi- /ook upon, x. 135, 2. kitava, m. gambler, x. 34,3.6.7.10.11. 13. kim, inter, prn. what ? vii. 86, 2. 4 ; viii. 48,:1_; x. 90,11; 129,12; with oan_[ anything: x. 129, 2 [Lat. qui-s, qui-d]. kila, adv. emphasizingprecedingword, indeed, ii. 12, 15 [180]. kit-i, m. singer, ii. 12, 6 [2. kr. cornmernorate]. ku-oara, a. wandering at will, i. 154, 2 [ku_ inter, prn. root where? = anywhere + oaxa from carfare]. ku-t4s, inter, adv. whence? x. 129, 62 ; 108, 8 [prn. root where ?]. ku-m_a_, 12. boy, x. 185. 3. 4.5 ; = son, ii. 33, m, kum_-desna, a. (By.) presenting gifts like boys, x. 84, 7 [des na, n. gift from dR g/ve]. kul-yl_, f. stream_ v. 83, 8. k_v-id, inter, pcl. wh_ther? ii. 85, 1. 2; iv. 51, 4 [ku-_ id : op. p. 226]. kd-ha, inter, adv. where? ii. 12, 5 ; x. 129, 1 [ku + sf. ha = dhit : elm p. 212]. k_ make, V. krnTti, krnut_, iv. 50, 9 ; "v. 83, 3; ='/_/d, x." 84, 12; = eaise

._.v_nt]

28o

[ga

(voice), 8 ; pr. sb. 3. s. k_..n_vat, viii. 48, 3 ; 3. pL k_.rn._,van,iv. 51, 1 ; vii. 63, 4; 2. pl. A. kT.n_dhvam, x. 34, 14; ipv. krn.uhi, x. 135,3; pf. cakrm_, vii._86, -) ; x. 15, 4 ; cakrdr, vii. 63, 5; A. cakr6, x. 90, 8; cak_te, viii. 29,9; cakrir6, i. 85, ] . 2. 7.10 ; ft. kari.sy_si, i. 1, 6 ; root so. _tkar, ii. 12, 4 ; iii. 59.9 ; v. 83, 10 ; _kran, x. 14, 9; 8. pl. A. _krata, vii. I03,8; x. 34, 5 ; sb. k6xati, ii. 35. 1 ; kgrgma, x. 15, 6 ; ao. ps. ttkgri, vii. 61, 7 [cp. Gk. _/mlvm 'accomplish'. Lat. ere_ ' create ']. aiDa _ drive up for : rt. ao. _kar_m, x. 127, 8. gvis- make manifest, v. 83, 3. his- turn out : rt. so. askrta , x. 127, 3. kxnv-_nt, pr. pt. making = offering, vii. 103, 8 ; x. 168, 1 [k.r make], kT-t_, pp. made, i. 85, 6 ; ii. 12, 4 ; vii. 61, 6 ( = offered) ; x. 90, 12. 15 ; 135, 6 ; n. luc8_ throw, x. 34, 6 lay. ksreta, Old Persian karts ' made'], k_tg, f. breast(?), ii. 85, 5. k_.-tv_, gd. having made, x. 15, 12. kr_-_, a. poor, ii. 12, 6 [k.T_ grow lean_, kf._ana, n. pearl, i. 35, 4. draw, I. P. k(Lr.sati, v. 88, 7 ; VI. P. kT. _-ti tiU, x. 34, 18. 9 k_..-i, f.fie/d, x. 84, 18 [k.r_.t//2]. k_.-t.I, f. pl. peopZe, i. 160,5; iii. 59,1 [tillage, settlement : k.x_.till], kr.s.-_, a. b_ack, i. 35, 2. 4.9 ; x. 127, 7 ; f. {, vii. 71, 1. kl.p be fit, I. k_Llpati, cs. kalp_yati, -re arrange, x. 15, 14. vi di_ose, x. 90, 11. 14. ket.xl, m. banner, v. 11, 2. 3 ; vii. 63, 2 [cit appear: Go. haidu-s 'manner']. k6va.ta, m. pit, vi. 54, 7. k6da, m./roche/, v. 83, 8 ; well (of a car), vi. 54, 8. kr-ti-tu, m. power, ii. 12, 1 ; w/sdom, vii. 61, 2 [kT. do_. krand bg_w. I. P. k_ndati, abhI- bellow towards, v. 83, 7. kr_nd-as, n. battle array, ii. 12, 8 [battle cry : krand shout], kram st_'ds, I. P. kr_mati, A. k__mate. vt- str/de ou_, pf. cakrame, viii. 29, 7. abhi vt. spread asunder, develop into : ipf. tikz-_a_,t, x. 90, 4. krid l_ay, t. krL-la, x. 84, 8.

krudh be angry, IV. P. krddhyati; red. ao. inj. cukrudhgma, ii. 33, 4. kva, inter, adv. w_'e_ i. 85, 7; ii. 33, 7 ; iv. 51, 6; x. 168, 3; with svid who knows where, x. 34,10 [pronounced kda_. kga-tr_, n. dominion, i. 160, 5 [kga = ks.i _de]. ksam forbear, I. A. k.s_mate. abhi- bemercif_,lto(acc.), ii. 38, 1. 7. k.si dwell, lI. P. k.s6ti, iv. 50, 8. gdhi- dwell in (lc.), i. 154, 2. k.siy-_nt, pr. pt. dwelling, ii. 12, 11 [k.si dwell]. k.s6-ma, m. possess/on, viii. 86, 8. [1_.i : k s_yati possess]. Khan-i-trima, a.ZJroducedbydigging, vii. 49, 2 [khan dig]. khd,lu, adv. indeed, x. 34. 14 [p. 227]. kh_-t_, pp. dug, iv. 50, 8 [khan dig]. khy_ see : no present ; a so. _khyat. abhi- perceive, vii. 86, 2. vi- survey, i. 35, 5. 7.8 ; x. 127, 1. Oan-tl, m. throng, iv. 50, 5 ; x. 34, 12. gabh-irtl, a. profound, x. 129, 1 [gabh = g_h plunge]. gabhir_-vepas, a. (By.) of deep inspirario% i. 35, 7. Kava go, I. gfichati, -re to (acc.), i. 1, 4; x. 14, 13; root ao. 3. pl. agman, vii. 71, 6 ; 1. pl. (zganma, viii. 48, 3. 11 _ [Gk. Ba1_w, Lat. venio, Eng. come_. a- come, i. 1, 5 ; 85, 11 ; root ao. ipv. gahI, vi. 54, 7 ; x. 14, 5 ; 2. pl. gate, x. 15, 4 ; 3. g_mantu, x. 15,5L 11 ; go to (acc.), x. 168, 2. s_m- go with (inst.), a ao. op., vi. 54, 2; unite with (ip.st.), x. 14, 8. g_m-a-dhyai, dat. inf. (of gain) to go, i. 154, 6. sarta-s_xl, a. ('rp.) sit_i_ on a &r-seat, ii. 38, 11. garbh-a, m. germ, ii. 88, 13 ; v. 88, 1.7 ; x. 168, 4 [g.rhh rece/ve_. g_v-y-_ztl, f. lmsturage, x. 14, 2 _Bv. having nurture for cows: go]. g_th-ana, a. unfathomable, x. 129, 1 [g_h plunge]. gb go, III. P. jtg_ti. abht- approach, vii. 71, 4, 1_- come: rE. an. ag_t, i. 85, 8. pftrl- go by (ace.) : root ao. inj. ggt, ii. 88, 14.

g_tti]

281

[ca_

pr_- go forward, ipv. jig_ta, i. 85, 6 ; ] g6-magha, a. (By.) _'ich in cows, vii. 71, enter, root ao., viii. 48, 2. ' 1 [hay/rig abundance of cows]. g_-t6, m. path, way, iv. 51, 1 ; vii. 63, g6-m_tr, i. 85, 3. hating a cow for a mother, a. (By.) 5 ; x. 14, 2 [g_. go]. g_tro-g_tre, lc. itv. cd.. in every limb_ g6m_yu, a. (By.) Imv/ng like a cow, vii. viii. 48, 2 [g_ gel. ' 103, 6. 10 [m_y_, m. lowing]. g_ya-tr_, f. a metre, x. 14, 16 [sang : g_ grabh stize,IX, gT.bh, n_ti, g.rbhn.it_, vii. sing]. 103, 4. l: so_g, ii. 85,1; v. 11,5; 83,1; _nu. greet, vii. 103,4. gtrvii. 71, 6 ; x. 135, 7 [g.r s_ng], gr_ma, m. village, x. 127, 5 ; pl. = dar_% giri-ksi-t, a. mountain-dwetting, i. 154, 3 it. 12, 7. _ksi'dwe//]. gr_ra-y_, a. belonging to the tillage, x. 90, giri-sth/L, a. _nountain-hauating, i 154, 2 8 [gr_ma]. [sth_ stand] grism_, m. summer, x. 90_ 6. gap guard: pf. jugupur, vii. 103, 9 [secondary root from the den. goGhax-m_ m. hot ,n//k offering, vii. 103, 9 lay. gar_ma, Lat. formu-s, Ok. O+pp6-_ p_,-ya_. ' warm ', Eng. warm]. gfxhft, adv. in hiding, v 11, 6 ; with kr, cause to disappear, it. 1"2,4 [from gul_gharma-s_d, a. ('1_.) sitting at the healing _,, inst of gdh concea/_wnt, w. advessel, x 15, 9. 10 [sad sit]. verbial shift of accent], ghaxm-in, a. heated, vii. 103, 8. gdh-ya, gdv. to be hidden, vii. 103, 8 ghas eat : root ao. 3. pl. _Lksan, x. 15, 12 ,[guh hide] [ = _-gh(a)s-an] gaxh-ant, pr. pt. hiding, iv. 51, 9 [gtth gh{*, enc. emphasizing pcl., iv. 51, 7 hide]. [180]. ghlh_, pp. h/e/den, x. 129, 3 [guh hide], gh_-ni, f. heat, it. 33, 6 [ghr = hr be hot] l "8T sin#, IX. grnati, grnit6, it. 33,8. gh_._A, (pp.) n. elarified buiter, ghee, i. 85, 12. - "" 3 ; it 33, 11.14 ; v. 11, 3 ; 83, 8 [gl_. abhi- greetfavourably, X. 15, 6. be hot]. 2. gTwahen : red. ao. 2. du. ipv. jigrt_m, ghrt_-nir.niJ, 35, (By.). having f.a sp/endour garment of ghee, it. a. 4 [mr- .ni], iv. 50, 11. from nis out + nij washJ. grn-_t, pr. pt. singing.; m. singer, iii. "59, 5 [gr. s/,g]._ ghrt_-pr_tika, a. (Bv.) butter-faced, v. gr.n-_a_, pr. pt. A. singing, praising, i. ][1, 1 [prCttika, n.front from praty_ifv 35, 10 ; 160, 5 [gT sing]. _ turned towards]. ghrt_-vant, a+accompanied with ghee, iii. g_.'t_sa, a. exj_r/enced, wx. 86, +. 59, 1 abounding in ghee, x. 14, 14. grdh be greedy, IV. P. g_[d+hyati ; a ao. _,Tdhat, x. 34, 4. gh_s-vi, a. impetuous_ i. 85, 1 [gh._...= t_.s. grbh-&y_, den. P. grasp, be excited]. _d- hdd up, cease, v. 88, 10. gho-r_,, a. _errib_e; n. magic power, v. _, gT.h-_, m. house, pl., vi. 54, 2 [grah 14. receive, containS, gh6s-a, a m. sound, x. 168, 1. 4 [ghu9 make nois_]. gTh6-grhe, le. itv. ed., in every house, "v. 11; 4. 86, f. tow, pl. N. g_vas, i. 154, 6 ; it. 12, Ca, erie. pel. and, i. 160, 2. 3 ; it. 33_ 7; viii. 48, 5 (=straps); x 34.13; 13 _. 35, 6.8; iv. 50, 10; v. ll, 5; 90.10; A. gl_s, ii. 12,3;vi. 54,'5-6 vii '86,1; x. 14, 7. 9.14 ; 34,11; 90, 127,8; G. g&v_m, iv. 51, 8 ; viL 103, 2. 8.7.8.10; if, viii. 48, 2; x. 34,5; 2. 10 lay. N. 9au-s, Gk. BoO-s, Lat. ca-ca, i. 35, 11 ; iv. 51, 11 ; x. 14, 3. bo-s (boy-), OI. bS, Eng. cow]. 11 and aue ; ' 15, 3.' ;13 _ ; 180]. 13 [kv. ca, .... ep. 90, , Lat. G6-tama, m. name of a seer, i. 85, 11 _akr.& n wheal, vi. 54, 3 ; vii. 63, z L_. go-pi_, m. Tp. (cow-protector), guardian, L 1, 8 ; v. 11, 1 ; viii. 48, 9 [36 cow e_ks, kern= k aA 8]_ine: = oa-k(a)s]. xorm Of s_ II. ochre [reduplic_tea

+_ _ro_].

c4"k?u] abhi- regard, iii. 59, 1 ; vii. 61, 1. pr_,-, cs. cak.s_ya illumine, viii. 48, 6. vi- revea/, x. 84; 13. c_k.s-u, n. eye; x. 90, 13 [cak.s see]. elk.A-urn, n. eye; vii. 61; 1 ; 63; 1 [oaks see]. cat hide (intr.), I. P. cltati ; es. c_tAya drive away; ii. 33; 2. catur-ak.s_, a. (Bv.)fsur-eyed, x. 14, ll [aks_ = _ksi eye]. eatu_.-pi_cl, "a. (]3v.) four-footed, iv. 5 [catdr four; Lat. q_attuor_ fldwSr], eatvfixi_. _, ord., f. f, fortieth, ii. 12,

282 cod-i-@, impdj. cy_v-ana, cy_v-_na, [pr. pt. eyu waver, pr-, es. m. furtherer, ii. 12,

[jas 6 .[cud

a. unstabl_, ii. 12, 4 [cyu mo_]. m. name of a seer, vii. 71, 5 of cyu mow]. fall, I. cy_vate. cy_vaya overthrow, i. 85; 4.

10. 51, Go. 11.

Chand seem, II. P. ch_ntti ; pf. cachfmda, vii. 68, 3 ; seem good, please, 3. s. s ao. _ehhn, x. 34, 1. ehlnd*as, n. metre, x. 14, 16 ; 90; 9. ahhyi_, f. shade, ii. 33, 6 [Gk. aatd]. Jt_gat, n. wof/d, i. 85, 1 [pr. pt. ofg_ go]. j_ffm-i, a. nimble, speeding, i. 85, 8 [from red. stem jag(a)m of gain go]. jajit-/m_, pf. pt. A. havin9 been born, x. 14, 2 [jan generate]. jan generate, create, I.j_aati ; pf.jajl[na, i. 160, 4 ; ii. 12, 3. 7 ; 35, 2 ; jajitir6 were born, x. 90, 9L 10 ; is. ao. _tjanis ts has been born, iii. 59; 4 ; v. 11, 1 ; red. ao. gjijanas hast caused to grow, v. 83, 10 ; cs. jan_ya generate, ii. 85, 13 ; x. 135, 5 tOld LaL gen-5 _generate' ; Gk. ao. LTEv-dq,,lv ]pr_ be yrolific, IV. A. J_ya, ii. 33, 1 ; 35, 8. J_n-a, m. mankind, ii. 35, 15; iii. 59: 9; iv. 51, 1 ; v. 11, 1 ; pl. men, l_eop/e, i. 35, 5 ; ii. 12, 1-14 ; iii. 59, 1.8 ; iv. 51, 11 ; vii. 49; 8 ; 61; 5 ; 68, 2. 4 ; x. 14, 1 [jan. 9_nerate ; cp. Lat. gon-us, Gk. 7i_-o_, Eng. k/n]. jantiy-ant, cs. pr. pt. ge',wrating_ i. 85_ 2. j_n-i, f. woman, i. 85, 1. j_n-i-man, n. birth, ii. 35, 6. Jan-fis, n. generation_ vii. 86; 1 [jan ffenerate]. J_y-ant, pr. pt. conquering ; m. vic._, x. 34, 7 [jl conquerJ. j_r-ant, pr. pt. aging, old, x. 34, 8 [J_ was_ away ; Gk. 71p-ovr - ' old man']_ jax-6.a, m. oM age, vii. 71, 5 [j._ wage away ; cp. Ok..?_poz , old age 'J. jar-i-t_., m. s/nger, iL 33, II [jr sing]. Jfi.l_a, a. cooling_ ii. 83_ 7. j_l_.a-bhesaja, a. (By.) having cooling remedies, viii. 29, 5 [bho.aa_t, n. retnedy]. j_lp-i, f. /d/t ta/k_ chat_r_ viii. 48_ 14 [jalp r)_ger]. Jas be ezhaustod, I. J_a; pf. ipv. JaJastf_n w_erb iv. 50, 11.

t_a-ng, pcl. and not, vii. 86, 6. candr_-m_s, m. moon, x. 90, 18 [K. cd. bright (ca_drli) moon.(m_.s)], carfare, I. cArati, -re, iv. 51, 6. 9 ; viii. 29; 8; x. 14_ 12 ; 168, 4. abhi- bewitch, x. 34, 14. i[- approach, iv. 51, 8. px,_- go forward, enter, viii. 48; 6. abhI s/ma- come together, viii. 48, 1. car_-tha_ n. motion, activity; iv. 51; 5 [carfare]. ef_-szat, pr. pt. wamlering; x. 34, 10; faring, x. 135_ 2. car-i-tra, n. leg, viii. 48, 5 [car move], o_.r-man, n. skin, hide; i. 85, 5; vii. 63, 1. aara.ani-dh_. -t, a. (Tp.) supporting the.folk, iii. 59_ 6 [car.sa_., a. aetlve; f. folk +dhr-t sutrporting]. et_-ru, a.dear, ii. 35,11[cangladden;Lat. c_-ru-s 'dear']. eiokit-vl_., red. pf. w/s_, vii. 86, 8 [oit think], eit percdr_ I. c6tati, -re ; pf. eik6ta, i. 85, 7 ; sb. efketat, i. 35, 6 ; cs. cit_ya stimulate, iv. 51, 3; cet_ys eaus_ to think, vii. 86; 7. i_- obse_e : pf. cikota, vii. 61, 1. eit-r_, a. brilliant; iv. 51, 2 ; n. marvel_ vii. 61, 5. dtr_-bh_mu, a.(Bv.)o.lbri_ian2splendour_ i. 35, 4 ; 85, 11. eitr_-tiravas, a. (By.) having brilliant fam_ ; spy. -tama of motrt brilliant fame, i. 1, 5 ; bringin 9 most brflliant fam_, iii. 59, 6. vial, enc..pe], ju_, t_n, i. 85, 4. 10 ; ii. 12, 8. 13. 15 ; 38, 12 ; vii. 86, 1. 3. 8; x. 84, 8 _ ; 127, 5 [Lat. qu/d]. eokit-_na, int. pr. pt. famous, ii. 38_ 15 [oit l_e_cz/ve],

ja]

2a8

[tan

j_bebolm, IV. Tt.j_yate_born, v. ll, 3;" 83, 4 ; x. 90, 5 ; j_yase art born, v. 11, 6 ; ipf. _ijKyata was bo_t, x. 90, 9. 12. 1S_ i 129, 3 ; 135, 6 ; _jKyanta, x. 90, 10. jf_gT. -vi, a. watchfid, v. 11, 1 ; stimulating, x. 34, 1 [from red. stem of 2. gr. wake], J_-t6, pp. born, it. 12, 1 ; x. 90, 5.7; 168, 3 ; = finite vb., were born, x. 90, 10, 13 ; n. what is born, it. 83, 3 [j_ be born], J_,tA-vedas, a.(B_'.)havingaknowledgeof beings, x.15, 12.13 [v6d-as, n. _Wwledge from vial know_. j_n-u, n. knee, x. 15, 6 [Gk. 75v-v, Lat. .gsnu, Go. kniu, Eng. knee]. laya-m_na, pr. pt. being bern, iv. 50, 4 [j_, be barn]. j_.-y_, f. w/fi, x. 34, '2. 4. 10. ll. 13 [j_. be born], j_r-fig-i , f. court, an, x. 34, 5 [having paramours : jfixl_], $i_hu_-_, m. name of a prot_g4 of the Aavins_ vii. 71, 5. ji conquer, I. jayati ; it. jesy_mi, x. 34, 6 ; ps. ]iyate, iii. 59, 2 [when actented this form appears in the RV. as j|yste, i.e. it isthen pr.._, ofjyK overpower]. vt- conquer, it. 12, 9. s_m- win, iv. 50, 9. jigi-v_, s, red. pf. pt. having conquered, it. 12, 4 ; x. 127, B [ji conquer], jihn_, a. transverse ----athwart, i. 85, 11 ; prone, it. 35_ 9. JirK-d_mu, a. (By.) havi_ q_dckening g/fls, v. 88, 1. Jiv-l_, n. livi_u3 world, iv. 51, 5 [Lat. v_V-o.s], _ivfm-e, dat. inf. to llve, viii. 48, 4 ; with l_r_ to live on, x. 14, 14. Ju_. enjoy, _rI. just, vii. 71, 6 ; 86, 2 ; x. 15,4.13; pf. sb.jfijusan.vii. 61,6 ; is ao. sb. j6.sisat, it. 85, 1 [ep. Gk. 7,_, Lat. gus-_us, Go. kiusan, Eng. cheoss], ju_.-_9_, pr. pt. A. enjoy/ng, viii. 48, 2. jf_.-.ta, pp. (with shifted accent) acve_tabk, iii. 59, 5 [Jus enjoy], Jf_, IX. P. junl_ti _, vii. 86, 7. Jr, L A. J_,r&awake, be active, iv. 51, 8. JSh_ana, pr. pt. A. gasp/_, x. 15_ 9 [Jeh gasp]. _Ji_t know, IX. j_n_ti_ x. 34, 4 [cp. Gk. L-p,_-_, Lat. co-no-s_o, Eng. know],

vf-, ps. jfiKy_te be distinguished, iv. 51,6. !me, f. earth, gen. jm_s_ iv. 50, 1. )ya-y_..ms, cpv. move, x. 90, 3 ; e/der, vii. 86, 6 [jy/t ot_,'rpower; Gk. B_a ' force ']. jyfi-.stha, spy. highest, it. 85, 9 ; chief, vii. 86, 4 [spv. ofjy_. jy6t-is, n. light, iv. 50, 4 ; 51, 1 ; viii. 48,3; x. 127,2[jyut= dyutshine]. T_, dem. prn., that ; he, she, it ; n. tad tlmt, i.l, 6; 35, 6; 154, 2. 5.6; it. 35, 11. 15; iv. 51, 10. 11; vii. 86, 2. 3. 4 ; 103_ 5. 7 ; x. 34_ 12. 13 ; 90, 12 ; 129, 2. 3. 4 ; 135, 5 ; m. A. t_m him, it. 33, 13 ; 35, 8. 4 ; iv. 50, 1.9 ; vi. 54, 4 ; that, x. 90, 7 ; 135, 4 ; I. t6na with it, viii. 29, 4.10 ; with him, x. 90, 7 ; I. f. t_y_. with that, i. 85, 11 ; D. t_.smai t_ him, iii. 59, 5 ; iv. 50, 8_ ; x. 34, 12 ; for him, x. 135, 2 ; to that, viii. 48, 12. 13 (= as such) ; x. 168, 4 ; for that, viii. 48, 10 ; ab. tf_smKdfrom him, x. 90, 5. 8. 9s. 10s; than that, x. 129, 2 ; O. tAsya ofhim_ it. 35, 9 ; iii. 59, 4 ; of that, viii. 48, 8 ; x. 15, 7 ; du. m. tAu these two, x. 14, 12 ; f. tfi these two, i. 160, 1.5 ; D. t_bhyMn to those two, x. 14", ll; pI.N.m.t_they, i. 85, 2.7. 10; viii. 48, 5; x.15, 8. 5s. 12. 13 ; _hose, x. 15, 1 ; 90, 16; ffi as such, x. 15, 4. 7 ; f. ti_s they_ iv. 51, 8 ; those, iv. 51, 7_. 9 ; viL.49, 1. 2.3. 4 ; n. t_ those, i. 15_, 6 ; it. 33, 13 ; x. 14, 16 ; _ those, i, 85, 12 ; x. 90, 16; A. t_n those = tl_at, x. 90_ 8 ; I. t_bhis with ll_n, i. 35, 11 ; x. ]5, 8. 14 ; f. t_bhis with them, x. 168, 2; G. t_S_Ul of them, x. 14, 6 ; L. tl_su in them, it. 38, 13. t_m. **shake. abhi attack : pf. tataar_, iv. 50, 2. tatan-v_a_qls., pf. pt. having s_re_, vii. 61, 1 [tan stretch]. t_tas, adv. thence, x. 90,4 ; s%x. 185, 6 [prn, _)ot tA]. tA-tra, adv. _ere, x. 34, 13 [prn. root tA]. tA-th_, adv. thus, x. 90, 14 [prn. root tA]. . tao_uim, say. tlwn, x. 129_ 1 [prn. root t_]. tan extend _ perform, VIIL tanSti ; ipf. _tanvata, x. 90, 6 [cp. Gk. _r&,vpa, ' stretch ', Let. tendo ' stretch ']. abhi- _d over : red, pf. sb., _. 160_ 5.

t_nayaj

234

[tri_adhasth_ 3 ; v. 11, 5 ; (angry) with thee, vii. 86., 3 ; = by thee, vii. 86, 8. tur4t, a. eager, vii. 86, 4 [tur = tvar speed]. tuvi-jKt6., pl). high.born, iv. 50_ 4 [tuvi from tu be strong]. t(avis.-mant, a. mighty, ii. 12, 12[tuv-is, n. might from tu be strong]. trp be plea_ed_ IV. P. t.rpnoti; cs. tarp_ya satisfy, i. 85, 11 [cp. Gk. rlpvtu]. trs thirst, IV. trsya; pf, tKtrsfir, x. 15, "'9 [cp. Gk.r_p'ao_tu'become (lry'_Lat. torreo ' scorch ', Eng. thzret]. trs-n_, a. thirsty, i. 85, 11. tr.sya-vant, "" _ a. thtrsty, wL ]03, 8 [trsyg ' "' thirst]. t_ cross, _rI. tire. prlt- extend, increase (family), vii. 61_ 4 ; prolong (lifo), 103, 10 ; is so., viii. 48, 4. 7. 11. vi- run counter to (ace.), x. 34, 6. to, enc. dat. (of tram), to thee, it. 38, 1 ; iii. 59, 2 ; viii. 48, 18; x. 127, 8 ; for thee, iv. 50, 3 ; gen. of thee_ i. 85, 11 ;' it. 12, 15; 33,7.11; v. ll, 3; vi.54, 9 ; viii. 48, 6. 7. 9 ; x. 14_ 5.11 ; 127, 4 lay. 16/, Gk. roll. tok-_., m. offsIo_ng, children, it. 88, 14 ; vii. 63, 6. train, self, vii. 68, 6 [cp. _tm(m]. tya, dem. prn., n. ty_d that, iv. 51, 1 ; pl. ty_ those, viii. 48, 11. traa trembte_ I. traaa [Gk. rp_% Lat. tvrree ' frighten ']. nia- speed away, viii. 48_ 11. tr _- protect, IV. ,_. tri_yato ; s ao. op, vii. 71, 2. tr_-t.r, a. pretecling, viii. 48, 14 [trK protect]. tri, nm. three, i. 35, 8 ; 154, 2.3.4 ; vlii. 29, 7 [Gk. r_-, Lat. tr/-_ OI. tri_ Eng. three]. tri-kadruka, m. pl. _hree Soma vats, x. 14, 16 [ksdr_, f. Soma vessel]. tri-dh$,tu, s. (Bv.) having three parts_ threefold, i. 85, 12 ; 154, 4. tri-pa_io_a, a. consisting of three fifties, x. 84, 8. tri-p_i, a.(Bv.)ons/_ting of three-fourths, x. 90, 4 ; m. three.fonrths, x. 90, 8. tri.vandhur_ a. three-seated, vii. 71_ 4. tri-.a_dhaath_, a. (By.) occu_/ng three seats, iv. 50, 1 ; n. threefold abode, v. 11_ 2 [sadh_atha, n. gather/ng-ptace].

ava- s/acken (A.), it. 33, 14. _- extend to (ace.), i. 85, 7. anu [-extend over, viii. 48, 13. tfm-aya, n. descendant, it. 33, 14 [tan extend], tan-_, f. body, i. 85, 8 ; it. 35, 18 ; iv. 51,9; viii. 48,9; x. 14_8; 15, 14; 84, 6; self, vii. 86, 2. 5 (pl.) [tan stretch: cp. Lat. ten-u-i-s_ Ok. rav-(_-, Eng. thin], tanv-Kng, pr. pt. _. performing, x. 90_ 15 [tan e_nd], tap burn, I. tapa; pf. tat_pa = itpains, x. 84, 11 ; ps. tapy_te,/s distressed, x. 34, 10 [ep. Lat. tep-_re 'be warm ']. tap-aria, a. burninq, x. 84, 7 [gala burn]. tap-as, n. heat, x. 129, 3 [Lat. top-or], tap-ta, pp. heated, vii. 103, 9 [tap burn], t4,m-as, n. darkness, iv. 50, 4 ; 51, 1. 2. 3 ; viL 68, 1 ; 71, 5 ; 127, 2. 3.7 ; 129, 3 _ [tam faint]. tarot.s-to-i, f. power of darkness, viii. 48, 11 [tamis = t4maa +ic = i-afic], tar-(mi. ", a.._peeding onward, vii. 63, 4 [t._ cross], t_-rhi, adv. then, x. 129_ 2 [prn. root t_]. t_va, gen. (of. tram) ofthe_, i. 1, 6 ; vi. fi4, 9 ; viii. 48, 8 lay. tam, Lith. tar_], tav._us, a. mighty, it. 33, 3 ; v. 83_ 1 [tu be strong], tavGa-tama, spy. mightiest, it. 33, 3. t_v-_-i, f. might, i. 85, 4 [Aivis = taras, n. might], t4skara, m. thie_ viii. 29, 6. taathi-v_ms., pf. pt. act. hamng stood, it. 85_ 14 [stl_ stand]. tgp_y-ia.n_, a. caus/ng to burn, x. 34, 7 [from Ca.of tap burn], tay-6, m. th/ef, vii. 86, 5 [ = at_y_ ; cp. ato-na th/ef]. rig-mS, a. sharp, viii. 29, 5 [tij be sharp], tira_o-_Lna, a. across, x. 129, 5 [tirM]. tir-_s, prp. across, vii. 61, 7 ITS."ross ; c A.v. tat'6 ; cp. Lat. traus = ' crossing', N. pr. pt.]. tis._, nm. f. of tri three, N. tinr_s, i. 85, 6 ; it. 85, 5. tot, pcl. indted_ vii. 86, 1 [prn. root tu in tu-am], tuoh-ya, n. void, x. 129. 3. tSbhya, D. (of tram) to thee, v. 11, 5 [cp. Lat. t//n_, tt2bhyam, D. (of tv_um) for thee, iv. 50,

tri_.tfbh_

235

[durit_ p/tri- gi_e over to : ipv. dehi, x. 14, l 1. pr_-lJ,'esent : root ao. _d_, x. 15, 12. 2. dR divide, IV. dRy a ; wield_ ii. 88_ 10. d_drh_n_., pf. pt. A. steadfast_ i. 85, 10 [_h _nake.firm_. d_-t_, m. given', ii 33, 12. Danu, m. son of Danu, a demon_ ii. 12, 11. d_-man, n. ropet viii. 86_ 5 [3. d_. bind]. d_-v_.ms, pf. pt. worshilrping, m. wor. shipper, i.l;6; 85, 12; vii. 71_2; x. 15, 7 IdOl honour]. dKs-a, a. twn-Aryan, ii. 12, 4 [dfi-_ be hostile_. d_-_, m. slare_ vii. 86, 7. did_k-.su, adv. with a desire to see = find out_ vii. 86, 3 [from ds. of dr_ see]. div, m. sky, A. dlvam, iii. 5"9, 7 ; O. divtts, iv. 51, 1.1O. 11 ; v. 88, 6 ; vii. 61,3; 63,4; x. 15,14; 127,8; L. divi, i. 85, 2 ; v. 11_ 8 ; viii. 29, 9 ; x. 90, 8 [Gk. AIfa, ZX, fJ_, A_/:_']. div play, IV. d_vya, x. 84, 18. dlv-_, adv. by day, vii. 71, 1.2 [w. shift of accent for div-_,]. divi-sp_i, a. touching the sky_ v. 11, 1 ; x. 168, 1 [divl L of div+ sp.r_i . t_w.h]. div6-dive, lc. itv. ed. every day, i. 1, 3. 7 [L. of divot day]. div-y(_, a. coming from hea_en_ divine, vii. 49, 1 ; 108, 2 ; x. 84, 9 [div l_aven]. di[_, f. _luarter (of the sky), i. 85, 11 ; x. 90, 14 [difipoin_]. 1. di fly, IV. d_ya. p_i- fly around_ ii. 35,14 ; v. 83, 7. 2. di shine : pf. did_ya, ii. 83, 4. didi-v_m, s, pf. pt. shining, ii. 35, 3. 14 [di shine]. dY_divi, a. shining, i. 1_ 8 [di shine]. d_dhy_na, pr. pt. A. ponder/ng, iv. 50_ 1 _dhi think]. dip shine, IV. A. d_pya. s_[m- i,_flame :red. ao. in_. didipas, viii. 48, 6 [cp. di shine]. d][y-ant, pr. pt. flying, vii. 68, 5 [difly]. dirgh_, a. /on#, i. 154_ 3 ; x. 14, 14 [Ok. 8ohtx_-_ ]. dirgh_-rmi-t, a. heard afar, vii. 61, 2 _ru hear + t]. du go : is ao. sb. davis_ai, x. 34, _. dudhr_,'a fierce, ii. 12, i5. dur-i-tli, (pp.) n. faring ill, hardship, .35, 3 [dun///+pp. ofi go].

tri-.s.t6bh, f. name of a metre, x. 14, 16. tri-s, adv. thrice, x. 90, l 1 [Gk. vpls], tre-dh_, adv. in three u'_ys, i. 154_ 1. tv_k.s-iyR .ms, cpv. most vigoroas_ ii. 83_ 6. trod, ab. (of tv_a) than thee, ii. 33, 10. tv_m, prs. prn. thou, i. l, 6 ; 35,8; ii. 33, 12 ; viii. 48, 9. 13. 15 _ ; x. 15, 122. 13. rltv_i.s-.tr, m. name of the artificer god, i. 85_ 9 ; cp. viii. 29, 3 [tvaks = taks fashion], tv_., enc. A. (of tv(_a) thee, i. 1_7; ii. 88, 4 ; v. 11, 3 ; vii. 86, 4 ; x. 14, 4. tv_-d_tta, pp. (Tp. cd.) giren b!! thee, ii. 83, 2. tviLm, prs. prn. A. (of tram) thee, v. 11, 5. 6_. tve.s-_, a. terrible, ii. 33_ 8. 14 [tvi.s be agitated], tve.sa-sa_, d.r.a, a. (By.) of terrible aspect, i. 85,8. tvSt_, pp. (Tp.) aided by thee, iii. 59. 2 [tv_ inst. + fat_ pp. of av favour], D_ks-_,, m. will, vii. 86, 6 ; might, viii. 48, 8 [dak_. be able], d_its-i_, a. right, vi. 54, 10 [cp. Gk. _-_ Lat. dex_'], d_r._i_.a.t(_s, adv. to _he south, x. 15, 6. d_l-at, pr. pt. giving, vii. 108, 10 [df_ g/ve]. daxlhat_ pr. pt. bestowing, i. 35, 8 ; with 1_(following), x._34, 6 [dh_ put]. d_dh-f_na, pr. pt. A. committing, ass'aming, i. 85, 4 ; ii, 12, 10 ; = going, x. 15, 10 [dla_ put]. d_m-a, m. house, i. l, 8 ; ii. 35, 7 [Gk. $_pO-_, Lat. doray_s]. dCL_a, nrn. ten, x. 84, 12 [Gk. $1ga, Lat. dseem, Eng. ten]. da_flgula, length of ten fingars, x. 90, 1 [d_tia + a_gdliflnger 3. :D_-b'v-a, m. an ancient priest, iv. 51, 4 [having ten cows : gu = go]. d_-yu, m. _ra-Aryan, ii. 12, 10 [das /ay waste]. clah burn, I. d_ha. nts- burn up, x. 84_ 9. 1. dr* give, HI. cl_dltti, ii. 85, 10 ; x. 14, 9; ao. _l_,t, vii. 108,10_ ; ipv. 8. du. d_tam, x. 14, 12 ; a dO. op. disiya, ii. i 88, 5 [cp. Ok. _t_, Lat. d_:e], mu-for_/r% ii. 12_ 10. take_ ii. 12, 4. DCa'f_-abandon : ao. inj., viii. 48, 8.

i.

aurg_,]

236

[clh_,

dur-gg, n. hardship, vii. 61, 7 [dus+gu = gam go]. dur-mati, f. i//-w_//, ii. 33, 14 [dus ill +mati thought]. duvas.ya, den. presentu_th(inst.),x. 14, 1 [ddvas, n.O./Yt], dus.-l_[t, m. evil.doer, v. 83, 2. 9 [dus + hr. do + t]. dtl-s..tuti, f. /// praise, ii. 33, 4 [dus ill + stutl loraise], dull milk, II. P. d6gdhi ; .s ao. duk.sara, with two ace.. i. 160, 3. duh-i-t_[, f. daughter , iv. 51, 1. 10. 11 ; x. 127, 8 [Gk. OvTfi_qp, Go. dauhtar], dfl-.d_bha, a. (Bv.) hard to deceive, vii. 86, 4 [dus+d_bhadeeeption]. dft-t_, m. messenger, v. 11, 4 ; 83, 3 ; x. 14, 12. dSx_d, ab. adv. fromfar, iiL 59, 2; v. 83, 3 [dfl-r_, a.far], dSr$.artha, a. (By.) whose goal is distant, vii. 68, 4. dr p/erce, int. dardars.i, ii. 12, 15. d_[-ti, m. water-skln, v. 83, 7 ; vii. 103, 2 [dr. spl/t ; cp. Gk. 5iptv, :Eng. tear]. dr,_ see : pf. d_dr_e is seen, vii. 61, 5. d_yo, dat. inf: to see, x. 14, 12. d_..-.tvi_ya, gd. having seerb x. 84, 11. drh make firm, I.P.d.f'mh.a; ipf. t_ .dr.-._. "hat, ii. 12, 2. dev-_, m. god. i. 1, 1.2. 4.5 ; 35, 1.2, 3_. 8. 10. 11 ; 160, 1.4 ; ii. 12, 12; 33. 15 ; 85, 5. 15 ; iii. 59, 6. 8. 9 ; iv. 50, 9; v. 11,2; vii. 61,1.7; 68,1.3; 86, 72; viii. 29, 2. 3. 7; 48, 8. 9. 14; x. 14, 3_. 7. 14 ; 15, 10. 1_ ; 34, 8 ; 90, 6. 7.15. 16_ ; 129, 6 ; 135, 1 ; 168, 2. 4_ [ee/est_ fi_)m div heaven], dora-trY, adv. among the gods, x. 15, 9. deva-m_n_, n. abode of the gods: x. 135, 7. dova-yd, a. dtvated to the gods_ i. 154, 5. dova-vand_, a. god-pralsing, x. 15, 10 [rand greet], dev_hiti, f. divi_ order, viii. 108, 9 [dev_ god + hi-tf, f. impulse from hi impel], dov-_, t. goddess, i. 160, 1 ; ii. 85, 5 ; iv. 51, 4. 5. 8.11; vii. 49, 1.2.8.4; x. 127, 1. 2.8 If. of dov-_ god]. d_.r,-vat_, m. (Tp.) ifluminer of gloom, i. 1,7 [do._ewning+vas-_ from vas shine], dgAv-ya, a. divine, L 85, 5 ; viiL 48, 2 ;

coming from the gods, ii. 33, 7; n. dirinity, ii. 35, 8 [from dev_ god]. Dy_v_-prthiv_, du. (De.) Heaven and Earth, i. 35, 9 ; 160, 1. 5 ; v. 83, 8 ; viii. 48, 13; tile parts of the ed. separated, ii. 12, 13. dyu-m_t, adv. brilli_lntly, v. 11, 1 [rn of. dyu-mfi.nt, a. bright]. dyu-mn_, n. wealth, iii. 59, 6. dy6, m. heaven, N. dyttus, iv. 51, 11 ; x. 90, 14 ; ace. dye.m, i. 35,' 7.9 ; 154, 4 ; ii. 12, 2. 12 ; iii. 59, 1; N. pl. f. dyavas, i. 35, 6 [Gk. ZE_, Z_u, Lat. diem]. dy6t-ana, a_ shining, viii. 29, 2 [dyut shine]. dr_v-il_.a, n. wealth, iv. 51, 7 [movable property, from dru run]. dru run, I, dr_va. _ti-runpast(acc.),x. 14, 10. drug-dh_, n. misdeed, vii. 86, 5 [pp. of druh be hostile]. drfth, f. _udic% ii. 35, 6 ; m. ave_zger,vii. 61, 5. dv_l, rim. two, i. 35, 6 ; viii. 29, 8. 9 [Gk. 5fiw, Lat. duo, Lith. dh, Eng. two]. dvSxla_, a. consisting of twelve, m. twdwmonth, vii. 103, 9. deS, r, f. du. door, iv. 51, 2 [cf. Gk. 0_p% Lat. fores, Eng. door; perhaps from dhvrclosewith loss ofaspiratethrough influence of dv_ two, as having two folds] dvi-t_, (inst.) adv. (doubly) as well, vii. 86,1 [dvitwo]. dvi-pad, a. (By.) two-footed, iv. 51, 5 [Gk. $t'._to_-, ].,at. bi-ped-]. dvi.s hat6 II. dv6.ty_i.',x. 84, 8. dv6s-as, n. hatred, ii. 33, 2 [dvis Irate]. Dh_n-a, n. wealth, monsy, iv. 50, 9 ; x. 34, 10. 12. 1. d.hfi_a-van, n. wast_ land, i." 35, 8 ; desert, v, 83, 10. 2. dh/m-van, n. bow, ii. 88, 10. dham Mow, I. P. dh_mati, ps. dhamyt_te, x. 185, 7. vf- blow asunder, iv, 50, 4. dhtim-ant, pr. pt. blowir_j, i. 85, 10. dh6x-man, n. ordinanct_ law, i. 160, 1 ; x. 90, 16 [that which holds or is established : dl_ ha/d]. 1. d.h_out, IlI. d_c_h_,ti, v. 8_, 1 ; tmpp/y w/th (inst.), ii. 85, 12; bestow, ipv. dheht, x. 14_ 11 ; dhatt_, i. 85, 12 ; ii. 12, 5 ; _- 15_ 7 ; dadl_ta, x. 15_ 4.

i, _.7 :_:-.r.'; _;:_

7 ; dadh_tana, x. 15, 11 ; clhatt$,m, iv. 51, 11 i dadhantu, vii. 63, 6 ; perform, ipf. dhatta, i. 85, 9 ; bestow, s so. sb. d3a_sathas, i. 160, 5 ; estab//sh, pf. dadh6, x. 129, 7; ds. desire to bestow, didhisanti, ii. 35, 5 ; support, didhiafi_v_i, ii. 35, 12 [Ok. vlOqtu]. _dhi- put on (ace.) : pf, dadhire, i. 85, 2 ; so. 6dhita, x. 127, 1. [i- deposit, root ao. sb. dh_, v. 83, 7. hi- deposit, root ao. dh_tam, vii. 71, 5 ; ps. ao. _dh_yi, viii. 48, 10. ptfxi- put around, vi. 54, 10. prt_- put from (ab.) into (le.), vii. 61, 8. vi- impose : pf. dadhur, iv. 51, 6 ; diwde, ipf. tidadhur, x. 90, 11. C-_nma-accept gladly, ii. 35, 1. pu.t_- plaxe at the head, appoint Purohita: pf. darlhi_e, iv. 50, 1. 2. dh_ suck, IV. P. dh6ya, ii. 33, 18 ; 85, 5. dl_-r-aU, n. power, i. 85, 11 ; ordinance, vii. 61, 4 ; 63, 3 [dl_ put, establish], dhAray_t-kavi, a. (gov.) supporting the sage, i. 160, 1 [dh_r_yat, pr. pt. ca. of dhr he/all. d3a_-ra, f. stream, i. 85, 5 ; v. 83, 6 [dh_.v run]. 4his(_a_, f. bowl, i. 160, 1. dl_:f.'thought, i. 1, 7 ; iv. 50, 11. dhi think_ III. d_dhye. _- tha'nk to onese4f, _- d_dhye, x. 34, 5. dl_-ra, a. thoughtfu/, viii. 48, 4; w/se, i. 160, 8 ; intelligent, vii. 86, 1 [dhi dhunati, a. (By.) having a resounding gait, iv. 50, 2 [dhuna + iti]. dhfar, po/e (of a ear), vii. 63, 2 ; viii. 48, 2. dhfi-m6, m. smoke, v. 11, 3 [dhfx agitate; Gk. 0v/_-_, Lat. fumu-s]. dhfar-ti, malice, viii. 48, 3 [dhvr. injure]. support, fix firmly : pf. d_dh_a, i. 154, 4 ; iii. 59, 1. _n.fi, n. adv. forcibly, x. 34, It Ides be bold, dare], dhe-nti, f. .ow_i. 160, 3 ; ii. 35, 7 [y/e/d" in9 m//k : dhe =, dh_. suck], dhx_-ti, f. sedudion_ vii. 86, 6 [dhru = dhv_. injure], [ 1. N_ pel. as, like, i. 85, 6; 85, 1. _7.8si 154,2;ii. 33, 11 ;iv. 51,8; vii. 61, 2 ; 63t 5 ; 86; 5_. 7 ; 103_ 2_. 8. 7;

_i_].

viii. 48, 5. 6 ; x. 127, 4. 8 ; 168, 2 [180]. .2. ngt, neg. pcl. net, ii. 12, 5. 9. 10 ; 33, 9. 10. 15_ ; 35, 6_ ; iii. 59, 24 ; iv. 51, 6; vi. 54_3 s.t.9;vii.61,5 s;63,3;86, 6 ; 103, 8 ; viii. 48, 10 ; x. 14, 2 ; 15, 182 ; 34, 2-5. 12 ; 129, 1'. 2. 7_ ; 168, 3. 4 [180]. n_kt-am, ace. adv. _j night, vii. 71, 1. 2 ; x. 84, 10 [stem nakt, ep. Lat. nox = noct-s]. n/i-k.satra, n. star; day-star, vii. 86, 1 [nt_k night+ ks.atra dominion = ruliT_ over night]. nad-_, f. stream, ii. 35, 3 [nad roar]. n_-pfLt, m. son, ii. 35, 1. 2. 3. 7. 10, 18 ; grandson, x. 15, 3 [Lat. _w2oSb _nephew ']. n_ptr, m. (weak stem of n_p_t) son : gon. n_ptur, ii. 85, 11 ; dat. n_l_tre, ii. 35, 14 [n_-pitr having no father =' nephew', ' grandson ']. n_bh-as, n. sky, v. 83, 3 [Gk. vlq_o_, OSI. nebo]. nam bend, L n(maa ; ._ : ii. 12, 13 ; iv. 50_ 8; before (dat.), i. 34, 8; int. n_axnamiti bend low, v. 83, 5. pr_ti- bend towards: pf. nfi_af_m_, ii. 83, 12. n_-aa, n. homage, i. 1, 7 ; ii. 33, 4. 8 ; 35, 12 ; iii. 59, 5 ; iv. 50, 6 ; v. 83, 1 ; vii. 61, 6 ; 63, 5 ; 86, 4 ; x. 14, 15 ; 15, 2 ; 34, 8 [nam bern/]. namas-y_, den. adore, ii. 33, 8 [nt_mas nazx_s-yi_, a. adorable, iii. 59, 4. n_r-a, a. manly, i. 85, 9. ngv-a, a. new, iv. 51, 4 ; vii. 61, 6 ; x. 135, 3 [Gk. _t9"_, Lat. novu-s, OSI. novu, Eng. new]. N_va-gv-a, m. an ancient priest, iv. 51, 4 ; pl, a family of ancient priests, x. 14, 6 [having nine cows : gu = g6]. n&v-yas, epv. a. renewed, v. 11, 1 [Lat. nev-ior]. 1. naat be lost, IV. P. nC-;ya ; ao. he/re.t, vi. 5_, 7. 2. nsti reach, L n_. vl- readt, ii. 35, 6. n_, f. night, vii. 71, 1. nas-tfl,, pp. test, vi. 54, 10 [na_i be/ost]. na_, prs. prn., A. us, i. 1, 9 ; 85, 11 _ ; ii. 38, 1.2.3.5.14; iv. 50,11; vii. 61,7_; 63,6; 71,2.4.6; 86,8; viii. 48, 6. 8.15c ; x. 14, 14; 15,1.6;34,

he_e].

nah]

238

[pathik._t ni.a-k.rtli, n. appointed place, x. 34,5[pp. arranged: nisout+krmake]. nilead, I.n_tya;2. pl. ipv.,x. 34,4. s6an- conjain with (inst.), vi. 54, 1. nic-_,adv, doum, x. 84,9[inst. ofnykflc downward]. nd, adv. now, i. 154, 1 ; ii. 33,7; iv. 51, 9; x. 34, 14_; 168, 1; = inter, pal. pray ? vii. 86, 2 [Gk. _, OI. nu, OG. nu]. nud push, VI. nudK ; pf. 3. pl.._, nunudre, i. 85, 10. 11. pzr_ push away : pf. vii. 86, 1. nu, adv. =nd now, vii. 63, 6[OG. n_]. n_.-tana, a. preseld, i. 1, 2 [n_t now]. nfi-ngm, adv. now, iv. 51",1 ; vii. 68, 4; viii. 48, 3 ; x. 15, 2 [n_ now]. n.f, m. man, pl. N. n(waa, i. 85, 8 ; 154, 5; v. 11,2.4; vii. 108, 9 [Gk. dv_p, dv_p&]. n.r.ed.k.sM, a. (By.) obser_vr of men, viii, 48, 9. 15 ; x. 14, 11 [n.r man+ o(kk.aas took]. n.r-p_ti, m. lord of me.n, vii. 71, 4. nr.-mn.K, a. manliness, valour, ii. 12, 1 [ep. nr-m6.nas man/y]. ne-i_, m" guide, ii. 12, 7 [ni lead]. n5 _: n_ + u also not, vi. 54, 3. n/tu, f. ship, x. 135, 4 [Gk. va_-_, Lat. ntiv-/-s]. ny-itrio, a. downward, v. 83, 7 [ni- down +-aria-ward]. ny-_pta, pp. thrown down, x. 34, 5. 9 [ni + yap s_rew]. Paks-in, a. _nged, x. 127_ 5 [pak_._, m. wing]. p_o-ant, pr. pt. cooking_ ii. 12, 14. 15 [pa_ cook, Lat. coquo for pequo, OSI. 8. s. _oe_tt_]. l_rica, nm. five, iii. 59, 8 lAY. panoa, Gk. nivr_, Lat. _inque]. l)_n.-i, m. nlggard_ iv. 51, 3 [pan bargain]. pat fly, I. ptlta, x. 14, 16 ; ca. p&t_ya fa//, v. 88, 4 [Gk. _tlr-_-rm .lies, Lat. loe_-o]. p_t-i, m. /ord, pl. N. l)_tayas, iv. 50, 6 ; 51, 10 ; viih 48, 18 [Gk. _tJa_-_]. pith, m. path, viii. 29, 6; x. I4,, 10 [ep. Gk. _Mro-_]. path-l, m. path, i. 85, 11; x. 14, 7: 168, 8. pathi-iq_", m./mth-niak_r, x. 14, 15 [I_.* raadang: kr. + determinative t].

14; /o us, x. 127,4; D.,i. 1,9a; 85, 12; 160,5; ii. 33, 15; iv. 50,2; v. 83,5.6; vi. 54, 5. 10; vii. 63,6_; vii. 86, 8 ; 103,10 ; viii. 48, 8.9. 12. 14. 15a; x. 14,2; 15,4; 84,14; 127,6; 135, 5 ; G. of us, ii. 33, 4. 13 ; v. 11, 4 ; 83,6; vi.54, 5; 86,5; viii. 48. 42. 7. 9; x. 14, 2. 6. 7; 15, 8; 135, 1. nab bind, IV. n_hya, s_m- knit together : irr. pf. 2. pl. an_ha, viii. 48, 5. na = n_ not, x. 84, 8. n_ka,x. 16.firmament' i. 85, 7 ; vii. 86, 1 ; 90,n' ng._, f. flute, x. 135, 7. ngth-itg, pp. distressed, x. 34_ 3 [ngth seek aid]. n&dy_[, m. son ofstrsams, ii. 35, 1. n_xlh-am_aa, pr. pt.A. seeking aid, supplianl, ii. 12, 6 ; 83, 6. ninnY,, adv. separately, ii. 12, 8. n_bhi, f. nave/, x. 90, 14. n[t-man, n. name, ii. 33, 8 ; 35, 11 ; vii. 103, 6 [Gk. 5vopa, Lat. n6men, Go. ham6, Eng. name], n_xi, f. wanton, ii. 38_ 5 [from n_r man]. ni_aatya, m. du. epithet of the A_vins, vii. 71,4[n_+aeaty_notuntrue]. hi- .k_t-van, a. deceifful, x. 34, 7 [ni down + kr. do]. ni-cit_t, pp. kn&en, ii. 12, 13 [ni+ci note], nin.yK, n. secret, vii. 61, 5. ni-todin, a. platting, x. 34, 7. ni-dr_, slsep, viii. 48, 14 [ni + d_ s/e_; cp. Gk. 8ap-e(iv_, Lat. dor-mio], ni-dhi, m. treasure, viii. 29, 6 ; dvpos/t, x. 15, 5 [ni down, dJai = dl_ put]. ni-dhruvi, a. persever/ng, viii. 29, 8 [ni + dhr_vifirm], ni-p_d_, m. valley, v. 88, 7 [ni down +lal_la, re.foot], nir-_y .aria. n. exit, x. 135, 6 [nis out + _y-ana going : i go]. ni-vltt, f. depth, x. 127, 2 [hi down], ni-v6_ani, a. causing to rest, 1. 35, 1 [from ca. of ni + aid cause to turn in]. ni-.satta, pp. with _, hav/ng sat dmcn in (lc.), x. 15, 2 [ni+sad s/t down], ni-ai_l-y&,_d, hav/ng sat down, ii. 35,10; x_ 15, 6; with _ x. 14, 5. ni-.siflo-(mt, pr. pt. pouring down, v. 83, 6 [_io s/rr/nk/e], nisJtli, m. nee.k/a_, it. 83, 10.

pathir_k.si]

239

[piny p_rva-ta, m. i. 85, 10 ; ii. 12, 2. 11. 13 [joined; Lesbian Gk. _p_Ta 'limits']. p(kr-van, n.join_, seclion, vii. 108, 5 ; viii. 48, 5 [cp. Gk. lrEpFav in _r_pa_v_ ' finish' for _rE#fa_]. Day-i, re.f ally, vi. 54, 3. pavitra-vant, a. purif_ng, i. 160, 3 [pavitra, n. means of purification ; root pfipurify]. pa_ = spa_ see, i. 35, 2 ; x. 14, 7 [Av. spas, ]hat.. spec-_S]. pa_i-_, m. beast, x. 90, 8 ; victim, x. 90, 15 lay. pasu-_ Lat. t_cu-s, Go. faihu]. pa_iu-t_p, a. eattlc-stealiny, vii. 86, 5 [t.rD bepleased with]. palioli-t_d, adv. behind, viii. 48, 15 [13asicaiinst, adv. Av. _uisca ' behind']. pa_ol_d, (ab.) adv. behind, x. 90, 5 ; after. wards, x. 135, 6. 1. Dg.drink, I. piba, iv. 50, 10 ; root ao. _ip_ma, viii. 48, 3 [cp. Lat. bibo _drink ']. s_ml- d_ink tayether, x. 135, 1. 2. Da protect, II. p_ti, from (ab.), ii. 35, 6 ; vii. 61, 7 ; 63, 6 ; 71, 6 ; 86, 8; viii. 48, 15. p_.th-a_, n. path, vii. 63, 5 ; domain, i. 154, 5 [related to p6.th, m. p_dh]. Dad-a, m. foot, x. 90, I I ; one.fourth, x. 90, 3. 4 [sec. stem formed from ace. D_d-am of p_dfoot ]. pb,pf, y_., inst. f. adv. evilly, x. 135, 2 _paD_, a. bad]. p_r-_, m. farther shore, ii. 38, 3 [Dr po_s = crossing ; Gk. _dpo-s ' passage']. piirthiva, a. earthly, i. 154, 1 ; x. 15, 2 [a. from p.rthiv_[ earth] p_v-ak6., a. purifying, iv. 51, 2; vii. 49, 2. 3 [pft purify]. pi swell, I. pCtyate ; pf. pipllya, ii.35, 7 ; viii. 29, 6. pi-tfi, m. drip,k, x. 15, 3 [p_ drink]. Di-_, re.father, i. 1, 9 ; 160, 2_. 3 ; ii. 38, 1.12.13 ; iv. 50, 6 ; v. 83, 6 ; vii. 103, 3; viii. 48, t; x. 14,5.6; 34,4; 185, 1 ; pL fathers, auce.stors, viii. 48, 12. 13 ; x. 14, 2. 4. 7. 8. 9; 15, 1-13 [Ok. xav_p, Lat. pa_er, Go.radar]. pitr-ya, a. paterna/, vii. 86, 5 ; viii. 48, 7 [pit'.father]. piny _/dd abundance, I. pinva, iv. 50, 8; overflow, v. 88, 4 [sec. root = pi-nu from pi s_dg].

pathi-r_d_si, a. (Tp.) _tdd,_j the /_th, x. 14, 11. path-y_, f. P_Jb x. 14, 2. pad fan, IV. A. p(tdya ; pp. Dap_la, x. 34, 11. _va-f_l down, vi. 54, 3. p(_d, foot, du. ab. padbhy_m, x. 90, 12. 14 [Gk. Iro_-, Lat. peg-, Eng. f_,t]. paxl-_l, n. step, i. 154, 3. 4.5. 6; ii. 35, 14 [pad wa/k ; Gk. wi_-o.v 'ground ']. pad-v_nt, a. having feet, x. 127, 5. pan-tiyya, gdv. praiseworthy, i. 160, 5 [Dan admire]. p_,nth_, m. path, i. 35, 11 ; vii. 71, 1 ; x. 14, 1 [cp. Ok. _6_o-_]. DCtny_,-tama, spy. gdv. most highly to be praised, iii. 59, 5 [Dnya, gdv. praiseworthy : pan admire]. Dapr_th-_nti, pf. pt. A. spreading oneself, iv. 51, 8 [prath spread], DOry-M, n. milk_ moi_tm'e, i. 160, 3 [p i swell. ptir-a, a. farrier, ii. 12, 8 ; higher, x. 15, 1 ; renwle, x. 15, 10 [pr pass], para-m_, spy. a. farthest, iv. 50, 3 ; x. 14, 8 ; 129, 7 ; highest, i. 154, 5. 6 ; ii. 35, 14 ; iv. 50, 4. par-tis, adv. far away, ii. 35, 6 ; beyond, x. 129, 1. 2. par6_.-t_d, adv. from afar, vi. 54, 9; above, x. 129_ 5. par&-y_nt, pr. pt. departing, x. 34, 5 [p6x_* away, _k. Irlph beyond, + i go]. par_v_t, f. distance, i..,5, 3 ; iv. 50, 3. p_i, prp. ound ; with ab. from, ii. 35, 10 ; X. 135, 4 [Av. pairi, Gk. _ip_]. paxi-clhi, m.pl. sticks enclosing the altar, x. 90, 15 [Dill round + dihi reduced form of dh_put], pari-bh_, a. be/ng around, encompassing (ace.), i. 1, 4 [bhft be]. paxivataar- .i.mi, a. yearly, vii. 10, 8 [plri-+ vata_rti, m. complete year], plvt-s.k.rta, pp. adorned, x. 185, 7 [p6a'i round + akr = kr make = pull. pareyi-vl_. ".", red" pf. pt. havi,_passed a_y, x. 14, 1 [p4_r_ away + iy-i-v_. : from igo]. ParJSmya, m. a god" of rain, v. 83, 1-5. 9. :Parlinya-Jinvitat, pp. quickened by Par_ny_, vii. 103, 1 [jinv sec. root = ji.nu from Ji _u/cken]. pary-_-vivrtsant, pr. pt. ds. wishing to

revo_MgJier (ace.), vii. 68, 2 IvY. turn],

pr_- l_ourf.orth, v. 88, 6.

pi_]

240

[pratn_ ph.s-_n, m. a solar deity, vi. 54, 1-6. 810 prosperer [pu? thrive]. p.r take across, III. P. pipaxti ; ipv. pip rt_m, vii. 61, 7 ; II. P. p_T.i = ipv., ii. 33, 3. pro m/X0 VII. pFn._kti. s_m-, A. p.rhkt6, mi2zgle, vii. 103, 4. prch_-mgna, pr. pt_ A. asking oneself, x. "34, 6 [jprach ask]. p_t-anfL, f. battle, i. 85, 8. pFthiv-_, earth, i. 35, 8 ; 154, 4 ; ii. 12. 2 ; iii. 59, 1. 3. 7 ; iv. 51, 11 ; v. 83, 4. 5. 9; vii. 61,3; x. 168, 1 [the_road one _ p.rthvf, f. of Drth_ from prath s_read ]. p_d-ni, a. speckled, i. 160, 3 ; vii. 108, 4. 6. 10. Prdni-m_tr, a. (Bv.) having Pr_Cnia_ a "mother, i.'85, 2. " p._?at-i, (pr. pt.) f. spotted mare, i. 85, 4. 5. p.r.s_l-_.jy_, n. clotted butter, x. 90, 8. p_s-ant, (pr. pt.) a. tarie_ted, iv. 50, 2. p_fi///lX, prxai_ti, ii. 35, 3. _.fill up, v.'ll, 5 ; vii. 61, 2. p_pi_oat, pr. pt. int. thickly painting, x. 127, 7 [pist laaint]. pSs-a, m. prosperity, i. 1, 3 [pus thrive]. pra-ketA, m. beacon, x. 129, 2 [pr_ +cit appear]. prach ask, VI. p roh_, ii. 12, 5 ; vfi. 86, 3 [sec. root: prrui+cha; cp. Lat. _oosc_ parc-scoandprec-o%OG..forsr_n]. = praoji_, f. offspring, ii. 33, 1 ; pl. progeny, ii. 85, 8 ; - men, v. 83, 10 [cp. Lat. pro-ge_-/_s]. praj_vant, a. accompanied by offspring_ iv. 51, 10. prati-k_m6m, adv. at p/easure, x. 15_ 8 [k_ma desire]. pr_tijan-ya, a. belonging to adversaries, iv. 50, 9 ; n. hostile force, iv. 50, 7 [prati-jau_, m. adversary]. prati-d_van, m. adversary at play, x. 34, 6 [divp/ay]. prati-do.s_m, adv. towards eventide, i. 85, 10 [do._ evening]. prati-b6dhyamfiaaa, .pr. pt. awaking towards (ace.), iv. 51, 10. prati-n_i_na, n. ma_h, ii. 12, 9 [countermeasure : m _, measure]. prO-tit-am, ace. inf. to pro/ong , viii. 48, 10 [tT._oes ]. pra-tn_, a. anc/ent_ iv. 50, 1 [pl_ before].

pf. pipiJifir, vii. 103, 6; A. pipi_e, ii. 33, 9. pi-t_,, pp. drwnk, viii. 48, 4.5. 10. 12. piy_., m. n. milk, ii. 35, 5 [pi swe/_], putr_, m. son, i. 160, 3 ; v. 11, 6 ; vii. 103, 3 ; x. 15, 7 ; 34, 10. pd.uax, adv. again, vi. 54, 10 ; x. 14, 8 ; 90, 4 ; 135, 2 ; back, x. 14, 12. punar-h_n, a. striking back, x. 34, 7. punChY, pr. pt. purifiding, vii. 49, 1 [pf_ pur_ry], pfir, f. citadel, ii. 35, 6 [p.r fi//]. pdram-dhi, f. reward, iv. 50, 11 [a. dhi bestozdng(reduced form of dh_)a_ndante, pftr-am acc.], laUr_a-t_d, adv. in the east, iv. 51, 1.2. 8 ; forward, v. 83, 8 ; before, viiL 48, 15 ; infrant, x. 135, 6. pur_, adv.farmerly, iv. 51, 7. pur_n_,a.,f._,an_'ent, iv. 51, 6; m. pl. ancients_ x. 185, 1.2 [pur_ fo_nerly]. Duru-t_ma, a. spy. most Jrequent, iv. 51, 1 [puff, Gk. _okJ-_J. pturu-tr_, adv. in many places, x. 127, 1 ; in many ways, vii. 103, 6. x pura-rupa, a. (By.) having many forms, ii. 83, 9. 7_ftru-s.a, m. the primaeval Malv, x. 90, 1.2. 4. 6. 7. 11. 15. purus(_-tA, f. human frailty, x. 15, 6. pur6-hita, pp. placed in front, m. domestic priest, i. 1, 1 ; v. 11, 2 [purt_+hit_, pp. of dl_ put]. la_UrS-hiti, f. priestly service, vii. 61, 7. ptm-.t4, n. (pl.) earnings, ii. 12, 4 [pp. of pUS lhrive], pus oti, "f. earnlngs_ ii. 12, 5 ; prosperity, viii. 48, 6. pf_ purify, IX. pun_ti, i. 160, 3. p_r-n_, pp. full, i. 154, 4; vii. 103, 7 [p._ fi//: cp. Ok. _ro_ol ' many ', Eng. full], p_m_,, m. metrical for p_ru.sa, x. 90, 3. 5. p_r-va, a.former, i. 1,2; be/ng in.front, iv. 50, 8 ; early, ancient, x. 14_ 2. 7.15 ; 15, 2. 8. 10 ; 90, 16. pftrva_J_, a. born of o/d, x. 14, 15 [j_ bo born], pfiLrvsPbh_, a. receiving the prefironce, iv. 50, 7 [bhaJ shareJ, pf_rva..su, a. bringing forih first, ii. 35, 5. phrvahn-_, m. morning, x.34, 11 [pfzrv_ ear/y+_hn_=t_handay], pfalT-y_, a. andvnt_ i. 35, 11 ; _ 14, 7.

pi_ _o_,'n,yI. pix9. _'.

prath]

241

[br11 bandh bind, ix. badhn_ti : ipf. gbadh- ,, nan, x. 90, 15. bgndh-u, a. akin, i. 154, 5 ; m. bond, x. 129,4 [bandhbind]. babhrd, a. (ruddy) brown, ii. 33, 5. 8. 9. 15 ; vii. 103, 10 ; viii. 29, 1. ; x. 34, 5. 11. 14. baxh-_.n.a magic power, x. 34, 7 _brh make big]. barhi-s_d, a. (Tp.) sitting on the sacrifidal grass, x. 15, 3. 4 [for baxhih.-aAd: sad Mt]. baxhis.-y_., a. placed on the sasrifidal grass, x. 15, 5 _baxhis]. barh-is, n. sacr(fieial grass, i. 85, 6. 7 ; v. 11, 2 ; x. 14, 5 ; 15, 11 ; 90, 7. bah-ft, a. many, ii. 35,12 ; x. 14, 1 ;34,13. b_.dh drive away, I. A. bl_hate, x. 127, 2 ; int. badbadhe press apart, vii. 61, 4. _pa- drive away, i. 85, 3. 9 ; 85, 3. bfO_-d, m. arm, i. 85, 6 ; du. x. 90, 11.12 lay. bdzu, Gk. 7r_XU-_OG. buoff]. , bibhy-at, pr. pt.fearing, x. 34, 10 [bhi fear]. bibhr-at, pr. pt. bearing, vii. 103, 6 [bl_. bear]. bfl-ma, n. shavings,..ii. 35, 12. budh-_n_, dot pt. A. waking, iv. 51, 8. budh-n_, m. n. bottom, x. 135, 6 [Lat. fundu-s]. brh-_t, (pr. pt.) adv. a/oud, ii. 33, 15 i "35, 15. b.rh-_nt, a. lofty, i. 35, 4 ; v. 11, 1 ; vii. 61, 3 ; 86, 1 ; x. 34, 1 ; ample, i. 160, 5 ; n. the great war/d, x. 14, 16 [pr. pt. of brh make big]. B_h_s:p_ti, m. Lord of prayer, name of "agod, iv. 50, 1.2. 3. 4.5. 6.7. 10. 11 ; x. 14, 3 [b._h-as prob. gen. = brh_s ; cp. br_hma09, as p_ti]. bodhi, 2. s. ipv. ao. of bhf_ b_, ii. 33, 15 [for bhfa-dhi]. br_h-man, n. prayer, ii. 12, 14 ; vii. 61, 2. 6 ; 71, 6 ; 103, 8 [brh swell]. brah-m_n, m. priest, iv. 50, 8. 9; Brahmin, ii. 12_ 6 _brh swe//]. brahman&, m. Brahmin, vii. 103, 1. 7. 8 ; 90, 12. bruv-_nt, pr. pt. ca_ing (ace.), viii. 48, 1

prath spread out, I. -_. prgtha : ppf. palargthat, vii. 86, 1. pra-thamg, ord. first, i. 85, 14 ; v. 11,2 ; vi. 54,4; x. 14,2; 34, 12; 90, 16; 129, 4 ; chief, ii. 12,1 [ = pra-tamgforemost ; OP.fra-tama]. prathama-jf% a. first-born, x. 168, 3 [jf_ =-jan]. prath_m_-m, adv. first, iv. 50, 4. pra-d_, f. control, ii. 12, 7 [difi point], pra-bodh_yant, cs. pr. pt. awakening, iv. 51, 5 [budh wake], pr_-yat_, pp. extended, i. 154, 3 ; offered, x. 15, 11. 12 [yam stretch eut_. pr_-yati, f. impulse, x. 129, 5 [yam extend]. lar_yaa-vant, a. offel_ng oblations, iii. 59, 2 [pr_y-as enjoynwnt from pri p/easel, pra-yo_, m. warder off, vii. 86, 6 [2. yu aaparate]. pra-v_t, f. dope, downward path, i. 35, 3 ; height, x. 14, 1 [prCLforward]. pravbte-j_, a. born in a windy place, x. 34, 1 [pra-v_t/_+ja = jan]. lard-elmS, m. traveller, viii. 29, 8 [pr_ + va8 dwell away from home], pr_-vi.s.ts, pp. Imt_ng entered,, vii. 49, 4 [viii en_r], pra-saxg_, m. discharge, vii. 103, 4 [s.rj emit] pra-savitf, m. rouser, vii. 63, 2 [sfl stimulate ]. lar_-siti, f. loi/s, x. 34, 15 [si bind]. pr_-sf_ta_pp.arouzed, vii. 63,4 [sO impei], l_ra-stma_, m. strewn grass, x. 14, 4 [stT. strew]. Dr_flll [extended form, pr-_, of p_d/], p_vade, s dO. _pr_s, x. 127, 2.". l_rt_flc, a., f. pr_c-_, forward, x. 34, 12 ; fadng, x. 135, 3 [pr_+aflc]. I_r_., m. breath, x. 90, 13 [pr_+an brealh_], pr_.v_., f. rainy season, vii. 103, 3. 9 [vra rain_, "Dr_'u._, a., f. _, belonging _othe rains, vii. 10_7. pr_-Vela-_, a. dangling, x. 34, 1 [pr_ +rip tremb/_], lariy.-_, a. dear, i. 85, 7 ; 154, 5 ; ii. 12, 15 ; viii. 48, 14 ; x. 15, 5 [pri _ease]. Phalig(_ Bad-db_ bind], 150_ cave, iv, 50, 5. pp. bound, x. 34, 4 [bandh

[b_ _a_].
speak].

bruv-_9. _, pr. pt. speaking, iii. 59, 1 [brft brh speak, II. braviti, i. 85, 6 ; _b. bravat, vL 54, 1.2; teg., op. x. 185_ 5. R -

Bhang]
f_lhi- speak for (acc.), i. 35, 15, 5. tips-, _.. implore, iv. 51, 11.

242
ll ; x.

[msdae_it

Bhaks-_, m. draught, x. 34, 1 [bhak-.s, soc.root cen.*umefrom bhaj partake of]. bha_ partake of (gen.), x. 15, 3 ; s ao., viii. 4_, 1. 7. bhad-r_, a. ausp/v/ous, i. 1, 6; ii. 35, 15; iii. 59, 4; iv. 51, 7; x. 14, 6. 12 [praiseworO_y : bhand be praised], Bhar-atR, m. pl. name of a tribe, v. 11, 1. bh_r-ant, pr. pt. beari_,i. 1, 7 [,bhrbear]. bh_v-ya, a. that will be, future, x: 90, 2 [gdv. ofbhfabe], bh_ shine, II. P. bhl_ti, _va- shi_ down, i_ 154, 6. vt- shinefarth, ii. 85, 7. 8 ; v. 11, 1. bhid split, VII. bhln_tti [Lat. _nd-o]. vi- sp/it open, i. 85, 10. bhi_._k-tam_, m. spy. best heabrr, ii. 33, 4 [bhi_._ aling], Iw, bhis_j, m. ph_ysician, ii. 33, 4. bib:fear, L A. bh_yate, i. 85, 8 ; ii. 12, 13; pf bibh_ya_ v. 83, 2; e ao. _bhaieux, viii. 48, 11. bhi-m_,'a, t_rrfb/e, i. 154, 2; ii. 38, 11 [b_/_r]. bhur quiver, int. J_rbhuriti, v. 88, 5. bhliv-ana, n. creature, i. 35, 2. 5. 6 ; 85, 8; 154, 2.4; 160, 2.3; ii. 35,2.8; vii. 61, 1 ; wet/d, ii. 33, 9 ; v. 83, 2. 4 ; iv. 51, 5 ; x. 168, 2. 4 [bhfi be]. bhft become, be, I. bh_va, i. 1, 9 ; v. 83, 7.8 ; ipv., x. 127, 6 ; pr. sb., viii. 48, 2 ; ipf. _bl_vat, v. 11, 3. 4 ; x. 135, 5. 6 ; come into being, x. 90, 4 ; pf: ba. bh_va, ii. 12, 9 ; vii. 103, 7 ; x. 34, 12 ; pf. op. babhfay_t, iv. 51, 4 ; root ao., viii. 48, 3 ; _bhfivan, vii. 61, 5 ; root ao. sb. bhuv_mi, vii. 86, 2 ; ipv. bh_tu, iv. 50, 11 [cp. Gk. @J-_, Lat.fu-i-t]. abhi- be superior _o (aec_), iii. 59, 7. I_ ar/se, pf., x. 129, 6. 7; 168, 3. i_vis- appear, vii. 103, _. _am- do good to (dat.), viii. 48, 4. bhfx-t_, pp. been, x. 90, 2 ; n. being, x. 90, 8. bh_-m_n, n. earth, i. 85, 5 ; vii. 86, 1 ; x. 90, 1. 14 [.cp. Gk. @_-/aa ' growth']. bh_-:i, a. gre_ ii. 83, 9 ; mur_h, ii. 88, 12; adv. gr._dy_ i. 154, 6.

bh_ri-_rfiga, a. (By.) many-harned, i. 154, 6. bh_r-ni, a. ang_ , vii. 86, 7. bhus. Mrive, I. P.bhus.ati [extended form of bhfi be]. pfLri- surpass, ii. 12, 1. bh_. bear, III. bfbharti, ii. 33, 10 ; iik 59, 8 ; he/d, iv. 50, 7 ; viii. 29, 3. 4.5 [Gk. _ip_o, Lat. fer6, Arm. hereto, 0I. berim, Go. baira]. vi-, I. bhara, carry hither and lhithvr, v. iI, 4. Bhf'g-u, m. pl. a family of ancient priests, x. 14, 6. bhesaJ-_, a. healing, ii. 83, 7, n. medicine, remedy, ii. 33, 2. 4. 12. 13 [bhis6j he_li_j]. " bh6g-a, m. use, x. 34, 3 [bhuj enjoy]. bhoj-t;, m. liberal man, iv. 51, 3. bhSj-ana, n. food, v. 83,10 [bhuj enjoy]. bhyas _ bhi fear, I. *, bhy(_sate, ii. 12, 1. bhr_j shiny, I.._. bbx_jate. vi- sh[nef_rth, i. 85, 4. bh_Jam_na, pr. pt.._, shining, vii. 63,4. bhr_-tr, m. brother, x. 34, 4 [Gk. _p, Lat.'fr_ter, OI. br_thir, Go. br_thar, OSi. bra_]. Mah, m_m.h be great, m_. hate and m_he(3, s.). sC[m- consecrate, vii. 61, 6. ma_h_vant, m. liberal patron, ii. 83, 14 ; 35, 15 [maxh-_ bounty : mah be great]. maghSni, a. f. bounteous, iv. 51, 3 If. of magh_vem]. ma_..d_ka, m. frog, vii. 103, 1. 2. 4.7. 10. math-it_ pp. _nd/ed by fric2/on, viii. 48, 6. math-1-m_ma, pr. pt. ps. bv/ng rubbed_ v. 11, 6. mad rejoice, I. mf_la_ in (le.), i. 85, 1 ; 154, 5 ; in (inst.), 154, 4 ; x. 14, 8. 7 ; with (inst.), x. 14, 10; be exhilarated, viii. 29, 7 ; drink with exhilaration, vii. 49, 4 ; cs. mf_iaya, A. rejoice, x. 15, 14 ; in (inst.), x. 14, 14 ; (gem), i. 85, 6 ; with (inst.), :L 14, 5 ; g/adden, x. 84, 1 [Gk. pt_, Lat. made5 'drip']. m_d-a_ m. intoxication, i. 85, 10 ; viii. 48, 6. m_la_cyt_t, a. r_iny w/th intoxication, L 85, 7 [oya move].

m_dant]

243

[m_sa m_rt-ya, a. morla/; m._wrlatman, i. 35, 2 ; vii. 61, 1; 71, 2 ; viii. 48, 1.3. 12; x. 15, 7. marm_, y_-m_na, pr. pt. int. _naking bright, ii. 35, 4 [n_j." wipo]. m_a, a. gr_, ii. 33, 8 ; G. mah_s, iv. 50, 4 ; f. -_, v. 11, 5 [Av. maz 'great' ; from mall be great]. mah-_.n, m. greatness, ii. 12, 1 ; 35, 2 [msh be great]. mah-_.nt, a. great, iii. 59, 5 ; v. 11, 6 ; 83, 8 ; vii. 63, 2 ; x. 34, 12 [pr. pt. of mah be great]. ma3a_-vadha, a. (By.) hav'i_lg a mighty weapon, v. 83, 2. m_,h-i, a. great, i. 160, 5 ; ii. 12, 10 ; v. 83, 5 ; viii. 29, 10 [mah be great]. mahi-tv_, n. greatness, vii. 61, 4. mahi-tvan_, n. gre._ttness, i. 85, 7. mah-in, a., f. -i, great, i. 160, 2. 5. mah-i-m_n, m. greatuess, i. 85, 2 ; ii. 35, 9; iii. 59, 7 ; vii. 86_1 ; x. 90, 3.16; 1687 1 ; power, x. 129, 3 ; pl.powers, x. 129, 5. mah-_, a. f. "great, ii. 33, 8. 14 ; x. 14, 1 [mah be great]. m_-hyam, prs. prn. D. "tome, x. 34: 1. 2 [ep. Lat. mih_]. ra_, measure, IIL A. mimite. vi- meas_re out: pf. vi-mam_, i. 154, 1. 3 ; 160, 4 ; ii. 12, 2. m_, enc. prs. prn. A. me, ii. 33, 6. 7 ; viii. 48, 5s. 6. 10 ; x. 34, 1.2 ; 127, 7 [Lat. _, Eng. _e]. m_, proh. pcl. _mt, ii. 33, 1. 4s. 5 ; viii. 48, 8. 14_; x. 15, 6 ; 34, 13. 14 [Gk. _ ' not ']. m$,kis, proh. prn. pcl. no_ any one, vi. 54, 7 [Gk. p_-r_s ' no one ']. m$,-kim, prob. prn. Iml. _o one, vi. 54, 7_. Mi_tali, m. a divine being, x. 14, 3. mr_-t._, f. mother, i. 160, 2 ; v. 11, 3 ; x. 34, 4. 10 _Gk. p_'r_p, Lat. m_it_r, 0I. m_thir, :Eng. m_ther]. m_dhvi, m. du. lovers of honey, vii. 71, 2 _m_lhu honey]. manus.a, a. human ; m. man, vii. 63, 1 _mKnus ,nan]. mare, prs. prn. A. nw, vii. 49, 1-4. m_.yf% f. mysterious pow_', i. 160, 3 [m_ ma_e]. m_-y% a. /ow/ng, vii. 103, 2 ImP. beUow]. m_a_ m. month, vii. 61, 4 [m$,s moon

m_d-a_t, pr. pt. rejoicing, iv. 50, 2; delighting in (inst.), iii. 59, 3. m_Ah-u, n. honey, n_ad, i. 154, 4.5 ; iv. 50, 8 ; viii. 48, 1 ; x. 34, 7 ; a. sweet, i. 85, 6 [Gk. piOv, Lith. mealie-s, OSI. m6d_, Eng. mead], m_hu-mat-tama, spv. a. most ]mnied, v. 11, 5 ; x. 14, 15. _dhu-_odt, a. (Tp.)dripping with honey, distilling sweetness, vii. 49, 3 [_eut drip], m_hya, a. middle, vii. 49, 1. 3 ; x. 15, 14 [Lat. mediu.s], m_lhy_-n_, spv._a, midddemost, x. 15, 1. man t_nk, VlIL A. manure, viii. 29, 10 ; IV. A. m_yate, viii. 48, 6 ; x. 34, 13. m_Ja-as, n. mind, x. 90, 13 ; 129, 4 ; 135, 8 [Av. man_, Gk. pivo_], m_mas-vant, a. wise, ii. 12, 1. man-_, f. jealousy, ii. 33, 5 [man think], manis_, f. thought, vii. 71,6 ; wisdom, x. 129,4: pruycr, v. 11,5; hynm ofpraise, v. 83, 10 [man think]. M_m-u, m. an ancient sage, iL 33, 13. m_no-ju, a. sw/fl as thought, i. 85, 4 [m_a_ mind +Jfl to speed]. m_-tra, m. hymn, ii. 35, 2 ; spel_, x. 14, 4. m_d ex_h//arate, I. m_,nd_ : is ao. A. _mandis_t_,m, vii. 108, 4. fxd- gladden, pf. mamanda, ii. 33, 6 [ = mad rejoice], mand-a_-_n_, -to. pt. rejoicing, iv. 50, 10 [mand ffi mad rejoice]. n_nd-r_, a. gladdening, v. 11, 3 [msnd _h//arate]. mandr_-Jihva, a. (By.) pleasan_-_ongued, iv. 50, 1. m_-man, n. thought, vii. 61, 6 ; hymn, L 154, 3 ; vii. 61, 2 [man think], man-yli, m. intention, vii. 61, 1 ; wrath, vii. 86, 6 ; viii. 48, 8 ; x. 34, 8. 14 " [man think], mayo-bh_,a.ben/flc_,iL33,13 [m/_y-as gladness + bh_l = bhf_ bc/ng for = conducing to]. ' Ma_-l_t. m. pl, the storm gods, i. 85,1. 4-6. 8. 10. 12 ; ii. 38, 1. 18 ; v. 83, 6. marfit-vant, a. accompanied by t_ Maruls, ii. 38, 6. _a_oi-t_, m. orw who p/t/es, x. 34, 3 [m_l.. be gradous], m_r-ta, m. mortat, iii.59,2_Gk._op_J-s_ Bpo-r_-_ ' mortal', Lat_ mor-ta ' goddess of death '].

_2

244
mi-ta, pp. set up, iv. 51, 2 [mi set up]. mitcL.jflu, a.(Bv.)firm-kneed, iii. 59,3. Mi-trtl, m. a sun god, iii. 59, 1-9 ; vii. 61, 4 ; 63, 1.6 ; n. friendship, x. 34, 14. Mitri_-Vda-un_,du. cd. Milraand Varu.na, i. 35, 1; v'fi. 61, 213. 6. 7; 63,5. mi damage, IX. mingti [cp. Gk. p_-v_-w, Lat. mi-nu-o]. _. diminish, ii. 12, 5. pr_- infringe, vii. 63, 3 ; 103, 9 ; viii. 48, 9. mi .dh-vlLms, a. bounteous, ii. 33, 14 ; vii. 86, 7 [unfed. pf. pt., probably from mih rain]. m_kha, n. mouth, x. 90, 11-13. muc release, _rI. muflo_ : ppf. _mumuktam, vii. 71, 5. mud be merry, I. A. m6da. prtlti- e_u/t, v. 83, 9. mrg-_, m. beast, i. 154, 2 ; ii. 33, 11. wipe, II. m_rjmi, a_rn- rub br/gh_, ii. 35, 12. mrd be gracious, VI. m.rlfl, ii. 33, 11.14 ; "v'iii. 48, 9 ; x. 34, 14 ; es. m.rlflya, id., viii. 48, 8. r_..lay-_ku, a..merciful, ii. 33, 7 [mr._l.. e b 9_ac/ous]. mrl-ik_, n. mercy, vii. 86, 2 ; viii. 48, 12 "_'n_.d. e gracious], b n_. ty5, m. death, x. 129, 2 _mr die]. touch, _rI. m.rlhi. " l_ri-embrace, x. 34, 4. be heed2ces, IV. m._.ya, t_pi-forgd, vi. 54, 4. me, eric. prs. prn. D. to me, vii. 63, 3 ; 86,3.4; x. 34_13; G. ofme, ii. 35,1; vii. 86_ 2 ; viii. 29, 2 [Gk. tzo_], maujava, t_, a. _oming flora Majavant, x. 34, 1.

1. 74. 14 _ ; 85, 7 ; v. 88, 4s ; vii. 61, 2; x. 34,4; f.y_.ayks, x. 127, 4; L. y_srnin_ iv. 50, 8 ; x. 135, 1 ; du. y_u, x. 14, 11 ; pl. N. y6, i. 35, 11 ; 85, 1. 4 ; iv. 50, 2 ; x. 14, 3. 10 ; 15, 1-4.8:10. 13 _. 142 ; 90, 7. 8 ; with k6 whatever, x. 90, 10; f.y_s, vii. 49, 1. 2..3.; n. y_ni, ii. 33, 13 ; y_, i. 85, 12 ; xL 33, 18 s ; iv. 50, 9 ; vii. 86, 5 ; A. m. y_n, x. 14, 8 ; 15, 132 ; G. f. yasim, vii. 49, 8 ; L.f. y_su, iv. 51, 7 ; vii. 49, 44 ; 61, 5. yak.a-_, n. mystery, vii. 61, 5. yaj sacrifice, -I. yaja ; ipf. _yajanta, x. 90, 7. 16. yaj-at_, a. adorable, i. 35_ 3.4 ; ii. 33,10 _Av. yazata ; from ya_ worshipS. yaj-_tha, m. sacrifice, v. 11, 2 [ybj worship]. y_a-m_&na, m. sacrificer, vi. 54_ 6 [pr. pt. A. of yaj worship]. ytij-us, n. sacrificial formula, x. 90, 9 [yaj worship]. yaj-it_,, m. worship, sacr/fir_, i. 1, 1.4 ; ii. 35, 12 ; iv. 50, 6. 10 ; v. 11, 2. 4 ; vii. 61, 6. 7 ; x. 14, 5. 18 ; 15, 6. 13 ; 90, 7-9. 15.162 [Av. yasrm, Gk. _7v6-_]. yajfl_-ketu, a. (By.) whose token/s sacr/rice, iv. 51, 11. yajd_-manman, a. (By.) whose heart /s _t on sacrifice, vii. 61, 4. ylklif-iya, a. worthy of worship, holy, iii. 59, 4; adorable, x. 14, 5. 6 _aJlf_ worship]. yat array one._f, I. y_ta : pf. i. 85, 8 ; cs. y_t_ya marshal, _lir, iii. 59, 1 ; dearoff, x. 127,7. r_-tas, adv. whence, x. 129, 6. 7 [prn. root y_]. y_-ti, prn. how mang, x. 15, 13 _prn. root yti]. Y_, tel. prn. who, which, that : N. _,ua,i. !i,_,-tra, rel. adv. where, i. 154, 5. 6 ; vii. 35,6; 154,1_.3.4; 160,4; ii. 12, 163,5; viii. 29, 7 ; 48,11; x. 14,2.7; 7. 9-15 ; 33, 5. 7 ; iii. 59, 2. 7 ; iv. 50, 90, 16 [prn. root y_]. 1.7. 9; vi. 54, 1.2. 4; vii. 61, 1 ; 68, ytl.th_, tel. adx;.how, x. 185,5. 6.;flo t./_.., ii. 83, 15 ; unaccented = ira t/ke, V111. 1.3 ; vii. 1,_t_; 7 86,1 ;viii. 48,10_. ; 12 x. 14_ 5 i 34, 12 ; 129, 7 ; f. y_, iv. 50_ 29, 6 _prn. root yti]. 3 ; n. y6xl, i. 1,6 ; ii. 35, 15 ; vii. 61, yath_va_tfan, adv. a_eordd_gto (thy, his) 2; 63,2; 103,5.7; x. 15,6; 90,2_. un71, x. 15, 14; 168, 4 [vti(_, m. 12 ; 129, 1.3. ; A. 7 ; w/th wha/ewr, v. 83,4 9; 135, y_,i.l,4"; irtm ca ii. 19,, 5.7. 9 ; 35_ 1_ ; viii. 48, 1 ; x. 135, 3. 4 ; I. y6na, i. 160, 5 ; ii. 12, 4 ; iv. 51_ 4 ; f. y_.yft, iv. 51, 6 ; Ab. ygt._m_l, iL 12, 9 ; G. y/_ya, i. 154_ 2 iil. 12_ y _d,] cj. whca, i. 35,3. 4. 5. 7.9; iv. 51, 6 ; v. 83, 2-4.9 ; vii. 108, 2-5 ; X./J4, 5 ; 90, 6. 11. 15 ; in order that, vii. 71, 4 ; _ that, vii. 86, 4 ; s/nce, i. 160, 2 ; (f, viii. 48_ 9 In. of reL _].

y_U va]

245

[r_

y_d-i v_ 7c.i. whether, x. 129, 7 ; or, or e/so, dat. yuv_.bhy_m to you two, vii. 61, 7 ibid. [y_-d-i if, rel. adv. + v_ or]. __ yfl- + am]. y-_nt, pr. pt. going, vii. 61, 3 _i go_. yuva-yd, a. addressed to you, vii. 71, 7. yam extend, bee_tow,L ygtcha, iv. 51, 10 ; yhy-_m, prs. prn. p]. N. you, iv. 51, 5 ; v. 88,5;pf.A. yemiresubmitto(dat.), vii. 61,7; 63,6; 71,6; 86,8 [for iii. 59, 8 ; s ao. bestow on (dat.), ii. 35, yft.s-_m, Av. y_, y_-dem, Go. y_s]. 15 g. y6g-a, m. aequisitwn, vii. 86, 8 [YuJ _,xlhi- extend to (dat.), i. 85, 12. yoke]. guide to (lc.), root ao. in]. yamat, x. y6j-ana, n./eagUe, i. 35, 8 [yoking from 14, 14. yuj yoke]. nI. bestow, iv. 50, 10. yS-ni, m. womb, ii. 35, 10 ; abode, iv. 50, pr_- presen_ a share of (gem), x. 15, 7. 2 ; x. 34, 11 ; reeepfaele, viii. 29, 2 v'l- extend to, i. 85, 12. [holder from yu hold]. Iram-_, m. god of the dead, i. 85, 6 ; x. y6s-_, f. woman, x. 168, 2. 14, 1-5. 7-16 ; 15, 8; 135, 1.7. y6s, n. blessing, ii. 33, 18; x. 15,4. ya_-_, a. ghrr/ous, i. ], 3; iv. 51, 11; viii. 48, 5. R_m.h hasten, I. ram.ha ; cs. r_m. h_ya yahv_, f. swift c_e, ii. 88, 9 ; 35, 14. cause to speed, i. 85, 5. yK go, II. y_ti, i. 35, 8s. 10 ; vii. 49, 3 ; rake protect, I. r_ksa, i. 85, 11 ; 160, 2 ; i_;. 50, 2 ; vi. 54",5 ; viii. 48, 5 [Gk. x. 168, 1. IL-come, i. 35, 2; x. 15, 9. d_iEw 'ward off']._ t_pa iL- come hither, vii. 71, 2. r_kaa-m_.na, pr. pt. A. proteding, vii. 61, apa come hither _o_vii. 71, 4. 3"[raks . "prcte_]. p_i pr_- pro_ed around, iv. 51, 5. raks.-_, m. d_non, i. 85, 10 ; v. 88, 2. yf_tay_j-jana, a. (gov. cd.) stirring men, raks-i-t_, m. guardian, x. 14, 11 [rak.s iii. 59, 5 [y_t_,yant, pr. pt. cs. of yat protectS. array on_self+j_,na man]. raghu-pC[tvan, a. (Tp.) .]lying sw/ft/y, i. yf_tu-dh_na, m. sorcerer, i. 85, 10 [y_td, 85, 6 [raghfi swift : Gk. _Xax_-_]. m. sorcery + dh_na praet/s/ng from dh_ raghu-.sy_d, a. swift-gliding, i. 85, 6 _put, do]. ya-ma, m. course, iv. 51, 4 [y_. go]. yit-man, n. course, i. 85, 1 ; approadb x. 127, 4 [y_ go]. yu separate, IlL yuydti, ii. 83, 1.8 ; vii. 71, 1.2; s ao. d_art from (ab.), iL 33. 9; ca yav_ya sar_ from, viii. 48, 5; y&v_ya ward off, x. 127, 6_. yuk-tA, pp. yoked, vii. 68, 2 [yUJ yok2, Gk. _vgr,_-_, Lat. iu_tu% Lith. j_nkta-s], yakt_-gr_van, a. (By.) who has to work the stones, ii, 12, 6. | yuJ _o_, VII. yun6.kti : pf. yuyUj_, x. 84, 11 ; rL ao. _yugdhvam, i. 85, 4. prti,, yoke in front, i. 85, 5. yddhya.mg_na, pr. pt. A. flght/ng ; m. .fighter, ii. 12, 9 [yudh fight]. ydyudh.i_ m. u_r/or, i. 85, 8 [from red. stem of yudhflght]. yuva.tt, f. young maiden, ii. 85, 4. 11 If. of y_vau _h]. yfiv-an, a. young, ii. 88, 11 ; m. youth, ii. 85, 4 [Lat. iuve_i-s], yuv._m, prs. prn. N. youtwo, vii. 71,5; [raghfi swift + syand run]. r_j-as, n. space, air, i. 85, 4. 9 ; 154, 1 ; 160, 1.4 ; x. 15, 2 ; 129, 1 [Gk. _p_Bo_, Go. r/q/z-a]. r_n-ya, a. glorious, i. 85, 10 [ran rejoice]. r_:tna, n. gift, treasure, i. 35, 8 [rb giveJ. ratna-dl_, a. (Tp.) bestowing treasure_ i. 1, 1. r_.-tha, m. car, i. 35, 2. 4. 5 ; 85, 4.5 ; ii. 12, 7.8 ; v. 83, 3. 7 ; vii. 71, 2-4 ; viii. 48, 5 ; x. 185, 8-5 ; 168, 1 [r go]. r_th-ya, a. belonging to a car, i. 35,'6. tad dig, I. r_la : pf. r_, vii. 49, 1. radh-r_, a. r/ch, ii. 12, 6 [r_clh succeed]. randh make subject, IV. P. r_dhya : red. ao., ii. 83, 5. r_p-as, n. bodily injury, ii. 33, 3. 7. rara set at rest, IX.ram.n_ti: ipf. ii. 12, 2 ; I.A. r_ma rejoice in (le.), x. 84, 13. ray.i, m. wealth, i. 1, 8 ; 85, 12 ; iv. 50, 6. 10; 51, 10 ; viii. 48, 18 ; x. 15, 7. 11 [.probably from ri ffi reduced form of r_ g_e]. r_v-a, m. roar, iv. 50, 1.4. 5 [ru c_y]. ra_-mi, m. ray, i. 85, 7 ; cord, x. 129, 5. r_ g/re, II. r_ti; 2. ind. rMiipv., ii.

r_]

246

[v_dant

83, 12 ; III. ipv. 2. pl. raridhvam, v. 83, 6. r_.j _ule, over (gem), I. P. r_ati, i. 1, 8. ri_J-an, m. h_/ng, i. 85, 8 ; iii. 59, 4 ; iv. 50, 7. 9 ; vii. 49, 3.4 ; 86, 5 ; viii. 48, 7. 8 ; x. 14, 1.4. 7. 11.15 ; 34, 8.12 ; 168, 2 [r_j rule, Lat. regS-], r_j-_nt, pr. pt. ruling over (gen.), i. 1, 8 [r_j _de]. r_jan-yiL a. royal ; m. warrior (earliest name of the second caste), x. 90, 12. rtLtri, f. night, i. 35, 1; x. 127, 1. 8; 129, 2. riCh-as, n. gift_ blessing, ii. 12, 14 [r_dh gratify]. r_.dho-d6ya, n. be._towalof wealth, iv. 51, 3 [dSya, gdv. to be given from d_ give]. ri rdease, IX. r" .L_ti, ii. 12, 8. _nu- flow along, i. 85, 3. rio brave, VII. P. rin_kti, vii. 71, 1 [Gk. h_g_w, Lat. linquo_. 6.ti- exZend beyond : ps. ipf. _ricyata, x. 90, 5. via., f. injury, ii. 35, 6. be hurt_ IV. ri.syati, vi. 54, 3 ; a ao. inj., vi. 54, 7. 9 ; injure, viii. 48, 10. rib kiss, II. r6.dtLt,ii. 33, 13. ruk-m_, m. golden gem, vii. 63, 4 true shine], rue shine, I. r6ea ; cs. roo_ya cause to shine, viii. 29, 10. ruc-_n_, rt. ao pt ._. beaming_ iv. 51, 9 ruj burst, VI. P. ruj_ : pf. rumSja, iv. 50, 5. ruj-_at, pr. pt. shattering, x. 168, 1. Rud-r_, m. name of a god, i. 85_ i ; ii. 83_ 1-9. 11-18. 15 ; pl. = sons of Rudra, the Maruts, i. 85, 2 [rud cry, how/]. rudh obst_uct_ VII. runaddhi, runddh6, x. 34, 3. " _pa- drive away : rt. ao. arodham, x. 84, 8. rd_-ant, pr. pt. gleaming, iv. 51, 9. rub grow_ L r6hati, r6hate, _ti- grow beyond (acc.), x. 90, 2. l_- rise up in (aec.), viii. 48, 11. rhp& n.form, x. 168,4 ;beauty, i. 160,2. re.n._, m. dust, x. 168, 1 [perhaps from ri _'un = d/spcfs]. r_-tu, n. seed, v. 83, 1. 4; x. 129, 4 [r_fl_]. _to.dl_, m. imprcgnator_ x. 129, 5 [r_tan s_d + dha _/adn0].

rebh-_, m. si_er, vii. 63, 8 [ribh sing]. rev6.t, adv. bountifully, ii. 35, 4 in. of rev_mt]. re-v_t-i, f. weallhy, iv. 51, 4 if. of rev_nt]. re-v_nt, a. wealthy, viii. 48, 6 [re = rai wealth]. r6das-i, f. du. the two warld._ (= heaven and earth), i. 85, 1 ; 160, 2. 4 ; ii. 12, 1 ; vii. 64, 4 ; 86, 1.. r_li, m. wealth, vi. 54, 8 ; vii. 86, 7 ; viii. 48, 2; G. r_y_, viii. 48, 7 [bestowal from r_. give ; Lat. r$-s]. Rauhi .n, m. name of a demon, ii. 12,12 [metronymic : son of l?Zhin.i]. :Lak-s_, n. stake (at play), ii. 12, 4 [token, mark : lag attach]. lok-_, m. place_ x. 14, 9 ; wet/d, x. 90, 14 [bright space = rok-_ light; ep. Gk. _ug_-s ' white ', Lat. lux, lfic-is]. Vag-nd, m. sound, vii. 103, 2 [vac speak]. vac utter, III. P. vivakti ; ao. op._ ii. 35, 2 ; speak, ps_ ucy_te, x. 90, 11 ; 135, 7 [Lat. vet.are ' call ']. _dhi- speak for (dat.), viii. 48, 14. pr_- lrfOclaim, i. 154, I ; vii. 86, 4; declare, x. 129, 6. v_o-_', n. speech, v. 11, 5 [vao speak; Gk. g=o_]. v_cas-yi_, f. eloquence, ii. 35, 1. v_-r_, m. thunderbolt, i. 85, 9 ; viii. 29, 4 [va_ be strong ; Av. vazra ' club ']. v_jra-b_hu, a. (By.) bearing a bolt in his arm, ii. 12, 12. 18 ; 33, 3. v_Jr_-hasta, a. (Bv.) having a bolt in his hand, ii. 12, 18. . va_rofm, m. bearer of the bolt, vii. 49, 1. vat_5., m. cal_ vii. 86, 5 [yearling from *vatas, Gk. Flro_ year, Lat. v_tus in vetus-tas ' age ']. vat_-Lu, a., f. -i, a_mpani_d by calves, vii. 103, 2. vad speak, L vSxla, ii. 38, 15 ; op. ii. 35, 15 ; vii. 103, 5_ ; x. 34, 12. _mh_- invoke, v. 83, 1. _- u_ter, ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 14. prf_ utter forth, is ao., av_di_.ur, vii. 108, 1. s_m- wnverse about (ace.) w/th (inst.), vii. 86, 2. vf_l-ant, pr. pt. speaking, vii. 103_ 8. 6. 7.

i"

van]

247

[va

van wln, VIII. vsnOti _/n _Eng. win; cp. Lat. yen-in ' favour ']. I_-, ds. viv_m, seek to win, ii. 33, 6 ; v. 83, 1. van-fis, m. e_emy, iv. 50, 11 [eager, r/red : van win]. vO_o-vane, lc. itv. cd. in every wood, v. 11, 6. vand pra/se, I. A. v_date, iv. 50, 7 [nasalized form of vad]. p_ri- extol, with (inst.), ii. 33, 12. vanda-mf_na, pr. pt. A. approring, ii. 38. 12. yap strew, I. vCtpati, v_pate, hi- lay low, ii. 33, 11. val3us-yk, a. fair, i. 160, 2 [vKpus, n. beautiful aFpearance], vay-_ml, prs. prn. N. pl. we, i. 1, 7 ; ii. 12, 15; iii, 59, 3. 4 ; iv. 50, 6; 51, 11 ; vi. 54, 8. 9 ; vii. 86, 5 ; viii. 48_ 9. 18. 14 ; x. 14, 6; 127, 4 [Av. vaem, Go. wais, Eng. we]. v_y-as, n. force, ii. 33, 6; viii. 48, 1 [f_d, strength : vi enj_t]. vay-t_, L offshoot, ii. 35, 8. vaydnK-vat, a. dear, iv. 51, 1 [vaydn_,]. vayo-dha, m. bestower of strength, viii. 48, 15 [v_yMforce+dh_ bestowing], v_,r-i-man, n. expanse, -iii. 59, 3 [yr. cover], vitr-i-vas, n. wide ._pace, vii. 63, 6 ; prosper/ty, iv. 50, 9 [breadth, freedom : vr cover], varivo-vit-tara, cpv. m. best finder of relie_ best banisher of care, viii. 48, 1 [v_riv_ + rid find]. v/_r-iya.s, epv. a. wider, ii. 12, 2 [urd wi_e]. v_,v-_, m. vii. 49, 8. 4 ; 61, 1.4 ; 63, 1.6 ; 86, 2. 80".4. 6. 8 ; x. 14, 7 [Gk. o_&_ 'heaven'; vr cover, encompass]. v_r-._ga, m. colour, ii: 12, 4 [coating : yr. cover]. v_a'ta-m_na, pr. pt.._., with I_ rolling hiOter, i. 35, 2 [v_t. turn], v_'t-_a_, n. track, i. 85, 8 Ivy. turn], vOxclh-ana_ n. strengthen/ng, _i. 12, 14 [vrdh iner&ts_]. _ vftrdha-m_na, pr. pt. A. growing, i. l, 8 [vr.clh grow], vf_v.zl_&ua, pr. pt.._, int. rolling about, x. 84, 1 [vr.t turn], ve,rs._, n. rain, v. 83, 10 [vr.a rain], vare..yb_ a. rainy, v. 88, 8_. ""

val-_, m. er_osure, cave, iv. 50, 5 [yr. corer]. valg_-y/_, don. honour, iv. 50, 7. va_ d_re, II. v_gti, s. 1. v_mi, ii. 38, 13; pl. 1. u_masi, i. 154, 6. 1. vas shine, VL P. uch_.ti : pf. pl. 2. lisa, iv. 51, 4 [A_v. usaiti 'shines '].. 2. vas wear, II.h. vO.ste [cp. Gk. _'vvv/a = f_avvp_, A.S. werian, Eng. wear]. abhi-, cs. clothe, i. 160, 2. 3. vas dwell, I. P. vt_sati [AS. wesan 'be', Eng. was ; in Gk. _arv = f&arv]. pr_- go on journeys, viii. 29, 8. vas, enc. prs. prn. A. you, i. 85, 6 ; iv. 51, 10. 11 ; D. to or for you, i. 85, 6. 12 ; iv. 51, 4 ; x. 15, 4. 6 ; G. of you, ii. 33, 18 ; x. 34, 12. 14 lay. vo, Lat. v_s]. vas-ati, f. abode, _st, x. 127_ 4 [vas dwdl]. vas-ant-_, m. spring, x. 90, 6 [vas shine]. vO, -_na, pr. pt. A. clothing one_f in s (ace.), ii. 35, 9 [2. van wear]. vKs-i.stha, spy. a. best; m.'name of a seer, vii. 86, 5; pl. a family of ancient seers, x. 15, 8 [vas shine]. vO_-u, n. wea/th, vi. 54, 4 ; vii. 103, 10 ; x. 15, 7 [vas shine]. vasu-dOya, n. granting of wealth, ii. 83, 7. vOa_t_-ms, a. laden with wealth, vii. 71, nt, 3. 4. vASU-ya, a. for sa/e, x. 34, 3 [vs,sn _t, n. price, Gk. _0o-_ = f_a-vo-_ ' purchase price ', Lat. rgmu-m = yes-hum]. vO.s-yae, ace. adv.forgr_a_rwelfare, viii. 48, 9 [cpv. of v_u good]. v_Ls-y_as, cpv. a. wea2thier, viii. 48, 6 [cpv. of v_-u]. vaJ_ carry, draw, dr/re, L v_ha, vii. 68_ 2 ; s ao. v_t, x. 15, 12 [Lat. veh.ere_ :Eng. we_h]. _,nu- drive after : pf. anfahir_, x. 15_ 8. _- bri_uj, i. 1, 2 ; 85, 6 ; viL 71, 3 ; x. 14, 4. n_- br/ng : pf. ftl_thttr, vii. 71, 5. vKh-ant, pr. pt. earry/ng, i. 85, 5 ; bearing, ii. 35, 9 ; bringing, vii. 71, 2. vO.h-emt-i, pr. pt. f. bringing, ii. 35, 14. v_h-ni, m. dr/vet, i. 160, 3 [yah dr/re]. vK blow, II. P. villi [Av. vaiti, Gk. _qa_ = _-f_-_, ; of. Go. waian_ German wehen ' blow '3pr_. blowforth, v. 88, 4. v_, enc. ej. or, iv. 51,4 ; x. 15, 2 [Lat. ve].

v_e]

248

[vi_va

vl_c, f. wice, vii. 103, 1.4.5.6.8; x. 34, _-,sao. winhither, x. 15,3. 5 [vac speak; Lat. _',x = v_c-s], nis- find o_d, x. 129, 4. v_j-a, m. conflict_ i. 85, 5 ; booty, ii. 12, vid-_tha, m. divine worship, i. 85_ 1 ; i_. 15 ; vi. 54, 5 [vaj bc strong]. 12, 15 ; 33, 15 ; 35, 15 ; viii. 48, 14 v_.ja-y12, a. desirous of gain, ii. 35. I. [victh worship]. vaj-in, a. victorious, x. 84_ 4 [v_Ja]. vi-dyfit, f. lightning, ii. 35, 9 ; v. 83, 4 vgn_, m. pipe, i. 85, 10. [vi ajar + dyut shine]. v_-ta, m. wind, v. 88, 4 ; x. 168, 1. 2. 4 vid-vl_, s, unfed, pf. pt. knoun'ng, vi. 54, [vg blow ; cp. Lat. ven-tu.s, Ok. d_r'l-_]. 1 [Ok. FE_8_]. vKm, ene. prs. prn. du. A. you two, iv. vidh worship, VI. vidh_, ii. 35, 12 ; iv. 50, 10; vii. 61, 63; 63, 5; 71, 1; 50,6; vi. 54,4; viii. 48, 12.13; x. D. for you two, vii. 61, 2. 5"; vii. 71, 168, 4. 4 ; O. of you two_ i. 154_ 6 ; iv. 50, 11 ; pr_ti- pay worship to, vii. 68, 5. vii. 61, 1 ; 71, 3, 4. vidh-gnt, pr. pt. m. worshipper, ii. 35, 7. vg-m_, n. wealth, vii. 71, 2 [vg ,_ van vi-dh_a, n. task, iv. 51, 6 [dis-position: win]. vi prp. + dh_na from dhf, putJ. v_yav-yk, a. relating to the wind, aD'ial, vi-pf'oh-am, acc. inf. to ask, vii. 86, 8. x. 90, 8 _vgyd]. vip-ra, a. wise, iv. 50, 1 ; m. sage, i. 85, v&-yd, m. wind, x. 90, 18 [v_ blow]. 11 ; vii. 61, 2; x. 135, 4 [inspired : vi_r-ya, gdv. desirable, i. 35, 8 [vr choose], rip tremble with emotion]. vitva_-at, pr. pt. int. lowing, i'v. 50, 5 vi-bhgt-_, pr. pt. f. shiningforO b iv. 51, [v/Lli/owl. 1. 10. 11 _'bhg shine]. v_-v-rdh-an_, pr. pt. ft, having grown_ x. vi-btE[daka, m. a nut used as a die for 1_, 8 [vrdh grow], gambling, vii. 86, 6 ; x. 34,1 [probably v_ii, f. _ze_ viii. 29, 3. from vi-bhid split asunder, but the vgsar.[, a. verna/, viii. 48, 7 [*vasar meaning here applied is obscure]. spring ; Gk. _ap, Lith. vasard], vi-bhr_ja-mKna, pr. pt. ft. shining forth, vi_s-tu, n. abode, i. 154, 6 [vas dwo//: vii. 63, 3 [bhr_j shine; Av. brdzait/ Gk. fdaw]. ' beams '. Gk. _kiT_ ' flame ']. v'i, m. bird, i. 85, 7 ; viii. 29_ 8 ; pl. N. vi-madhya, m. middle, iv. 51_ 3. v_yas, x. 127, 4 [Av. vi-, Lat. avi-s], vi-rapd_, m. abundance, iv. 50, 3 [vi vi.kr_man, a, n. wide stride, i. 154, 2 ; x. + x'_pd befull]. 15, 3. Vi-rl[J, m. name of a divine being vt-e_r_amg.mt, pf. pt. ft. havi_g strode identified with Puru.sa, x. 90, 5_ [far. out_ i. 154 t 1 [kram stride], ruJing]. , vf-caxsant, a. active, i. 35, 9. vir_-.s_, a. overcoming men, i. 35, .6 viJ, pl" stak at play, ii. 12, 5. [ = vira-a_h for.vira-s/_h]. vi.tata, pp. extended, x. 129, 5 [tan vi-rfk-mant, m. shining weapon, i. 85_ 8 stretch]. [rue shine]. vi-tar_m, adv. far away, ii. 33. 2 [6pv. vi-rf_pa, a. having d_fferen_ colours, vii. of prp. vf away]. 108, 6 [rfip_, n. farm]. vit-tl_, n. property, x. 84, 13 [pp. of vial Vivga-vant, m. name of a divine being, find, acquire: acquisition], v. 11_ 3; x. 14, 5 [vi+vaa shine 1. vial know, II. P. v6t_i ; pr. sb. know of afar]. (gem), ii. 35, 2 ; ipv. viddhi, viiL 48, rift, f. _ement, x. 15, 2 ; abode, vii. 61_ 8 ; pf. v6da, viii. 29, 6 ; s. 2. v6t-tha 8 ; se_er, i. 35, 5 ; subject, iv. 50, 8. x. 15, 18 ; 8. v6da, x. 129, 6L 7a ; pl. viii enter, VL vilfg. I. vidm_t, x. 15, 18 [Gk. o_$a, _p_v ; 1[- entzr, iv. 50, 10 ;.viiL 48, 12. 15. AS. ic ux_t, u_ w/ton ; Eng. 1 wet ; Lat. hi- come home, go to r_, _' 34, 14 ; 168, ,n:d-_e 'see ']. 8; s ao., avlk?mshi, x. 1_7, 4; _s. prg_- know_ x. 15, 18. ved_ya cause to rest, 1. 85_ 2. 2. vial .tbu_ VI. rindS, vi. 54, 4 ; x. 34, vi_-p_ti, m. mas/er of the hotu_ x. 185, 1. 8_ ; pf. viveda, x. l&, 2 ; a ao., v. 88, vi_a, prn. a. a//, i. 85, 8. 5 ; 85, 8. 8; i0 ; viii. 48, 3. 154, 2. 4 ; ii. 12,.4. 7. 9 ; _3, 8. 10 ; 85, 6,nu-flnd ou2, iL 12, 11 ; v. 11_ 6. 2. 15; iii. 59, 8 ; iv.50, 7 ; v. 83_ 2.4.

vi_v_tas]

249

IvY. sny_vant
1. vr cover, V. vrn6ti, v-mute _ --_ . . . a-, mr. Hff. a-varlval' contain, x. 129, 1. vi- unclose, rt. ao. arran, iv. 511 2. 2. yr. clwose, IX.._. yr..nite, it. 33, 13 ; v. 11, 4; x. 127, 8. v_.'k-a, m. we/f, x. ]27, 6 [Gk. hJgo-% Lat. lupu.s, Lith. vilka-s, Eng. we{f]. vr.k-_[, f. sho-wobe, x. 127, 6. vrkt_-barhis, a. (By.) whose sacrificial grass _ spread, iii. 59, 9 _vr.kt_t,pp. of ' _ + barhis, q. v.]. v_.k-s_, m. tree, v. 83, 2 ; x. 127, 4 ; 135, 1 [v.rk simpler form of arra_o cut, fell]. _ twist, VII. vrn_kti, v_kt_. p_Lri- po_s by, i_.'33, 14. v_. -/ma, n. circle ( = family, sons), vii. 61, 4 [enclosure = vrj]. .v_.an_, pr. pt. A. e_wostng, v. 11, 4 [yr. choose]. vr.t turn, I. A. v_rtate ro/_, x. 34_ 9; es. vart_ya t_rn, i. 85, 9. _-, cs. whirl hiOwr, vii. 71, 3. nis-, cs. re//out, x. 135, 5. pr_, cs. set rolling, x. 185, 4. 6._u pr- roll forth after,, x. 135, 4. sdma- be evolved, x. 90, 14. _dhi s_,m- com_ upon, x. 129, 4. Vr-tr_, m. name of a demon, i. 85, 9 ; "n. foe _pl.), viii. 29, 4 [ensompasser: vr c_erj. vr-tv_, gd., having covered, x. 90, 1. vrdh grow, I. v(krdha, i. 35, 7 ; it. 35, "11 ; cause toprosper, iv. 50, 11 ; increase, pf. va .v_lht_r, x. 14, 3 ; cs. vardh_ya strengthen, v. 11, 3. 5. vr.dh-_, dat. inf. to increase, i. 85, 1. _ rain, I. v_rs.a rain : is. ao. _vargis, v. 83, 10. abhI- rain upon, ao. vii. 103, 3. v_san-vaeu, a. (By.) of mighty wealth, "iv.'50, 10 Ivan.an b_dl]. v_s-an, m. bu//, i. 85, 7. 12 ; 154, 3. 6 ; "it. 38, 18 ; 85, 18 ; iv. 50, 6 ; v. 83, 6 (with (ulva = stallion) ; vii. 61, 5 ; .71,6; stab/on, vii. 71, 3 lay. ar_n_ Gk. _p_]. vrss_bh/_, m. buU, i. 160, 3 ; ii. 12, 12 ; "33, 4. 6-8. 15 ; v. 83, 1 ; vii. 49, 1. v_sa-l_, m. beggar, x. 34, 11 [little man]. v_a-vr_ta, a. (Bv.) having mighty hosts, "{. 85, 4 Ivy..san b_, sto2/ion]. v_s-ti, f. rain, v. 83, 6 [v'_.. rain]. _-vaat, a. raiqldy, _. 88, 2 _..""._ manly strengt_b from _ buff].

9 ; vii. 61, 1.5. 7 ; 63, 1.6 ; x. 15, 6; 90, 3 ; 127, 1 ; 168, 2. vi_v_-tas, adv on et'ery_/dc, i. 1, 4 ; viii. 48, 15 ; x. 90, 1 ; in all directions, x. 135, 3_ vi_va-d_nim, adv. edways, iv. 50, 8. vi_v_-deva, a. [Bv.] belo_ging to all the gods, iv. 50, 6. vi_v6,-psnya, a. laden with allfood, vii. 71, 4 [psnya from pa_ eat]. vi_v_r_pa, a. (By.) omn/form, i. 35, 4 ; it. 33, 10 ; v. 83, 5. vi_v_-_anbhfa, a. beneficial to all, i. 160, 1. 4 [_a prosperity + bhfl being for, conducting to]. vi_v_-ha, adv. always, it. 12, 15 ; viii. 43, 14 ; -hfL, /d., i. 160, 5 ; for e_', it. 35, 14. . vi_viLh_, adv. always, i. 160, 3 [vidv_ all days], vi_ve devils, m. pl. the alPgods, vii. 49, 4 ; viii. 48, 1. vi.s work, III. vivest.i : pf. viv_.sa, it. 35, 13. vi-s.ita, pp. unfastened, v. 83, 7. 8 [vi + si bind]. visu-na, a. varied inform, viii. 29, 1. vi.sfmi, a. f. turned _n various directions, it. 33, 2 [f. of visv-aflo]. vt-sthl_ host(?), x. 168, 2. Yis-nu, m. a solm: deity, i. 85, 7 ; 154, i. 2. 3. 5 ; x. 15, 3 [vi.s be active], visv-a_ic, a. turned in all directions, x. "90, 4. vi-sarg_f, m. re/ease, vii. 103, 9 [vi + s.rj /etgo]. vi-st_rJana, n. creation, x. 129, 6 [vi + _ /st go]. vi-m:_i., f. crea2/_, x. 129_ 6. 7 [vI + _ /e$go]. vi-m-_sas, ab. inf. from break/ng, viii. 48, 5 [_i + s_faU]. vi-h_yas, a. mighty, viii. 48, 11. vi 9u/de, II. v6ti, i. 35_ 9. dpa- come to (ace.), v. 11, 4. _-rlt, m. hero, i. 35, 1; ii. 33, 1; 35_4 _i v. v_ra, Lat. v/r, 0I. fer, Go. wait, th. _a, ' man ']. vir_rat-tama, spy. a. most abeundi_tg in heroes, i. 1, 3. _vant, a. possessed ofhero_s, iv. 50, 6. vi_dh, f. p/ant, it. 35, 8 [vi asund_' + rudh grow], vi_.y_, n. heroic dud, i. 154, 1. 2; heroism, iv. 50, 7 [vix_ hero].

v6d_n_]

250

[_umbh _ar_d, f. autumn, ii. 12, 11 ; vii. 61, 2 ; x. 90, 6. _(tr-u, f. arrow, ii. 12, 10 ; vii 71, 1 [Go; hairu-s]. _rdh-ant, pr. pt. arrogant, ii. 12, 10 [_rdh be defiant]. tldar.nlan, n. shelter, i. 85, 12 ; v. 83, 5 ; x. 129, 1 [Lith. szdtma-s _helmet', OG. helm 'helmet ']. fi_v-as, n. power, v. 11, 5 [_iftswell]. fia_am-ftnCt, pf. pt. A. having prepared (the sacrifice), i. 85, 12; ii. 12, 14; strenuous, iv. 51, 7_[tfam toil]. _aday-_n_, pf. pt. A. lying, vii. 103, 1 [_i lle]. d_-vant, a. ever repeating itself, many, ii. 12, 10 ; -vat, adv. for ever, i. 85, 5 [for s_+_ivant, orig. pt. of dfx swell, Gk. _[tkt_, m. teacher, vii. 103, 5 [_,k be able]. _.s order, II. _.sti, I_ste. _nu- instruct., vi. 54, 1. abhi- guide to (acc.), vi. 54, 2. _ik.vanflame(?), ii. 35, 4. _ik.s be helpful, pay obeisance, I. gilts a, iii. 59, 2 [ds. of dak be able]. _Ik.sa-ma.na (pr. pt.._.), m. /earner, vii. 103, 5. _iiti-p_d, a. (By.) white-footed, i. 35, 5. _iithir(t, a. loose ; n. freedom, vii. 71, 5 [Gk. _aOapg-_ ' free, pure ']. _iv_, a. k/nd, x. 34, 2. _i_u, m. child, ii. 33, 13 [_f_ swell, ep. Gk. _v$_]. _i_iriy-_n._t, pf. pt.._, abiding, v. 11, 6 [_ri resort]. di-tA, a. c_/d, x. 34, 9 [old pp. of Sy_ coagulate]. _irs.-6_a, n. head, x. 90, 14 [_ir!a)s head +an; cp. Gk. x6pa-_7 _head 1. duk.r_, a. shining, i. 160, 3 ; bright, ii. 38, 9 ; iv. 51, 9 ; clear, ii. 35, 4 [duo be bright, Av. sux-ra ' flaming ']. _fto*t, a. bright, i. 160, 1 ; bright, ii. 35, 8"; iv. 51, 2. 9 ; v. 11, 1. 8 ; viii. 29, 5; clear, vii. 49, 2. 8 ; pure_ ii. 38, 18 ; 35, 3 _ [duo sh/_]. ,tfbh, f. brilliance;= shining path (cog. ace.), iv. 51_ 6. Subh-_tya, A. adorn onesdf_ i. 85, 8. _ubh-r_, a. bright_ i. 35_ 8; 85_ 8 ; iv. 51, 6 [dubh ado__]. lumbh, ador_ I. A. Sdmbhate. prtt- adorn oneseif_ L 85, 1.

v6d-ana, n. possession, x. 34, 4 [rid find, acquire], vedh-6.s, m. disposer, iii. 59, 4 [vidh worship, be gracious], yen long, I. P. v_nati. _nu- seek thefriendship of, x. 135, 1. volhf, n. vehicle, vii. 71, 4 [yah draw +tr; Av. va_tar 'draught animal' Lai. vector]. v_ti, pel., ii. 38, 9. 10 [180]. Vairfaptl, m. son of Virapa, x 14, 5. Vaiva_vat_m. son of Vivasvant, x. 14,1. v(ddya, m. man of the third caste, x. 90, 12 [belonging to the settlement = vil]. vahiv_aar_, a_ belonging to all 7n_, epithet of Agni, vii. 49, 4 [vidv_.nara]. vy-b-kt_, pp. distingidshed by (inst.), x. 14, 9 ; palpable, x. 127, 7 [vi+aflj vyae extend, III. P. vivyakti. a_a- re//up, ipf. _vivyak, vii. 63, 1. vyath waver, I. vy_.tha, _vi. 54, 3. vy_tha-mana, pr. pt. A. quak/ng, ii. 12, 2. v_.t.i, f. daybreak, vii. 71, 3 [vi+va_ s_ine]. vy-gJman, n. heave_, iv. 50, 4 ; x. 14, 8 ; 129, 1. 7 [v-i + oman of doubtful etymology]. vl'aj.6., m. pen, fold, iv. 51, 2 [vrJ. ondose]. v'ra.t_, n. will, ordinance, iii. 59, 2. 3 ; v. 88, 5 ; viii. 48, 9 ; seruice, vi. 54, 9 [v T choose]. vrata-_rin, a. practising a vow, vii. 108, 1 [o_,r-fn, from car go, practise]. vr_ts, m. troop, host, x. 84, 8. 12. (_r_ praise, I. _i_aseb vii. 61, 4 [Lat. senseo]. $&_ms. -a_at, pr. pt. praising, ii. 12, 14 ; iv. 51, 7. _tA, n. hundred, ii. 33, 2 ; vii. 108, 10 [Gk. bt_'_'d.v, Lat. centum, Go. hund], _6.m..t_m_, spv. a. most beneficent, ii. 83, 2. 13; x. 15, 4 [_n, n. healing]. . &tph_-vant, a. having h_fs, v. 33, 5. _b_da, a. br/nd/ed, x. 14, 10. ,(tin, n. hea/ing, ii. 8_, 13; comfort, v. 11, 5 ; viii. 48_ 4 ; hea/th, x. 15, 4 ; . prosp_'ty, viii. 86, 8_. Sftmbaa-a, m. name of a demon, ii. 12, 11. /_y-_na, pr. pt. -_. lying, ii. 12, 11 ; vii. 108, 2_i lis].

-_

_t_.ka]

9.51

[sadyt_m 13 s ; 35, 1. 4.5 8. 10 ; iii. 59, 2. 8 ; iv. 50, 52. 7.8 ; 51, 4 ; v. 11, 2. 6 ; 83, 5 ; vii. 61, 1.2 ; 86, 6 ; x 14, 14 ; 34, 11 ; 90, 1.5 ; 129, 7 ; as such = thus, ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 9 [A_. h0, Gk. _, Go. sa]. saa]a-ygnt, pr. pt. going together, ii. 12, 8 [s_m +i go]. ssap. -ra_9._ , pf. pt. _,. sharing gifls_ x. 15, 8 [s_m+r_gire]. sam.-vatsar_, m. gear, vii. 103, 1. 7. 9. sa_a-vid-_a_., pr. pt. A. uniti_3, will, (inst.), viii. 48, 13 ; x. 14, 4 [vidfind]. sa .m-v_', a. conquering, ii 12, 3. s_kh-i, m. friend, ii. 35, 12 ; vii. 86, 4 ; viii. 48, 4g. 10 ; x. 34, 2. 5 ; 168, 3. sakh-y_ n.friendship, viii. 48, 2. sam. -g_mana, m. assemb/er, x. 14, 1. sac accompany, I. A. s_eate, i. 1, 9 ; vii. 61, 5;associatewith, viii. 48, 10; reach. x. 90, 16 [Gk. _ra,, Lat. sequitur, Lith. sekh]. s_c-_, adv. prp. with (lc.), iv. 50, 11 [sac accompany]. s_Jan-ya, a. belonging to his own peaple, iv. 50, 9 [sa-jalxa, kin._nan]. sa-j6.eaa, a. acting in harmony with (inst.), viii. 48, ] 5 [j6saa, n. pleasure]. sat, n. the ez/s_, x. 129, 1 [pr. pt. of as be]. s_t-pati, m true(?) lord, ii. 33, 12. sat-y,a, true, i. 1, 5.6; ii. 12, 15; x. 15, 9. 10 [sat, n truth +ya]. saty_-dharman, a. (By.)wlwse ordinances are true, x. 34, 8. satyrs.ft,, n. Dv. cd. t_t0_ andfalsehood_ vii. 49, 3 [u, ty_ + t_nrta]. sad sit down, I. P. s_dati, i. 85, 7 ; s/t down on(ace.), a so. sadata, x. 15, 11 [Lat. sido]. _- seat onesdf on (aec.), i. 85, 6 ; occupy: pf. sasada, viii 29, 2. ni- s/t down, pf. (ni)?edur, iv. 50, 3; inj. sidst, v. 11, 2; settle: pf. s. 2. s_s_ttha, viii. 48, 9. s_l-as, n. seat, iv. 51, 8; viii. 29, 9 ; abode, i. 85, 2 6.7 [Ok. _os]. s(_las-sadas, ace. itv. ed. on each seat, x. 15, 11. s_-d_,, adv. always, vii. 61, 7; 63,6 ; 71_ 6 ; 86, 8. sa.d_._, a., f. -i, alike, iv. 51, 6 [having a similar appearance]. sa-dy_s, adv. in one da_, iv. 51, 5 ; at once, iv. 51, 7.

_t_.-ka, a dry, vfi. 103, 2 [for sus-ka, Av. hlt_-ka], dt_..-ma, m. vehemence, ii. 12, 1. 13 ; irapu/se, iv. 50, 7 ; force, vii. 61, 4 [dvaa blow, snort], _u-r_, m. hero, i. 85, 8 [Av. sf_ra 'strong', Gk (L-h'vpo-_' in-valid ']. _fadr_ m. man of the serrile caste, x. 90, 12. ifuluj-(ma, pf. pt. A. trembling(?), x. 84, 6. _fas.-_ a.inspiring, i. 154, 8 [_vas breathe], _.n.v-_nt, pr. pt. hearing, vi 54, 8 [_fru hear], _r.dh.yl[, f. arrogance, ii. 12, 10 [_rdh be arrogant], _._ crush, IX. _n_ti. s_m- be crushed : ps. so. _firi, vi. 54, 7. _out d_j0, I. _odta, iv. 50, 3. (q_-v_ a. dusky, i. 35, 5 [OSI. s/-rt_ 'grey']. _yen_, m. eag/e, vii 63, 5 ; m hawk, x. 127, 5. _r_ heart only with dh_ -_ put faith in, believe i_ (dat.), ii. 12, 5 [Lat. cord-, (_k. tcap_-i_ ' heart r_. _v_v-a.s, n. fame, i. 160, 5 ; iii. 59, 7 [[tru hear ; Gk. xhlfos ' fame ', OSI. slovo 'word']. _ravas-y_, a. fame-seeking, i. 85, 8. /rzioti_, pp. reaching to (le.), v. 11, 3 ?tr_,f. glory, i. 85,2;iv. 33,3;x. 127,1. _ru, V. _irndti, hear, ii. 83, 4 ; x. 15, 5 ; pl. 3. _a'_avire =_ps., x. 168, 4. _ru-t_i, pp'. heard; famous, ii. 33, 11 [_ru hear, Gk. _kv-v6-_ ' famous ', Lat. in-du-tu-s ' famous ']. /n_-._.h_, spy. a. best, ii. 33, 8. fw_.tra, n. ear, x. 90, 14 [_ru hear], tir_u_.ti, f. obedient mare, viii, 48, 2 [art_. hear, extension of &-u]. lfrva-ghn-in, m. gambler, ii. 12, 4. _vS,u, m. do_, x. 14, 10. 11 [Av. span, Gk. x_]. _vs,._r_, f. mother-in.law, x. 34, 3 [OSl. _eh_y, _oek_ve]. _v_ty-_,_a, s. whitish, ii. 38, 8 [_rviti (akin to _vet_, Go:" hwsits, Eng. white) + aflo]. S/us, nm. s/x, x. 14, 16 [Av. _$v_, Gk. [(i, Lat. sex, 0I. _, Go. salhe_ Eng. six]. S_, dem. prn. N, s. m. that, he, i. 1, 2. 4. 9 ; 154,5 ; 160, 8 ; ii. 12,1-1t ; ii. 88,

| " ;f

_U_am_da]

252

[s_aana

sad.ha-mlLda, m. joint fiast, x. 14. 10 [co-revelry ; sadh_ = sah_ together], sadh/_-stha, n. gathering place, i. 154, 1.3. san gain, VIII. P. san6ti, vi. 54, 5. san_ya, a. o/d, iv. 51, 4 [from s_Lua ; Gk. _vo-_, OI. sen, Lith. sennas ' old '1. s_t, pr. pt. being, x. 34, 9 [as be ; Lat. (prae)-se_t-]. sa .mod._a, f. s/g/d, ii. 38, 1. saptA, nm. seven, i. 35, 8 ; ii. 12, 3. 12 ; x. 90, 15 _ [Gk. _rd, Lat. septem, Eng. seven], sapt_-ra/i_ai, a. (By.) seven-.reined, ii. 12, 12 ; seven.rayed, iv. 50, 4. sapt_sya, a. (By.) seven-mouthed, iv. 50, 4; 51, 4 [sapt_+_k, n. mouth]. s_p-ti, m. racer, i. 85, 1.6. sa-pr_thas, a. (By.) renowned, iii. 59, 7 [accompanied by prtithas, n.fame], aa-b/l_lha, a. zea/ous, vii. 61, 6" [b_dh_, m. stress]. nabhl_, f. assembly l_d1, x. 34, 6 lOG. sippa ' kinship ', AS. s/b]. a___m_a, level, v. 88, 7 [Av.hama 'equal', Gk. _pJ-_, Eng. same, ep. Lat. s/mi-li-s]. sam-_d, f. ball/e, ii. 12, 8. s(un*ana, n. festival, x. 168, 2 [coming sa n_u_?a dr. in th_ same way, iv. 51, 82 " [inst., with shift of accent, from s#maana bsing togaher], s_tman_, a., f. i, same, ii. 12, 8 ; iv. 51, 9 ; vii. 86, 8 ; uniform, vii. 63, 2 ; cornmon, li. 85, 8 ; vii. 68, 8 ; 108, 6. sam_n_-tss, adv. from the sam_ place, iv. 51, 8. ssm-idh, f. fa4got _ x. 90, 15 [sam + idh k/ndte], samudr_Jyes._a, a. (By.) ha_/ng the ocean as their chief, vii. 49, 1 [sam. udrli, m. co/lea/on of wc/_s + jye-, spy. clde/], samudrgrtha, a.(Bv.)havingtheocsanas thdr goa/, vii. 49, 2 [arths, m. goal], sam-._dh, f. unison, vii. 103, 5 [s_,m + .rah _,i_]. s_m. -prk-t_, pp. mi._d with (inst.), x. 34, 7 [px, o miz_. sk.m-.p_u, ab. inf. from mingling wilh_ iL 85, 6 [_Tc m/_]. sam-bhrta, pp. oo_/_ted, x. 90, 8 [bl_. bear_.." sam-riM, m. sovere/_n k/nO', viii. 29, 9.

sa-ydj, a. united with (inst.), x. 168, 2. sa-r_tham, adv. (cog. ace.) on the same car, with (inst.), v. 11, 2 ; x. 15, 10 ; 168, 2. s_r-as, n. lake, vii. 103, 7 [_ run_. saras-_, f. lake, vii. 103, 2. s_,rg-a, m. herd, iv. 51, 8 [_j/et loose]. s_rt-ave, dat. inf. toflow, ii. 12, 12 [s.r _ow]. _p creep, I. P. s_rpati. v'i. slink off, x. 14, 9. sarpir-_.suti, a. (By.) having melted butter as their draught', viii. 29, 9 [savpis (from s rp run = melt) + _.-sutI brew from su press]. s_rva, a. a//, vii. 103, 5 ; x. 14, 16 ; 90, 2; 129, 8 [Gk. 6ho-_--g_.-fo-_, Lat. sa/on-s ' whole '1. s_'va-vira, a. consisting entirely of sons, iv. 50, 10 ; x. 15, 11. sarva-htft, a. (Tp.) comt_le.telyoffering, x. 90, 8. 9 [hu-t : hu saer/ficc + determinative t]. sal-il_, n. water, x. 129, 3 ; sea, vii. 49, 1 [sal= srflow]. Sav-i-t._, m" a solar god, i. 85, 1-6. 810 ; vii. 63, 8 ; x. 84, 8. 13 [Stimulator from sf_ stimulate]. sea sleep, II. P. s_sti, iv. 51, 3. sss-_ut, pr. pt. sleeping, iv. 51, [Gk. _X_, sah overcome, I. s_ha, x. 34, 9 5. so. _a(_)X-o_]. s/th-as, n. m/ght_ iv. 50, 1.; v. 11, 6_[sah overcome]. sa-h/u_a, nm. a thousand, x. 15, 10 [Gk. X/_,_, Lesbian X_,o_ from X_o]. sshg_-s-pf_d, a. (By.) 6_sand-footed, x. 90, 1 [padfooi]. ssh_ra_bh_..t i, a. (By.) thousand-edged, i. 85, 9 [bh.r.9ti from bh_.. = _ stick up]. sah_sra_gu_.an, a. thousand-headed, x. 34, 14. sshssrs-s&vl_, m. thonsandfold Soma-,press. ing, vii. 108, 10 [nftv/t, m. press/n_ from su press]. s_bur_ks._, a. (By.) thonsand-ey_d, x. 90, I [a_.._ _ = _t]. a_-hf_ti, f. joint praY, ii. 88, 4 _hf_ti invocation from hft ca//]. sli b/nd, YI. sy_ti. vi- discharge, i. 85, 5. s/i, dem. prn. N. a f. that, iv. 50, 11 ; vii. 86, 6 ; as such .= so, x. 127, 4. " el[d-anna n. seat, x. 185, 7 lead s/t].

e_ra_.a]

253

[suvit_

s_dbE_'_, a.bdm_gi_vj jointly, com?n_n, vii. 63, 1 [sa-_dh_rana having the same support]. " a_clh-_, a.good, x.14,i0. s_dhu-y_., adv.straightt_y, II,4. v. S_d.h-y_, m.pl. a group'of divine_beings, x. 90, 7. 16. s_n-as-i, a. bringing gain, iii. 59, 6 [san gain], san-u, n. m. back, ii. 35, 12. sA-man, n. chant, viii. 29, 10 ; x. 90, 9 ; 135, 4. siLya-k_, n. arrow, ii. 33, 10 [suilabl6for hurling : si hurl], sbramey_, m. son of Saramd, x. 14, 10. sk_an_na_an_, n. (Dv.) eating and nonsating things, x. 90, 4 [sa-a_ana + ana_iansi. aim.ha, m. lion, v. 83, 8. sic pour, VI. ai2te(t, i. 85, 11 lOG. sO-u ' drip ', Lettic s/k-u ' fall' of water], hi-pore'down, v. 83,8. sidh repel, L P. sgdhatL _ipa- chase away, i. 35, 10. sindh-u, m. viver, i. 35, 8 ; ii- 12, 3.12 ; Indus, v. 11, 5 [Av. hind-u-s], sisvid-_n_ pf. pt. A. sweating, vii. 103, 8 [svidperspire : Eng. s,xeat], sire, enc. prn. pcl. him &c., i. 160, 2. su press, V. sun6ti, sunut_, V. 14, 13 [Av. hu]. st%, adv. _ ii. 35, 2; v. 83, 7 ; vii. 86, 8 lAY. hu-, OL su-]. m%-k_,a, pp. wall-made, i. 35, 11 ; 85, 9 ; uu_/prepared_ x. 15, 13; 34, 11. su-kr_tu, a. (By.) veryw/se, v. 11, 2; vii. 61, 2 [kr_tu wisdom], sukrath-y_, f. insight, i. 160, 4. su-ks_tr(% s. (By.) wielding fair sway, iii. _f9, 4. su-k@iti, f. sa/e dwelling, ii. 35, 15. su.g_., a. easy to traverse, i. 35, 11 ; vii. 68, 6. su-J_man, a. (Bv.) producing fair crest/one, i. 160, 1. su-t_, pp. _ressed, viii. 48, 7 ; x. 15, 3. s_i-ta_, a, pp. walL fashioned, ii. 35, 2 [take fashion], sutA-soma, (By.) m. Soma-presser, ii. 12, 6. su-t(_ra, a. easy to lease, x. 127, 6. su-d_mss, s, a. (By.) wondrous, i. 85, 1 [df_qmu wonder]. " _a.a_-a, a. (By.) most skilful, v. 11, 1.

su-d_.nu,a. bountiful, 85, 10 ; vii. i. 61, 3. su-ddgha, a. (By.) yielding good )))ilk, ii. 85,7 [d6gha mi/king dugh = duh]. : s_t-dhita, pp. _ell-_tol_ish_l, iv.50, 8 [dhita, pp. of dhK put]. su-dh_.s-tama, spy. a. very proud, i. 160, 2. su-nithfi, a. (By.) giving good guidance, i. 35, 7. 10. sunv-_nt, pr. pt. pressing Soma, ii. 12, 14. 15 ; vi. 54, 6 [su press]. su-p_th_, n.fair path, vii. 63, 6. su-par_, a. (By.) having b_autiful wings ; m. bird, i. 85, 7. su-pal_., a. fair-leaved, x. 135, 1. su-p(_as, a. (By.) well-adorned, ii. 35, 1 [p6_as, n. ornamtmt]. su-praket_, a. conspicuous, iv.50, 2 [praket(_, m. token]. su-pra_ a. (By.) having flood offspring, iv. 50, 6 [praj&]. su-pr_tika, a. (By.) /ore/y, vii. 61, 1 [having a fair couldenanoe : pr_tika, n.J. su-pr_gfi-ti, a. (By.) giving good guidance, x. 15, 11. su-prap-aa_, a. (By.) giving good drink ; n. good dr/nk/ng_/ace_ v. 83, 8. su-bh_ga, a. having a flood share, opu/ent ; *" denied, vii. 63, 1. su-bhti, a. excellent, iL 3,5, 7 [sd we//+ bhu being]. sd-bh_, s, pp. well clwrished, iv. 50, 7. s,i-makha, vs. great warrior, i. 85, 4. su-msti, f. good-wil_, iii. 59, 3. 4; iv. 50,11; viii. 48,12;x. 14,6. su-m/_nas, a. (By.) r_eerfu/, vii. 86, 2 [Av. hu-manah- ' w_ell-disposed ' ; cp. second part of _-pcm_]. sv-m;..%ika, a. (By.) very gracious, i. 35, 10 [m_..lik, n. mercy]. su-medh_s, a. (By.) having a good understanding, wise, viii. 48, I. su-mn_, n. good-wi//_ ii. 33, 1. 6. sumn_-y_ a_ ki_w_ly, vii 71, 3. su-rsbhi, a. fragrant, x. 15, 12. sdrb, f. liquor, vii. 86, 6 [/kv. hura]. su-r6taa, a. (By.) abounding in seed, i. 160, 3. su-v_v_cas, a. (Bv.)fu_ of rigour, x. 14, 8. su-v&e, a. (By.) eb_/uent, viL 103, 5. suv-it(% n. welfare, v. 11, 1 [su we)A+ it& pp. of i go: opposite of durit_].

!
suvid_tra] 254 [sth_ soma-pith_, m. Soma draught, x. 15, 8 [pith_ from p_ dr/nk]. sore-in, a. soma-pressing, vii. 103, 8. som-y_, a. Soma-loving, x. 14, 6; 15, 1. 5. 8. saumanas-_, n. good graces, iii. 59, 4 ; x. 14, 6 [su-m_nas]. skand leap, I. P. sk(mdati, int. inj. k_nis.kan, vii. 103, 4. skabh_ya, den. Fro'p, establish, i. 154, 1 [from skabh, IX. skabhn_ti]. sk_mbh-ana, n. prop, support, i. 160, 4. stan thunder, II. P. ; cs. stan_yati, id., v. 83, 7. 8 [Gk. a_'ivoJ lament'l. stan-_tha, m. lhunder, v. 83, 3. stan_yant, pr. pt. thundering, v. 83, 2 ; x. 168, 1. stanayi-tn_tj m. thunder, v. 83, 6. stabh or stambh prop, supt_rt, IX. stabhn_ti, ii. 12, 2. vi- prop asunder, pf. tastambha, iv. 50, 1 ; vii. 86, 1. st_,v-_aa, pr. pt. A. = ps. bcin9 praised_ ii. 33, 11 [stupraise]. sthi-r_, a. firm, ii. 33, 9. 14 [sth/L stand]. stu praise, II. stauti, ii. 33, 11 ; v. 83, 1. pr_- praise aloud, i. 154, 2. stu-t6., pp. praised, ii. 33, 12. stuv-_nt, pr. pt. praising, iv. 51, 7 ; vi. 54, 6. ste-n_, m. thief, x. 127, 6 [st_ be steaW_y]. sto-t._, m. praiser, vi. 54, 9 ; vii. 86, 4 [staz praise]. stS-ma, m. song o.(pr_ise, ii. 33, 5 ; vii. 86, 8 ; x. 127, 8 [stu praise]. sb6ms-tas.ta, a. (Tp.) fashioned into (= being the subject of) praise; x. 15, 9. stY, f. woman, x. 34, 11 lAY. _tri]. sth a stand, I. tis.tha; pf. tasthur, i. 35, 5 ; ft. ao. s. 3. _ath_t, i. 35, 10 ; iv. 51, 1 ; pl. 3. _l_thttr, iv. 51, 2 lay. hi_taiti, Gk. _ar_u, Lat. sisto]. _ti- extend beyond, x. 90, 1. _aiascend, x. 135, 8 ; stand upon, i. 85_ 6. _pa_ start off, viii. 48, 1I. abhi- overcome, iv. 50, 7. _,. mount, i. 35, 4 ; mount to (acc.), i. 85, 7 ; occupy, ii. 35, 9. _d- ar/se, v. 11, 8. t_pa- alrproach, rt. ao. Mthit_, x; 127, 7. p_,ri- surround, pf. taathur, iL I_5_3. su-vid_tra, a. bountiful, x. 14, 10 ; 15, 3. 9. su-v_ra, a. (By.)having good champions = strong sons, io 85, 12 ; ii. 12, 15; 33, 15 ; 35, 15 ; viii. 48, 14. su-vzrya, n. host of good champions, iv. 51, 10. su-v-rkti, f. song of praise, ii. 35, 15 ; vii. 71_ 6 [s_t+rk-ti" from arc praise, cp..rc], suovr_j. ,na, a. (By.) having .fair abodes, x. _ 15, 2. su-_ipra, a. (By.)fair-lipped, ii. 12, 6 ; 83, 5. su-_6va, a. most propitious., iii. 59, 4. 5 ; viii. 48, 4. su-.sakhi, m. good fiiend, viii. 48, 9 [s,lkhi friend], su-stuti, f. cal_y, ii. 38, 8 [stuti praise], su-_t.libh, a. weU-prais_ng, iv. 50, 5 [stubh praY], su-h_va, a. (By.) ea._j to invoke, ii. 33, 5 [h_,va invocatwn], s_, adv. walt, v. 83, 10 [= eft w_l]. _-n_ra_ a. bountiful, viii. 29, 1 lAY. hunara], sS-n_, m.. svn, i. 1, 9 ; 85, 1 ; viii. 48, 4 lay. hunu, OG. sunu, Lith. s_ni_, Eng. son]. sflp_y_n_, a. (By.) giving easy access, .easityac.cessible, i.l, 9[sfa+up_yana]. sur-a, m. sun, vii. 63, 5 [svba" light], s_tri, m. patron, ii. 35, 6. su_-ya, m. sun, i. 35, 7. 9 ; 160, 1 ; ii. 12, 7 ; 33, 1 ; vii. 61, 1 ; 63, 1. 2.4 ; viii. 29, 10 ; x. 14, 12; 90, 13 [_var light], at. flow, III. si_rti. 5papr_- str_tchforth to, int. 3. s.ssr_r-e, ii. 35, 5. m'j.emit, VI..m'j_ti [Av. hcrtz.aiti], _va. discharge downward, ii. 12, 12 ; cast off, vii. 86, 5. t_pa- send forth lo (ace.), ii. 85, 1. s.rp-rti, a. e_tsive, iv. 50, 2 [srp creep]. s6-n_, f. missile, ii. 33, 11" [si discharge]. sen_-n_ m. /eadcr of an army, general, x. 34, 12. sS-ma, m. juice of the _oma plant, i. 85, 10 ; ii. 12, 14 ; iv. 50, 10 ; vii. 49, 4 ; viii. 48,3.4_. 7-15; x. 14, 13; 34,1; Soma sacr/rice, vii. 103, 7 [su press: Av. haoma]. soma.p_, m. Soma d_rd_er, ii. 12_ 13.

sp_]

255

[n_

pr_- _cpforth, x. 14, 14. sp_, m. _, vii. 61, 3 lAY. sp_ ; cp. Lat. au-s_x, Gk. _K_ ' owl _]. spr _'n, V. sprnSti. his- rescue, rt. ao. 2. du. spartam, vii. 71, 5. eprh, cs. sDrh_.ya long for, x. 135, 2 [Av. _per%aite]: sphdr spurn, VI. sphur, ii. 12, 12 ; .vpring, x. 34, 9 [Av. sparaitl,-Gk. analpco 'quiver', Lat. sperno, Lith. spir/h ' kick ', OG. spurnu ' kick ']. sma, enc. pcl. j_st, indeed, ii. 12, 5 [1801,. sy(_, dem. prn. that, ii. 33, 7 lOP. hya, L hyg ; OG. siu_. syand flow, I. A. sy_date, v. 83, 8. syuma-gabhasti, a. (By.) drawn with thongs, vii. 71, 3 [sy_-man band ; Gk. 5-pr}v 'sinew 'J. syon_, n. soft couch, iv. 51, 10. arena, m. d/sea._e, viii. 48, 5. sru flow, L s_va, vii. 49, 1 [Gk. _if-E, ' flows ']. sv_,poss, prn. own, i. 1, 8; ii. 85,7; iv. 50, 8 ; vii. 86, 2. 6 ; x. 14, 2 [Av. hva, Gk. aJ-_, _-_, Lat. suu-s]. sv_-tavas, a. (Bv.) self.strong, i. 85, 7. 1. sv_ll_, f.funeral offering, x. 14, 3. 7 ; 15, 8.12-14. 2. sve,.d.h_ f. own power, x.129, 2 ; e_tergy, x. 129, 5 ; vital force, ii. 35, 7 ; bliss, i. 154, 4 [ev_ own and d.hg put ; cp. Gk. _-0o-_ 'custom ']. svadhi_-vant, a. self-de_dent, vii. 86, 4.8. sv-i_pas, a. (By.) skilful, i. 85, 9 [s_ + _pas ' do_n_ good work ]. sv_p-na, m. s/eep, vii. 86, 6 [Gk. _n_o-s, Lat. somnu% Lith. s_pna-sJ, svayam-ja, a. rising spontaneously, vii. 49, 2. eva-y-am, ref. pin. se/f, ii. 35, 14; of their own accord, iv. 50, 8 [115a]. svk,r.,n, light; heaven, ii._,6; v. 83, 4. sva.rg, j, m. sovereign ruler, x. 15, 14. mrw'(_ru,sacrific/alpost, iv. 51, 2. m. Svar-vfd_ m.flnder of light, viii. 48, 15. av_,-valat, a. bountiful, i. 85, 10 [possessingpra1_dy: sv_, n.J. sv_ar, f. s/s/_, vii. 71, 1 ; x. 127, 3 [Lat. soror, OSl. sestra_ Go. sw/star, Eng. s/ster_, av-asti, f. n. wel_-being, i. 1, 9 ; 35, 1 ; ii. 33, 8; vii. 71,6; 86,8; x. 14,11; inst. s. svuti for welfare, viii. 48, 8 ;

p|. b_t_.% vii. 61, 7 ; 63, 6 [s_ well + asti being]. sv_d-fi, a. su_et_ viii. 48, 1 [Gk. _8_-_ Lat. stir'i-s, Eng. salt]. sv-f_lh_, a. (By.) sfir*'ing good thoughts, viii. 48, I. sv-_bht_, a. invigorating, iv. 50, 10. sv_h_, ij.hail, asa sacrificial call, x. 14,3. svid, ene. emph. pcl., iv. 51, 6 ; x. 84, 10; 129,5_; 135,5; 168,3. _-ra, enc. emph. pcl., i. 85, 7 ; vii. 86, 3 ; x. 14, 13 ; 90, 10. 16 ; 129, fl [later form of gha]. ha-tv_, gd. having slabz, ii. 12, 3 [han strike]. hart slay, IL h_nt_, i. 85, 9 ; ii. 88, 15 ; smite, v. 83, 2_. 9 ; I. jighna slay, viii. 29, 4; pf. jaghl_na, ii. 12, 10. 11 ; ps. hany_te, iii. 59, 2 ; ds. jighfLmsa, vii. 86, 4. han-t._, m. slayer, ii. 12, 10. h_r-as, n. wrath, viii. 48, 2 [heat ; from hr. behot: Gk,0_p-o_ '_ummer']. h_r-i, m. bay steed, i. 35_ 3 [._.v. zairi' yellowish ' ; Lat. hclu-s, Li_h. zelh, OO. g_o]. h(_r-ita, a. y_ow, vii. 103, 4. 6, 10 lay. zairit_ ' yellowish '_. hry-a_va, a. (Bv.) dratcn by bay sbseds, viii. 48, 10. h_v-a," m. invovation, x. 15, 1 [hf_ ea/lJ. havana-_rfit, a. (Tp.) listening $o invocations, ii. 33, 15 [h_vana (from hn2 call) + {_rf_-thearing from _ru hear with determinative t]. havir-_d, a. (Tp.) coding the oblation, x. 15, 10[havia + adj. . havis-pa, a. drinking the oblation, x. 15, 10 [havis+pa]. hay-is, n. oblation, ii. 33, 5 ; 35, 12; iii. 59, 5; iv. 50, 6 ; vi. 54, 4 ; viii. 48, 12. 13 ; x. 14, 1. 4. 13. 14; 15, 8. 11.12; 90, 6_; 168, 4 [hu sacrifice]. h_,v-i-man, n. mvo_ation, ii. 33, 5 [hf_ ca//]. hav-y_, (gdv.) n. what is to be offered, oblation, iii. 59, 1 ; vii. 63, 5 ; 86,.2 ; x. 14, 15; 15, 4 [hu sacr/ficeJ. havya-vghana_ m. carr/er of oblations, v. 11, 4 [v_laana from va3a carry]. havya-sfxd, a. (Tp.) sweetening the oblat/o_, iv. 50, 5 _sf_d --- sv_,d sweeten]. h_st_, m. hand_ iL 83, 7; vi. 54, 10; viii. 29, 3-5.

h_tavant]

256

[hv_ hi, an.ya-_ami, a. (By.)ha_inggo_pi_, i. 35, 4. hiram, ya-sa .m.d_, a. (By.) having a goldm_ aspect, ii. 35, 10. [email protected], a. (Bv.)golden-handed, i. 35, 10. hirany_ks_, a. (By.) golden-eyed, i. 35, 8 [aks_ = aksi eye]. hi.d be angry, I. h6.da: pf. jih-_a_ x. 84, 2. hi-n, pp. forsaken, x. 34, 10 [ha/eave]. hu sacrifice, offer, III. Juh6ti, iii. 59, 1 ; x. 14, 13-15. _. offer, iii_. 59, 5. h(x ca//, L A. havate, ii. 12, 8. 9 ; 33, 5 ; VI. A. huv_f, vii. 61_ 6; 71, 1 ; x. 14, 5. hr be angry, IX. _.. hrnito, ii. 33, 15 ; "wig_ (dat.), vii. 86, 3". l_.'d, n. hcart_ ii. 35, 2 ; v. 11, 5; vii. 86, 8 ; viii. 48, 4.12 ; x. 129, 4 [Av. zard]. h_'d-aya, n. heart, x. 34, 9. he-ti, f. dart, ii. 38, 14 [hi impel]. he-tfz, m. cause : ab. het6s for the sake of, x. 34) 9 [impulse : hi impe2]. h6-tr, m.-inwker_ i. 1, 1. 5; v. 11, 2 [h'fa ca//]. hotr_,-vtd, a. (Tp.) knowing oblations, x. 15, 9 [hS-tr_, Av. zao-thra ; cp. Gk. Xti-_rp_' pot ']. hv_ ca//, IV. hv/_ya, i. 85, 1% vi- ca/_ divergently, ii. 12, 8.

h_u_ta-vant, a. ha_,_g hands, x. 34, 9. 1. 1_/ease, III. P. ja/_ti, _va-, ps. hiyate, M_left behind, x. 84, 5. 2. h_ go away, III. A. jihite, tips- dapart, vii. 71, 1 : 3. s. sb. s. ao. ]a_t% x. 197, 3. rid- spring up, v. 83, 4. hi, cj. for, i. 85, 1 ; 154, 5 ; 160, 1 ; ii. 35, 1. 5. 9 ; iv. 51, 5; viii. 48, 6; s/nee, viii. 48, 9 ; x. 34, 11 ; pray, x. 14_ 4. him. a, ir_ure, VII. hin_sti injure ; is ao. inj., x. 15, 6 [probably a ds. of hart strike]. hi-t_, lap. p/aced, v. 11, 6 [later form of dhita from dh_ put ; Gk. #_r6-_ set]. hi-tv_ya, gd. leaving behind, x. 14, 8 [1. ha kave], him_, m. w/nter, ii. 38, 9 [Av. zima, OSI. zima 'wiuter'; Gk. _-)_epo-_ ' subject to bad storms', _horrid ']. h/ran-ya, n. gohl ornament, ii. 33_ 9. hirsa_.ya_dl_., a. (Tp.) giver of gold. ii. 35, 10. hiranya-p_aai, a. (By.) golden-handed, i. 35, 9. hirma.ya_praiiga, a. (By.)haviug a golden loo/_, i. 85, 5. hiran..y/_-ya, a. golden, i. 35, 9 ; 85, 9 ; ii. 35, 10 ; viii. 99, 1. htra_.ya-r_pa, a. (By.) having a golden form, ii. 35, 10. [email protected], a. (Bv.) goldmz-coloured, ii. 35, 9-11.

GENERAL

INDEX
indicate the first,

The letters a, b, c, d following the references to hymns second, third, and fourth P_da respectively of the stanza. Accent, in Sandhi: kd_5'vv,,vi. 54,3; sf_n_.v_ 'gne, i. 1, 9 ; brahman6 'sya, x. 90, 12a; Svarita followed by Ud_tta : nv ftnttix, vii. 86, 2 ; kv_d_nim, i. 35, 7 e ; tanv_ d_i_.na.h, x. 34, 6 b ; vapu.sy& n_, i. 160, 2 c ; Ud_tta changed to Svarita : t_ 'vatd.hanta, i. 85, 7 a ; in compounds : :Dvandvas, dyJ.v_-prthiv_, J. 35, 9b; 160, 2 ; Karmadhar_.ya.s, su-&vRn, i. 3,5, 10 b ; _sadc_nt, i. 160, 2 ; sdmakh_sM, i. 85, 4 a ; _-k.siyam_.. _, i. 15_, 4 b ; sxitastam, ii. 35, 2 a ; iLhitam, viii. 29, 4 ; Tatpurusas, :ParJ_nya_jinvitRm, vii. 103, 1 c ; dev_hitim, vii. 103, 9 a ; kavi-_sst_ts, x. 14, 4 e ; /kgni-.sv/_ttfi_s, x. 15, 11 a ; ekapar_sya, x. 34, 2 c ; ]3ahuw'ihis, au-ps_._s, su-nithi_s, i. 35, 7 a b ; are.n_.vas, i. 3,5, 11 b; su.d_t.msasa_, i. 85, 1 b; hira.ny_k.s_s, i. 35, 8c; uru-vyRca_, i. 160, 2 a ; _du-h_mR, su-p_asas, ii. 35, 1 c d ; _n-RgRs, v. 83, 2e; vi_vK-ce, k.sfts, uru-cAk_.s, vii. 63,1; tri-vandhu_s, vii. 71, 4 b ; eu-sakhl_, viii. 48, 9 d ; governing compounds, y_vay_-Janas, iii. 59, 5 b ; in declension, nady_ts, ii. 35,3b; d_dhat, i. 35,8d; gf.natd,

iii

bah f_na_n, ii. 35, 12; prth'_ivy_ts,i'. 35, 8a; 160, la; in syntax: at beginning of sentence, ii. 3,5, 12 c _v. 50, 2 d. 11 c ; v. 83, 4 a b 7 a ; vii. 68,4_d; 71,2d (irr.); 86, Id; viii. 48,6b. 8a; x. 15,4b; 34,4d. 14a; _.vithkuvit, ii. 35,1c. 2b;iv. 51,4a; of cal. _erb, i. 35, 9c; v. 83,4ab; shift of, jtl.._m, iii. 59, 5 c ; did._ksu, vii. 86, ;3a; vidv_, i. 160, . ._ 1 a. 5 c ; c_tur-, _v. 51, 5 d ; amuya, x. 135, 2 b.
190_

ni n'm vi,i

Accusative, double, ii. 33,4; 35, I; iv. 51, 11 b ; of goal, x. 14, 13 c ; of time, vii. 103, la; x. 168, 3b. Agni, description of, pp. 1-3 ; viii 29, 2. Ahura ffi Asura, meaning of, i. 35, 7 ; in Avests, pp. 119, 1'24. Alliteration, x. 14, 7 a b. 9. Ambiguity, intentional, vii. 103, 8 c. 9 d. Ambiguous furm : _.msR, 2. s. ipv. or I.s. sb. ; vii. 61, 4 a. .4.ml'_l..ita compounds : dive-dive, i. 1, 3. 7 ; grhd-grhe, v. 11, 4 b ; v/Lnevane, v'. 11, "6b ; gi[.tre-gRtre, viii. 48, 9 b ; piba-piba, see note on x 14, 7. Anaphoric repetition : Agnis, v. 11, 4; _rhan, ii. 33, 10 ; aye .msam, ii. 35, ]5ab; iy_m, vii. 71, 6; _.va, vii. 86, 5; u,x. 127,3; kRs, x. 135, 5; tdbhyam, v. 11, 5 ; tv_m, viii. 48, 15 ; t_, x. 15, .... ; ni, x. 127, 5 ;_ :Pf_s_, vi. 5 .o 54,5;M_tr(ts, m.59,1;ma,_].33,4; x.13,5,2.3(y_hn, kumRra);y_s, ii:.12, 1-4 &c. ; y_sye vratd, v. 83, 5 ; yv,su, vii. 49, 4 ; y_, x. 15, 2 ; vt, ii. 33, 2 ; s_m,x. 14, 8 ; hv_yRmi, i. 35, 1 ; use ofst_,i.l, 9;v. ll,6;oftd, x. 15,7d.

;,gi ases iption 29, de of viii 10

Antithesis : pracy_v_yauto avyut, i. 85, 4b; e'ko tribhis, i. 154, 3 d; dko vidvR, i. 15_, _t d ; p_re _vare, ii. 12, 8 b ; samRn_m n_.nR, ii. 12, 8cd; s_m dpa, ii. 35, 3_t; jihm_.nRm _rdLhv_.h, ii. 35, 9b; jig._(tm J_astt_m, iv. 50, 11; _sarnm_wtah _tfcih.,v. ll,3a; _nRg_s du.sk._ta'.h,v. 83, 2 c d ; _yajvan_m ysj_t_tmanm_, vii. 61,4cd; krsn_r aru_._y&,vii. 71, -,. 1 b ; _etayad acttah., vii. 86, 7 c ; sam_,n_m virf_p_.h, vii. 103_ 6 c ;

258
_nartyo m_rtyfm, viii. 487 12 b; s_t _kam, x. 14, 16 b; nic_up_ri,'a_ hastAsoh_ta-vantam,_it_hnirdahanti, x. 34, 9 d ; 6ka vi_v_tal_., x. 135, 3 c. Antithetical accent, i. B5, 9 c ; 85, 7 b ; ii. 35, 3a; iv. 51, 11 d(oa-ca); v. 83, 4 a b ; x. 129, 5 b. AnudEttas following a Svarita, unmarked, vii. 61, 2. Aerial, characteristic use of, viii. 29, 3. Apas Waters, description of, pp. 115-16. Apam nap_t, descrlptmn of, pp. 67-8. Apposition_ adjective in, i. 35, 12 b ; substantive in, x. 90, 15 d. A_vins, description of, pp. 128-30; viii. 29, 8. Aspiration, initial, ii. 12, 10 b (d) ; v. 11, 4 c (h); vi. 5_, 10b (h); vii. 103,10 b (h) ; viii. 48,10b(h); x. 14, 14a(h); 15, 12b(h); 90, 6d(h); 129, 2 d (Ix); loss of, i. 160, 3 d (dukaata). Asyndeten_ i. 1, 3a; 85, 10c; 85, 9d; 160, 5 b ; iii. 59, 9 a ; iv:50, 11 d ; vii. 61, 4 a ; 63. I c. 4 d. 6 b ; 71, 1 d ; x. 15, 4 d; 127, 6a; &c. &c. Atris, p. 152. Attraction, of antecedent, v. 50, 8 ; x. 15, 6; 127, 4b; ofcase, viii. 48,5c; x. 14, 2 c _ of gender, i. 35, 6 a ; 154, 5 c ; x. 129, 4 b ; of number, x. 90, 12 b ; of number and gender, x. 90, 8 c. Autumns _ years of life, vii. 61, 2. Avesta, pp. 44, 67, 79, 116, I19, 124, 135, 154, 171, 212. Bird, said of Savitr, i. 35, 7 a. B.rhaspati, description of, pp. 83-4. Brf, hmanas, ritual of, vii. 103, 8. Cadence, trochaic (of Glyatri), viii. 29, 7. Caesura, irregular long syllable after, i. 35, 8bd; v. ll, 3c; after third syllable_viL61,1d;hiatusafter, vii. 71, 6a; a preceding o not shortened before a, i. 35, 11 d. Case-form retained in compound, ii. _8, 2 a (tv_-). Castes in RV., only mention of, p. 195. Cerebralization, of n in external Sandhi, ii. 88, Sc(naa); viii. 48, 4d (.has). 7 c (.has) ; in internal Sandhi,

"
v. 83, 8d (suprap_n_m) ; x. 35, 11 b (au-pra.n.itayas); ofs: i. 85,5c_w/ syanti) ; 6 a (raghu-.sy_das) ; ]54, 2 b (giri-.s.th_s) ; ii. 33, 4 b (d_stuti_ ; iv. 50, 3 b (hi sedum) ; vii. i_)3, 7 c (p_ri stha) ; 8 c (sisvidf_a_s) ; viii. 48, 9b (_i.sas_ttha) ; 9d (su.sak.ha) : in all tim above cases the Sandhi is annulled in the Pada text. Change from sing. to pl., syntactical, iv. 51, ll ; from 2. to 3. prs., i. 85, 5 ; ii. 33, 1 ; from 3. to 2. prs., i. 85, 4 ; ii. 12, 15 ; 35, 6 a b ; vii. 103, 5 d. Cognate ace., i. 154, 2 a ; iv. 51, 6 c; v. 11, 6 c ; vii. 49, 4 b ; viii. 29, 1 b. 7 a ; x. 14, 10 d.; 15, 10 b ; 34_ 13 a ; 135_ 2 c. Collective use of singular, ii. 33, 1 e (_rvat). 3a (jEt_; vii. 103, 2 a (enam).4c(man. d._kas).lc. 6d. Sa _v_o). Comparative pcl. to be supplied, vii. 108. 1 b. 7 a. Compound: first membcrinPadatext, unchanged, iv. 50,10 b (vFsan. -vasfl) ; interpreted in the RV. itself, x. 15, 12a (j_t_vedas). Concord, of _at_m, ii. 33, 2 ; of sah_ram, x. 15, 10 c ; irr., viii. 48, I c (y_m for y_d); iv. 51, 9c (m. adj. with f. noun). Contraction, irr. secondary, vii. 86, 4 d (tttr6ybm). Creation, hymn of, pp. 207-11. Dative, of 11, ld ; ii. 12, 9; 86, 7 d ; Dice hymn, Dissyllabic vowels, advantage, ii_ 35, 7d x. 34, 6d; final, i. 85, 83,3; v. ll, lb. 2d; viii. 48, 10 d. x. 84, pp. 186-95. pronunciation of L 35, 8b (t_t); 154, ; v. 9c ; vii.

long ld

(tr_db_). 3 a (_s_un); vi. 54, 10 a (parOled) ; vii. 63, 6 a (nSu) ; 86, 4 a (jy_._ham) ; viii. 29, 6 (nidhin_am). Doubtful interpretation, i. 85, lla (di_); 154, 6b (ay_sas); 85, 4 (malch_) ; 160, lc (_._.) ; ii. lg, 1 b (pary_bhf_a. t). 3 b (apadl_) ; 88, 12 a b ; 35, 4 a (_nne_). o (/dkrabbis). 5c (k_t_s). 6 (a-d). 9d (yahv_). 14 d (_tkais) ; iv. 50, 2 (a-d) ; 51, 1 b _vayfna). 4 d (sap_yo) ; vii. 61, 2d. 5; 71, 4d (vldv_pan_u); 86, 8 a (dld_k.su) ; 6 a (dhr_tis) ;

259
6c (up_r_). 6d (prayo ); 103,5c (sam_dh_) ; viii 48, 2 d (fir_usti) ; x. 14, 2 d (end, jajS_n_s). 1"2 a (udumbal_u). 16 a b ; 15, 3 b (n_o p_tam). 8 b (anShir6) ; 34, 6 b (_Uo _uj_nas) ; 90, 2 d (atirShati) ; 129, 5 a (ra_mis) ; 185, 5 d (anud6yi). 6 a-d ; 168, 2 a (visth_-s). Dual, compounds, ii_ 12, 13 (members separated) ; ending au, when used, vii. 61, 7 b, irregularly used for _, x. 14, 10 a b. 11. 12. Durga, ii. 12, 3 ; 35, 10. Dvandva compounds, not analysed in the Pada text, vii. 49, 3 b: latest form of, x. 90, 4 d (a_an_na_an6). Dy_.v_-P.rthivl, description of, pp.36-7. Elliptical vocative, vii. 61, I a (Varuha). Emendation of the text, i. 85, 9 c (n_r]r_.p_msi). Etymology, of Agnf, p 8 ; of _ndra, p. 44; of pf_s_tn, p. 111 ; of Marfit, p. 22 ; of Rudr_, p. 57 ; of Us._, p. 93 ; of S_-'ya, p. 124 ; of V_ru_. a, p. 135 ; of V_ta, p. 216 ; of vid(ttha, i. 85, 1 d ; of Vi.snu, p. 31. Eyes of night = stars, x. 127, 1 b. Fathers, see Pitaras. Frogs, rain-producing hymn addressed to, pp. 141-7; compared with Brahrains, vii. 108, 8 a. Funeral hymn, pp. 164-75. Geldner, Prof., ii. 85, 9 ; x. 15, 8. Gerund, a. 84, 11 agreeing witlt acc., x. 14, 5 d ; Governing compound, i. 160, l b (dh_ra= _t.kavi);iii. 59) Sb(y_tay_janas). Haoma ffi Soma, pp. 154, 155. Hiatus in Sambit_ text, irr., v. 11, 5 b .. (manis_, iy_Lna) ; w_. 71, 6 a (mamsa iyg_m)'; x. 129, 5 d (svadh_, avf_tAt). IdenticalP_das, viii. 48,11d(=i. l13, 16d); viii. 48, 13d (= iv. 50,6d). Imperfect_ irr. use of _ffi aorist), viii. 48, 11 b. Impersonal u_e of verb, x. 84, tla (tat_lm). Incidental deities, i. 85, 7 c (Vi.s.nu) ; ,154,6a(Indra); ii. 83,18a(Maruts); v. 83, 6a (Maruts); viii. 48, 10bd (Indra). 12 a (Pitaras); x. 127, 7 c _U.sas). Indefinite pronoun, v. 83, 9 d (y_t kim ca). Indi_tive_imperative, ii,33,8(par_.i)Indo-European period, pp. 44, 67, 180, 154, 212. Indo-Iranian period, pp. 135, 154. Indra, description of) pp. 41-4 ; viii. 29, 4. Infinitive, ace., vii. 86, 8 b (vi-'pf_ham) ; viii. 48, 10 d (10rattram) ; dat., with ps sense, x. 14, 2 b (_pabhartav_i) ; with attracted acc. Cdrs_yesuryaya) , with kr = cal(se to (.on.krir6 v.rdh6). Initial s added to kx', x. 127, 3 a (nix" as .krta) ; 135, 7 d (13_risk.rtas). Injunctive, doubtful, i. 85",1"1 Ctarpad yanta). Instrumental, contracted, ii. 33, 3 c (svasti). 4 b (dfistuti, s_hflti). 6 c (gh._.ni);local sen_of, x. 168, ld. 3a. Jacobi, Professor, vii. 103, 9. Juxtaposition of similar forms, i. 1, 5 c (dev5 dev_bhih). ; 160,_ 1 d (devS_. dove) ; 3 a b (pawtravan punatx) ; ii. 12, 1 b (dov5 devon) ; 88, 8 b (tav(_stamae tavg_s_m). 8 b (mah6 m_rn) ; 35, 8 c (_dcl_n _dcayah.) ; 4 a (yuvat/Lyo yd.v_nam) ; 5 b (de= v_-ya dev_h) ; iv. 51, 4d (revatY rev_t). 6 b (vidhan_, vidadh_Lr) ; 50, 7 c (a_bhrtam bibhS, rti) ; v. 11, 4 d (.vrn._u_ ".v_a._e) ; 83, 10 (_var_ir varsS.m) ; vii. 86, 7 c (_cetayad aci= ta.h) ; viii. 48, 2 c (s_kheva s_khye) ; x. 15, 8 d (u_nn u_.db_dh) ; 34, 9 b (_-_t_so h_tavantam) ; 18 a (kr.sire it kr.sasva); x. 90, l_a (yaJfl6na yajfl_m ayajanta). Karmadh_raya Bahuvr_hi, x. 15, 9 b.

Lengthening of vowels, metrical, i. 35, 11d (r_k._.) ; ii. 12, 5 (sma) ; 83, 2 (c_taya_v_). 4 a (cukrudh_m_t). 7 (abhI). ]3c (av_.it_). 15 (ev&); 85, 8 ; iv. 51, 2 c (/x)'; iv. 50, 6 a (ev_.); v. 83, 1 (aohr_). 7 b (diy&) ; vii. 61) 4a (_(mgs._.); 63, 5a (y_,tr_); 86,5d (aria) ; 108, 2 d (_ttr_) ; viii. 48, 6 (ath_. carg). 8 a (mr.lay_). 9 b (eao earth&) ; x. 14, 18 b'(.Juhutlt). 14d;

260
15, 4d. 11 d; 127, 6a; 129, 6d (_.th_); 15,4 b; vii. 86, 5 b (oakrm_,) ; x. 84, 4 d (nsyate_). 8 c (niJ,)_ 14 a (mF.l.at_,) ; 90, 3 b (P_ru?as); 127, 6a (ybvay_); 129, 1 b (vySm_.); 135, 1 e (_tr_) : in cds. and deriv/_tires: i. 35, 4(abh[-wtam) ; 160,1b (.rt_-vari) ; ii. 12, 4 c'(jigiv$,n) ; vii. 71, 3b (sumn_y_vas) ; 63_ 2 a (pr_savit_) ; x. 34, 10 e (.rng,-va)_ ; 14, 12 . .e (uru-.nasau) ; 168, 3 c (.rt_.va). Locative, absolute, vii. 63, 5 c ; 103, 3b; of the goal, i. 1,4; v. ll,3d; of time, vii. 108, 9c. 10 d. Long reduplicative vowel, i. 154, 4 d ; iii. 59, 1 b (d_,dhgra) ; ii. 33, 12 (n_n_ma) ; 35, 3 e (didiv_,msam) ; 4d (did_ya). 7 b ; viii. 29, 6 a (pip_ya). Loss of accent, ii. 85, 1 a b (asmai, asya) ; vi. 54, 4 a (asmai) ; vii. 63, 5 a (asmai) ; viii. 29, 6 (yath_). Maruts, description of, pp. 21-2. Metre, irregular, i. 35, 9 d ;iii. 59, 2 d. 7e. 8c; iv. 12, 4c; 35, llb; 50, 2 e; viii. 29, 5; x. 90, 2 b. 4 a; mentioned in the RV., p. 175. Anu.st.ubh : v. 83, 9 ; vii. 103, 1 ; x. 14, 18. 14. 16; 90, 1-15; 135, 1-7; P_da redundant by one syllable, x. 90,4a; 135,7c. Gayatrl : i. 1, 1-9 ; iii. 59, 6-9 ; vi. 54, 1-10; x. 127, 1-8. Jagat! : i. 85, 1-4.6-11 ; 160, 1-5 ; iv. 50, 10; v. 11, 1-6; 83,2-4; viii. 48, 5; x. 15,11 ;34,7; P_dainTris.t.ubh stanza, i. 35, 8a; v. 83, 10c; vii. 108,8; x. 14,1a. 10b. llb; 34,5e; 129,8b; P_tda withTri.s.tubh cadence, i. 35, 9 d ; stanzas in Tris..tubh hymn, iv. 50, 10 ; v. 83, 2-4. Tris.t.ubh, i. 35, 1-11; 85, 5.12 ; 154, 16 ; ii. 12, 1-15 ; 33, 1-15 ; 35, 1-15 ; iii. 59,1-5; iv. 50, I-9.11; 51,1-11; v. 83, 1.5-8. 10 ; vii. 49, 1-4 ; 61, 1-7 ; 63. 1-6; 71, 1-6;86,1-8;103,2-10; viii. 48, 1-4. 6-15 ; x. 14, 1-12 ; 15, 1-10. 12-14 ; 34, 1-6. 8-14 ; 90, 16 ; 129, 1-7 ; 168, 1-4 ; P_da in JagatI stanza_ viii. 48, 5 e; P_tda defective by one syllable, x. 14, 5 e. 8 d, by two syllables, x. 129, 7 b, redundant by one syllable, x. 129, 6 b. Dvipad_(JagatI+ G&yatri P&da), viii. 29,1-10. B.rhati, x. 14, 15. Metronymic, irregular, ii. 12, 11 (D_nu). Middle in passive sense, i. 35, 10 d; 154,2a; 160,4d. 5a; ii. 33,5.11c; vii. 61, 5 b. 3[ithra in the Avesta_ p. 119. :_Iitra, description of, pp. 78-9. Mitra-_'arun. a, description of, pp. 11819 ; viii. 29, 9. Naighant.uka, ii. 12, 14. 15 ; 35, 9. Nasalization of a finalvowel attheend of an internal P_da, i. 35, 6 a (upt_stha_a 6ka) ; vln. 29, 6 (ya ham e.s_,) ; x. 34, 5 c (_,kratar_ 6m_[d). Natural philosophy, starting point of_ p. 207 (x. 129). Nirukta, ii. 12, 3. 14. Nominative for vocative, iv. 50, 10 a. Numerals, syntax of_ ii. 83, 2 ; x. 15, 10c. Objective genitive, x. 34, 3 d. 7 d.

Padatext, its treatment of the pcl. u, vi. 54, 2; of vocatives ia o, ii. 33, 3 b (vajrab_ho). 15 a (babhro) ; viii. 48, 2c. 15c (indo); of Pragrhyavowels, i. 35, 9 b (e, i) ; i. 160, 1 b (i) ; iv. 50, 10b (_); x. 168, 1 d (utS); of final etymological r, i. 8.5, 11 a (Savitar iti) ; ii. 12_ 4b (_kar iti) ; vii. 86, 2 b (ant_.h) ; v_ii. 48, 2 a (ant_r iti); of internal s before k, vii. 103_ 4 c (k_nis.kan); of suffixes: i. 1, J c; 160,2c;iii. 59,6c(-tama); vbi. 48, 1 b (-tara) ; vii. 103; 6d; x. 15,9a (-trOt) ; vii. 103, 3c (gd. -ty_.); ii. 85, 4 c ; iv. 51, 9 c d (-bhis) ; iv. 50, 7 d (den. -ya) ; x. 15, 6 a ; 129, 4 d (gd. -y_) ; ofcertain longSa .mhit_ vowels: i. 35, 8 b (oy_vaya); 85, 4 b (pracy_v_,yantas). 10 b (d_d_.h_ftm); x. 135, 7 (sf_danam) ; i. 160, 1 b (.rt_. vari) ; ii. 12,4 (jigivl_u) ; iii. 59_'6a (earsanidb_tas) ; vii. 68, 2a (prasavii_,_ i x. 15, 9 a (the) ; x. 84_, 10 (.rn._v_) ; its restoration of lost aspirate, i. 160, 3 d (duk_ata) ; its remoral of Sandhi in ods._ i. 154, 2 _giri-._..h_s) ; x. 15, 11 b (supra_fitaya_) ; its treatment of dual eompounds, i. 85, 1 b (mitr_v_.tau) ; 160, 1 a (dy&v&-p.rthivI) ; x. 14, 8 b

261 (istfi-purt_) ; its non-analysis of cerrain cds., i. 35, 9 b; v. 83, 8 c (dy_v_-prthiv{);i.154,2b(ku-car_). 4; ii. 35,'7h (svadl_); ii. 12, 4c ($.dat) ; ii. 33, 3 ; viii. 48, 8 a (svasti); ii. 33, 5c; viii. 48, 10 a (rdhd_,ra); iv. 50, 1 -(B_ha_p6ti); x. 90, 13 .. a . . z (candr_mas); 13a, 2a(vl.sthas); n. 12, 1 a (m_nasvan) ; its analysis of sv_v_n, i. 35, 10 b ; its irregular accentuation of cd. augmented verbs, viii. 48, 2 a (pr_ _gfis). 10c (hi trl_lh_yi);x. 135,4a(pr_var_aya_). P_.nini, p. 210. Pantheism, starting point of, p. 195. Parenthetical P_da, x. 127, 8 h. Parjanya, description of, p. 104. Partitive genitive, i. 160, 4 a: ii. 33, 3 b. 4d; viii. 48, la; x 15,3d. Perfect with present sense, i. 85, 3 b (dsdhire). ii. 12, 10 b (jagh_,na) ; 35, 3 d (tasthur). 13 d (vivess.) ; iii. 59, 1 b (dftcthfixa). 7 b (babhuva). 8 a (yemire) ; x. 34, 11 a (tath.pa). Periphrastic use of relative, x. 90, 7 d. 8 d. 12 c. Person, syntactical change of, i. 85, 4 c (3. to 2.). 5 c (2. to 3.) ; viii. 48, 5 b c (2. to 3.). Pisehel, iv. 51, 1 (p. 937. Pital_s, description of, p. 176. Play on words, p. 174 (yam). Pragr. hya vowels : i, i. 35, 9 b (dy_,v_p_hiv_) ; 160, 1 a b c (dy_,v_prthiv_, rt_.vari, dhgray_t-kavi, st_j_,nmani, dev_). 4 be (r6dasi, r_jasi). 5 a b (mahini, dy&v_prthivi) ; ii. 12, 8 a (krzl.nd.ssi, sa.mya_[). 13 (prthiv_[); v. 83, 8c (dyl_v_-prthiv_);" vii. 86,1b(rSdasi,_w_); fi_ iv. 50, 10b (.v_a_vas_) ; vii. 61, 2 c (sukratfl). 3 b (sud_nfa); e : i. 35, 9 b (ubh6") ; 160, 1 a c (t_, dhi.s_.ne). 2 c (audh._.st.arae, valau_'b). 5 a (t6, gr.hfi_i). 5 d (astor) ; ii. 12, 8 a d (vihvayeto, havete). 13 a (namote) ; 33, 12 d (_._m4) ; 35, 4 c (a_m_) ; iv. 50, 11 b (eem_) ; vii. 61, 3 e (dadh_tho) ; viii. 48, 10 c (a_m_) ; r_ 90, 4 d (s_an__a_lan_) ; o : ii. 33, 3 b (vajrab_ho) ; viii. 48, 2 e. 4 a (indo) ; x. 168, 1 d (utS); not shortened in pronunciation before vowels: ii.12, lc(r6dMi); vii. 49, 3 b (saty_ .n_). Pravargya ceremony, vii. 103, 8. Predicative adjective, ii. 12, 2. 4 ; 33, 2d; iv. 50,7d; v. 83,3d. 7c; vii. 61,4c; x. 3_, 12d"; (nom.) with ps., x. 90, 12b. Preposition. following vb., i. 85, 3 c. 6c. lOb. 12b;ii. 35,11 c; iv. 50, 1 v. 7b. 9a; v. ll, 2d; x. 34,14b;90, 4d; 129,4a; 168,2!?); following participle, x. 34, 6 d ; separated from vb., i. 35, 7 a. 9 c d. 11 d ; 85, 1 a.2 d. 4 a. 5 a. 6 a. 7 b. 9 d ; ii. 33, 2 ; iii. 59,4c; iv. 50,4d; 51.2c; vii. 61, 6a; 63,5c; x. 15,9c; 34,2d. 3a; 127, 1 d. 5 a. 7 a. 8 a ; separated from infinitive, vii. 61, 6 c ; of compound vb. repeated, li. 33, 2 cd ; iii. 59, 7 c ; vii. 61, 3 b ; x. 51, 1 a b ; 127, 5 b c ; accentuation of compounded, iv. 51, 5c; vii. 71, 2a. 4c; x. 14, 14d; 15, 2 c. Present used in past sense, i. 8,5, 9 c. Principle clause for relative, ii. 12, 5 b. 8 d. Prolation of vowel, x. 129, 5 b (fLs_.3t). Puru.sa hymn, pp. 195-203. Pfisan, description of, p. 111 ; viii. 29, 5. Quantity, interchange of, i. 35, 6 b ; iv. 51, 2 d ; vii. 49, 2 e. 3 e. RfLtri, goddess of Night, deueription of, p. 203 ; hymn to, pp. 203-7. Reciprocal generation, x. 90, 5 a b. Reduplication, irregular, viii. 48, 5 b (anf_ha). Refrain, of stanzas, ii. 12, 1 d-14 d ; v. 83, 3 d--4 d ; vii. 49, 1 d-4 d ; of hymns, ii. 12, 15d; 33, lSd; 35, 15d; iv. 50, 6d; vii. 61, 7d; 63, 6 a-d. 6 d ; 71, 6 a-d ; 86, 8 d ; 103, 10 d ; viii. _8, 14 d ; x. 14, 5 d. Relative clause, antecedent in, iv. 50, 7 b. 8 d ; principal clause in place of, ii. 12, 5a. 8d. Rhythm, abnormal, i. 160, 5 d ; x. 90, 2 b. 6 a. 15 a ; see also Metre, irregular. Roth, i. 85, 10 ; 154, 6 ; ii. 35, 9. Rudra, description of, pp. 56-7 ; viii. 29, 5. Sampras_ran. a, ii. 12, 8 ('aft for hva). Sandhi, L of vowels : artificial, v. 83_ 6 c (e =-_,+ e) ; irr., ii. 12, 5a (sbti) ;

262 between P_das, resolved : a a, ii. 33, 7c. lOa;iii. 59, 4e;v. 33,10a; viii. 29,1a. 3a; x. 14,4a; 15,4c; 34, lla; 90, 13e; 129, 6c; a_., i. 35, 2c; ii. 33, 6e; ai, x. 14, 8a; 15, 6a; au, i. 35, 5e; a.r, vii. 103, 9a; _-a,i. 85,11a; 160,4c; v. ll,4a; viii. 29, la;x. 90, lc. 3a;_,i. 85, 7a; _r, i. 160, la; _,u, iv. 51, 2c; P_.dainitialarestored: e a, i. 1, 9b; 85, 9d; iv. 50, 10b; x. 14, 5c; 129, 3b; 168, 2d; o a, i. 35, llb; ii. 35. 13d ; iii. 59, 6b ; iv. 50, 10d; v. 11, 4d; vii. 86, 4d. 5b; 103, 3 d ; viii. 29, 2 b ; 48, 12 b. 18 b ; x. 14, 9 b ; 15, 8 b. 12 b ; 34, 10 d. 2. of semivowels : at tile end of a P_da resolved before vowels : y a, i. 1544, 44a; v. 88, 6c; vii. 86, 7 a; viii. 448, 2a; y u, x. 14, 13c ; 15, 8c. lie; va, i. 154,2c; iv. 51,3c; x. 15, 5c; v e, x. 144, 4c; v r, vii. 61, 3 c. 3. of consonants : r before r, i. 85, 11c ; ii. 38, 2a. 144a ; 35, 4c ; v. 83, 1 c ; Visarjaniya before k, i. 85, 6 c ; ii. 35, 1 d: s before k, i. 85, 6 c ; ii. 35, ld; v. 83, 2d; vii. 103,44c; s before p, v. 11, 6 d; x. 185, 4, b; t before d, i. 85, 3; n beforet, vi. 54, 9 a (P_.san t_va) ; x. 90, 8 c (pasun t-) ; n before c, x. 90, 8 c (tz .amd cakre); n before d, i. 35, 5; ii. 12, 10b; iv. 51, 2d. 7d; v. ll, 6b; _n before y, i. 35, 10 b ; before 1, ii. 12, 44c ; _.n before vowels becomes /_, ii. 38, 4 &c., irregularly remains, x. 90, 8 a (ot_v_n asya) ; _.n at the end of a P_da before vowels remains, i. 85, lOc; ii. 12, lOa. 12a; x. 90,8c; before t at the end of a P_da remains, ii. 33, 6 a. Savitr, description of, pp. 10-11. S_yan. a, i. 1544, 2. 8. 6; 160, 8. 44; i i. l2, 1.3.8.12.14; 33,5.6.8.9.10. 12; 35, 9; iii. 59,1; iv. 51, 1.3.8; v. 83, 6; vi. 54, 3; vii. 86,1; viii 29, 10 ; x. 144, 3 ; x. 15, 3. 12. Secondary root, i. 160, 5d (inv _. 'Self' expressed by tm_n in RV., vii. 63, 6 b ; by tan_ vii. 86, 2 a. 5 b. Separation of members of Devat_dvandvas, ii. 12, 13. Shortening_ of e and o before a : i. 35, 5a. llc; 85_ 3a. 6d; 154_ lc; 160, 3d. 5d; ii. 12, 3 c. 7 d. 8 b. 9 d. 11 c; 38,5c. 11d; 35,8a; iii. 59, 2a; iv. 50, la; 51,2b. 3c. 4b; vi. 54, Ib 3bc.4a;vii.63,4b.6a:86,6b. 7c. 8c; 103,3d. 4a;viii. 48,8d. llc. 12d; x. 14,3a; 15, ld. 2a. Sd. 12c. 14a; 34, 6c. ]1c-d; 90, 5bc. 6c; 127, 4a. Sa; 129,6a. 7cd; 135,6b;of _ before r, i. 160, la; of i betbre a, x. 34, 4b; 127, 1 b, before u, 2b, before_,3b; of radical vowel, ii.35, 3c; iv. 50,5d; ofdual fL,vii. 61, la (Vatu .ha). 7 a (deva) ; ofinst, i, viii. 48, 8a(svasti). Slurred pronunciation of long vowel, i. 1544, 3 a (d_u.s_m). 1 d (tr[cll_) ; vii. 63, 6a (nu_). Singing, characteristic of the Ahgirases, viii. 29, 10, Singular, for plur. noun, i. 85_ 10c (v_n._m); ii. 33_ 1 (_a-vati); change from-to plur., iv. 51, lle. Six e.'_rths, p. 175. Sociative sense of inst., x. 144, 3 a b. 5a b. 10 d; 15, 8 c. 10 cd. 14c; 34, 5a. Sores, description of, pp. 152-5 ; viii. 29, 1. Soma sacrifice, vii. 10B_ 7.10d. Stanzas syntactically connected, i. 1, 7.8; 85, 4. 5. Steed, ruddy _ of heaven, i. 85, 5 e ; of the Sun, vii. 63, 2 d. Steeds of the Maruts, i. 85, 4d. Strong form for weak, i. 35_ 12c (yahta) ; ii. 33, I b (yuyoth_). 8 d (yuyod.hi) ; iii. 59, 1 d (Juhota) ; vii. 71, 1 d (yuyotam) ; x. 14, 144b (Juhera). 15 l_ (jub.otaaa) ; 15, 7 d (dadh_ta). 11 d (dadhfitana). Subjunctive apd injunctive, when identical in form, distinguished by m_, ii. 83, 4 a. Suffixes treated like second member of a cd., i. 160, 1 h (.rt_vaxi). 3 a (pavitrav_.n), &c. Supplied, word to be, iii. 59, 7c; v. 11,1c; vi. 54,7c; vii. 61,5a. 7d; viii. 29, 5 a; x. 14, 2d. 5 c; 15,13a; 344, 10b ; 127, 4ac ; 168, 1 a. 4c. Sfirya_ description of_ p. 124. Sfitras, viii. 29, 8. Svarabhakti vowel, il. 33, 1-8. 5-7. 9-11 (Rudffi_a) ; iv. 50, 11 a (I_d_ra); v. 11. 3 a (m_tarSa). Svarita_ independent, ii. 38,3 (abh_ti) ;

263
35, 2 c (asuryi_) ; x. 90, 8 c (vrtyavo y_n); followed by Ud_tta, how marked t L 85 t 7 c; iv. 51, 9a ; Abhinihita, ii. 12 t 6 c (y6 'vit_.). Syntactical order_ irr, i. 85, 5 e 0fta); 160_ 3 (ca). Threefold division of the world t x. 15, 1. 2. Tvastr fashions Indra's bolt, i. 85, 9a b ; viii. 29, 3. Unreduplicated (rni.dhvas). Usas t description perfect_ ii. 33 t 14 d Vyfihs, resolution of semi-vowels, i. 1, 6a;35,1a5c. 7ac. Sd.9c. 10b. lla; 85 t 3 d. 4 c; 154, 1 a. 2a. 2c. &c.&e. Warrior sons, frequent prayer for, i. 17 3 c ; 85, 12 d r &c. &c. Words identical in form distinguished by accent : i. 35, 11 (t6 those, te to thee); ii. 12 t 4 (dfLs_ demon, d_.sa demoniac) ; i. 160 t ld (dh_rman, n. ordinance, dharmfLn, m. ordamer) i vii. 86, 5 d (d_man, n. bond t detrain, r" _ " m. g_fc) ; _11. 103, 9a (dvadasa twelve, dvgda_ twe/flh) ; ii. 35, 6c (par_s, adv. far away_ l_ras, adj. N. other) ; i. 85, 5d; vii. 86, 1 d (bh_unan, n. earth t bhfim_n, m. abmulance) ; 71, 7 .t (yuv_bhy_.m to you two, yfivabhy_.m to th6 two youths); i. 35, 10c (i_k_.as, n. injury, raka._Lsm. demon) ; iii. 59, 3 (v_rhnala, n. and varim(m, m. expanse). ajurveda, ritual of_ vii. 103, 7 a. _unat description oft p. 212. Yh_ka t i. 154 t 2. 3. 6; ii. 33, 5 _ p. 129.

of_ pp. 92-3.

_aruna_ description oft pp. 134-5. VrLta, description of t p. 216. Vedas_ first mention of, p. 195. Vigve dovft_ description of t pp. 147-8. Vi.snu, description of, pp. 30-1 ; viii. 29, 7. _ocative t elliptical_ vii. 61_ 1 a (Varun_, = Mitr_-Varu_,) ; accent, vii. 71_ 1 c ; viii. 48, 7c (Sdma r_jan). 14a (tr$,t_ro devfLs).

PRINTED AT THE OXFORD

IN

ENGLAND PRESS

UNI_'E_glTY